AI Tipiṭaka Translations
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Vinayapiṭake
Vinayapiṭaka
Cūḷavagga-aṭṭhakathā
Cūḷavagga-aṭṭhakathā
1. Kammakkhandhakaṃ
1. Kammakkhandhakaṃ
Tajjanīyakammakathā
Tajjanīyakammakathā
1.Cūḷavaggassa paṭhame kammakkhandhake tāvapaṇḍukalohitakāti paṇḍuko ceva lohitako cāti chabbaggiyesu dve janā; tesaṃ nissitakāpi paṇḍukalohitakātveva paññāyanti.Balavābalavaṃ paṭimantethāti suṭṭhubalavaṃ paṭivadatha.Alamatthatarāti samatthatarā.
1. In the first chapter of the Cūḷavagga, regarding Kammakkhandhaka, paṇḍukalohitakā means Paṇḍuka and Lohitaka, two individuals among the Chabbaggiyas; those dependent on them are also known as Paṇḍuka and Lohitaka. Balavābalavaṃ paṭimantethā means strongly refute the strong. Alamatthatarā means more capable.
Tajjanīyakammakathā niṭṭhitā.
Tajjanīyakammakathā is complete.
Adhammakammadvādasakakathā
Adhammakammadvādasakakathā
4.Asammukhākatantiādīsu saṅghadhammavinayapuggalasammukhānaṃ vinā kataṃ, cuditakaṃ appaṭipucchitvā kataṃ, tasseva appaṭiññāya kataṃ.Adesanāgāminiyāti pārājikāpattiyā vā saṅghādisesāpattiyā vā. Ettha purimakesu tīsu tikesu nava padā adhammenakataṃ vaggenakatanti imehi saddhiṃ ekekaṃ gahetvā nava tikā vuttā. Evaṃ sabbepi dvādasa tikā honti. Paṭipakkhavasena sukkapakkhesupi eteyeva dvādasa tikā vuttā.
4. In Asammukhā kata etc., (it means) done without the presence of the Saṅgha, the Dhamma, the Vinaya, and the individual; done without questioning the accused; done without their admission. Adesanāgāminiyā means a pārājikā offense or a saṅghādisesa offense. Here, in the first three sets of three, the nine terms, when taken individually with "adhammena kataṃ" and "vaggenakataṃ," form nine triplets. Thus, there are twelve triplets in all. These same twelve triplets are stated in the positive aspect, based on the opposing side.
6.Ananulomikehigihisaṃsaggehīti pabbajitānaṃ ananucchavikehi sahasokitādīhi gihisaṃsaggehi.
6.Ananulomikehi gihisaṃsaggehī means association with laypeople through inappropriate interactions for renunciants, such as laughing and joking.
Tiṇṇaṃ,bhikkhave, bhikkhūnantiādi ekekenāpi aṅgena tajjanīyakammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tajjanīyassa hi visesena bhaṇḍanakārakattaṃ aṅgaṃ, niyassassa abhiṇhāpattikattaṃ, pabbājanīyassa kuladūsakattaṃ vuttaṃ. Imesu pana tīsu aṅgesu yena kenaci sabbānipi kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Yadi evaṃ yaṃ campeyyakkhandhake vuttaṃ – ‘‘tajjanīyakammārahassa niyassakammaṃ karoti…pe… upasampadārahaṃ abbheti; evaṃ kho upāli adhammakammaṃ hoti avinayakammaṃ, evañca pana saṅgho sātisāro hotī’’ti idaṃ virujjhatīti. Idañca na virujjhati. Kasmā? Vacanatthanānattato, ‘‘tajjanīyakammārahassā’’ti imassa hi vacanassa kammasanniṭṭhānaṃ attho. ‘‘Tiṇṇaṃ, bhikkhave’’tiādivacanassa aṅgasambhavo, tasmā yadā saṅghena sannipatitvā ‘‘idaṃ nāma imassa bhikkhuno kammaṃ karomā’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ hoti, tadā kammāraho nāma hoti. Tassa iminā lakkhaṇena tajjanīyādikammārahassa niyassakammādikaraṇaṃ adhammakammañceva avinayakammañcāti veditabbaṃ. Yassa pana bhaṇḍanakārakādīsu aṅgesu aññataraṃ aṅgaṃ atthi, tassa ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho yathānuññātesu aṅgesu ca kammesu ca yena kenaci aṅgena yaṃkiñci kammaṃ vavatthapetvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ kammārahaṃ katvā kammaṃ kareyya. Ayamettha vinicchayo. Evaṃ pubbenāparaṃ sameti.
Tiṇṇaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhūna etc., is stated to show that Tajjanīyakamma is valid with even one factor. Specifically, being a quarrel-maker is a factor for Tajjanīya, being a frequent offender is for Niyassa, and being a family polluter is for Pabbājanīya. However, any of these three factors allow all (three actions) to be done. If so, the statement in the Campeyyakkhandhaka—"He performs Niyassakamma for one deserving Tajjanīyakamma… ordains one fit for ordination; thus, Upāli, it is an unlawful act, an un-Vinaya act, and the Sangha incurs great loss thereby"—would be contradictory. But this is not contradictory. Why? Because of the difference in the meaning of the statements. The meaning of "tajjanīyakammārahassa" implies the determination of the action. The meaning of "tiṇṇaṃ, bhikkhave" etc., implies the existence of a factor. Therefore, when the Sangha convenes and determines, "We will perform this action for this bhikkhu," then he is called deserving of the action. Performing Niyassakamma etc., for one deserving Tajjanīya etc., with this characteristic, is to be understood as both an unlawful act and an un-Vinaya act. However, if one has any of the factors such as being a quarrel-maker, the Sangha, if it wishes, having determined which action to take with which factor among the permitted factors and actions, may perform the action after making that bhikkhu fit for the action. This is the decision here. Thus, the former and the latter are reconciled.
Aṭṭhārasa sammāvattanavatthūnipārivāsikakkhandhake vaṇṇayissāma.
Aṭṭhārasa sammāvattanavatthūni we will describe in the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka.
Adhammakammadvādasakakathā niṭṭhitā.
Adhammakammadvādasakakathā is complete.
Nappaṭippassambhetabbaaṭṭhārasakādikathā
Nappaṭippassambhetabbaaṭṭhārasakādikathā
8.Lomaṃpātentīti pannalomā honti; bhikkhū anuvattantīti attho.Netthāraṃ vattantīti nittharantānaṃ etanti netthāraṃ; yena sakkā nissāraṇā nittharituṃ, taṃ aṭṭhārasavidhaṃ sammāvattanaṃ vattantīti attho. Kittakaṃ kālaṃ vattaṃ pūretabbanti? Dasa vā pañca vā divasāni. Imasmiñhi kammakkhandhake ettakena vattaṃ pūritameva hoti.
8. Lomaṃ pātentī means they have hairs that have fallen; it means the monks follow along. Netthāraṃ vattantī means they declare the netthāra; that by which one can be released is the netthāra; it means they declare the eighteen kinds of correct behavior. How long do they fulfill the practice? Five or ten days. In this Kammakkhandhaka, the practice is fulfilled by this much.
Nappaṭippassambhetabbaaṭṭhārasakādikathā niṭṭhitā.
Nappaṭippassambhetabbaaṭṭhārasakādikathā is complete.
Niyassakammakathā
Niyassakammakathā
11.Seyyasakavatthusmiṃ –apissu bhikkhū pakatāti apissu bhikkhū niccaṃ byāvaṭā honti. Sesaṃ tajjanīye vuttasadisameva.
11. In the Seyyasaka story, apissu bhikkhū pakatā means the monks are always busy. The rest is similar to what was said in the Tajjanīya.
Niyassakammakathā niṭṭhitā.
Niyassakammakathā is complete.
Pabbājanīyakammakathā
Pabbājanīyakammakathā
21.Assajipunabbasukavatthu saṅghādisesavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ.
21. The Assaji and Punabbasu story is described in the section on Saṅghādisesa offenses.
27.Kāyikena davenātiādīsu panettha kāyiko davo nāma kāyakīḷā vuccati. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.Kāyiko anācāronāma kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadavītikkamo vuccati. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.Kāyikaṃ upaghātikaṃnāma kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadassa asikkhanabhāvena upahananaṃ vuccati; nāsanaṃ vināsananti attho. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.Kāyiko micchājīvonāma paṭikkhittavejjakammādivasena telapacanaariṭṭhapacanādīni.Vācasiko micchājīvonāma gihīnaṃ sāsanasampaṭicchanārocanādīni.Kāyikavācasikonāma tadubhayaṃ. Sesaṃ tajjanīye vuttanayameva.
27. In kāyikena davenā etc., here, kāyiko davo means physical play. The same method applies to the other two terms. Kāyiko anācāro means transgression of the training rules prescribed through the body. The same method applies to the other two. Kāyikaṃ upaghātikaṃ means harming by not training in the training rules prescribed through the body; it means destroying or ruining. The same method applies to the other two. Kāyiko micchājīvo means wrong livelihood through the body, such as cooking oil or making ariṭṭha (a kind of medicinal drink) against the prohibition of medical practices. Vācasiko micchājīvo means wrong livelihood through speech, such as praising or recommending the Teaching to laypeople. Kāyikavācasiko means both of these. The rest is the same as explained in the Tajjanīya.
Pabbājanīyakammakathā niṭṭhitā.
Pabbājanīyakammakathā is complete.
Paṭisāraṇīyakammakathā
Paṭisāraṇīyakammakathā
33.Sudhammavatthusmiṃ pana –anapaloketvāti na āpucchitvā.Etadavocāti kiṃ te gahapati therānaṃ paṭiyattanti sabbaṃ vivarāpetvā disvā etaṃ avoca.Ekā ca kho idha natthi yadidaṃ tilasaṃguḷikāti yā ayaṃ tilasakkhalikā nāma vuccati, sā natthīti attho. Tassa kira gahapatino vaṃse ādimhi eko pūviyo ahosi. Tena naṃ thero jātiyā khuṃsetukāmo evamāha.Yadeva kiñcīti evaṃ bahuṃ buddhavacanaṃ ratanaṃ pahāya kiñcideva tilasaṃguḷikāvacanaṃ bhāsitaṃ. Kukkuṭapotakaudāharaṇena idaṃ dasseti ‘‘yathā so neva kākavassitaṃ na kukkuṭavassitaṃ akāsi, evaṃ tayāpi neva bhikkhuvacanaṃ na gihivacanaṃ vutta’’nti.
33. In the Sudhamma story, anapaloketvā means without asking permission. Etadavocā means after having him explain everything about what was prepared for the elders by the householder, he said this. Ekā ca kho idha natthi yadidaṃ tilasaṃguḷikā means that which is called tilasakkhalikā (sesame sweet), that is not here. It seems that at the beginning of that householder's lineage, there was one pūviyo (sweet maker). The Elder, wanting to scorn him by his birth, spoke thus. Yadeva kiñcī means having abandoned so much of the Buddha's word, the jewel, only a trivial word about a sesame sweet was spoken. This illustrates with the example of a chick: "Just as it did not make a crow's sound or a chicken's sound, so too, you have spoken neither the monks' words nor the laypeople's words."
Paṭisāraṇīyakammakathā niṭṭhitā.
Paṭisāraṇīyakammakathā is complete.
Adhammakammādidvādasakakathā
Adhammakammādidvādasakakathā
37.Asammukhā katantiādayo tikā vuttappakārā eva.
37. The triplets beginning with asammukhā kata are of the kind already described.
39.Aṅgasamannāgamo purimehi asadiso. Tattha yathā lābhaṃ na labhanti; evaṃ parisakkanto parakkamantoalābhāya parisakkatināma. Esa nayo anatthādīsu. Tatthaanatthoti atthabhaṅgo.Anāvāsoti tasmiṃ ṭhāne avasanaṃ.Gihīnaṃ buddhassa avaṇṇanti gihīnaṃ santike buddhassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati.Dhammikaṃ paṭissavaṃ na saccāpetīti yathā sacco hoti, evaṃ na karoti; vassāvāsaṃ paṭissuṇitvā na gacchati, aññaṃ vā evarūpaṃ karoti.Pañcannaṃ bhikkhavetiādi ekaṅgenapi kammārahabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānatthañceva, tajjanīye ca vuttanayameva.
39. The associated factors are dissimilar to the previous ones. There, just as they do not obtain gain, so too, while striving and exerting, alābhāya parisakkati means striving for no gain. This method applies to non-benefit etc. There, anattho means destruction of benefit. Anāvāso means not dwelling in that place. Gihīnaṃ buddhassa avaṇṇa means speaking disparagingly of the Buddha in the presence of laypeople. Dhammikaṃ paṭissavaṃ na saccāpetī means not doing as truthful; having promised to stay for the rains, he does not go, or does something similar. Pañcannaṃ bhikkhave etc., is stated to show eligibility for action even with one factor. The rest here is straightforward in meaning and is the same as explained in the Tajjanīya.
Adhammakammādidvādasakakathā niṭṭhitā.
Adhammakammādidvādasakakathā is complete.
Āpattiyā adassane ukkhepanīyakammakathā
Āpattiyā adassane ukkhepanīyakammakathā
46.Channavatthusmiṃ –āvāsaparamparañca bhikkhave saṃsathāti sabbāvāsesu ārocetha.
46. In the Channa story, āvāsaparamparañca bhikkhave saṃsathā means announce it in all dwellings.
50.Bhaṇḍanakārakotiādīsu bhaṇḍanādipaccayā āpannaṃ āpattiṃ ropetvā tassā adassaneyeva kammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Tikā vuttappakārā eva.
50. In Bhaṇḍanakārako etc., action should be taken only upon reporting an offense incurred due to quarrels, etc., and not acknowledging it. The triplets are of the kind already described.
51.Sammāvattanāyaṃ panettha tecattālīsa vattāni. Tatthana anuddhaṃsetabboti na codetabbo.Na bhikkhu bhikkhūhīti añño bhikkhu aññehi bhikkhūhi na bhinditabbo.Na gihiddhajoti odātavatthāni acchinnadasapupphadasāni ca na dhāretabbāni.Na titthiyaddhajoti kusacīrādīni na dhāretabbāni.Na āsādetabboti na apasādetabbo.Anto vā bahi vāti vihārassa anto vā bahi vā. Na titthiyādipadattayaṃ uttānameva. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ pārivāsikakkhandhake vaṇṇayissāma. Sesaṃ tajjanīye vuttanayameva. Āpattiyā appaṭikamme ukkhepanīyakammaṃ iminā sadisameva.
51. Here, in the rectification, there are forty-three practices. There, na anuddhaṃsetabbo means should not be accused. Na bhikkhu bhikkhūhī means one bhikkhu should not be separated from other bhikkhus. Na gihiddhajo means white clothes and uncut lotus-colored flowers should not be worn. Na titthiyaddhajo means kusa grass clothes etc., should not be worn. Na āsādetabbo means should not be disparaged. Anto vā bahi vā means inside or outside the monastery. The three terms beginning with "titthiya" are straightforward in meaning. We will describe the rest in the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka. The remainder is the same as explained in the Tajjanīya. Ukkhepanīyakamma for not making amends for an offense is similar to this.
65.Ariṭṭhavatthu khuddakavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Bhaṇḍanakārako’’tiādīsu yaṃ diṭṭhiṃ nissāya bhaṇḍanādīni karoti, tassā appaṭinissaggeyeva kammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tajjanīye vuttanayameva. Sammāvattanāyampi hi idha tecattālīsaṃyeva vattānīti.
65. The Ariṭṭha story is described in the Khuddakavaṇṇanā. In "Bhaṇḍanakārako" etc., action should be taken only upon not abandoning the view that causes quarrels etc. The rest is the same as explained in the Tajjanīya. In the rectification, there are forty-three practices here as well.
Āpattiyā adassane ukkhepanīyakammakathā niṭṭhitā.
Āpattiyā adassane ukkhepanīyakammakathā is complete.
Kammakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Kammakkhandhakavaṇṇanā is complete.
2. Pārivāsikakkhandhakaṃ
2. Pārivāsikakkhandhakaṃ
Pārivāsikavattakathā
Pārivāsikavattakathā
75.Pārivāsikakkhandhake –pārivāsikāti parivāsaṃ parivasantā. Tattha catubbidho parivāso – appaṭicchannaparivāso, paṭicchannaparivāso, suddhantaparivāso, samodhānaparivāsoti. Tesu ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, aññopi aññatitthiyapubbo imasmiṃ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhati pabbajjaṃ, ākaṅkhati upasampadaṃ, tassa cattāro māse parivāso dātabbo’’ti (mahāva. 86) evaṃ mahākhandhake vutto titthiyaparivāso appaṭicchannaparivāso nāma. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ taṃ vuttameva. Ayaṃ pana idha anadhippeto. Sesā tayo yena saṅghādisesāpatti āpannā ceva hoti paṭicchāditā ca, tassa dātabbā. Tesu yaṃ vattabbaṃ taṃ samuccayakkhandhake vakkhāma. Ete pana idha adhippetā. Tasmā etesu yaṃkiñci parivāsaṃ parivasantā ‘‘pārivāsikā’’ti veditabbā.
75. In the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka, pārivāsikā means those undergoing parivāsa. There are four kinds of parivāsa: appaṭicchannaparivāsa, paṭicchannaparivāsa, suddhantaparivāsa, and samodhānaparivāsa. Among them, the titthiyaparivāsa mentioned in the Mahākhandhaka as, "Bhikkhus, any person who was formerly a follower of another sect and desires ordination in this Dhamma-Vinaya, should be given four months of parivāsa" (mahāva. 86), is called appaṭicchannaparivāsa. What should be said there has already been said. However, this is not intended here. The remaining three are to be given to one who has committed a saṅghādisesa offense and has concealed it. What should be said about them, we will say in the Samuccayakkhandhaka. But these are intended here. Therefore, those undergoing any of these parivāsas should be known as "pārivāsikā."
Pakatattānaṃ bhikkhūnanti ṭhapetvā navakataraṃ pārivāsikaṃ avasesānaṃ antamaso mūlāyapaṭikassanārahādīnampi.Abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānanti yaṃ te abhivādanādiṃ karonti, taṃ sādiyanti, sampaṭicchanti; na paṭikkhipantīti attho. Tatthasāmīcikammanti ṭhapetvā abhivādanādīni aññassa anucchavikassa bījanavātadānādino ābhisamācārikassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Āsanābhihāranti āsanassa abhiharaṇaṃ, āsanaṃ gahetvā abhigamanaṃ paññāpanameva vā. Seyyābhihārepi eseva nayo.Pādodakanti pādadhovanaudakaṃ.Pādapīṭhanti dhotapādaṭṭhapanakaṃ.Pādakathalikanti adhotapādaṭṭhapanakaṃ pādaghaṃsanaṃ vā.Āpatti dukkaṭassāti saddhivihārikānampi sādiyantassa dukkaṭameva, tasmā te vattabbā – ‘‘ahaṃ vinayakammaṃ karomi, mayhaṃ vattaṃ mā karotha, mā maṃ gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchathā’’ti. Sace saddhāpabbajitā kulaputtā ‘‘tumhe, bhante, tumhākaṃ vinayakammaṃ karothā’’ti vatvā vattaṃ karonti, gāmappavesanampi āpucchantiyeva, vāritakālato paṭṭhāya anāpatti.Mithu yathāvuḍḍhanti pārivāsikabhikkhūnaṃ aññamaññaṃ yo yo vuḍḍho tena tena navakatarassa sādituṃ.
Pakatattānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ means excluding a pārivāsika who is newer, to the remaining (monks), even to those deserving of having the root offense drawn back. Abhivādanapaccuṭṭhāna means they approve and accept the greetings etc., offered to them; they do not reject them. There, sāmīcikamma excluding greetings etc., this term is an epithet for other appropriate behavior such as giving fans and water for chewing sticks. Āsanābhihāra means bringing a seat, approaching with a seat, or preparing a seat. The same method applies to preparing a bed. Pādodaka means water for washing the feet. Pādapīṭha means a footstool for placing washed feet. Pādakathalika means a footrest for unwashed feet or for wiping the feet. Āpatti dukkaṭassā means even for those who approve of it for their co-residents, it is only a dukkata offense. Therefore, they should be told: "I am performing Vinaya action; do not do my duties; do not ask me about entering the village." If sons of good families who have gone forth with faith say, "Venerable sir, you perform your Vinaya action," and do the duties and ask about entering the village, there is no offense from the time they are warned. Mithu yathāvuḍḍha means among the pārivāsika monks, each one who is older should approve for the newer one.
Pañcayathāvuḍḍhanti pakatattehipi saddhiṃ vuḍḍhapaṭipāṭiyā eva. Tasmā pātimokkhe uddissamāne hatthapāse nisīdituṃ vaṭṭati. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘‘pāḷiyā anisīditvā pāḷiṃ vihāya hatthapāsaṃ amuñcantena nisīditabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Pārisuddhiuposathe karīyamāne saṅghanavakaṭṭhāne nisīditvā tattheva nisinnena attano pāḷiyā pārisuddhiuposatho kātabbo. Pavāraṇāyapi saṅghanavakaṭṭhāne nisīditvā tattheva nisinnena attano pāḷiyā pavāretabbaṃ. Saṅghena ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā bhājīyamānaṃ vassikasāṭikampi attano pattaṭṭhāne gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.
Pañca yathāvuḍḍha means in order of seniority even with the established ones. Therefore, it is proper to sit within arm's reach when the Pātimokkha is recited. However, in the Mahāpaccari, it is said, "Having not sat according to the text, one should sit releasing the arm's reach, abandoning the text." When purity is being declared on the Uposatha day, having sat in the new seat of the Sangha, one should declare one's purity for the Uposatha while sitting there. In the Pavāraṇā ceremony, having sat in the new seat of the Sangha, one should invite (criticism) according to one's turn while sitting there. It is also proper to take the Vassikasāṭika (rain-cloth) being distributed by the Sangha, having struck the bell, at one's own bowl stand.
Oṇojananti vissajjanaṃ vuccati. Sace hi pārivāsikassa dve tīṇi uddesabhattādīni pāpuṇanti, aññā cassa puggalikabhattapaccāsā hoti, tāni paṭipāṭiyā gahetvā ‘‘bhante, heṭṭhā gāhetha, ajja mayhaṃ bhattapaccāsā atthi, sve gaṇhissāmī’’ti vatvā vissajjetabbāni. Evaṃ tāni punadivasesu gaṇhituṃ labhati. Punadivase sabbapaṭhamaṃ etassa dātabbanti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Yadi pana na gaṇhāti na vissajjeti, punadivase na labhati, idaṃ oṇojanaṃ nāma pārivāsikasseva odissa anuññātaṃ. Kasmā? Tassa hi saṅghanavakaṭṭhāne nisinnassa bhattagge yāgukhajjakādīni pāpuṇanti vā na vā, tasmā so ‘‘bhikkhāhārena mā kilamitthā’’ti idamassa saṅgahakaraṇatthāya odissa anuññātaṃ.
Oṇojana means relinquishment. If a pārivāsika receives two or three invitation meals, etc., and expects a personal meal, he should take them in order and relinquish them, saying, "Venerable sir, take from below, today I have an expected meal, I will take it tomorrow." Thus, he can receive them on subsequent days. It is said in the Kurundi that on the following day, it should be given to him first. But if he neither takes it nor relinquishes it, he does not receive it on the following day; this oṇojana is allowed specifically for the pārivāsika. Why? Because for him, sitting in the new seat of the Sangha, porridge, sweets, etc., may or may not be available in the refectory; therefore, to prevent him from being fatigued by alms-seeking, it is specifically allowed for him to be supported.
Bhattanti āgatāgatehi vuḍḍhapaṭipāṭiyā gahetvā gantabbaṃ vihāre saṅghassa catussālabhattaṃ, etaṃ yathāvuḍḍhaṃ labhati. Pāḷiyā pana gantuṃ vā ṭhātuṃ vā na labhati, tasmā pāḷito osakkitvā hatthapāse ṭhitena hatthaṃ pasāretvā yathā seno nipatitvā gaṇhāti, evaṃ gaṇhitabbaṃ. Ārāmikasamaṇuddesehi āharāpetuṃ na labhati. Sace sayameva āharanti, vaṭṭati. Rañño mahāpeḷabhattepi eseva nayo. Catussālabhatte pana sace oṇojanaṃ kattukāmo hoti, attano atthāya ukkhitte piṇḍe ‘‘ajja me bhattaṃ atthi, sve gaṇhissāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Punadivase dve piṇḍe labhatīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Uddesabhattādīnipi pāḷito osakkitvāva gahetabbāni. Yattha pana nisīdāpetvā parivisanti, tattha sāmaṇerānaṃ jeṭṭhakena bhikkhūnaṃ saṅghanavakena hutvā nisīditabbaṃ.
Bhatta (meal) means the Sangha's Catussala meal in the monastery, which should be taken and consumed by those who have arrived, according to seniority. This is obtained according to seniority. However, one is not allowed to go forward or remain standing in the Pali (row), therefore, after stepping aside from the row, one should extend their hand when standing within arm's reach, and take it as a hawk swoops down to grab something. It is not allowed to have ārāmikas or novice monks bring it. If they bring it themselves, it is permissible. The same method applies to the king's Mahāpeḷa meal. However, in the Catussala meal, if one intends to set aside a portion, one should say, regarding the portion lifted for one's own sake, "I have a meal today, I will take it tomorrow." The Mahāpaccari states that on the following day, one will receive two portions. Uddesabhatta (designated meal) and other meals should also be taken after stepping aside from the row. However, in places where they seat and serve, the most senior of the novices should sit as the newest member of the Sangha of monks.
76.Idāni yā ayaṃ sammāvattanā vuttā, tatthana upasampādetabbanti upajjhāyena hutvā na upasampādetabbaṃ; vattaṃ nikkhipitvā pana upasampādetuṃ vaṭṭati. Ācariyena hutvāpi kammavācā na sāvetabbā, aññasmiṃ asati vattaṃ nikkhipitvā sāvetuṃ vaṭṭati.Na nissayoti āgantukānaṃ nissayo na dātabbo. Yehipi pakatiyāva nissayo gahito, te vattabbā – ‘‘ahaṃ vinayakammaṃ karomi, asukattherassa nāma santike nissayaṃ gaṇhatha, mayhaṃ vattaṃ mā karotha, mā maṃ gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchathā’’ti. Sace evaṃ vuttepi karontiyeva, vāritakālato paṭṭhāya karontesupi anāpatti.
76. Now, regarding this proper conduct that has been described, na upasampādetabbaṃ (should not confer higher ordination) means one should not confer higher ordination while acting as an upajjhaya (preceptor); however, it is permissible to confer higher ordination after relinquishing the duties. Even as an ācariya (teacher), the Kammavācā (ordination statement) should not be recited; if no one else is available, it is permissible to recite it after relinquishing the duties. Na nissayo (no guidance) means guidance should not be given to newcomers. Even those who have already received guidance by default should be told: "I am performing Vinaya duties; take guidance from such-and-such a Thera (elder); do not perform duties for me; do not ask me about entering the village." If they continue to do so even after being told, there is no offense for them doing so from the time they were forbidden.
Na sāmaṇeroti añño sāmaṇero na gahetabbo. Upajjhaṃ datvā gahitasāmaṇerāpi vattabbā – ‘‘ahaṃ vinayakammaṃ karomi, mayhaṃ vattaṃ mā karotha, mā maṃ gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchathā’’ti. Sace evaṃ vuttepi karontiyeva, vāritakālato paṭṭhāya karontesupi anāpatti. Bhikkhunovādakasammuti nāma ādhipaccaṭṭhānabhūtāti paṭikkhittā, tasmā bhikkhusaṅghassa vattabbaṃ – ‘‘bhante, ahaṃ vinayakammaṃ karomi, bhikkhunovādakaṃ jānāthā’’ti, paṭibalassa vā bhikkhussa bhāro kātabbo. Āgatā bhikkhuniyo ‘‘saṅghasantikaṃ gacchatha, saṅgho vo ovādadāyakaṃ jānissatī’’ti vā ‘‘ahaṃ vinayakammaṃ karomi, asukabhikkhussa nāma santikaṃ gacchatha, so vo ovādaṃ dassatī’’ti vā vattabbā.
Na sāmaṇero (no novice) means another novice should not be accepted. Novices who have been accepted by giving an upajjha (preceptor) should also be told: "I am performing Vinaya duties; do not perform duties for me; do not ask me about entering the village." If they continue to do so even after being told, there is no offense for them doing so from the time they were forbidden. The Bhikkhunovādakasammuti (agreement as an advisor to nuns) is rejected because it is a position of authority; therefore, the Bhikkhu Sangha (community of monks) should be told: "Bhante (venerable sirs), I am performing Vinaya duties; be aware of the advisor to nuns," or the burden should be placed on a capable bhikkhu. The nuns who have arrived should be told, "Go to the Sangha; the Sangha will recognize who gives you advice," or "I am performing Vinaya duties; go to such-and-such a bhikkhu; he will give you advice."
Sā āpattīti sukkavissaṭṭhiyā parivāse dinne sukkavissaṭṭhi nāpajjitabbā.Aññā vā tādisikāti kāyasaṃsaggādigarukāpatti.Tato vā pāpiṭṭhatarāti pārājikāpatti; sattasu hi āpattīsu dubbhāsitāpatti pāpiṭṭhā; dukkaṭāpatti pāpiṭṭhatarā; dukkaṭāpatti pāpiṭṭhā, pāṭidesanīyāpatti pāpiṭṭhatarāti evaṃ pācittiyathullaccayasaṅghādisesapārājikāpattīsu nayo netabbo. Tāsaṃ vatthūsupi dubbhāsitavatthu pāpiṭṭhaṃ, dukkaṭavatthu pāpiṭṭhataranti purimanayeneva bhedo veditabbo. Paṇṇattivajjasikkhāpade pana vatthupi āpattipi pāpiṭṭhā. Lokavajje ubhayampi pāpiṭṭhataraṃ.
Sā āpattī (that offense) means that after giving parivāsa (probation) for the emission of semen, the emission of semen should not be committed again. Aññā vā tādisikā (or another similar one) means a grave offense such as physical contact. Tato vā pāpiṭṭhatarā (or even more evil than that) means a pārājikā offense; for among the seven offenses, the dubbhāsita (wrongly spoken) offense is more evil; the dukkaṭa (wrongdoing) offense is even more evil; the dukkaṭa offense is more evil, the pāṭidesanīya (that which ought to be confessed) offense is even more evil, and thus the principle should be applied to the pācittiya, thullaccaya, saṅghādisesa, and pārājikā offenses. Even among their objects, the object of dubbhāsita is more evil, the object of dukkaṭa is even more evil, and the distinction should be understood in the same way as before. However, in a paṇṇattivajja (offense against a rule) training rule, both the object and the offense are evil. In a lokavajja (worldly offense), both are even more evil.
Kammanti parivāsakammavācā vuccati. Taṃ kammaṃ ‘‘akataṃ dukkaṭa’’ntiādīhi vā ‘‘kiṃ idaṃ kammaṃ nāma kasikammaṃ gorakkhakamma’’ntiādīhi vā vacanehi na garahitabbaṃ.Kammikāti yehi bhikkhūhi kammaṃ kataṃ, te vuccanti, te ‘‘bālā abyattā’’tiādīhi vacanehi na garahitabbā.Nasavacanīyaṃ kātabbanti palibodhatthāya vā pakkosanatthāya vā savacanīyaṃ na kātabbaṃ, palibodhatthāya hi karonto ‘‘ahaṃ āyasmantaṃ imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ savacanīyaṃ karomi, imamhā āvāsā ekapadampi mā pakkāmi, yāva na taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasantaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ karoti. Pakkosanatthāya karonto ‘‘ahaṃ te savacanīyaṃ karomi, ehi mayā saddhiṃ vinayadharānaṃ sammukhībhāvaṃ gacchāmā’’ti evaṃ karoti; tadubhayampi na kātabbaṃ.
Kamma (act) refers to the formal statement of parivāsa (probation). That act should not be criticized with statements such as "akataṃ dukkaṭa (unskillful and badly done)," or "kiṃ idaṃ kammaṃ nāma kasikammaṃ gorakkhakamma (what kind of act is this, is it farming or cattle-raising)?" Kammikā (those who perform the act) refers to the bhikkhus (monks) who have performed the act; they should not be criticized with statements such as "bālā abyattā (foolish, incompetent)." Na savacanīyaṃ kātabbaṃ (should not be made subject to questioning) means it should not be made subject to questioning for the purpose of creating an obstacle or for the purpose of summoning; for when making it for the purpose of creating an obstacle, one does so by saying, "I make the venerable one subject to questioning in this matter; do not leave this dwelling even a step until that issue is resolved." When making it for the purpose of summoning, one does so by saying, "I make you subject to questioning; come, let us go together into the presence of the Vinaya experts"; neither of these should be done.
Na anuvādoti vihāre jeṭṭhakaṭṭhānaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Pātimokkhuddesakena vā dhammajjhesakena vā na bhavitabbaṃ. Nāpi terasasu sammutīsu ekasammutivasenāpi issariyakammaṃ kātabbaṃ.Na okāsoti ‘‘karotu me āyasmā okāsaṃ, ahaṃ taṃ vattukāmo’’ti evaṃ pakatattassa okāso na kāretabbo, vatthunā vā āpattiyā vā na codetabbo, ‘‘ayaṃ pubbe te doso’’ti na sāretabbo.Na bhikkhūhi sampayojetabbanti aññamaññaṃ yojetvā kalaho na kāretabbo.
Na anuvādo (no blaming) means one should not establish a senior position in the monastery. One should not be a Pātimokkhuddesaka (reciter of the Pātimokkha) or a Dhammajjhesaka (teacher of the Dhamma). Nor should one perform any act of authority by way of any of the thirteen agreements. Na okāso (no permission) means permission should not be requested from one who is known to be at fault, saying, "May the venerable one grant me permission; I wish to speak to him"; one should not rebuke him with regard to an object or an offense; one should not remind him, "This was formerly your fault." Na bhikkhūhi sampayojetabbaṃ (should not be connected with monks) means a quarrel should not be created by connecting them with each other.
Puratoti saṅghattherena hutvā purato na gantabbaṃ, dvādasahatthaṃ upacāraṃ muñcitvā ekakena gantabbaṃ. Nisīdanepi eseva nayo.Āsanapariyantoti bhattaggādīsu saṅghanavakāsanaṃ vuccati; svāssa dātabbo, tattha nisīditabbaṃ.Seyyāpariyantoti seyyānaṃ pariyanto, sabbalāmakaṃ mañcapīṭhaṃ. Ayañhi vassaggena attano pattaṭṭhāne seyyaṃ gahetuṃ na labhati. Sabbabhikkhūhi vicinitvā gahitāvasesā maṅkulagūthabharitā vettalatādivinaddhā lāmakaseyyā assa dātabbā.Vihārapariyantoti yathā ca seyyā, evaṃ vasanaāvāsopi vassaggena attano pattaṭṭhāne tassa na vaṭṭati. Sabbabhikkhūhi vicinitvā gahitāvasesā pana rajohatabhūmi jatukamūsikabharitā paṇṇasālā assa dātabbā. Sace pakatattā sabbe rukkhamūlikā abbhokāsikā ca honti, channaṃ na upenti, sabbepi etehi vissaṭṭhāvāsā nāma honti. Tesu yaṃ icchati, taṃ labhati. Vassūpanāyikadivase paccayaṃ ekapasse ṭhatvā vassaggena gaṇhituṃ labhati. Senāsanaṃ na labhati, nibaddhavassāvāsikaṃ senāsanaṃ gaṇhitukāmena vattaṃ nikkhipitvā gahetabbaṃ.
Purato (in front) means one should not go in front as the Sangha Thera (elder of the Sangha); one should go alone, relinquishing the twelve-hattha (cubit) vicinity. The same principle applies to sitting down. Āsanapariyanto (end of seat) refers to the seat for the Sangha novice in the refectory, etc.; that should be given to him, and he should sit there. Seyyāpariyanto (end of the bed) means the end of the beds, the worst kind of cot or bench. For in the distribution of dwellings for the rains, he is not allowed to take a bed in the place that is his due. The worst beds, filled with bedbugs and excrement, bound with rattan, etc., which are left over after all the bhikkhus have chosen, should be given to him. Vihārapariyanto (end of the monastery) means just as with the bed, so too with the dwelling for the rains, it is not permissible for him to have it in the place that is his due in the distribution of dwellings for the rains. However, the dilapidated leaf hut, filled with dust-covered ground, termite mounds, and mice, which is left over after all the bhikkhus have chosen, should be given to him. If, by nature, all are root-dwellers and open-air dwellers, and they do not approach a roof, all these are called abandoned dwellings. He may have whichever he wants. On the day of entering the rains, he is allowed to receive requisites by standing on one side while the division is happening. He cannot receive a dwelling; if one wants to receive a dwelling for permanent rains-residence, one must relinquish the duty first.
Tenaca so sāditabboti yaṃ assa āsanādipariyantaṃ bhikkhū denti, so eva sāditabbo.Puresamaṇena vā pacchāsamaṇena vāti ñātipavāritaṭṭhāne ‘‘ettake bhikkhū gahetvā āgacchathā’’ti nimantitena ‘‘bhante, asukaṃ nāma kulaṃ bhikkhū nimantesi, etha tattha gacchāmā’’ti evaṃ saṃvidhāya bhikkhū puresamaṇe vā pacchāsamaṇe vā katvā na gantabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhante, asukasmiṃ nāma gāme manussā bhikkhūnaṃ āgamanaṃ icchanti, sādhu vatassa sace tesaṃ saṅgahaṃ kareyyāthā’’ti evaṃ pana pariyāyena kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.
Tena ca so sāditabbo (and he should be pleased) means he should be pleased with whatever seat, etc., the bhikkhus give him. Puresamaṇena vā pacchāsamaṇena vā (as a front-going or back-going monk) means one should not go as a front-going or back-going monk by arranging it like this: "Bhante (venerable sir), such-and-such a family invited monks, let us go there," after being invited by someone who said at a relative's invitation, "Take so many monks and come." However, it is permissible to speak in this way by circumlocution: "Bhante (venerable sir), people in such-and-such a village desire the arrival of monks; it would be good if you would do them a favor."
Na āraññikaṅganti āgatāgatānaṃ ārocetuṃ harāyamānena āraññikadhutaṅgaṃ na samādātabbaṃ. Yenāpi pakatiyā samādinnaṃ, tena dutiyaṃ bhikkhuṃ gahetvā araññe aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpetabbaṃ, na ca ekakena vatthabbaṃ. Tathā bhattaggādīsu āsanapariyante nisajjāya harāyamānena piṇḍapātikadhutaṅgampi na samādātabbaṃ. Yo pana pakatiyāva piṇḍapātiko tassa paṭisedho natthi.
Na āraññikaṅga (not the forest-dwelling practice) means one should not undertake the forest-dwelling dhutaṅga (ascetic practice), being eager to announce it to those who have arrived. Even if one has already undertaken it by nature, one should wake up at dawn in the forest with a second bhikkhu, and should not stay alone. Likewise, in the refectory, etc., one should not undertake the alms-food dhutaṅga (ascetic practice), being eager to sit at the end of the seats. However, there is no prohibition for one who is naturally an alms-goer.
Na ca tappaccayāti ‘‘nīhaṭabhatto hutvā vihāreyeva nisīditvā bhuñjanto rattiyo gaṇayissāmi, gacchato me bhikkhuṃ disvā anārocentassa ratticchedo siyā’’ti iminā kāraṇena piṇḍapāto na nīharāpetabbo.Mā maṃ jāniṃsūti ‘‘mā maṃ ekabhikkhupi jānātū’’ti ca iminā ajjhāsayena vihāre sāmaṇerehi pacāpetvā bhuñjitumpi na labhati. Gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisitabbameva. Gilānassa pana navakammaācariyupajjhāyakiccādipasutassa vā vihāreyeva acchituṃ vaṭṭati. Sacepi gāme anekasatā bhikkhū vicaranti, na sakkā hoti ārocetuṃ, gāmakāvāsaṃ gantvā sabhāgaṭṭhāne vasituṃ vaṭṭati.
Na ca tappaccayā (and not because of that reason) means alms should not be brought out with this intention: "Having had the meal brought out, I will sit in the monastery and count the nights, lest there be a break in the night for me if I do not announce to a bhikkhu who sees me going." Mā maṃ jāniṃsū (lest they know me) means one is not allowed to have novices cook and eat in the monastery with this intention: "Let not even one bhikkhu know me." One must enter the village for alms. However, it is permissible for a sick person or one who is occupied with the duties of a new construction teacher or preceptor to stay in the monastery. Even if hundreds of bhikkhus wander in the village, and it is not possible to announce to them, it is permissible to go to the village boundary and stay in a common area.
Āgantukenāti kañci vihāraṃ gatena tattha bhikkhūnaṃ ārocetabbaṃ. Sace sabbe ekaṭṭhāne ṭhite passati, ekaṭṭhāne ṭhiteneva ārocetabbaṃ. Atha rukkhamūlādīsu visuṃ visuṃ ṭhitā honti, tattha tattha gantvā ārocetabbaṃ. Sañcicca anārocentassa ratticchedo ca hoti, vattabhede ca dukkaṭaṃ. Atha vicinanto ekacce na passati, ratticchedova hoti, na vattabhedadukkaṭaṃ.
Āgantukenā (by the newcomer) means one who has gone to any monastery should announce to the bhikkhus there. If one sees all of them standing in one place, one should announce to them while standing in one place. If they are standing separately under trees, etc., one should go there and announce to them. If one intentionally does not announce, there is a break in the night and a dukkaṭa for violating the duty. However, if while searching, one does not see some of them, there is only a break in the night, not a dukkaṭa for violating the duty.
Āgantukassāti attano vasanavihāraṃ āgatassāpi ekassa vā bahūnaṃ vā vuttanayeneva ārocetabbaṃ. Ratticchedavattabhedāpi cettha vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Sace āgantukā muhuttaṃ vissamitvā vā avissamitvā eva vā vihāramajjhena gacchanti, tesampi ārocetabbaṃ. Sace tassa ajānantasseva gacchanti, ayañca pana gatakāle jānāti, gantvā ārocetabbaṃ. Sampāpuṇituṃ asakkontassa ratticchedova hoti, na vattabhedadukkaṭaṃ. Yepi antovihāraṃ appavisitvā upacārasīmaṃ okkamitvā gacchanti, ayañca nesaṃ chattasaddaṃ vā ukkāsitasaddaṃ vā khipitasaddaṃ vā sutvāva āgantukabhāvaṃ jānāti, gantvā ārocetabbaṃ. Gatakāle jānantenapi anubandhitvā ārocetabbameva. Sampāpuṇituṃ asakkontassa ratticchedova hoti, na vattabhedadukkaṭaṃ. Yopi rattiṃyeva āgantvā rattiṃyeva gacchati, sopissa ratticchedaṃ karoti, aññātattā pana vattabhedadukkaṭaṃ natthi. Sace ajānitvāva abbhānaṃ karoti, akatameva hotīti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā adhikā rattiyo gahetvā kātabbaṃ, ayaṃ apaṇṇakapaṭipadā.
Āgantukassā (to the newcomer) means even to one or many who have come to one's own dwelling monastery, one should announce in the manner described above. The break in the night and the violation of duty should also be understood in the manner described above. If the newcomers go through the middle of the monastery, whether after resting for a moment or without resting, one should announce to them. If they go without knowing, and this one knows when they have gone, one should go and announce to them. If one is unable to reach them, there is only a break in the night, not a dukkaṭa for violating the duty. Even those who do not enter the inner monastery but go beyond the boundary, and this one knows of their arrival only by hearing the sound of an umbrella, a cough, or a snap of the fingers, one should go and announce to them. Even if one knows after they have gone, one should still pursue and announce to them. If one is unable to reach them, there is only a break in the night, not a dukkaṭa for violating the duty. Even one who comes at night and leaves at night causes a break in the night for them, but because they are unknown, there is no dukkaṭa for violating the duty. If one performs the act of invitation without knowing, it is not done, according to the Kurundi. Therefore, one should do it by taking more nights, this is the Apaṇṇakapaṭipadā (undeviating practice).
Nadīādīsu nāvāya gacchantampi paratīre ṭhitampi ākāsena gacchantampi pabbatatalaaraññādīsu dūre ṭhitampi bhikkhuṃ disvā sace ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti vavatthānaṃ atthi, nāvādīhi vā gantvā mahāsaddaṃ katvā vā vegena anubandhitvā vā ārocetabbaṃ, anārocentassa ratticchedo ceva vattabhedadukkaṭañca. Sace vāyamantopi sampāpuṇituṃ vā sāvetuṃ vā na sakkoti, ratticchedova hoti, na vattabhedadukkaṭaṃ. Saṅghasenābhayatthero pana visayāvisayena katheti – ‘‘visaye kira anārocentassa ratticchedo ceva vattabhedadukkaṭañca hoti, avisaye pana ubhayampi natthī’’ti. Karavīkatissatthero ‘‘samaṇo ayanti vavatthānameva pamāṇaṃ, sacepi avisayo hoti, vattabhedadukkaṭameva natthi, ratticchedo pana hotiyevā’’ti āha.
If one sees a bhikkhu going on a boat in rivers, etc., standing on the opposite shore, going through the air, standing far away in mountain caves or forests, etc., and one is certain that they are a bhikkhu, one should announce to them by going on a boat, etc., making a loud noise, or quickly pursuing them; if one does not announce, there is both a break in the night and a dukkaṭa for violating the duty. If, even while trying, one is unable to reach them or make them hear, there is only a break in the night, not a dukkaṭa for violating the duty. However, Sanghasenābhaya Thera speaks according to territory: "In the domain, if one does not announce, there is both a break in the night and a dukkaṭa for violating the duty; however, outside the domain, both are absent." Karavīkatissa Thera said, "Certainty that it is a Samaṇa (ascetic) is the measure; even if it is outside the domain, there is no dukkaṭa for violating the duty, but there is still a break in the night."
Uposatheti ‘‘uposathaṃ sampāpuṇissāmā’’ti āgantukā bhikkhū āgacchanti, iddhiyā gacchantāpi uposathabhāvaṃ ñatvā otaritvā uposathaṃ karonti, tasmā āgantukasodhanatthaṃ uposathadivase ārocetabbaṃ. Pavāraṇāyapi eseva nayo.Gilānoti gantuṃ asamattho.Dūtenāti ettha anupasampannaṃ pesetuṃ na vaṭṭati, bhikkhuṃ pesetvā ārocāpetabbaṃ.
Uposathe (on the Uposatha day) means that newcomer bhikkhus arrive thinking, "We will reach the Uposatha (observance day)," and even those going by psychic power, knowing that it is the Uposatha, descend and perform the Uposatha; therefore, one should announce on the Uposatha day in order to purify the newcomers. The same principle applies to the Pavāraṇā (invitation ceremony). Gilāno (sick) means unable to go. Dūtenā (by a messenger) means here, it is not permissible to send one who is not fully ordained; one should send a bhikkhu and have them announce.
Abhikkhukoāvāsoti suññavihāro; yattha ekopi bhikkhu natthi, tattha vāsatthāya na gantabbaṃ. Na hi tattha vuttharattiyo gaṇanūpikā honti, pakatattena pana saddhiṃ vaṭṭati. Dasavidhantarāye pana sacepi rattiyo gaṇanūpikā na honti, antarāyato parimuccanatthāya gantabbameva. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘aññatra antarāyā’’ti. Nānāsaṃvāsakehi saddhiṃ vinayakammaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Tesaṃ anārocanepi ratticchedo natthi, abhikkhukāvāsasadisameva hoti. Tena vuttaṃ –‘‘yatthassu bhikkhū nānāsaṃvāsakā’’ti. Sesaṃ uposathakkhandhake vuttanayameva.
Abhikkhuko āvāso (a monkless dwelling) means an empty monastery; one should not go there to stay. For the nights spent there are not countable, but it is permissible to go together with one who is by nature doing it. However, in the case of the ten kinds of dangers, even if the nights are not countable, one must go in order to be freed from the danger. Therefore, it was said: "aññatra antarāyā (except in the case of danger)." It is not permissible to perform Vinaya acts with those of different communities. There is no break in the night even if one does not announce to them, it is just like a monkless dwelling. Therefore, it was said: ‘‘yatthassu bhikkhū nānāsaṃvāsakā’’ (where there are monks of different communions). The rest is as stated in the Uposatha Khandhaka.
81.Ekacchanne āvāsetiādīsuāvāsonāma vasanatthāya katasenāsanaṃ.Anāvāsonāma cetiyagharaṃ bodhigharaṃ sammuñjaniaṭṭako dāruaṭṭako pānīyamāḷo vaccakuṭi dvārakoṭṭhakoti evamādi. Tatiyapadena tadubhayampi gahitaṃ. Etesu yattha katthaci ekacchanne chadanato udakapatanaṭṭhānaparicchinne okāse ukkhittako vasituṃ na labhati. ‘‘Pārivāsiko pana antoāvāseyeva na labhatī’’ti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘avisesena udakapātena vārita’’nti vuttaṃ. Kurundiyaṃ ‘‘etesu ettakesu pañcavaṇṇacchadanabaddhaṭṭhānesu pārivāsikassa ca ukkhittakassa ca pakatattena saddhiṃ udakapātena vārita’’nti vuttaṃ. Tasmā nānūpacārepi ekacchanne na vaṭṭati. Sace panettha tadahupasampannepi pakatatte paṭhamaṃ pavisitvā nipanne saṭṭhivassopi pārivāsiko pacchā pavisitvā jānanto nipajjati, ratticchedo ceva vattabhedadukkaṭañca. Ajānantassa ratticchedova na vattabhedadukkaṭaṃ. Sace pana tasmiṃ paṭhamaṃ nipanne pacchā pakatatto pavisitvā nipajjati, pārivāsiko ca jānāti, ratticchedo ceva vattabhedadukkaṭañca. No ce jānāti, ratticchedova na vattabhedadukkaṭaṃ.
81.Ekacchanne āvāse (in a dwelling under one roof) etc., āvāso (dwelling) means a dwelling made for the purpose of residing. Anāvāso (non-dwelling) means a shrine room, a Bodhi tree room, a sweeping heap, a wooden platform, a water hall, a toilet, a gatehouse, and so on. The third term includes both of these. In any of these, in any space covered by one roof and defined by the place where the water falls from the roof, an ukkhittaka (one under suspension) is not allowed to reside. "However, a pārivāsika (probationary monk) is not allowed to stay inside the dwelling," according to the Mahāpaccari. However, the Mahāaṭṭhakathā states, "barred by the falling of water without distinction." The Kurundi states, "In so many of these places bound by five-colored roofs, a probationary monk and one under suspension are barred from water falling, together with one who is by nature doing it." Therefore, it is not permissible even without different boundaries under one roof. However, if in this case, even with one who is ordained on that very day being by nature doing it, the ordained first enters and lies down, and a probationary monk of sixty years later enters knowing it and lies down, there is both a break in the night and a dukkaṭa for violating the duty. If he does not know, there is only a break in the night, not a dukkaṭa for violating the duty. However, if after that one lies down first, the one who is naturally doing it later enters and lies down, and the probationary monk knows it, there is both a break in the night and a dukkaṭa for violating the duty. If he does not know, there is only a break in the night, not a dukkaṭa for violating the duty.
Vuṭṭhātabbaṃ nimantetabboti tadahupasampannampi disvā vuṭṭhātabbameva; vuṭṭhāya ca ‘‘ahaṃ iminā sukhanisinno vuṭṭhāpito’’ti parammukhena na gantabbaṃ, ‘‘idaṃ ācariya-āsanaṃ, ettha nisīdathā’’ti evaṃ nimantetabboyeva. Navakena pana ‘‘mahātheraṃ obaddhaṃ karomī’’ti pārivāsikattherassa santikaṃ na gantabbaṃ.Ekāsaneti samānavassikāsane mañce vā pīṭhe vā.Na chamāyaṃ nisinneti pakatatte bhūmiyaṃ nisinne itarena antamaso tiṇasanthārepi uccatare vālikātalepi vā na nisīditabbaṃ, dvādasahatthaṃ pana upacāraṃ muñcitvā nisīdituṃ vaṭṭati.Ekacaṅkameti sahāyena viya saddhiṃ caṅkamanto ekasmiṃ caṅkame.
Vuṭṭhātabbaṃ nimantetabbo ti: Even if one sees someone ordained on the same day, one should rise for them; and having risen, one should not leave with averted face thinking, "I was made to get up from my comfortable seat by this person," but should invite them saying, "This is the seat for the teacher, please be seated here." However, a junior monk should not go to a pārivāsika elder thinking, "I will put the venerable elder under obligation." Ekāsane ti: On a seat shared by those of equal seniority, whether it be a couch or a stool. Na chamāyaṃ nisinne ti: When one is sitting on the bare ground in one's normal state, another should not sit on the ground, even if it be on a spread of grass, or on a slightly higher sandy area. However, it is permissible to sit beyond the twelve-cubit limit of personal space. Ekacaṅkame ti: While pacing together like friends on the same caṅkama (walking path).
Chamāyaṃ caṅkamantanti chamāyaṃ caṅkamante, ayameva vā pāṭho. Ayaṃ panettha attho – akataparicchedāya bhūmiyā caṅkamante paricchedaṃ katvā vālikaṃ ākiritvā ālambanaṃ yojetvā katacaṅkame nīcepi na caṅkamitabbaṃ, ko pana vādo iṭṭhakācayasampanne vedikāparikkhitteti! Sace pana pākāraparikkhitto hoti dvārakoṭṭhakayutto pabbatantaravanantaragumbantaresu vā suppaṭicchanno, tādise caṅkame caṅkamituṃ vaṭṭati. Appaṭicchannepi upacāraṃ muñcitvā vaṭṭati.
Chamāyaṃ caṅkamanta ti: While pacing on the bare ground; or this may be another reading. Here is the meaning in this context: While pacing on ground where no boundary has been made, one should not pace even on a low caṅkama where a boundary has been made, sand has been scattered, and a support has been set up. What then to say of one built with bricks and enclosed by a railing! But if it is enclosed by a wall, has a gatehouse, or is well-hidden among mountains, forests, or thickets, it is permissible to pace on such a caṅkama. Even if it is not hidden, it is permissible beyond the twelve-cubit limit of personal space.
Vuḍḍhatarenāti ettha sace vuḍḍhatare pārivāsike paṭhamaṃ nipanne itaro jānanto pacchā nipajjati, ratticchedo cassa hoti vattabhede ca dukkaṭaṃ. Vuḍḍhatarassa pana ratticchedova na vattabhedadukkaṭaṃ. Ajānitvā nipajjati, dvinnampi vattabhedo natthi, ratticchedo pana hoti. Atha navakapārivāsike paṭhamaṃ nipanne vuḍḍhataro pacchā nipajjati, navako ca jānāti, ratti cassa chijjati, vattabhede ca dukkaṭaṃ hoti. Vuḍḍhatarassa ratticchedova na vattabhedo. No ce jānāti, dvinnampi vattabhedo natthi, ratticchedo pana hoti. Sace dvepi apacchāpurimaṃ nipajjanti, vuḍḍhatarassa ratticchedova itarassa vattabhedopīti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Dve pārivāsikā samavassā, eko paṭhamaṃ nipanno, eko jānantova pacchā nipajjati, ratti ca chijjati, vattabhede ca dukkaṭaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ nipannassa ratticchedova na vattabhedo. Sace pacchā nipajjantopi na jānāti, dvinnampi vattabhedo natthi, ratticchedo pana hoti. Sace dvepi apacchāpurimaṃ nipajjanti, dvinnampi ratticchedoyeva, na vattabhedo. Sace hi dve pārivāsikā ekato vaseyyuṃ, te aññamaññassa ajjhācāraṃ ñatvā agāravā vā vippaṭisārino vā hutvā pāpiṭṭhataraṃ vā āpattiṃ āpajjeyyuṃ vibbhameyyuṃ vā, tasmā nesaṃ sahaseyyā sabbappakārena paṭikkhittā. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Mūlāyapaṭikassanārahādayo cettha pārivāsikānaṃ pakatattaṭṭhāne ṭhitāti veditabbā.
Vuḍḍhatarenā ti: Here, if the senior pārivāsika lies down first, and the other, knowing this, lies down later, there is a break of the night for him and a dukkaṭa for violating the rule. But for the senior, there is only a break of the night, not a dukkaṭa for violating the rule. If he lies down unknowingly, there is no violation of the rule for either of them, but there is a break of the night. Then, if the junior pārivāsika lies down first, and the senior lies down later, and the junior knows this, his night is broken and there is a dukkaṭa for violating the rule. For the senior, there is only a break of the night, not a violation of the rule. If he does not know, there is no violation of the rule for either of them, but there is a break of the night. If both lie down without regard for seniority, the Kurundi says that there is only a break of the night for the senior, and also a violation of the rule for the other. If two pārivāsikas are of equal seniority, and one lies down first, and the other, knowing this, lies down later, the night is broken and there is a dukkaṭa for violating the rule. For the one who lay down first, there is only a break of the night, not a violation of the rule. If the one who lies down later also does not know, there is no violation of the rule for either of them, but there is a break of the night. If both lie down without regard for seniority, there is only a break of the night for both of them, not a violation of the rule. If two pārivāsikas were to live together, they might know of each other's transgressions and become disrespectful or remorseful, or commit a more serious offense, or become disturbed; therefore, their sharing a bed is prohibited in every way. The rest should be understood in the manner already stated. Here, those deserving of reversion to the mūla status, etc., are considered to be in the pakatatta state.
Pārivāsikacatuttho ce, bhikkhave, parivāsanti ettha pārivāsikaṃ catutthaṃ katvā aññassa parivāsadānādīni kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Etesvevāyaṃ gaṇapūrako na hoti, sesasaṅghakammesu hoti. Gaṇe pana appahonte vattaṃ nikkhipāpetvā gaṇapūrako kātabboti.
Pārivāsikacatuttho ce, bhikkhave, parivāsa ti: Here, it is not proper to give parivāsa to another, etc., by making a pārivāsika the fourth. He is not a quorum-filler in these instances only, but he is in other saṅgha transactions. But if the quorum is incomplete, he should be made a quorum-filler after having the rule set aside.
83.Imaṃ pana vattakathaṃ sutvā vinayadharaupālittherassa rahogatassa evaṃ parivitakko udapādi – ‘‘bhagavatā bahu pārivāsikavattaṃ paññattaṃ, katihi nu kho ettha kāraṇehi ratticchedo hotī’’ti! So bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā tamatthaṃ pucchi. Bhagavā cassa byākāsi. Tena vuttaṃ –‘‘atha kho āyasmā upāli…pe… ratticchedā’’ti. Tatthasahavāsoti yvāyaṃ pakatattena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekacchannetiādinā nayena vutto ekato vāso.Vippavāsoti ekakasseva vāso.Anārocanāti āgantukādīnaṃ anārocanā. Etesu tīsu ekekena kāraṇena ratticchedo hoti.
83. Having heard this account of the rules, the vinayadhara (one who upholds the Vinaya) Elder Upāli, while alone, had this thought: "The Blessed One has prescribed many pārivāsika rules; by how many causes is there a break of the night here?" He approached the Blessed One and asked about this matter. The Blessed One explained it to him. Hence it was said: "Atha kho āyasmā Upāli…pe… ratticchedā ti." Here, sahavāso ti: Living together in the manner stated, beginning with "under the same roof," with a bhikkhu in the normal state. Vippavāso ti: Living alone. Anārocanā ti: Not informing those who arrive, etc. With any one of these three causes, there is a break of the night.
84.Na sakkontīti saṅghassa mahantatāya tattha tattha gantvā sabbesaṃ ārocetuṃ asakkontā sodhetuṃ na sakkonti.Parivāsaṃ nikkhipāmi, vattaṃ nikkhipāmīti imesu dvīsu padesu ekenāpi nikkhittova hoti parivāso; dvīhi sunikkhittoyeva. Samādānepi eseva nayo. Evaṃ vattaṃ samādiyitvā parivutthaparivāsassa mānattaṃ gaṇhato puna vattasamādānakiccaṃ natthi, samādinnavattoyeva hesa tasmāssa chārattaṃ mānattaṃ dātabbaṃ, ciṇṇamānatto abbhetabbo. Evaṃ anāpattiko hutvā suddhante patiṭṭhito tisso sikkhā pūretvā dukkhassantaṃ karissatīti.
84. Na sakkontī ti: Being unable to purify because of the large size of the Saṅgha, being unable to announce to all by going here and there. Parivāsaṃ nikkhipāmi, vattaṃ nikkhipāmī ti: In these two expressions, the parivāsa is relinquished by even one of them; it is certainly relinquished by both. The same method applies to undertaking it. Having undertaken the rule in this way, there is no further need to undertake the rule when one who has lived the parivāsa takes on mānatta; he is one who has already undertaken the rule. Therefore, he should be given six nights of mānatta, and having completed the mānatta, he should be reinstated. Thus, being without offense, established in purity, fulfilling the three trainings, he will make an end to suffering.
Pārivāsikavattakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Account of the Rules for a Pārivāsika is Finished.
Mūlāyapaṭikassanārahavattakathā
The Account of the Rules for One Deserving Reversion to the Mūla Status
86.Mūlāyapaṭikassanārahā bhikkhū sādiyanti pakatattānanti ṭhapetvā navakataraṃ mūlāyapaṭikassanārahaṃ avasesānaṃ antamaso pārivāsikādīnampi. Imesañhi pārivāsikamūlāyapaṭikassanārahamānattārahamānattācārikabbhānārahānaṃ pañcannaṃ ṭhapetvā attano attano navakataraṃ, sesā sabbe pakatattā eva. Kasmā? Mithu yathāvuḍḍhaṃ abhivādanādīnaṃ anuññātattā. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘avasesānaṃ antamaso pārivāsikādīnampī’’ti. Mūlāyapaṭikassanārahādilakkhaṇaṃ pana nesaṃ parato āvibhavissati. Sesamettha ito paresu ca mānattārahādivattesu pārivāsikavatte vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
86. Mūlāyapaṭikassanārahā bhikkhū sādiyanti pakatattāna ti: Except for a mūlāyapaṭikassanāraha (one deserving reversion to the mūla status) who is newer, the remaining ones, even pārivāsikas, etc. For these five—the pārivāsika, the mūlāyapaṭikassanāraha, the one deserving mānatta, the one practicing mānatta, and the one not deserving reinstatement—except for one who is newer than oneself, all the rest are in the normal state. Why? Because mutual salutations, etc., are allowed according to seniority. Hence it was said, "the remaining ones, even pārivāsikas, etc." However, the characteristics of one deserving reversion to the mūla status, etc., will become clear later. The rest here, and in the subsequent rules for those deserving mānatta, etc., should be understood in the same way as stated in the pārivāsika rules.
87.Mūlāyapaṭikassanārahacatuttho cetiādīsupi yatheva pārivāsiko; evaṃ etepi etesu vinayakammesu gaṇapūrakā na honti, sesasaṅghakammesu honti.
87. Mūlāyapaṭikassanārahacatuttho ce ti: In these instances also, just as with the pārivāsika, these too are not quorum-fillers in these vinaya transactions, but they are in other saṅgha transactions.
Mūlāyapaṭikassanārahavattakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Account of the Rules for One Deserving Reversion to the Mūla Status is Finished.
Mānattacārikavattakathā
The Account of the Rules for One Practicing Mānatta
90.Mānattacārikassavattesu ‘‘devasikaṃ ārocetabba’’nti viseso.
90. Mānattacārikassa: Among the rules for one practicing mānatta, the special feature is that "it should be announced daily."
92.Ratticchedesuūne gaṇeti etthagaṇoti cattāro vā atirekā vā; tasmā sacepi tīhi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ vasati, ratticchedo hotiyeva. Mānattanikkhepasamādānesu vuttasadisova vinicchayo. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
92. Among the breaks of the night, ūne gaṇe ti: Here, gaṇo ti: "quorum" means four or more; therefore, even if he lives with three bhikkhus, there is indeed a break of the night. The judgment in relinquishing and undertaking mānatta is similar to what has been stated. The rest is all straightforward.
Mānattacārikavattakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Account of the Rules for One Practicing Mānatta is Finished.
Pārivāsikakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Pārivāsikakkhandhaka Commentary is Finished.
3. Samuccayakkhandhakaṃ
3. Samuccayakkhandhaka
Sukkavissaṭṭhikathā
The Account of Semen Emission
97.Samuccayakkhandhake –chārattaṃ mānattanti ettha catubbidhaṃ mānattaṃ – appaṭicchannamānattaṃ, paṭicchannamānattaṃ, pakkhamānattaṃ, samodhānamānattanti. Tatthaappaṭicchannamānattaṃnāma – yaṃ appaṭicchannāya āpattiyā parivāsaṃ adatvā kevalaṃ āpattiṃ āpannabhāveneva mānattārahassa mānattaṃ diyyati.Paṭicchannamānattaṃnāma – yaṃ paṭicchannāya āpattiyā parivutthaparivāsassa diyyati.Pakkhamānattaṃnāma – yaṃ paṭicchannāya vā appaṭicchannāya vā āpattiyā addhamāsaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ diyyati.Samodhānamānattaṃnāma – yaṃ odhāya ekato katvā diyyati. Tesu idaṃ ‘‘appaṭicchannāya chārattaṃ mānatta’’nti vacanato ‘‘appaṭicchannamānatta’’nti veditabbaṃ. Taṃ dentena sace ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno hoti, idha vuttanayena dātabbaṃ. Sace dve vā tisso vā tatuttariṃ vā āpanno, yatheva ‘‘ekaṃ āpatti’’nti vuttaṃ; evaṃ ‘‘dve āpattiyo, tisso āpattiyo’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tatuttari pana sacepi sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā hoti, ‘‘sambahulā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Nānāvatthukāyopi ekato katvā dātabbā, tāsaṃ dānavidhiṃ parivāsadāne kathayissāma.
97. In the Samuccayakkhandhaka – chārattaṃ mānattaṃ ti: Here, mānatta is of four kinds: un-concealed mānatta, concealed mānatta, pakkha mānatta, and combined mānatta. Among these, appaṭicchannamānattaṃ nāma: Un-concealed mānatta is the mānatta that is given to one deserving mānatta simply because of having committed an offense, without giving parivāsa for an un-concealed offense. Paṭicchannamānattaṃ nāma: Concealed mānatta is that which is given to one who has lived parivāsa for a concealed offense. Pakkhamānattaṃ nāma: Pakkha mānatta is that which is given to nuns for half a month for either a concealed or un-concealed offense. Samodhānamānattaṃ nāma: Combined mānatta is that which is given by combining (offenses) together. Among these, this should be understood as "un-concealed mānatta" because of the statement "six nights of mānatta for an un-concealed offense." If he has committed one offense, it should be given in the manner stated here. If he has committed two or three or more offenses, just as "one offense" is stated, so "two offenses, three offenses" should be stated. But for more than that, even if there are a hundred or a thousand, "several" should be stated. Even if they are of different kinds, they should be combined and given together; we will describe the method of giving them in the parivāsa account.
Evaṃ āpattivasena kammavācaṃ katvā dinne mānatte ‘‘evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti kammavācāpariyosāne māḷakasīmāyameva ‘‘mānattaṃ samādiyāmi, vattaṃ samādiyāmī’’ti vuttanayena vattaṃ samādātabbaṃ. Vattaṃ samādiyitvā tattheva saṅghassa ārocetabbaṃ, ārocentena ca evaṃ ārocetabbaṃ –
Having made the formal announcement of the act according to the offenses in this way, at the conclusion of the formal announcement, while still within the boundary of the enclosure, the rule should be undertaken in the manner stated, saying, "I undertake mānatta, I undertake the rule." Having undertaken the rule, it should be announced to the Saṅgha right there. And in announcing it, it should be announced thus:
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ sañcetanikaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ appaṭicchannaṃ, sohaṃ saṅghaṃ ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā appaṭicchannāya chārattaṃ mānattaṃ yāciṃ, tassa me saṅgho ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā appaṭicchannāya chārattaṃ mānattaṃ adāsi. Sohaṃ mānattaṃ carāmi, vedayāmahaṃ, bhante ‘vedayatī’ti maṃ saṅgho dhāretū’’ti.
"Bhante, I committed an intentional offense of semen emission that was un-concealed, so I requested six nights of mānatta from the Saṅgha for that one intentional offense of semen emission that was un-concealed, and the Saṅgha gave me six nights of mānatta for that one intentional offense of semen emission that was un-concealed. I am practicing mānatta. I inform you, bhante, may the Saṅgha remember me as ‘one who is informing.’"
Imañca pana atthaṃ gahetvā yāya kāyaci bhāsāya ārocetuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Ārocetvā sace nikkhipitukāmo, vuttanayeneva saṅghamajjhe nikkhipitabbaṃ. Māḷakato bhikkhūsu nikkhantesu ekassapi santike nikkhipituṃ vaṭṭati. Māḷakato nikkhamitvā satiṃ paṭilabhantena sahagacchantassa santike nikkhipitabbaṃ. Sace sopi pakkanto, aññassa yassa māḷake nārocitaṃ, tassa ārocetvā nikkhipitabbaṃ. Ārocentena pana avasāne ‘‘vedayatīti maṃ āyasmā dhāretū’’ti vattabbaṃ. Dvinnaṃ ārocentena ‘‘āyasmantā dhārentū’’ti, tiṇṇaṃ ārocentena ‘‘āyasmanto dhārentū’’ti vattabbaṃ. Nikkhittakālato paṭṭhāya pakatattaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati.
And indeed, it is proper to announce this meaning in any language. Having announced it, if he wishes to relinquish the rule, it should be relinquished in the midst of the Saṅgha in the manner stated. When the bhikkhus have left the enclosure, it is proper to relinquish it in the presence of even one. Having left the enclosure, while regaining mindfulness, it should be relinquished in the presence of one who is going along. If that one has departed, it should be announced and relinquished to another to whom it has not been announced in the enclosure. But in announcing it, at the end, "May the venerable one remember me as ‘one who is informing’" should be said. When announcing it to two, "May the venerable ones remember" should be said; when announcing it to three, "May the venerable ones remember" should be said. From the time of relinquishment, he stands in the pakatatta state.
Sace appabhikkhuko vihāro hoti, sabhāgā bhikkhū vasanti, vattaṃ anikkhipitvā antovihāreyeva rattiyo gaṇetabbā. Atha na sakkā sodhetuṃ, vuttanayeneva vattaṃ nikkhipitvā paccūsasamaye catūhi pañcahi vā bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ parikkhittassa vihārassa parikkhepato, aparikkhittassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānato dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvā mahāmaggato okkamma gumbena vā vatiyā vā paṭicchannaṭṭhāne nisīditabbaṃ. Antoaruṇeyeva vuttanayena vattaṃ samādiyitvā ārocetabbaṃ. Sace añño koci bhikkhu kenacideva karaṇīyena taṃ ṭhānaṃ āgacchati, sace esa taṃ passati, saddaṃ vāssa suṇāti, ārocetabbaṃ. Anārocentassa ratticchedo ceva vattabhedo ca.
If the monastery has few bhikkhus, and those of the same category dwell there, the nights should be counted within the monastery without relinquishing the rule. But if it is not possible to purify, having relinquished the rule in the manner stated, at dawn, with four or five bhikkhus, one should sit outside the perimeter of the enclosed monastery, or from a place suitable for a perimeter if it is unenclosed, having passed beyond two leḍḍupāta (distances a clod of earth can be thrown), in a hidden place concealed by bushes or a fence. At the break of dawn itself, the rule should be undertaken and announced in the manner stated. If any bhikkhu comes to that place for some reason, if he sees him or hears his voice, he should be informed. For one who does not inform, there is both a break of the night and a violation of the rule.
Atha dvādasahatthaṃ upacāraṃ okkamitvā ajānantasseva gacchati, ratticchedo hoti eva, vattabhedo pana natthi. Ārocitakālato paṭṭhāya ca ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā sesehi sati karaṇīye gantumpi vaṭṭati. Aruṇe uṭṭhite tassa bhikkhussa santike vattaṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ. Sace sopi kenaci kammena purearuṇeyeva gacchati, aññaṃ vihārato nikkhantaṃ vā āgantukaṃ vā yaṃ paṭhamaṃ passati, tassa santike ārocetvā vattaṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ. Ayañca yasmā gaṇassa ārocetvā bhikkhūnañca atthibhāvaṃ sallakkhetvāva vasi, tenassa ūne gaṇe caraṇadoso vā vippavāso vā na hoti. Sace na kañci passati, vihāraṃ gantvā attanā saddhiṃ gatabhikkhūsu ekassa santike nikkhipitabbanti mahāsumatthero āha. Mahāpadumatthero pana ‘‘yaṃ paṭhamaṃ passati, tassa ārocetvā nikkhipitabbaṃ; ayaṃ nikkhittavattassa parihāro’’ti āha.
But if, having gone beyond the twelve-cubit limit of personal space, he goes without knowing, there is indeed a break of the night, but there is no violation of the rule. And from the time of informing, it is proper for the rest to go if there is a need, except for one bhikkhu who is kept behind. When dawn rises, the rule should be relinquished in the presence of that bhikkhu. If that one also goes on some business even before dawn, the rule should be announced and relinquished to the first one who is seen coming out of the monastery or arriving. And since he has dwelt having announced it to the quorum and having considered the presence of bhikkhus, there is no fault of wandering with an incomplete quorum or of living separately for him. If he does not see anyone, he should go to the monastery and relinquish it in the presence of one of the bhikkhus who went with him, said the Elder Mahāsumata. But the Elder Mahāpaduma said, "It should be announced and relinquished to the first one who is seen; this is a safeguard for one who has relinquished the rule."
Evaṃ chārattaṃ mānattaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ caritvā yattha siyā vīsatigaṇo bhikkhusaṅgho, tattha so bhikkhu abbhetabbo. Abbhentehi ca paṭhamaṃ abbhānāraho kātabbo. Ayañhi nikkhittavattattā pakatattaṭṭhāne ṭhito, pakatattassa ca abbhānaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, tasmā vattaṃ samādāpetabbo. Vatte samādinne abbhānāraho hoti. Tenāpi vattaṃ samādiyitvā ārocetvā abbhānaṃ yācitabbaṃ. Anikkhittavattassa puna vattasamādānakiccaṃ natthi. So hi chārattātikkameneva abbhānāraho hoti, tasmā so abbhetabbo. Tatra yvāyaṃ ‘‘evañca pana, bhikkhave, abbhetabbo’’ti pāḷiyaṃyeva abbhānavidhi vutto, ayañca ekāpattivasena vutto. Sace pana dve tisso sambahulā vā ekavatthukā vā nānāvatthukā vā āpattiyo honti, tāsaṃ vasena kammavācā kātabbā. Evaṃ appaṭicchannamānattaṃ dātabbaṃ. Paṭicchannamānattaṃ pana yasmā paṭicchannāya āpattiyā parivutthaparivāsassa dātabbaṃ hoti, tasmā naṃ parivāsakathāyaṃyeva kathayissāma.
Having practiced the six nights of mānatta without interruption in this way, in a bhikkhu saṅgha where there is a quorum of twenty, that bhikkhu should be reinstated. And of those who are reinstating, one who is not deserving of reinstatement should be made first. Since he is standing in the pakatatta state because he has relinquished the rule, and it is not proper to reinstate one in the pakatatta state, he should be made to undertake the rule. When the rule has been undertaken, he is one who is deserving of reinstatement. He too, having undertaken the rule and announced it, should request reinstatement. There is no further need to undertake the rule for one who has not relinquished the rule. Since he becomes deserving of reinstatement merely by the passing of the six nights, he should be reinstated. There, the method of reinstatement is stated in the Pāḷi itself, "Thus, bhikkhus, he should be reinstated," and this is stated in terms of one offense. But if there are two, three, or several offenses, either of the same kind or of different kinds, the formal announcement should be made in terms of those. Thus, un-concealed mānatta should be given. But since concealed mānatta must be given to one who has lived parivāsa for a concealed offense, we will describe it in the parivāsa account itself.
Parivāsakathā
The Parivāsa Account
102.‘‘Tena hi, bhikkhave, saṅgho udāyissa bhikkhuno ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā ekāhapaṭicchannāya ekāhaparivāsaṃ detū’’tiādinā nayena pāḷiyaṃ anekehi ākārehi parivāso ca mānattañca vuttaṃ. Tassa yasmā āgatāgataṭṭhāne vinicchayo vuccamāno pāḷi viya ativitthāraṃ āpajjati, na ca sakkā hoti sukhena pariggahetuṃ, tasmā naṃ samodhānetvā idheva dassayissāma.
- "Therefore, monks, let the Saṅgha grant to the monk Udāyi one-day parivāsa for one intentionally emitted semen offense that was concealed for one day," etc. In the Pāḷi, parivāsa and mānatta are described in many ways. Since, when explaining the rulings as they come up, it would become as extensive as the Pāḷi and difficult to grasp easily, we will condense and present it here.
Ayañhi idha adhippeto parivāso nāma – paṭicchannaparivāso, suddhantaparivāso, samodhānaparivāsoti tividho hoti. Tattha paṭicchannaparivāso tāva yathāpaṭicchannāya āpattiyā dātabbo. Kassaci hi ekāhapaṭicchannā āpatti hoti yathā ayaṃ udāyittherassa, kassaci dvīhādipaṭicchannā yathā parato āgatā udāyittherasseva, kassaci ekā āpatti hoti yathā ayaṃ, kassaci dve tisso tatuttari vā yathā parato āgatā, tasmā paṭicchannaparivāsaṃ dentena paṭhamaṃ tāva paṭicchannabhāvo jānitabbo.
Here, the intended parivāsa is threefold: paṭicchannaparivāsa (concealment parivāsa), suddhantaparivāsa (pure end parivāsa), and samodhānaparivāsa (combined parivāsa). Among these, paṭicchannaparivāsa should be given according to the offense that was concealed. Someone might have an offense concealed for one day, like the venerable Udāyi; someone might have it concealed for two or more days, as in the case of the venerable Udāyi who came later; someone might have one offense, as in this case; someone might have two, three, or more offenses, as in the case of the one who came later. Therefore, one giving paṭicchannaparivāsa should first ascertain the fact of concealment.
Ayañhi āpatti nāma dasahākārehi paṭicchannā hoti. Tatthāyaṃ mātikā – āpatti ca hoti āpattisaññī ca, pakatatto ca hoti pakatattasaññī ca, anantarāyiko ca hoti anantarāyikasaññī ca, pahu ca hoti pahusaññī ca, chādetukāmo ca hoti chādeti cāti.
Indeed, an offense is concealed in ten ways. Here is the matrix: one commits an offense and is aware that it is an offense; is in good standing and is aware of being in good standing; has no obstacles and is aware of having no obstacles; is capable and is aware of being capable; intends to conceal and does conceal.
āpatti ca hoti āpattisaññī cāti yaṃ āpanno, sā āpattiyeva hoti. Sopi ca tattha āpattisaññīyeva. Iti jānanto chādeti, channāva hoti. Atha panāyaṃ tattha anāpattisaññī, acchannā hoti, anāpatti pana āpattisaññāyapi anāpattisaññāyapi chādentenāpi acchāditāva hoti. Lahukaṃ vā garukāti garukaṃ vā lahukāti chādeti, alajjipakkhe tiṭṭhati, āpatti pana acchannā hoti. Garukaṃ lahukāti maññamāno deseti, neva desitā hoti, na channā. Garukaṃ garukāti ñatvā chādeti, channā hoti. Garukalahukabhāvaṃ na jānāti, āpattiṃ chādemīti chādeti, channāva hoti.
āpatti ca hoti āpattisaññī ca: Whatever one has offended is indeed an offense. And one is aware that it is an offense. Thus, knowing, one conceals, and it is concealed. But if one is unaware that it is an offense, it is not concealed. However, even if one conceals what is not an offense, thinking it is an offense or not an offense, it is still not concealed. Whether it is a light offense or a grave offense, one conceals, thinking a grave offense is a light offense or a light offense is a grave offense, one stands on the side of shamelessness, but the offense is not concealed. Thinking a grave offense is a light offense, one confesses, but it is neither confessed nor concealed. Knowing it is a grave offense and concealing it, it is concealed. Not knowing whether a grave offense is grave or light, one conceals thinking, "I am concealing an offense," and it is indeed concealed.
Pakatattoti tividhaṃ ukkhepanīyakammaṃ akato – so ce pakatattasaññī hutvā chādeti, channā hoti. Atha ‘‘mayhaṃ saṅghena kammaṃ kata’’nti apakatattasaññī hutvā chādeti, acchannā hoti. Apakatattena pakatattasaññinā vā apakatattasaññinā vā chāditāpi acchannāva hoti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
Pakatatto: Without having undergone any of the three types of ukkhepanīyakamma (suspension), if one is aware of being in good standing and conceals, it is concealed. But if one is aware of being not in good standing, thinking, "The Sangha has performed a kamma against me," and conceals, it is not concealed. Even if it is concealed by someone not in good standing who is aware or unaware of being in good standing, it is still not concealed. This was also said:
‘‘Āpajjati garukaṃ sāvasesaṃ,
"Having committed a grave, remaining offense,
Concealing it due to disrespect;
Not a bhikkhunī, nor touching a fault,
These are questions considered by the wise." (pari. 481);
Ayañhi pañho ukkhittakena kathito.
This question was posed regarding one who has been suspended.
Anantarāyikoti yassa dasasu antarāyesu ekopi natthi, so ce anantarāyikasaññī hutvā chādeti, channā hoti. Sacepi so bhīrukajātikatāya andhakāre amanussacaṇḍamigabhayena antarāyikasaññī hutvā chādeti, acchannāva hoti. Yassa hi pabbatavihāre vasantassa kandaraṃ vā nadiṃ vā atikkamitvā ārocetabbaṃ hoti, antarāmagge ca caṇḍavāḷaamanussādibhayaṃ atthi, magge ajagarā nipajjanti, nadī pūrā hoti, ekasmiṃ pana satiyeva antarāye antarāyikasaññī hutvā chādeti, acchannāva hoti. Antarāyikassa pana antarāyikasaññāya vā anantarāyikasaññāya vā chādayato acchannāva hoti.
Anantarāyiko: If one has none of the ten antarāyas (impediments), and is aware of having no impediments, and conceals, it is concealed. But if one is by nature timid and conceals, being aware of having impediments due to fear of darkness, non-humans, or fierce animals, it is not concealed. For one dwelling in a mountain monastery, having to cross a ravine or river to report it, and there is fear of fierce beasts or non-humans on the way, or snakes lying on the path, or the river is full, if one conceals, being aware of having an impediment when there is only one present, it is not concealed. However, when one with an impediment conceals, being aware or unaware of having an impediment, it is not concealed.
Pahūti yo sakkoti bhikkhuno santikaṃ gantuñceva ārocetuñca; so ce pahusaññī hutvā chādeti, channā hoti. Sacassa mukhe appamattako gaṇḍo vā hoti, hanukavāto vā vijjhati, danto vā rujjati, bhikkhā vā mandā laddhā hoti, tāvatakena pana neva vattuṃ na sakkoti na gantuṃ; apica kho na sakkomīti saññī hoti, ayaṃ pahu hutvā appahusaññī nāma. Iminā chāditāpi acchāditā. Appahunā pana vattuṃ vā gantuṃ vā asamatthena pahusaññinā vā appahusaññinā vā chāditā hotu, acchāditāva.
Pahū: One who is able to go to a monk and report it; if one is aware of being capable and conceals, it is concealed. But if one has a small boil on the mouth, or lockjaw afflicts, or a tooth is breaking, or little alms are obtained, and to that extent one is not able to speak or go; moreover, one is aware of not being able, this is one who, being capable, is aware of being incapable. What is concealed by this is also not concealed. However, whether it is concealed by one who is incapable of speaking or going, being aware or unaware of being capable, it is not concealed.
Chādetukāmo ca hoti chādeti cāti idaṃ uttānatthameva. Sace pana chādessāmīti dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā purebhatte vā pacchābhatte vā paṭhamayāmādīsu vā lajjidhammaṃ okkamitvā antoaruṇeyeva āroceti, ayaṃ chādetukāmo na chādeti nāma.
Chādetukāmo ca hoti chādeti ca: This meaning is straightforward. But if, intending to conceal, one postpones the matter, and having transgressed the quality of shame either before or after the meal, or in the first watch of the night, reports it only at dawn, this is one who intends to conceal but does not conceal.
Yassa pana abhikkhuke ṭhāne vasantassa āpattiṃ āpajjitvā sabhāgassa bhikkhuno āgamanaṃ āgamentassa sabhāgasantikaṃ vā gacchantassa addhamāsopi māsopi atikkamati, ayaṃ na chādetukāmo chādeti nāma, ayampi acchannāva hoti.
For one dwelling in a place without a fellow bhikkhu, and, having committed an offense, half a month or a month passes while waiting for the arrival of a fellow bhikkhu or going to where a fellow bhikkhu is, this is one who does not intend to conceal but conceals; this too is not concealed.
Yo pana āpannamattova aggiṃ akkantapuriso viya sahasā apakkamitvā sabhāgaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā āvi karoti, ayaṃ na chādetukāmova na chādeti nāma. Sace pana sabhāgaṃ disvāpi ‘‘ayaṃ me upajjhāyo vā ācariyo vā’’ti lajjāya nāroceti, channāva hoti āpatti. Upajjhāyādibhāvo hi idha appamāṇaṃ averisabhāgamattameva pamāṇaṃ, tasmā averisabhāgassa santike ārocetabbā.
But one who, as soon as having committed the offense, quickly departs like someone whose clothes are on fire and goes to a place with fellow bhikkhus and reveals it, this is one who neither intends to conceal nor conceals. But if, seeing a fellow bhikkhu, one does not report it out of shame, thinking, "This is my preceptor or teacher," the offense is concealed. For here, the state of preceptor or teacher is not the measure, but only a fellow bhikkhu who is not an enemy is the measure; therefore, it should be reported in the presence of a fellow bhikkhu who is not an enemy.
Yo pana visabhāgo hoti sutvā pakāsetukāmo, evarūpassa upajjhāyassāpi santike na ārocetabbā. Tattha purebhattaṃ vā āpattiṃ āpanno hotu pacchābhattaṃ vā, divā vā rattiṃ vā yāva aruṇaṃ na uggacchati tāva ārocetabbaṃ. Uddhaste aruṇe paṭicchannā hoti, paṭicchādanapaccayā ca dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Sabhāgasaṅghādisesaṃ āpannassa pana santike āvi kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace āvi karoti, āpatti āvikatā hoti, dukkaṭā pana na muccati, tasmā suddhassa santike āvikātabbā. Āvikaronto ca ‘‘tuyhaṃ santike ekaṃ āpattiṃ āvikaromī’’ti vā ‘‘ācikkhāmī’’ti vā ‘‘ārocemī’’ti vā ‘‘mama ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpannabhāvaṃ jānāhī’’ti vā vadatu, ‘‘ekaṃ garukāpattiṃ āvikaromī’’tiādinā vā nayena vadatu, sabbehipi ākārehi appaṭicchannāva hotīti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Sace pana lahukāpattiṃ āvikaromītiādinā nayena vadati, paṭicchannā hoti, vatthuṃ āroceti, āpattiṃ āroceti, ubhayaṃ āroceti, tividhenāpi ārocitāva hoti. Iti imāni dasa kāraṇāni upalakkhetvā paṭicchannaparivāsaṃ dentena paṭhamameva paṭicchannabhāvo jānitabbo.
But one who is not a fellow and, hearing, intends to reveal it, it should not be reported even in the presence of such a preceptor. There, whether one commits an offense before or after the meal, day or night, it should be reported before dawn breaks. Once dawn has broken, it is concealed, and due to the condition of concealment, one incurs a dukkata. But for one who has committed a Saṅghādisesa offense, it is not proper to reveal it in the presence of the Saṅgha. If one reveals it, the offense is revealed, but one is not freed from the dukkata; therefore, it should be revealed in the presence of a pure one. And while revealing, one should say, "I reveal an offense to you," or "I declare," or "I report," or "Know that I have committed an offense," or in the manner of "I reveal a grave offense," etc. In all these ways, it is not concealed, as stated in the Kurundī. But if one speaks in the manner of "I reveal a light offense," etc., it is concealed. One reports the object, one reports the offense, one reports both; in all three ways, it is reported. Thus, having discerned these ten reasons, one giving paṭicchannaparivāsa should first ascertain the fact of concealment.
Tato paṭicchannadivase ca āpattiyo ca sallakkhetvā sace ekāhapaṭicchannā hoti – ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ sañcetanikaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ ekāhapaṭicchanna’’nti evaṃ yācāpetvā idha vuttanayeneva kammavācaṃ vatvā parivāso dātabbo. Atha dvīhatīhādipaṭicchannā hoti, dvīhapaṭicchannaṃ tīhapaṭicchannaṃ catūhapaṭicchannaṃ pañcāhapaṭicchannaṃ chāhapaṭicchannaṃ sattāhapaṭicchannaṃ aṭṭhāhapaṭicchannaṃ navāhapaṭicchannaṃ dasāhapaṭicchannaṃ ekādasāhapaṭicchannaṃ dvādasāhapaacchannaṃ terasāhapaṭicchannaṃ cuddasāhapaṭicchannanti evaṃ yāva cuddasa divasāni divasavasena yojanā kātabbā. Pañcadasa divasāni paṭicchannāya pakkhapaṭicchannanti vatvā yojanā kātabbā. Tato yāva ekūnatiṃsatimo divaso, tāva atirekapakkhapaṭicchannanti.
Then, having considered the days of concealment and the offenses, if it was concealed for one day - "I, venerable, committed an offense, intentional emission of semen, concealed for one day" - having had him request thus, the kammavācā should be spoken and the parivāsa given in the manner stated here. But if it was concealed for two, three, or more days, the connection should be made according to the number of days - "concealed for two days, concealed for three days, concealed for four days, concealed for five days, concealed for six days, concealed for seven days, concealed for eight days, concealed for nine days, concealed for ten days, concealed for eleven days, concealed for twelve days, concealed for thirteen days, concealed for fourteen days" - thus, connection should be made according to the days up to fourteen days. For concealment of fifteen days, it should be stated as "concealed for half a month" and connection should be made. Then up to the twenty-ninth day, it is "concealed for more than half a month."
Tato māsapaṭicchannaṃ atirekamāsapaṭicchannaṃ dvemāsapaṭicchannaṃ atirekadvemāsapaṭicchannaṃ temāsapaṭicchannaṃ atirekatemāsapaṭicchannaṃ catumāsapaṭicchannaṃ atirekacatumāsapaṭicchannaṃ pañcamāsapaṭicchannaṃ atirekapañcamāsapaṭicchannaṃ chamāsapaṭicchannaṃ atirekachamāsapaṭicchannaṃ sattamāsapaṭicchannaṃ atirekasattamāsapaṭicchannaṃ aṭṭhamāsapaṭicchannaṃ atirekaaṭṭhamāsapaṭicchannaṃ navamāsapaṭicchannaṃ atirekanavamāsapaṭicchannaṃ dasamāsapaṭicchannaṃ atirekadasamāsapaṭicchannaṃ ekādasamāsapaṭicchannaṃ atirekaekādasamāsapaṭicchannanti evaṃ yojanā kātabbā. Saṃvacchare paripuṇṇe ekasaṃvaccharapaṭicchannanti. Tato paraṃ atirekaekasaṃvacchara… dvesaṃvacchara… atirekadvesaṃvacchara… tisaṃvacchara… atiraketisaṃvacchara… catusaṃvacchara… atirekacatusaṃvacchara… pañcasaṃvacchara… atirekapañcasaṃvaccharapaṭicchannanti evaṃ yāva saṭṭhisaṃvacchara… atirekasaṭṭhisaṃvaccharapaṭicchannanti vā tato vā bhiyyopi vatvā yojanā kātabbā.
Then "concealed for a month, concealed for more than a month, concealed for two months, concealed for more than two months, concealed for three months, concealed for more than three months, concealed for four months, concealed for more than four months, concealed for five months, concealed for more than five months, concealed for six months, concealed for more than six months, concealed for seven months, concealed for more than seven months, concealed for eight months, concealed for more than eight months, concealed for nine months, concealed for more than nine months, concealed for ten months, concealed for more than ten months, concealed for eleven months, concealed for more than eleven months" - thus, the connection should be made. When a year is complete, "concealed for one year." Then, beyond that, "concealed for more than one year... two years... more than two years... three years... more than three years... four years... more than four years... five years... more than five years" - thus, the connection should be made by stating up to "sixty years... more than sixty years" or even more than that.
Sace pana dve tisso tatuttari vā āpattiyo honti, yathā idha ekaṃ āpattinti vuttaṃ; evaṃ dve āpattiyo tisso āpattiyoti vattabbaṃ. Tato paraṃ pana sataṃ vā hotu sahassaṃ vā, sambahulāti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Nānāvatthukāsupi ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ – ekaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ, ekaṃ kāyasaṃsaggaṃ, ekaṃ duṭṭhullavācaṃ, ekaṃ attakāmaṃ, ekaṃ sañcarittaṃ, ekāhapaṭicchannāyo’’ti evaṃ gaṇanavasena vā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ nānāvatthukāyo ekāhapaṭicchannāyo’’ti evaṃ vatthukittanavasena vā, ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ ekāhapaṭicchannāyo’’ti evaṃ nāmamattavasena vā yojanā kātabbā.
But if there are two, three, or more offenses, just as "one offense" is stated here, it should be stated as "two offenses, three offenses." Beyond that, whether there are a hundred or a thousand, it is proper to say "many." Even in cases of various objects, "I, venerable, committed many Saṅghādisesa offenses - one emission of semen, one bodily contact, one coarse speech, one urging for self, one acting as go-between, concealed for one day" - thus, connection should be made by way of enumeration, or "I, venerable, committed many Saṅghādisesa offenses of various objects, concealed for one day" - thus, by way of stating the object, or "I, venerable, committed many Saṅghādisesa offenses, concealed for one day" - thus, connection should be made by way of name alone.
Tattha nāmaṃ duvidhaṃ – sajātisādhāraṇañca sabbasādhāraṇañca. Tattha saṅghādisesoti sajātisādhāraṇaṃ, āpattīti sabbasādhāraṇaṃ; tasmā ‘‘sambahulā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ ekāhapaṭicchannāyo’’ti evaṃ sabbasādhāraṇanāmavasenapi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Idañhi sabbampi parivāsādikaṃ vinayakammaṃ vatthuvasena gottavasena nāmavasena āpattivasena ca kātuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva.
There, name is twofold - common to the same kind and common to all. Among these, "Saṅghādisesa" is common to the same kind, "offense" is common to all; therefore, it is proper to state even by way of a name common to all, such as "I committed many offenses, concealed for one day." Indeed, all this vinaya-kamma, beginning with parivāsa, should be done by way of the object, by way of the class, by way of the name, and by way of the offense.
Tattha ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhī’’ti vatthu ceva gottañca. ‘‘Saṅghādiseso’’ti nāmañceva āpatti ca. ‘‘Kāyasaṃsaggo’’ti vatthu ceva gottañca. ‘‘Saṅghādiseso’’ti nāmañceva āpatti ca, tattha ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ kāyasaṃsagga’’ntiādinā vacanenāpi ‘‘nānāvatthukāyo’’ti vacanenāpi vatthu ceva gottañca gahitaṃ hoti. ‘‘Saṅghādiseso’’ti vacanenāpi ‘‘āpattiyo’’ti vacanenāpi nāmañceva āpatti ca gahitā hoti. Idha pana ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ sañcetanikaṃ ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhi’’nti nāmampi vatthugottānipi gahitāneva. Yathā ca idha ‘‘ayaṃ udāyi bhikkhū’’ti vuttaṃ; evaṃ yo yo āpanno hoti, tassa tassa nāmaṃ gahetvā ‘‘ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhū’’ti kammavācā kātabbā.
There, "emission of semen" is both the object and the class. "Saṅghādisesa" is both the name and the offense. "Bodily contact" is both the object and the class. "Saṅghādisesa" is both the name and the offense. There, by the statement "emission of semen, bodily contact," etc., or by the statement "of various objects," both the object and the class are taken. By the statement "Saṅghādisesa" or by the statement "offenses," both the name and the offense are taken. Here, in "I committed one offense, intentional emission of semen," both the name and the object and class are indeed taken. And just as it is stated here, "this monk Udāyi," so too, having taken the name of whoever has offended, the kammavācā should be done as "this monk named so-and-so."
Kammavācāpariyosāne ca tena bhikkhunā māḷakasīmāyameva ‘‘parivāsaṃ samādiyāmi, vattaṃ samādiyāmī’’ti vuttanayeneva vattaṃ samādātabbaṃ. Samādiyitvā tattheva saṅghassa ārocetabbaṃ, ārocentena ca evaṃ ārocetabbaṃ –
At the end of the kammavācā, that monk should, within the māḷaka boundary, undertake the vow in the manner stated, "I undertake parivāsa, I undertake the observance." Having undertaken it, it should be announced to the Saṅgha right there, and while announcing, it should be announced thus:
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ sañcetanikaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ ekāhapaṭicchannaṃ, sohaṃ saṅghaṃ ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā ekāhapaṭicchannāya ekāhaparivāsaṃ yāciṃ, tassa me saṅgho ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā ekāhapaṭicchannāya ekāhaparivāsaṃ adāsi, sohaṃ parivasāmi – ‘vedayāmahaṃ, bhante, vedayatī’ti maṃ saṅgho dhāretū’’ti.
"I, venerable, committed one offense, intentional emission of semen, concealed for one day, therefore I requested from the Saṅgha one-day parivāsa for one intentionally emitted semen offense that was concealed for one day; the Saṅgha granted me one-day parivāsa for one intentionally emitted semen offense that was concealed for one day; I am undergoing parivāsa - 'I inform, venerable, the Saṅgha should remember me as informing.'"
Imañca panatthaṃ gahetvā yāya kāyaci bhāsāya ārocetuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Ārocetvā sace nikkhipitukāmo, vuttanayeneva saṅghamajjhe nikkhipitabbaṃ. Māḷakato bhikkhūsu nikkhantesu ekassāpi santike nikkhipituṃ vaṭṭati. Māḷakato nikkhamitvā satiṃ paṭilabhantena sahagacchantassa santike nikkhipitabbaṃ. Sace sopi pakkanto, aññassa yassa māḷake nārocitaṃ, tassa ārocetvā nikkhipitabbaṃ. Ārocentena ca avasāne ‘‘vedayatīti maṃ āyasmā dhāretū’’ti vattabbaṃ. Dvinnaṃ ārocentena ‘‘āyasmantā dhārentū’’ti, tiṇṇaṃ ārocentena ‘‘āyasmanto dhārentū’’ti vattabbaṃ. Nikkhittakālato paṭṭhāya pakatattaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati.
And it is indeed proper to announce this meaning in whatever language. Having announced, if one wishes to entrust it, it should be entrusted in the midst of the Saṅgha in the manner stated. When the monks have left the māḷaka, it is proper to entrust it in the presence of even one. Having left the māḷaka, if one regains mindfulness, it should be entrusted in the presence of one going along. If that one has also departed, it should be announced and entrusted to another who was not announced to in the māḷaka. And while announcing, one should say at the end, "May the venerable remember me as informing." When announcing to two, one should say, "May the venerables remember," when announcing to three, one should say, "May the venerables remember." From the time of entrusting, one stands in the place of one in good standing.
Sace appabhikkhuko vihāro hoti, sabhāgā bhikkhū vasanti, vattaṃ anikkhipitvā vihāreyeva rattipariggaho kātabbo. Atha na sakkā sodhetuṃ, vuttanayeneva vattaṃ nikkhipitvā paccūsasamaye ekena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ mānattavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva upacārasīmaṃ atikkamitvā mahāmaggā okkamma paṭicchanne ṭhāne nisīditvā antoaruṇeyeva vuttanayeneva vattaṃ samādiyitvā tassa bhikkhuno parivāso ārocetabbo. Ārocentena sace navakataro hoti, ‘‘āvuso’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace vuḍḍhataro, ‘‘bhante’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace añño koci bhikkhu kenacideva karaṇīyena taṃ ṭhānaṃ āgacchati, sace esa taṃ passati, saddaṃ vāssa suṇāti, ārocetabbaṃ; anārocentassa ratticchedo ceva vattabhedo ca. Atha dvādasahatthaṃ upacāraṃ okkamitvā ajānantasseva gacchati, ratticchedoyeva hoti, vattabhedo pana natthi.
If the monastery has few monks, and monks of the same group reside there, the vatta should be taken up within the monastery itself without setting it aside. But if it is not possible to purify it, having set aside the vatta in the manner described above, at dawn, together with one monk, having crossed the boundary of the upacāra-sīmā in the manner described in the section on mānatta, having left the main road, and sitting in a secluded place, just before sunrise, having undertaken the vatta in the manner described above, the parivāsa of that monk should be announced. When announcing, if he is newer, "Āvuso" should be said. If he is older, "Bhante" should be said. If any other monk comes to that place for some reason, if he sees him or hears his voice, it should be announced; for one who does not announce, there is both an interruption of the night and a breaking of the vatta. But if, having crossed the twelve-cubit upacāra, he goes without him knowing, there is only an interruption of the night, but there is no breaking of the vatta.
Uggate aruṇe vattaṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ. Sace so bhikkhu kenacideva karaṇīyena pakkanto hoti, yaṃ aññaṃ sabbapaṭhamaṃ passati, tassa ārocetvā nikkhipitabbaṃ. Sace pana kañci na passati, vihāraṃ gantvā attanā saddhiṃ gatabhikkhussa santike nikkhipitabbanti mahāsumatthero āha. Mahāpadumatthero pana ‘‘yaṃ paṭhamaṃ passati, tassa ārocetvā nikkhipitabbaṃ, ayaṃ nikkhittavattassa parihāro’’ti āha.
When the sun has risen, the vatta should be set aside. If that monk has departed for some reason, having announced to whomever he sees first, it should be set aside. But if he sees no one, having gone to the monastery, it should be set aside near the monk who went with him, says Mahāsumatthera. But Mahāpadumatthera says, "Having announced to whomever he sees first, it should be set aside; this is the manner of taking care of the nikkhittavatta."
Evaṃ yattakāni divasāni āpatti paṭicchannā hoti, tattakāni tato adhikatarāni vā kukkuccavinodanatthāya parivasitvā saṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vattaṃ samādiyitvā mānattaṃ yācitabbaṃ. Ayañhi vatte samādinne eva mānattāraho hoti nikkhittavattena parivutthattā. Anikkhittavattassa pana puna samādānakiccaṃ natthi, so hi paṭicchannadivasātikkameneva mānattāraho hoti, tasmā tassa mānattaṃ dātabbameva. Idaṃ paṭicchannamānattaṃ nāma. Taṃ dentena sace ekāpatti hoti, pāḷiyaṃ vuttanayeneva dātabbaṃ. Atha dve vā tisso vā ‘‘sohaṃ parivutthaparivāso saṅghaṃ dvinnaṃ āpattīnaṃ tissannaṃ āpattīnaṃ ekāhapaṭicchannānaṃ chārattaṃ mānattaṃ yācāmī’’ti parivāse vuttanayeneva āpattiyo ca divase ca sallakkhetvā yojanā kātabbā.
Thus, for as many days as the offense is concealed, having lived in parivāsa for that many or more days for the purpose of dispelling anxiety (kukkucca), having approached the Saṅgha, having undertaken the vatta, mānatta should be requested. For indeed, he is worthy of mānatta only when the vatta has been undertaken, due to having lived in parivāsa with the vatta set aside. But for one whose vatta has not been set aside, there is no need for a renewed undertaking; he is worthy of mānatta merely by the passing of the days of concealment, therefore, mānatta should be given to him. This is called paṭicchannamānatta. When giving it, if there is one offense, it should be given in the manner described in the Pāḷi. But if there are two or three, having considered the offenses and the days in the manner described in the parivāsa, the connection should be made, saying, "Sohaṃ parivutthaparivāso saṅghaṃ dvinnaṃ āpattīnaṃ tissannaṃ āpattīnaṃ ekāhapaṭicchannānaṃ chārattaṃ mānattaṃ yācāmī."
Appaṭicchannāpattiṃ paṭicchannāpattiyā samodhānetvāpi dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Kathaṃ? Paṭicchannāya ekāhaparivāsaṃ vasitvā –
It is also permissible to give mānatta by combining an appaṭicchannāpatti with a paṭicchannāpatti. How? Having lived one day of parivāsa for the paṭicchannāpatti –
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ sañcetanikaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ ekāhapaṭicchannaṃ, sohaṃ saṅghaṃ ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā ekāhapaṭicchannāya ekāhaparivāsaṃ yāciṃ, tassa me saṅgho ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā ekāhapaṭicchannāya ekāhaparivāsaṃ adāsi, sohaṃ parivutthaparivāso. Ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ sañcetanikaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ appaṭicchannaṃ. Sohaṃ, bhante, saṅghaṃ tāsaṃ āpattīnaṃ sañcetanikānaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhīnaṃ paṭicchannāya ca appaṭicchannāya ca chārattaṃ mānattaṃ yācāmī’’ti.
"Ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ sañcetanikaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ ekāhapaṭicchannaṃ, sohaṃ saṅghaṃ ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā ekāhapaṭicchannāya ekāhaparivāsaṃ yāciṃ, tassa me saṅgho ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā ekāhapaṭicchannāya ekāhaparivāsaṃ adāsi, sohaṃ parivutthaparivāso. Ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ sañcetanikaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ appaṭicchannaṃ. Sohaṃ, bhante, saṅghaṃ tāsaṃ āpattīnaṃ sañcetanikānaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhīnaṃ paṭicchannāya ca appaṭicchannāya ca chārattaṃ mānattaṃ yācāmī."
Athassa tadanurūpaṃ kammavācaṃ katvā mānattaṃ dātabbaṃ. Sace paṭicchannā dve, appaṭicchannā ekā ‘‘paṭicchannānañca appaṭicchannāya cā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Atha paṭicchannā ekā, appaṭicchannā dve, ‘‘paṭicchannāya ca appaṭicchannānañcā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace paṭicchannāpi dve, appaṭicchannāpi dve, ‘‘paṭicchannānañca appaṭicchannānañcā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sabbattha anurūpaṃ kammavācaṃ katvā mānattaṃ dātabbaṃ. Ciṇṇamānattassa ca tadanurūpameva kammavācaṃ katvā abbhānaṃ kātabbaṃ. Idha pana ekāpattivasena vuttaṃ. Iti yaṃ paṭicchannāya āpattiyā parivāsāvasāne mānattaṃ diyyati, idaṃ paṭicchannamānattaṃ nāma. Evamettha ekeneva yojanāmukhena paṭicchannaparivāso ca paṭicchannamānattañca vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Pakkhamānattaṃ samodhānamānattañca avasesaparivāsakathāvasāne kathayissāma.
Then, having performed a kammavāca corresponding to that, mānatta should be given. If two are paṭicchannā and one is appaṭicchannā, "paṭicchannānañca appaṭicchannāya ca" should be said. Then, if one is paṭicchannā and two are appaṭicchannā, "paṭicchannāya ca appaṭicchannānañca" should be said. If two are paṭicchannā and two are appaṭicchannā, "paṭicchannānañca appaṭicchannānañca" should be said. In all cases, having performed a corresponding kammavāca, mānatta should be given. And for one who has lived mānatta, abbhāna should be performed by reciting a kammavāca corresponding to that. Here, however, it is stated in terms of one offense. Thus, that which is given as mānatta at the end of parivāsa for a concealed offense, this is called paṭicchannamānatta. Thus, here it should be understood that both paṭicchannaparivāsa and paṭicchannamānatta are stated with a single connection. Pakkhamānatta and samodhānamānatta will be discussed at the end of the remaining discussion of parivāsa.
‘‘suddhantaparivāso’’nāma parato adhammikamānattacārāvasāne ‘‘tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpanno hoti, āpattipariyantaṃ na jānāti, rattipariyantaṃ na jānātī’’ti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ anuññātaparivāso. So duvidho – cūḷasuddhanto, mahāsuddhantoti. Duvidhopi cesa rattiparicchedaṃ sakalaṃ vā ekaccaṃ vā ajānantassa ca assarantassa ca tattha vematikassa ca dātabbo. Āpattipariyantaṃ pana ettakā ahaṃ āpattiyo āpannoti jānātu vā mā vā, akāraṇametaṃ.
"Suddhantaparivāsa" means the parivāsa permitted in this case: "tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpanno hoti, āpattipariyantaṃ na jānāti, rattipariyantaṃ na jānātī" at the end of living unrighteously during the period of mānatta. That is twofold - cūḷasuddhanto, mahāsuddhanto. And both of these should be given to one who does not know the complete or partial limit of the night, to one who does not remember, and to one who is doubtful about it. But whether he knows the limit of the offenses, that "I have committed so many offenses," or not, this is not a reason.
‘‘cūḷasuddhanto’’ti vuccati.
"Cūḷasuddhanto" is called.
Taṃ gahetvā parivasantena yattakaṃ kālaṃ attano suddhiṃ jānāti, tattakaṃ apanetvā avasesaṃ māsaṃ vā dvemāsaṃ vā parivasitabbaṃ. Sace māsamattaṃ asuddhomhīti sallakkhetvā aggahesi parivasanto ca puna aññaṃ māsaṃ sarati, tampi māsaṃ parivasitabbameva. Puna parivāsadānakiccaṃ natthi. Atha dvemāsaṃ asuddhomhīti sallakkhetvā aggahesi, parivasanto ca māsamattamevāhaṃ asuddhomhīti sanniṭṭhānaṃ karoti, māsameva parivasitabbaṃ. Puna parivāsadānakiccaṃ natthi. Ayañhi suddhantaparivāso nāma uddhampi ārohati, heṭṭhāpi orohati, idamassa lakkhaṇaṃ. Aññasmiṃ pana āpattivuṭṭhāne idaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ – yo appaṭicchannaṃ āpattiṃ paṭicchannāti vinayakammaṃ karoti, tassa āpatti vuṭṭhāti. Yo paṭicchannaṃ appaṭicchannāti vinayakammaṃ karoti, tassa na vuṭṭhāti. Acirapaṭicchannaṃ cirapaṭicchannāti karontassāpi vuṭṭhāti. Cirapaṭicchannaṃ acirapaṭicchannāti karontassa na vuṭṭhāti. Ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitvā sambahulāti karontassāpi vuṭṭhāti, ekaṃ vinā sambahulānaṃ abhāvato. Sambahulā pana āpajjitvā ekaṃ āpajjinti karontassa na vuṭṭhāti.
Having taken that, for as long as he knows his purification, having removed that much, the remaining month or two months should be lived in parivāsa. If, having considered "I am impure for about a month," he takes it, and while living in parivāsa, he remembers another month, that month should also be lived in parivāsa. There is no need for giving parivāsa again. Then, having considered "I am impure for two months" he takes it, and while living in parivāsa, he concludes "I am impure for only one month," only one month should be lived in parivāsa. There is no need for giving parivāsa again. For this suddhantaparivāsa goes up and down, this is its characteristic. In another arising of offenses, this is the characteristic - for one who performs a vinayakamma saying that an appaṭicchannaṃ āpatti is paṭicchannaṃ, the offense arises. For one who performs a vinayakamma saying that a paṭicchannaṃ is appaṭicchannaṃ, it does not arise. For one who does an acirapaṭicchannaṃ as cirapaṭicchannaṃ, it arises. For one who does a cirapaṭicchannaṃ as acirapaṭicchannaṃ, it does not arise. For one who, having committed one offense, does it as many, it arises, because without one, many do not exist. But for one who, having committed many offenses, does it as one offense, it does not arise.
‘‘mahāsuddhanto’’ti vuccati. Taṃ gahetvā gahitadivasato paṭṭhāya yāva upasampadadivaso, tāva rattiyo gaṇetvā parivasitabbaṃ. Ayaṃ uddhaṃ nārohati, heṭṭhā pana orohati. Tasmā sace parivasanto rattiparicchede sanniṭṭhānaṃ karoti, māso vā saṃvaccharo vā mayhaṃ āpannassāti māsaṃ vā saṃvaccharaṃ vā parivasitabbaṃ. Parivāsayācanadānalakkhaṇaṃ panettha parato pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Kammavācāpariyosāne vattasamādānamānattaabbhānāni vuttanayāneva. Ayaṃ suddhantaparivāso nāma.
"Mahāsuddhanto" is called. Having taken that, having counted the nights from the day it is taken until the day of upasampadā, that much should be lived in parivāsa. This does not go up, but it goes down. Therefore, if while living in parivāsa, he concludes about the limit of the night, "A month or a year has passed for me," a month or a year should be lived in parivāsa. Here, the characteristic of requesting and giving parivāsa should be understood in the manner that comes later in the Pāḷi. At the end of the kammavāca, the undertaking of vatta, mānatta, and abbhāna are in the manner already stated. This is suddhantaparivāsa.
‘‘Samodhānaparivāso’’nāma tividho hoti – odhānasamodhāno, agghasamodhāno, missakasamodhānoti. Tattha‘‘odhānasamodhāno’’nāma – antarāpattiṃ āpajjitvā paṭicchādentassa parivutthadivase odhunitvā makkhetvā purimāya āpattiyā mūladivasaparicchede pacchā āpannaṃ āpattiṃ samodahitvā dātabbaparivāso vuccati. So parato ‘‘tena hi bhikkhave saṅgho udāyiṃ bhikkhuṃ antarā ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā pañcāhapaṭicchannāya mūlāya paṭikassitvā purimāya āpattiyā samodhānaparivāsaṃ detū’’ti ito paṭṭhāya vitthārato pāḷiyaṃyeva āgato.
"Samodhānaparivāsa" is of three kinds – odhānasamodhāno, agghasamodhāno, missakasamodhānoti. Therein, "odhānasamodhāno" means – for one who, having committed an antarāpatti and concealing it, having wiped out and smeared over the days lived in parivāsa, and having combined the offense committed later with the root-day limit of the former offense, the parivāsa to be given is called. That comes later in detail in the Pāḷi itself, starting from "tena hi bhikkhave saṅgho udāyiṃ bhikkhuṃ antarā ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā pañcāhapaṭicchannāya mūlāya paṭikassitvā purimāya āpattiyā samodhānaparivāsaṃ detū."
Ayaṃ panettha vinicchayo – yo paṭicchannāya āpattiyā parivāsaṃ gahetvā parivasanto vā mānattāraho vā mānattaṃ caranto vā abbhānāraho vā aññaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitvā purimāya āpattiyā samā vā ūnatarā vā rattiyo paṭicchādeti, tassa mūlāyapaṭikassanena te parivutthadivase ca mānattaciṇṇadivase ca sabbe odhunitvā adivase katvā pacchā āpannāpattiṃ mūlāpattiyaṃ samodhāya parivāso dātabbo. Tena sace mūlāpatti pakkhapaṭicchannā, antarāpatti ūnakapakkhapaṭicchannā, puna pakkhameva parivāso parivasitabbo. Athāpi antarāpatti pakkhapaṭicchannāva pakkhameva parivasitabbaṃ. Etenupāyena yāva saṭṭhivassapaṭicchannā mūlāpatti, tāva vinicchayo veditabbo. Saṭṭhivassāni parivasitvā mānattāraho hutvāpi hi ekadivasaṃ antarāpattiṃ paṭicchādetvā punapi saṭṭhivassāni parivāsāraho hoti.
Herein, this is the decision – for one who, having taken parivāsa for a concealed offense, while living in parivāsa, or being worthy of mānatta, or living mānatta, or being worthy of abbhāna, commits another offense and conceals the nights equal to or less than the former offense, by reverting to the root, those days lived in parivāsa and the days of living mānatta should all be wiped out, making them non-days, and having combined the offense committed later with the root offense, parivāsa should be given. Therefore, if the root offense is concealed for a fortnight, and the intervening offense is concealed for less than a fortnight, parivāsa should be lived again for a fortnight. Even if the intervening offense is concealed for a fortnight, parivāsa should be lived for a fortnight. By this method, the decision should be known as long as the root offense is concealed for sixty years. For even having lived in parivāsa for sixty years and being worthy of mānatta, having concealed an intervening offense for one day, he is again worthy of parivāsa for sixty years.
Sace pana antarāpatti mūlāpattito atirekapaṭicchannā hoti, tattha ‘‘kiṃ kātabba’’nti vutte mahāsumatthero āha – ‘‘atekiccho ayaṃ puggalo, atekiccho nāma āvikārāpetvā vissajjetabbo’’ti. Mahāpadumatthero panāha – ‘‘kasmā atekiccho nāma, nanu ayaṃ samuccayakkhandhako nāma buddhānaṃ ṭhitakālasadiso, āpatti nāma paṭicchannā vā hotu appaṭicchannā vā samakaūnataraatirekapaṭicchannā vā vinayadharassa kammavācaṃ yojetuṃ samatthabhāvoyevettha pamāṇaṃ, tasmā yā atirekapaṭicchannā hoti, taṃ mūlāpattiṃ katvā tattha itaraṃ samodhāya parivāso dātabbo’’ti. Ayaṃ ‘‘odhānasamodhāno’’ nāma.
If, however, the intervening offense is concealed for more than the root offense, when it is said there "what should be done?", Mahāsumatthera says – "this person is atekiccho, atekiccho means having it revealed and discharged." But Mahāpadumatthera says – "why is he atekiccho? Is this not called samuccayakkhandhako, similar to the period of the Buddhas? Whether the offense is concealed or unconcealed, whether it is equally, less, or more concealed, the ability of the vinayadhara to connect the kammavāca is the measure here. Therefore, that which is concealed for more, having made that the root offense, the other should be combined there and parivāsa should be given." This is called "odhānasamodhāno."
‘‘Agghasamodhāno’’nāma sambahulāsu āpattīsu yā ekā vā dve vā tisso vā sambahulā vā āpattiyo sabbacirapaṭicchannāyo, tāsaṃ agghena samodhāya tāsaṃ rattiparicchedavasena avasesānaṃ ūnatarapaṭicchannānaṃ āpattīnaṃ parivāso diyyati. Ayaṃ vuccati agghasamodhāno. Sopi parato ‘‘tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpanno hoti, ekā āpatti ekāhapaṭicchannā ekā āpatti dvīhapaṭicchannā’’tiādinā nayena pāḷiyaṃ āgatoyeva.
"Agghasamodhāno" means – among many offenses, the parivāsa for the remaining less-concealed offenses is given by combining with the value of those offenses which are one, two, three, or many that are concealed for the longest time, according to the limit of those nights. This is called agghasamodhāno. That too comes in the Pāḷi itself in the manner beginning with "tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpanno hoti, ekā āpatti ekāhapaṭicchannā ekā āpatti dvīhapaṭicchannā" etc.
Yassa pana sataṃ āpattiyo dasāhapaṭicchannā, aparampi sataṃ āpattiyo dasāhapaṭicchannāti evaṃ dasakkhattuṃ katvā āpattisahassaṃ divasasatapaṭicchannaṃ hoti, tena kiṃ kātabbanti? Sabbaṃ samodahitvā dasa divase parivasitabbaṃ. Evaṃ ekeneva dasāhena divasasatampi parivasitameva hoti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
But what should be done by one who has a hundred offenses concealed for ten days, and another hundred offenses concealed for ten days, thus having done it ten times, a thousand offenses are concealed for a hundred days? Having combined everything, he should live in parivāsa for ten days. Thus, even a hundred days are lived in parivāsa with just one ten-day period. And this was said –
‘‘Dasasataṃ rattisataṃ, āpattiyo chādayitvāna;
"Dasasataṃ rattisataṃ, āpattiyo chādayitvāna;
Dasa rattiyo vasitvāna, mucceyya pārivāsiko" (pāri. 477);
Ayaṃ agghasamodhāno nāma.
This is called agghasamodhāno.
‘‘Missakasamodhāno’’nāma – yo nānāvatthukā āpattiyo ekato katvā diyyati. Tatrāyaṃ nayo –
"Missakasamodhāno" means – that which is given by combining offenses of various grounds into one. Herein, this is the method –
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhante, sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ ekaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ, ekaṃ kāyasaṃsaggaṃ, ekaṃ duṭṭhullavācaṃ, ekaṃ attakāmaṃ, ekaṃ sañcarittaṃ, ekaṃ kuṭikāraṃ, ekaṃ vihārakāraṃ, ekaṃ duṭṭhadosaṃ, ekaṃ aññabhāgiyaṃ, ekaṃ saṅghabhedaṃ, ekaṃ bhedānuvattakaṃ, ekaṃ dubbacaṃ, ekaṃ kuladūsakaṃ, sohaṃ, bhante, saṅghaṃ tāsaṃ āpattīnaṃ samodhānaparivāsaṃ yācāmī’’ti –
"Ahaṃ, bhante, sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ ekaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ, ekaṃ kāyasaṃsaggaṃ, ekaṃ duṭṭhullavācaṃ, ekaṃ attakāmaṃ, ekaṃ sañcarittaṃ, ekaṃ kuṭikāraṃ, ekaṃ vihārakāraṃ, ekaṃ duṭṭhadosaṃ, ekaṃ aññabhāgiyaṃ, ekaṃ saṅghabhedaṃ, ekaṃ bhedānuvattakaṃ, ekaṃ dubbacaṃ, ekaṃ kuladūsakaṃ, sohaṃ, bhante, saṅghaṃ tāsaṃ āpattīnaṃ samodhānaparivāsaṃ yācāmī" –
Tikkhattuṃ yācāpetvā tadanurūpāya kammavācāya parivāso dātabbo.
Having made him request three times, parivāsa should be given with a kammavāca corresponding to that.
Ettha ca saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ nānāvatthukāyotipi saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjintipi evaṃ pubbe vuttanayena vatthuvasenapi gottavasenapi nāmavasenapi āpattivasenapi yojetvā kammavācaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatiyevāti ayaṃ missakasamodhāno. Sabbaparivāsakammavācāvasāne pana nikkhittānikkhittavattādikathā purimanayeneva veditabbāti.
And here, "saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ nānāvatthukāyopi" or "saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjintipi," thus, in the manner previously stated, it is indeed permissible to perform the kammavāca by connecting according to the basis, according to the lineage, according to the name, and according to the offense, whichever he desires. This is missakasamodhāno. At the end of all parivāsakammavācā, however, the discussion of nikkhittānikkhittavatta etc. should be understood in the previous manner.
Parivāsakathā niṭṭhitā.
The discussion of parivāsa is finished.
‘‘pakkhamānatta’’nti bhikkhuniyā dātabbamānattaṃ. Taṃ pana paṭicchannāyapi appaṭicchannāyapi āpattiyā aḍḍhamāsameva dātabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘garudhammaṃ ajjhāpannāya bhikkhuniyā ubhatosaṅghe pakkhamānattaṃ caritabba’’nti (cūḷava. 403). Taṃ pana bhikkhunīhi attano sīmaṃ sodhetvā vihārasīmāya vā vihārasīmaṃ sodhetuṃ asakkontīhi khaṇḍasīmāya vā sabbantimena paricchedena catuvaggagaṇaṃ sannipātāpetvā dātabbaṃ. Sace ekā āpatti hoti ekissā vasena, sace dve vā tisso vā sambahulā vā ekavatthukā vā nānāvatthukā vā tāsaṃ tāsaṃ vasena vatthugottanāmaāpattīsu yaṃ yaṃ icchati taṃ taṃ ādāya yojanā kātabbā.
"Pakkhamānatta" means the mānatta to be given to a bhikkhunī. That, however, should be given for half a month for both a concealed and unconcealed offense. For it was said that "garudhammaṃ ajjhāpannāya bhikkhuniyā ubhatosaṅghe pakkhamānattaṃ caritabba" (cūḷava. 403). That, however, should be given by the bhikkhunīs after purifying their sīmā, or in the vihārasīmā, or by assembling a catuvaggagaṇa with the final boundary when they are unable to purify the vihārasīma. If there is one offense, it is based on one; if there are two or three or many, whether of one basis or of various bases, the connection should be made by taking whichever of those bases, lineages, names, and offenses one desires.
Tatridaṃ ekāpattivasena mukhamattadassanaṃ, tāya āpannāya bhikkhuniyā bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā vuḍḍhānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ pāde vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā evamassa vacanīyo – ‘‘ahaṃ, ayye, ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ gāmantaraṃ, sāhaṃ, ayye, ekissā āpattiyā gāmantarāya pakkhamānattaṃ yācāmī’’ti.
Here, regarding the case of expiation for a single offense, if a bhikkhuni has shown only her face, that bhikkhuni should approach the bhikkhuni Sangha, arrange her upper robe over one shoulder, bow at the feet of the senior bhikkhunis, sit in a squatting position, raise her joined palms, and say thus: "Venerable ones, I have committed an offense involving going to another village. Venerable ones, I request pakkhamānatta penance from the Sangha for that single offense involving going to another village."
Evaṃ tikkhattuṃ yācāpetvā byattāya bhikkhuniyā paṭibalāya saṅgho ñāpetabbo –
After having her request in this way three times, a competent and capable bhikkhuni should inform the Sangha:
‘‘Suṇātu me ayye saṅgho, ayaṃ itthannāmā bhikkhunī ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajji gāmantaraṃ, sā saṅghaṃ ekissā āpattiyā gāmantarāya pakkhamānattaṃ yācati, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho itthannāmāya bhikkhuniyā ekissā āpattiyā gāmantarāya pakkhamānattaṃ dadeyya, esā ñatti.
"Venerable ones, may the Sangha hear me. This bhikkhuni named so-and-so has committed an offense involving going to another village. She requests pakkhamānatta penance from the Sangha for that single offense involving going to another village. If it seems fitting to the Sangha, may the Sangha grant pakkhamānatta penance to this bhikkhuni named so-and-so for that single offense involving going to another village. This is the motion (ñatti)."
‘‘Suṇātu me ayye saṅgho, ayaṃ…pe… dutiyampi… tatiyampi etamatthaṃ vadāmi. Suṇātu me ayye saṅgho…pe… deti… dinnaṃ saṅghena itthannāmāya bhikkhuniyā ekissā āpattiyā gāmantarāya pakkhamānattaṃ, khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī; evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti.
"Venerable ones, may the Sangha hear me…pe… For the second time… For the third time, I say this matter. Venerable ones, may the Sangha hear me…pe… grants… Pakkhamānatta penance for a single offense involving going to another village has been granted by the Sangha to this bhikkhuni named so-and-so. It is pleasing to the Sangha; therefore, it is silent. Thus, I hold it."
Kammavācāpariyosāne vattaṃ samādiyitvā bhikkhumānattakathāya vuttanayeneva saṅghassa ārocetvā nikkhittavattaṃ vasitukāmāya tattheva saṅghamajjhe vā pakkantāsu bhikkhunīsu ekabhikkhuniyā vā dutiyikāya vā santike vuttanayeneva nikkhipitabbaṃ. Aññissā pana āgantukāya santike ārocetvā nikkhipitabbaṃ. Nikkhittakālato paṭṭhāya pakatattaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati. Puna samādiyitvā aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpentiyā pana bhikkhunīnaṃyeva santike vasituṃ na labhati. ‘‘Ubhatosaṅghe pakkhamānattaṃ caritabba’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Tasmā assā ācariyupajjhāyāhi vihāraṃ gantvā saṅgāhakapakkhe ṭhito eko mahāthero vā dhammakathiko vā bhikkhu vattabbo – ‘‘ekissā bhikkhuniyā vinayakammaṃ kattabbamatthi, tatra no ayyā, cattāro bhikkhū pesethā’’ti. Saṅgahaṃ akātuṃ na labbhati, pesessāmīti vattabbaṃ. Catūhi pakatattabhikkhunīhi mānattacāriniṃ bhikkhuniṃ gahetvā antoaruṇeyeva nikkhamitvā gāmūpacārato dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvā maggā okkamma gumbavatiādīhi paṭicchannaṭṭhāne nisīditabbaṃ. Vihārūpacāratopi dve leḍḍupātā atikkamitabbā catūhi pakatattabhikkhūhipi tattha gantabbaṃ. Gantvā pana bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ na ekaṭṭhāne nisīditabbaṃ, paṭikkamitvā avidūraṭṭhāne nisīditabbaṃ. Kurundimahāpaccarīsu pana ‘‘bhikkhunīhipi byattaṃ ekaṃ vā dve vā upāsikāyo bhikkhūhipi ekaṃ vā dve vā upāsake attarakkhaṇatthāya gahetvā gantabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Kurundiyaṃyeva ca bhikkhunupassayassa ca vihārassa ca upacāraṃ muñcituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ, gāmassāti na vuttaṃ.
At the conclusion of the Kammavācā, after undertaking the duties (vatta) and informing the Sangha in the manner stated in the section on mānattakathā for bhikkhus, if she wishes to dwell with the duties relinquished, it should be relinquished in the same manner as stated either in the midst of the Sangha there, or in the presence of one or two bhikkhunis who have gone away. However, it should be relinquished after informing another visiting bhikkhuni. From the time of relinquishment onwards, she stands in the state of pakatatta (normal status). But after undertaking the duties again and causing the dawn to rise, she is not allowed to dwell in the presence of bhikkhunis only. For it is said, "Pakkhamānatta penance should be undertaken in both Sanghas." Therefore, going to the monastery with her teachers (ācariya) and preceptors (upajjhāyā), one senior elder (mahāthera) or a bhikkhu who is a Dhamma speaker, who stands on the side of support (saṅgāhakapakkhe), should be addressed: "A Vinaya procedure needs to be done for a bhikkhuni; therefore, venerable ones, send four bhikkhus." Support should not be refused; one should say, "I will send them." Taking the bhikkhuni who is observing mānattā with four bhikkhunis who are in pakatatta status, before dawn itself, having gone beyond the boundary of the village by two clod-throws, stepping off the road, they should sit in a place covered with bushes and so on. The boundary of the monastery should also be exceeded by two clod-throws, and four bhikkhus in pakatatta status should also go there. Having gone, they should not sit in the same place with the bhikkhunis, but having stepped back, they should sit in a place not far away. However, in the Kurundimahāpaccarī, it is said, "Bhikkhunis should take one or two competent laywomen (upāsikā) and bhikkhus should take one or two laymen (upāsaka) for self-protection and go." And in the Kurundi itself, it is said, "It is proper to release the boundary of the bhikkhuni residence and the monastery," but it is not said about the village.
Evaṃ nisinnesu pana bhikkhūsu ca bhikkhunīsu ca tāya bhikkhuniyā ‘‘mānattaṃ samādiyāmi, vattaṃ samādiyāmī’’ti vattaṃ samādiyitvā bhikkhunīsaṅghassa tāva evaṃ ārocetabbaṃ –
When the bhikkhus and bhikkhunis are sitting in this way, that bhikkhuni, after undertaking the duties, saying, "I undertake mānatta, I undertake the duties," should inform the bhikkhuni Sangha thus:
‘‘Ahaṃ, ayye, ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ gāmantaraṃ, sāhaṃ saṅghaṃ ekissā āpattiyā gāmantarāya pakkhamānattaṃ yāciṃ, tassa me saṅgho ekissā āpattiyā gāmantarāya pakkhamānattaṃ adāsi, sāhaṃ pakkhamānattaṃ carāmi, ‘vedayāmahaṃ, ayye, vedayatī’ti maṃ saṅgho dhāretū’’ti.
"Venerable ones, I committed an offense involving going to another village. I requested pakkhamānatta penance from the Sangha for that single offense involving going to another village. The Sangha granted me pakkhamānatta penance for that single offense involving going to another village. I am observing pakkhamānatta. May the Sangha hold me as ‘I inform, venerable ones, she informs.’"
Tato bhikkhusaṅghassa santikaṃ gantvā evaṃ ārocetabbaṃ – ‘‘ahaṃ, ayyā, ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ …pe… vedayāmahaṃ, ayyā, vedayatīti maṃ saṅgho dhāretū’’ti. Idhāpi yāya kāyaci bhāsāya ārocetuṃ vaṭṭati.
Then, going to the presence of the bhikkhu Sangha, she should inform them thus: "Venerable ones, I committed an offense…pe… May the Sangha hold me as ‘I inform, venerable ones, she informs.’" Here also, it is proper to inform in whatever language.
Ārocetvā ca bhikkhunisaṅghasseva santike nisīditabbaṃ, ārocitakālato paṭṭhāya bhikkhūnaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace sāsaṅkaṃ hoti, bhikkhuniyo tattheva ṭhānaṃ paccāsīsanti, ṭhātabbaṃ. Sace añño bhikkhu vā bhikkhunī vā taṃ ṭhānaṃ eti, passantiyā ārocetabbaṃ. No ce āroceti, ratticchedo ceva vattabhedadukkaṭañca. Sace ajānantiyā eva upacāraṃ okkamitvā gacchati, ratticchedova hoti, na vattabhedadukkaṭaṃ. Sace bhikkhuniyo upajjhāyādīnaṃ vattakaraṇatthaṃ pageva gantukāmā honti, rattivippavāsagaṇaohīyanagāmantarāpattirakkhaṇatthaṃ ekaṃ bhikkhuniṃ ṭhapetvā gantabbaṃ. Tāya aruṇe uṭṭhite tassā santike vattaṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ. Etenupāyena akhaṇḍā pañcadasa rattiyo mānattaṃ caritabbaṃ.
Having informed, she should sit in the presence of the bhikkhuni Sangha itself. From the time of informing, it is proper for the bhikkhus to leave. If there is apprehension, the bhikkhunis should remain in the same place, one should stay. If another bhikkhu or bhikkhuni comes to that place, it should be informed when seeing them. If she does not inform, there is a break of night (ratticchedo) and a dukkata offense for breaking the duties (vattabheda). If, without knowing, she goes beyond the boundary, there is only a break of night, not a dukkata offense for breaking the duties. If the bhikkhunis want to go early to perform duties for the preceptor and so on, they should go, having left one bhikkhuni to protect against separation from the night, group abandonment, being outside the boundary, and offenses involving going to another village. When the dawn rises, the duties should be relinquished in her presence. In this way, mānatta should be observed for fifteen unbroken nights.
Anikkhittavattāya pana pārivāsikakkhandhake vuttanayeneva sammā vattitabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – ‘‘āgantukassa ārocetabba’’nti ettha yattakā purebhattaṃ vā pacchābhattaṃ vā taṃ gāmaṃ bhikkhū vā bhikkhuniyo vā āgacchanti, sabbesaṃ ārocetabbaṃ. Anārocentiyā ratticchedo ca vattabhedadukkaṭañca. Sacepi rattiṃ koci bhikkhu taṃ gāmūpacāraṃ okkamitvā gacchati, ratticchedo hotiyeva, ajānanapaccayā pana vattabhedato muccati. Kurundiādīsu pana anikkhittavattabhikkhūnaṃ vuttanayeneva kathetabbanti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pārivāsikavattādīnaṃ upacārasīmāya paricchinnattā yuttataraṃ dissati. Uposathe ārocetabbaṃ, pavāraṇāya ārocetabbaṃ, catunnaṃ bhikkhūnañca bhikkhunīnañca devasikaṃ ārocetabbaṃ. Sace bhikkhūnaṃ tasmiṃ gāme bhikkhācāro sampajjati, tattheva gantabbaṃ. No ce sampajjati, aññatra caritvāpi tatra āgantvā attānaṃ dassetvā gantabbaṃ. Bahigāme vā saṅketaṭṭhānaṃ kātabbaṃ – ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne amhe passissasī’’ti. Tāya saṅketaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā ārocetabbaṃ. Saṅketaṭṭhāne adisvā vihāraṃ gantvā ārocetabbaṃ. Vihāre sabbabhikkhūnaṃ ārocetabbaṃ. Sace sabbesaṃ sakkā na hoti ārocetuṃ, bahiupacārasīmāya ṭhatvā bhikkhuniyo pesetabbā. Tāhi ānītānaṃ catunnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ārocetabbaṃ. Sace vihāro dūro hoti sāsaṅko, upāsake ca upāsikāyo ca gahetvā gantabbaṃ. Sace pana ayaṃ ekā vasati, rattivippavāsaṃ āpajjati, tasmāssā ekā pakatattā bhikkhunī sammannitvā dātabbā ekacchanne vasanatthāya.
However, for one who has not relinquished the duties, one should conduct oneself well in the manner stated in the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka. But this is the difference: in "It should be informed to a visitor," as many bhikkhus or bhikkhunis as come to that village before or after the meal should all be informed. If she does not inform, there is a break of night and a dukkata offense for breaking the duties. Even if some bhikkhu goes beyond that village boundary at night, there is indeed a break of night, but due to not knowing, she is freed from breaking the duties. However, in the Kurundi and so on, it is said that the bhikkhus who have not relinquished the duties should speak in the manner stated. That seems more fitting because the duties of the probationary period (pārivāsikavatta) and so on are limited by the boundary of the upacāra. It should be informed on the Uposatha day, it should be informed on the Pavāraṇā day, and it should be informed daily to four bhikkhus and bhikkhunis. If alms-gathering is accomplished for the bhikkhus in that village, one should go there itself. If it is not accomplished, having gone elsewhere and wandered, one should come there and show oneself and leave. A meeting place should be made outside the village: "You will see us in such-and-such place." Having gone to the meeting place, it should be informed. Not seeing them in the meeting place, having gone to the monastery, it should be informed. In the monastery, it should be informed to all the bhikkhus. If it is not possible to inform all, standing outside the upacāra boundary, the bhikkhunis should be sent. It should be informed to the four bhikkhus brought by them. If the monastery is far away and there is apprehension, one should go, taking laymen and laywomen. But if she dwells alone, she incurs separation from the night; therefore, one bhikkhuni in pakatatta status should be appointed and given to her for dwelling under one roof.
Evaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ mānattaṃ caritvā vīsatigaṇe bhikkhunisaṅghe vuttanayeneva abbhānaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sace mānattaṃ caramānā antarāpattiṃ āpajjati, mūlāya paṭikassitvā tassā āpattiyā mānattaṃ dātabbanti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Idaṃ ‘‘pakkhamānattaṃ’’ nāma.
Having observed mānatta in this way without a break, in a group of twenty bhikkhunis, abbhāna should be done in the manner stated. If, while observing mānatta, she commits an intervening offense (antarāpatti), having drawn back to the root offense (mūlāya paṭikassitvā), mānatta should be given for that offense, it is said in the Kurundi. This is called "pakkhamānatta."
‘‘Samodhānamānattaṃ’’pana tividhaṃ hoti – odhānasamodhānaṃ, agghasamodhānaṃ, missakasamodhānanti. Tattha yadetaṃ parato udāyittherassa pañcāhapaṭicchannāya āpattiyā parivāsaṃ parivasantassa parivāse ca mānattārahaṭṭhāne ca antarāpattiṃ āpajjitvā mūlāyapaṭikassitassa ‘‘tena hi, bhikkhave, saṅgho udāyissa bhikkhuno tissannaṃ āpattīnaṃ chārattaṃ mānattaṃ detū’’ti mānattaṃ anuññātaṃ, idaṃ‘‘odhānasamodhānaṃ’’nāma. Idañhi punappunaṃ mūlāyapaṭikassanena parivutthadivase odhunitvā purimāpattīhi saddhiṃ samodhāya dinnaṃ, tasmā odhānasamodhānanti vuccati. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘samodhānaparivāsaṃ vutthassa dātabbaṃ mānattaṃ samodhānamānatta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tampi tena pariyāyena yujjati.
"Samodhānamānatta" (cumulative mānatta), however, is of three kinds: odhānasamodhāna, agghasamodhāna, and missakasamodhāna. Therein, that mānatta which was permitted later for the Elder Udāyi, who, while observing parivāsa for an offense concealed for five days, having committed an intervening offense in the place fit for parivāsa and mānatta, having drawn back to the root offense, saying, "Then, bhikkhus, may the Sangha grant six nights of mānatta to the bhikkhu Udāyi for three offenses," this is called "odhānasamodhāna." For this is given by accumulating the days lived in parivāsa and combining them with the former offenses due to repeatedly drawing back to the root offense; therefore, it is called odhānasamodhāna. However, in the Kurundi, it is said, "The mānatta that should be given to one who has lived samodhānaparivāsa is samodhānamānatta." That too is consistent with that meaning.
Agghasamodhānaṃpanamissakasamodhānañcaagghasamodhānamissakasamodhānaparivāsāvasāne dātabbamānattameva vuccati, taṃ parivāsakammavācānusārena yojetvā dātabbaṃ. Ettāvatā yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tena hi, bhikkhave, saṅgho udāyissa bhikkhuno ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā ekāhapaṭicchannāya ekāhaparivāsaṃ detūtiādinā nayena pāḷiyaṃ anekehi ākārehi parivāso ca mānattañca vuttaṃ, tassa yasmā āgatāgataṭhāne vinicchayo vuccamāno pāḷi viya ativitthāraṃ āpajjati, na ca sakkā hoti sukhena pariggahetuṃ, tasmā naṃ samodhānetvā idheva dassessāmā’’ti, tadidaṃ atthato sampāditaṃ hoti.
Agghasamodhāna and missakasamodhāna are called the mānatta that should be given at the end of agghasamodhānaparivāsa and missakasamodhānaparivāsa, and that should be given by connecting it according to the kammavācā of the parivāsa. In so far as what was said, "Then, bhikkhus, may the Sangha grant one-day parivāsa to the bhikkhu Udāyi for one intentionally emitted semen offense concealed for one day," in this way, since parivāsa and mānatta are stated in the Pāḷi in many ways, if the decision is spoken at each place as it comes, it becomes excessively detailed like the Pāḷi, and it is not possible to easily grasp it; therefore, having summarized it, we will show it here itself," that is accomplished in meaning.
Paṭicchannaparivāsakathā
The Account of Concealed Parivāsa (Paṭicchannaparivāsakathā)
102.Idāni yā tāva ayaṃ paṭicchannāya ekissā āpattiyā vasena pāḷi vuttā, sā uttānatthāva.
102. Now, that Pāḷi which was stated based on one concealed offense is clear in meaning.
108.Tato paraṃ dvīhatīhacatūhapañcāhapaṭicchannānaṃ vasena pāḷiṃ vatvā pañcāhapaṭicchannāya parivāsato paṭṭhāya antarāpatti dassitā. Yasmā pana taṃ āpattiṃ āpanno mūlāyapaṭikassanāraho nāma hoti, tasmāssa tattha mūlāyapaṭikassanaṃ anuññātaṃ. Sace pana nikkhittavatto āpajjati, mūlāyapaṭikassanāraho na hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā na so parivasanto āpanno, pakatattaṭṭhāne ṭhito āpanno, tasmā tassā āpattiyā visuṃ mānattaṃ caritabbaṃ. Sace paṭicchannā hoti parivāsopi vasitabbo. Yañcetaṃ mūlāyapaṭikassanaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmimpi kate parivutthadivasā makkhitā honti. Iti parivāse antarāpattiṃ dassetvā puna mānattārahassa antarāpattiṃ dassetvā mūlāyapaṭikassanaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmimpi kate parivutthadivasā makkhitāva honti. Tato parivutthaparivāsassa tāsaṃ tissannampi āpattīnaṃ samodhānamānattaṃ dassitaṃ. Tato mānattacārikassa antarāpattiṃ dassetvā mūlāyapaṭikassanaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana paṭikassane kate mānattaciṇṇadivasāpi parivutthadivasāpi makkhitāva honti. Tato abbhānārahassa antarāpattiṃ dassetvā mūlāyapaṭikassanaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmimpi kate sabbe te makkhitāva honti. Tato paraṃ sabbā antarāpattiyo yojetvā abbhānakammaṃ dassitaṃ. Evaṃ paṭicchannavāre ekāhapaṭicchannādivasena pañca, antarāpattivasena catassoti nava kammavācā dassitā honti.
108. After that, having stated the Pāḷi based on offenses concealed for two, three, four, and five days, from parivāsa for an offense concealed for five days onwards, an intervening offense (antarāpatti) is shown. Since one who has committed that offense is indeed worthy of being drawn back to the root offense (mūlāyapaṭikassanāraho), therefore, drawing back to the root offense is permitted for him there. But if he commits an offense having relinquished the duties, he is not worthy of being drawn back to the root offense. Why? Because he has not committed an offense while observing parivāsa, but has committed an offense while standing in the state of pakatatta. Therefore, mānatta should be observed separately for that offense. If it is concealed, parivāsa should also be lived. And in that drawing back to the root offense, even when it is done, the days lived in parivāsa are spoiled (makkhitā). Thus, having shown an intervening offense in parivāsa, again, having shown an intervening offense to one worthy of mānatta, drawing back to the root offense is stated; even when that is done, the days lived in parivāsa are indeed spoiled. After that, cumulative mānatta (samodhānamānatta) is shown for those three offenses for one who has lived parivāsa. Then, having shown an intervening offense to one observing mānatta, drawing back to the root offense is stated. But when that drawing back is done, the days observed in mānatta and the days lived in parivāsa are indeed spoiled. After that, having shown an intervening offense to one worthy of abbhāna, drawing back to the root offense is stated. Even when that is done, all those are spoiled. After that, having combined all the intervening offenses, the procedure for abbhāna is shown. Thus, in the case of concealment, five kammavācās are shown based on one-day concealment and so on, and four based on intervening offenses, totaling nine.
Paṭicchannaparivāsakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Account of Concealed Parivāsa is finished.
Samodhānaparivāsakathā
The Account of Cumulative Parivāsa (Samodhānaparivāsakathā)
125.Tato paraṃ pakkhapaṭicchannāya āpattiyā antoparivāsato paṭṭhāya pañcāhapaṭicchannāya antarāpattiyā vasena samodhānaparivāso ca, samodhānamānattañca dassitaṃ. Ettha ca mānattacārikamānattārahakālepi āpannāya āpattiyā mūlāyapaṭikassane kate mānattaciṇṇadivasāpi parivāsaparivutthadivasāpi sabbe makkhitāva honti. Kasmā? Yasmā paṭicchannā antarāpatti. Teneva vuttaṃ – ‘‘mūlāya paṭikassitvā purimāya āpattiyā samodhānaparivāsaṃ datvā chārattaṃ mānattaṃ detū’’ti. Tato paraṃ sabbā antarāpattiyo yojetvā abbhānakammaṃ dassetvā sukkavissaṭṭhivatthu niṭṭhāpitaṃ.
125. After that, cumulative parivāsa (samodhānaparivāsa) and cumulative mānatta (samodhānamānatta) are shown based on an offense concealed for a fortnight, from within parivāsa onwards, and on an intervening offense concealed for five days. And here, when an offense is committed while observing mānatta or during the time for mānatta, when drawing back to the root offense is done, the days observed in mānatta and the days lived in parivāsa are all spoiled. Why? Because the intervening offense is concealed. Therefore, it is said, "Having drawn back to the root offense, having given cumulative parivāsa for the former offense, may he be given six nights of mānatta." After that, having combined all the intervening offenses, the procedure for abbhāna is shown, and the subject of seminal emission is concluded.
Samodhānaparivāsakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Account of Cumulative Parivāsa is finished.
Sukkavissaṭṭhikathā ca niṭṭhitā.
And the Seminal Emission Account is finished.
Agghasamodhānaparivāsakathā
The Account of Agghasamodhānaparivāsa
134.Tato ekāpattimūlakañca āpattivaḍḍhanakañcāti dve naye dassetvā agghasamodhānaparivāso dassito.
134. After that, having shown two ways—one based on a single offense and one increasing the offenses—agghasamodhānaparivāsa is shown.
Tato sañcicca anārocitāpattivatthuṃ dassetvā sañcicca ajānanaassaraṇavematikabhāvehi anārocitāya āpattiyā pacchā lajjidhamme vā ñāṇasaraṇanibbematikabhāvesu vā uppannesu yaṃ kātabbaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idha pana bhikkhave’’tiādinā nayena pāḷi ṭhapitā. Tato ajānanaassaraṇavematikapaṭicchannānaṃ appaṭicchannabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ tatheva pāḷi ṭhapitā.
Then, having shown the case of an intentionally unconcealed offense, in order to show what should be done when shame (lajji) or knowledge, remembrance, or certainty arises later regarding an unconcealed offense due to intentionality, unknowing, non-remembrance, or doubt, the Pāḷi is established in the manner beginning with "Here, bhikkhus." Then, in order to show the unconcealed state of those concealed due to unknowing, non-remembrance, or doubt, the Pāḷi is established in the same way.
Agghasamodhānaparivāsakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Account of Agghasamodhānaparivāsa is finished.
Dvemāsaparivāsakathā
The Account of Two-Month Parivāsa
138.Tato dvinnaṃ āpattīnaṃ dvemāsapaṭicchannānaṃ ekamāsaparivāsayācanavatthuṃ dassetvā asañcicca ajānanaassaraṇavematikabhāvehi anārocite itarasmiṃ māse pacchā lajjidhammādīsu uppannesu yaṃ kātabbaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ajānanaassaraṇavematikapaṭicchannassa ca āpannabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ purimanayeneva pāḷi ṭhapitā.
138. After that, having shown the case of requesting one month of parivāsa for two offenses concealed for two months, in order to show what should be done when shame and so on arise later in the other month regarding what was unconcealed due to unintentionality, unknowing, non-remembrance, or doubt, and in order to show the state of having committed an offense concealed due to unknowing, non-remembrance, or doubt, the Pāḷi is established in the same way as before.
Dvemāsaparivāsakathā niṭṭhitā.
The discourse on two-month parivāsa is concluded.
Suddhantaparivāsādikathā
Discourse on Suddhanta Parivāsa, etc.
156.Tato ‘‘āpattipariyantaṃ na jānāti, rattipariyantaṃ na jānātī’’tiādinā nayena suddhantaparivāso dassito.
Then, suddhantaparivāsa (blameless penance) is shown in the manner beginning with "he does not know the limit of the offense, he does not know the limit of the night," etc.
160.Tato paraṃ pārivāsikaṃ ādiṃ katvā vibbhamitvā punaupasampannādīsu paṭipattidassanatthaṃ pāḷi ṭhapitā.
After that, the Pāḷi is established to show the practice regarding a probationer (pārivāsika), beginning, deviating, and being re-ordained, etc.
165.Tattha‘‘antarā sambahulā āpattiyo āpajjati parimāṇā appaṭicchannāyo’’tiādīsu āpattiparicchedavasena parimāṇāyo ceva appaṭicchannāyo cāti attho.
Here, in "He commits numerous offenses in between, offenses that are definite and uncovered," etc., the meaning is that they are definite according to the classification of offenses, and also uncovered.
166.Pacchimasmiṃāpattikkhandheti ekova so āpattikkhandho, pacchā chāditattā pana ‘‘pacchimasmiṃ āpattikkhandhe’’ti vuttaṃ.Purimasminti etthāpi eseva nayo.
"In the last group of offenses": that group of offenses is one and the same, but it is called "in the last group of offenses" because it was covered later. "In the first": the same method applies here as well.
180.Vavatthitā sambhinnāti sabhāgavisabhāgānamevetaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ.
"Defined and mixed": this is just a synonym for similar and dissimilar.
Suddhantaparivāsādikathā niṭṭhitā.
The discourse on suddhanta parivāsa, etc., is concluded.
Dvebhikkhuvāraekādasakādikathā
Discourse on Dvebhikkhuvāra Ekādasaka, etc.
181.Tato paraṃ yo paṭicchādeti, tasmiṃ paṭipattidassanatthaṃ‘‘dve bhikkhū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthamissakanti thullaccayādīhi missakaṃ.Suddhakanti saṅghādisesaṃ vinā lahukāpattikkhandhameva.
Then, to show the practice towards the one who conceals, "two bhikkhus" etc., is stated. Here, "mixed" means mixed with thullaccaya, etc. "Pure" means only a light group of offenses, without saṅghādisesa.
184.Tato paraṃ avisuddhavisuddhabhāvadassanatthaṃ‘‘idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sambahulā saṅghādisesā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha byañjanato vā adhippāyato vā anuttānaṃ nāma kiñci natthi, tasmā tañca ito pubbe avuttañca sabbaṃ pāḷianusāreneva veditabbanti.
Then, to show the state of impure and pure, "Here, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu has numerous saṅghādisesas" etc., is stated. Here, there is nothing that is not clear either in terms of expression or intention, therefore all of that, and what has not been said before, should be understood according to the Pāḷi itself.
Dvebhikkhuvāraekādasakādikathā niṭṭhitā.
The discourse on dvebhikkhuvāra ekādasaka, etc., is concluded.
Samuccayakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The commentary on the Samuccayakkhandhaka is concluded.
4. Samathakkhandhakaṃ
4. Samathakkhandhaka
Sammukhāvinayakathā
Discourse on Sammukhāvinaya
186-187.Samathakkhandhake – ‘‘adhammavādī puggalo’’tiādīni cha mātikāpadāni nikkhipitvā ‘‘adhammavādī puggalo dhammavādiṃ puggalaṃ saññāpetī’’tiādinā nayena vitthāro vutto. Tatthasaññāpetīti kāraṇapatirūpakāni vatvā paritosetvā jānāpeti.Nijjhāpetīti yathā so taṃ atthaṃ nijjhāyati, oloketi; evaṃ karoti.Pekkhati anupekkhatīti yathā so taṃ atthaṃ pekkhati ceva punappunañca pekkhati; evaṃ karoti.Dasseti anudassetīti tesaññeva pariyāyavacanāni.Adhammena vūpasammatīti yasmā so adhammameva ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo’’tiādinā nayena mohetvā dasseti, tasmā adhammena vūpasammati nāma.
In the Samathakkhandhaka – having set aside the six topic headings beginning with "a person who is an advocate of non-Dhamma," the expansion is stated in the manner beginning with "a person who is an advocate of non-Dhamma convinces a person who is an advocate of Dhamma," etc. Here, "convinces" means making him know by saying things that appear to be reasons, delighting him. "Causes to ponder" means he makes him think and consider that matter in such a way that he ponders over it. "Looks, keeps looking" means he makes him look at that matter and repeatedly look at it in such a way. "Shows, keeps showing" these are synonyms for those same things. "Is appeased by non-Dhamma" since he shows delusion by deceiving him with non-Dhamma in the manner of "this is the Dhamma," etc., therefore it is called being appeased by non-Dhamma.
188.Dhammena vūpasammatīti yasmā dhammavādī dhammameva ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo’’tiādinā nayena amohetvā dasseti, tasmā dhammena vūpasammati nāma.
"Is appeased by Dhamma" since the advocate of Dhamma shows without deceiving him with the Dhamma in the manner of "this is the Dhamma," therefore it is called being appeased by Dhamma.
Sammukhāvinayakathā niṭṭhitā.
The discourse on sammukhāvinaya is concluded.
Sativinayakathā
Discourse on Sativinaya
195.Pañcimānibhikkhave dhammikāni sativinayassa dānānīti ettha suddhassa anāpattikassa dānaṃ ekaṃ, anuvaditassa dānaṃ ekaṃ, yācitassa dānaṃ ekaṃ, saṅghena dānaṃ ekaṃ, dhammena samaggadānaṃ ekanti evaṃ pañca. Etāni pana ekekaaṅgavasena na labbhanti, tasmā desanāmattamevetaṃ, pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ pana sativinayadānaṃ dhammikanti ayamettha attho. Tattha caanuvadantīti codenti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Ayaṃ pana sativinayo khīṇāsavasseva dātabbo na aññassa, antamaso anāgāminopi. So ca kho aññena codiyamānasseva, na acodiyamānassa. Dinne ca pana tasmiṃ codakassa kathā na ruhati. Codentopi ‘‘ayaṃ khīṇāsavo sativinayaladdho, ko tuyhaṃ kathaṃ gahessatī’’ti apasādetabbataṃ āpajjati.
"These five, bhikkhus, are the lawful givings of sativinaya": here, giving to one who is pure and without offense is one, giving to one who has confessed is one, giving to one who has requested is one, giving by the Saṅgha is one, giving lawfully by the unanimous Saṅgha is one; thus there are five. However, these are not obtained by individual aspects, therefore this is just a mere statement. However, the giving of sativinaya, which is endowed with five aspects, is lawful; this is the meaning here. And here, "confessing" means accusing. The rest is clear in meaning. However, this sativinaya should be given only to one who is a khīṇāsava, not to another, even an anāgāmi. And that too, only to one who is being accused by another, not to one who is not being accused. And when it has been given, the accuser's speech does not stand. Even the accuser incurs being degraded, thinking, "This khīṇāsava has received sativinaya, who will heed your words?"
Sativinayakathā niṭṭhitā.
The discourse on sativinaya is concluded.
Amūḷhavinayakathā
Discourse on Amūḷhavinaya
196.Bhāsitaparikkantanti vācāya bhāsitaṃ kāyena parikkantaṃ; parikkamitvā katanti attho.Saratāyasmā evarūpiṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitāti ettha saratu āyasmā evarūpiṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitā; āyasmā evarūpiyā āpattiyāti ayamattho. Āpajjitvāti vā pāṭho, tassattho – paṭhamaṃ āpajjitvā pacchā taṃ āpattiṃ saratu āyasmāti.
"Spoken and transgressed" means spoken by speech and transgressed by body; the meaning is having transgressed and done. "The venerable one remembers having committed such an offense": here, may the venerable one remember having committed such an offense; the venerable one, such an offense, this is the meaning. Or, "having committed" is also a reading, its meaning is – having first committed and then may the venerable one remember that offense.
Amūḷhavinayakathā niṭṭhitā.
The discourse on amūḷhavinaya is concluded.
Yebhuyyasikākathā
Discourse on Yebhuyyasikā
202.Yebhuyyasikāya vūpasametunti ettha yassā kiriyāya dhammavādino bahutarā, esā yebhuyyasikā nāma.
"Let it be settled by yebhuyyasikā": here, that action in which the advocates of Dhamma are more numerous, that is called yebhuyyasikā.
204.Adhammikasalākaggāhesuoramattakanti parittaṃ appamattakaṃ bhaṇḍanamattameva.Na ca gatigatanti dve tayo āvāse na gataṃ, tattha tattheva vā dvattikkhattuṃ avinicchitaṃ.Na ca saritasāritanti dvattikkhattuṃ tehi bhikkhūhi sayaṃ saritaṃ vā aññehi sāritaṃ vā na hoti.Jānātīti salākaṃ gāhento jānāti ‘‘adhammavādī bahutarā’’ti.Appeva nāmāti iminā nīhārena salākāya gāhiyamānāya ‘‘api nāma adhammavādino bahutarā assū’’ti ayamassa ajjhāsayo hoti. Aparesupi dvīsu eseva nayo.
In taking non-Dhamma ballots, "oramattaka" means a small, insignificant amount, just a little quarrel. "Na ca gatigata" means not gone to two or three residences, or undecided there two or three times. "Na ca saritasārita" means not remembered by those bhikkhus themselves or caused to be remembered by others two or three times. "Knows" means while taking the ballot, he knows, "the advocates of non-Dhamma are more numerous." "Appeva nāmā" means with this method, while taking the ballot, "may it be that the advocates of non-Dhamma are more numerous," this is his intention. The same method applies to the other two as well.
Adhammenagaṇhantīti adhammavādino ‘‘evaṃ mayaṃ bahū bhavissāmā’’ti dve dve salākāyo gaṇhanti.Vaggā gaṇhantīti dve dhammavādino ekaṃ dhammavādisalākaṃ gaṇhanti ‘‘evaṃ dhammavādino na bahū bhavissantī’’ti maññamānā.Na ca yathādiṭṭhiyā gaṇhantīti dhammavādino hutvā ‘‘balavapakkhaṃ bhajissāmā’’ti adhammavādisalākaṃ gaṇhanti. Dhammikasalākaggāhesu ayamevattho parivattetvā veditabbo. Evaṃ salākaṃ gāhetvā sace bahutarā dhammavādino honti; yathā te vadanti, evaṃ taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasametabbaṃ, evaṃ yebhuyyasikāya vūpasantaṃ hoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana paratopi āgamissati.
"They take with non-Dhamma" means the advocates of non-Dhamma take two ballots each, thinking, "thus we will be many." "They take in groups" means two advocates of Dhamma take one Dhamma ballot, thinking, "thus the advocates of Dhamma will not be many." "Na ca yathādiṭṭhiyā gaṇhantī" means being advocates of Dhamma, they take a non-Dhamma ballot, thinking, "we will side with the powerful faction." In taking Dhamma ballots, this same meaning should be understood by changing it around. Thus, having taken the ballots, if the advocates of Dhamma are more numerous, then that dispute should be settled as they say. Thus, it is settled by yebhuyyasikā. This is the summary here. The detailed explanation, however, will come later.
Yebhuyyasikākathā niṭṭhitā.
The discourse on yebhuyyasikā is concluded.
Tassapāpiyasikākathā
Discourse on Tassapāpiyasikā
207.Asucīti asucīhi kāyavacīkammehi samannāgato.Alajjīti sañcicca āpajjanādinā alajjilakkhaṇena samannāgato.Sānuvādoti saupavādo. Iti imesañca tiṇṇaṃ aṅgānaṃ vasena tīṇi karaṇāni, saṅghena karaṇaṃ, dhammena samaggena karaṇanti imāni ca dveti pañca tassapāpiyasikākammassa karaṇāni nāma honti. Sesamettha tajjanīyādīsu vuttanayameva. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho – idañhi yo pāpussannatāya pāpiyo puggalo, tassa kattabbato ‘‘tassapāpiyasikākamma’’nti vuccati.
"Impure" means endowed with impure bodily and verbal actions. "Shameless" means endowed with the characteristic of shamelessness, such as intentionally committing offenses. "Liable to rebuke" means liable to censure. Thus, based on these three factors, there are three procedures, and these two: procedure by the Saṅgha, procedure lawfully by the unanimous Saṅgha; thus, there are five procedures for the tassapāpiyasikā kamma. The rest here is the same as the method stated in the tajjanīya, etc. And this is the meaning of the word here – because it is to be done to one who is evil due to the increase of evil, it is called "tassapāpiyasikākamma."
Tassapāpiyasikākathā niṭṭhitā.
The discourse on tassapāpiyasikā is concluded.
Tiṇavatthārakādikathā
Discourse on Tiṇavatthāraka, etc.
212.Kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāyāti kakkhaḷabhāvāya ceva vāḷabhāvāya ca.Bhedāyāti saṅghabhedāya.Sabbeheva ekajjhanti kassaci chandaṃ anāharitvā gilānepi tattheva ānetvā ekato sannipatitabbaṃ.Tiṇavatthārakena vūpasameyyāti ettha idaṃ kammaṃ tiṇavatthārakasadisattā ‘‘tiṇavatthārako’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā hi gūthaṃ vā muttaṃ vā ghaṭṭiyamānaṃ duggandhatāya bādhati, tiṇehi avattharitvā suppaṭicchāditassa panassa so gandho na bādhati; evameva yaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ mūlānumūlaṃ gantvā vūpasamiyamānaṃ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṃvattati, taṃ iminā kammena vūpasantaṃ gūthaṃ viya tiṇavatthārakena paṭicchannaṃ suvūpasantaṃ hotīti idaṃ kammaṃ tiṇavatthārakasadisattā ‘‘tiṇavatthārako’’ti vuttaṃ.
"For roughness, for harshness" means for the state of being rough and for the state of being harsh. "For division" means for division of the Saṅgha. "All together" means without bringing the consent of anyone, even a sick person should be brought there and gathered together. "Should be settled with tiṇavatthāraka": here, this kamma is called "tiṇavatthāraka" because it is similar to tiṇavatthāraka. Just as when feces or urine are rubbed, it is disturbing due to the bad smell, but when it is covered with grass and well concealed, that smell does not disturb; in the same way, when a dispute is settled going to the root and its secondary roots, it leads to roughness, harshness, and division, but when it is settled with this kamma, it is well-settled like feces covered with grass, therefore this kamma is called "tiṇavatthāraka" because it is similar to tiṇavatthāraka.
213.Thullavajjanti pārājikañceva saṅghādisesañca.Gihipaṭisaṃyuttanti gihīnaṃ hīnena khuṃsanavambhanadhammikapaṭissavesu āpannaṃ āpattiṃ.
"Grave offenses" means pārājika and saṅghādisesa. "Connected with laypersons" means an offense committed in the inferior acts of disparaging, reviling, and making unlawful promises to laypersons.
214.Evañca pana bhikkhave te bhikkhū tāhi āpattīhi vuṭṭhitā hontīti evaṃ tiṇavatthārakakammavācāya katāya kammavācāpariyosāne yattakā tattha sannipatitā antamaso suttāpi samāpannāpi aññavihitāpi sabbe te bhikkhū yāva upasampadamaṇḍalato paṭṭhāya thullavajjañca gihipaṭisaṃyuttañca ṭhapetvā avasesā āpattiyo āpannā, sabbāhi tāhi āpattīhi vuṭṭhitā honti. Ye pana ‘‘na metaṃ khamatī’’ti aññamaññaṃ diṭṭhāvikammaṃ karonti, tehi vā saddhiṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitvāpi tattha anāgatā, āgantvā vā chandaṃ datvā pariveṇādīsu nisinnā, te āpattīhi na vuṭṭhahanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ṭhapetvā diṭṭhāvikammaṃ ṭhapetvā ye na tattha hontī’’ti.
"And thus, bhikkhus, those bhikkhus are acquitted of those offenses" means thus, when the tiṇavatthāraka kamma is done by the formula, at the end of the kamma formula, all those who are gathered there, even those who are asleep, in samāpatti, or otherwise engaged, all those bhikkhus, from the boundary of ordination onwards, having committed offenses except for grave offenses and those connected with laypersons, are acquitted of all those offenses. But those who do an act of disregard towards each other, saying "this is not pleasing to me," or those who have committed an offense with them but have not come there, or having come and given their consent, are sitting in the enclosure, etc., they are not acquitted of the offenses. Therefore it was said – "except for an act of disregard, except for those who are not there."
Tiṇavatthārakādikathā niṭṭhitā.
The discourse on tiṇavatthāraka, etc., is concluded.
Adhikaraṇakathā
Discourse on Adhikaraṇa
215.Bhikkhunīnaṃ anupakhajjāti bhikkhunīnaṃ anto pavisitvā. Vivādādhikaraṇādīnaṃ vacanattho duṭṭhadosavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttoyeva.Vipaccatāya vohāroti cittadukkhatthaṃ vohāro; pharusavacananti attho.Yo tattha anuvādoti yo tesu anuvadantesu upavādo.Anuvadanāti ākāranidassanametaṃ; upavadanāti attho.Anullapanā anubhaṇanāti ubhayaṃ anuvadanavevacanamattameva.Anusampavaṅkatāti punappunaṃ kāyacittavācāhi tattheva sampavaṅkatā; anuvadanabhāvoti attho.Abbhussahanatāti ‘‘kasmā evaṃ na upavadissāmi, upavadissāmiyevā’’ti ussāhaṃ katvā anuvadanā.Anubalappadānanti purimavacanassa kāraṇaṃ dassetvā pacchimavacanena balappadānaṃ.
"Without entering the bhikkhunīs" means having entered among the bhikkhunīs. The meaning of the words vivādādhikaraṇa, etc., has already been stated in the description of faults and defects. "Vipaccatāya vohāro" means speech for the suffering of the mind; it means harsh speech. "Yo tattha anuvādo" means that which is reproach among those who reproach. "Anuvadanā" this is an indication of the manner; it means upavadanā. "Anullapanā anubhaṇanā" both are just synonyms for anuvadanā. "Anusampavaṅkatā" means repeatedly being involved in that same thing with body, mind, and speech; it means the state of reproaching. "Abbhussahanatā" means reproaching with effort, thinking, "why should I not reproach in this way, I will reproach indeed." "Anubalappadāna" means giving strength by the later words, showing the reason for the former words.
Kiccayatākaraṇīyatāti ettha kiccameva kiccayaṃ, kiccayassa bhāvo kiccayatā, karaṇīyassa bhāvo karaṇīyatā; ubhayampetaṃ saṅghakammasseva adhivacanaṃ.Apalokanakammantiādi pana tasseva pabhedavacanaṃ. Tatthaapalokanakammaṃnāma sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghaṃ sodhetvā chandārahānaṃ chandaṃ āharitvā samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā tikkhattuṃ sāvetvā kattabbakammaṃ.Ñattikammaṃnāma vuttanayeneva samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā ekāya ñattiyā kattabbakammaṃ.Ñattidutiyakammaṃnāma vuttanayeneva samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā ekāya ñattiyā ekāya ca anussāvanāyāti evaṃ ñattidutiyāya anussāvanāya kattabbakammaṃ.Ñatticatutthakammaṃnāma vuttanayeneva samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā ekāya ñattiyā tīhi ca anussāvanāhīti evaṃ ñatticatutthāhi tīhi anussāvanāhi kattabbakammaṃ.
"Kiccayatā karaṇīyatā": here, kicca itself is kiccaya, the state of kiccaya is kiccayatā, the state of karaṇīya is karaṇīyatā; both of these are designations for Saṅgha kamma itself. "Apalokanakamma," etc., are divisions of that same thing. Here, "apalokanakamma" means having purified the Saṅgha within the boundary, having brought the consent of those who are worthy of consent, and with the agreement of the unanimous Saṅgha, the kamma that should be done after announcing three times. "Ñattikamma" means the kamma that should be done with one ñatti with the agreement of the unanimous Saṅgha in the manner stated. "Ñattidutiyakamma" means the kamma that should be done with one ñatti and one announcement with the agreement of the unanimous Saṅgha in the manner stated; thus, kamma to be done with a ñatti and a second announcement. "Ñatticatutthakamma" means the kamma that should be done with one ñatti and three announcements with the agreement of the unanimous Saṅgha in the manner stated; thus, kamma to be done with a ñatti and the fourth, three announcements.
Tattha apalokanakammaṃ apaloketvāva kātabbaṃ, ñattikammādivasena na kātabbaṃ. Ñattikammampi ekaṃ ñattiṃ ṭhapetvāva kātabbaṃ, apalokanakammādivasena na kātabbaṃ. Ñattidutiyakammaṃ pana apaloketvā kattabbampi atthi, akattabbampi atthi. Tattha sīmāsammuti sīmāsamūhananaṃ kathinadānaṃ kathinubbhāro kuṭivatthudesanā vihāravatthudesanāti imāni cha kammāni garukāni, apaloketvā kātuṃ na vaṭṭanti. Ñattidutiyakammavācaṃ sāvetvāva kātabbāni. Avasesā terasa sammutiyo senāsanaggāhakamatakacīvaradānādisammutiyo cāti evarūpāni lahukakammāni apaloketvāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭanti. Ñattikammañatticatutthakammavasena pana na kātabbameva. Ñatticatutthakammaṃ ñattiñca tisso ca kammavācāyo sāvetvāva kātabbaṃ, apalokanakammādivasena na kātabbanti ayamettha saṅkhepo.
Here, apalokanakamma should be done only after announcing, it should not be done as ñattikamma, etc. Ñattikamma should be done only after establishing one ñatti, it should not be done as apalokanakamma, etc. However, ñattidutiyakamma, there is that which should be done after announcing, and there is that which should not be done. Here, the agreement for a boundary, the removal of a boundary, the giving of kaṭhina, the taking up of kaṭhina, the assigning of dwelling place, the assigning of a monastery site, these six kammas are weighty, they are not fit to be done after announcing. They should be done only after announcing the ñattidutiyakamma formula. The remaining thirteen agreements, such as the agreement for senāsana-gāhāka, giving of matakacīvara, etc., such light kammas are fit to be done even after announcing. However, they should definitely not be done as ñattikamma or ñatticatutthakamma. Ñatticatutthakamma should be done only after announcing the ñatti and the three kamma formulas, it should not be done as apalokanakamma, etc.; this is the summary here.
Vitthārato pana imāni cattāri kammāni ‘‘katihākārehi vipajjantī’’tiādinā nayena parivārāvasāne kammavagge etesaṃ vinicchayo āgatoyeva. Yaṃ pana tattha anuttānaṃ, taṃ kammavaggeyeva vaṇṇayissāma. Evañhi sati na aṭṭhāne vaṇṇanā bhavissati, ādito paṭṭhāya ca tassa tassa kammassa viññātattā suviññeyyo bhavissati.
In detail, however, these four kammas, the decision regarding these has already come in the Kamma Vagga at the end of the Parivāra in the manner beginning with "in how many ways do they fail?" However, that which is not clear there, we will explain in the Kamma Vagga itself. For when that is so, there will be no explanation out of place, and because each kamma is known from the beginning, it will be easily understood.
216.Vivādādhikaraṇassa kiṃ mūlantiādīni pāḷivaseneva veditabbāni.
"What is the root of vivādādhikaraṇa?" etc., should be understood according to the Pāḷi itself.
220.‘‘Vivādādhikaraṇaṃsiyā kusala’’ntiādīsu yena vivadanti, so cittuppādo vivādo, samathehi ca adhikaraṇīyatāya adhikaraṇanti evamādinā nayena attho daṭṭhabbo.
In "Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ siyā kusala" etc., the meaning should be understood in the manner that the mind-moment with which they dispute is vivāda, and because it is to be made an adhikaraṇa by the samathas, it is called adhikaraṇa, etc.
222.Āpattādhikaraṇaṃ siyā akusalaṃ siyā abyākataṃ, natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusalanti ettha sandhāya bhāsitavasena attho veditabbo. Yasmiñhi pathavikhaṇanādike āpattādhikaraṇe kusalacittaṃ aṅgaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ sati na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’’nti, tasmā nayidaṃ aṅgappahonakacittaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Idaṃ pana sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yaṃ tāva āpattādhikaraṇaṃ lokavajjaṃ, taṃ ekantato akusalameva, tattha ‘‘siyā akusala’’nti vikappo natthi. Yaṃ pana paṇṇattivajjaṃ, taṃ yasmā sañcicca ‘‘imaṃ āpattiṃ vītikkamāmī’’ti vītikkamantasseva akusalaṃ hoti, asañcicca pana kiñci ajānantassa sahaseyyādivasena āpajjato abyākataṃ hoti, tasmā tattha sañciccāsañciccavasena imaṃ vikappabhāvaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘āpattādhikaraṇaṃ siyā akusalaṃ, siyā abyākataṃ, natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’’nti.
222.Āpattādhikaraṇaṃ siyā akusalaṃ siyā abyākataṃ, natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusalanti, the meaning here should be understood as spoken with reference to a specific context. For in any case of offense-related issues (āpattādhikaraṇa) such as digging the earth, if a wholesome (kusala) mind is a contributing factor, it cannot be said that "there is no offense-related issue that is wholesome (kusala)." Therefore, this is not stated with reference to the mind that is predominantly a contributing factor. However, this is stated with reference to this: Whatever offense-related issue is a transgression against the world (lokavajja), that is entirely unwholesome (akusala); there, there is no alternative of "it might be unwholesome (akusala)." But that which is a transgression against the rule (paṇṇattivajja), since it is unwholesome (akusala) only for one who intentionally transgresses, thinking "I will transgress this offense," but for one who unknowingly commits an offense unintentionally, such as through sharing a bed, it is indeterminate (abyākata). Therefore, with reference to this state of alternatives based on intentionality and unintentionality, this is stated: "An offense-related issue (āpattādhikaraṇaṃ) might be unwholesome (akusala), might be indeterminate (abyākata), there is no offense-related issue (āpattādhikaraṇaṃ) that is wholesome (kusala)."
Sace pana ‘‘yaṃ kusalacitto āpajjati, idaṃ vuccati āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’’nti vadeyya, acittakānaṃ pana eḷakalomapadasodhammādisamuṭṭhānānampi kusalacittaṃ āpajjeyya, na ca tattha vijjamānampi kusalacittaṃ āpattiyā aṅgaṃ. Kāyavacīviññattivasena pana calitappavattānaṃ kāyavācānaṃ aññatarameva aṅgaṃ, tañca rūpakkhandhapariyāpannattā abyākatanti.
But if someone were to say, "That which one incurs with a wholesome mind (kusalacitto), this is called an offense-related issue (āpattādhikaraṇaṃ) that is wholesome (kusala)," then even for unintentional occurrences arising from causes such as goat hairs or foot-filth, a wholesome mind (kusalacittaṃ) could be incurred, but even the wholesome mind (kusalacittaṃ) present there is not a contributing factor to the offense (āpatti). However, of the bodily and verbal expressions that move and proceed as expressions of body and speech, only one is a contributing factor, and that, being included in the aggregate of form (rūpakkhandha), is indeterminate (abyākata).
Yaṃ jānantotiādimhi pana ayamattho – yaṃ cittaṃ āpattiyā aṅgaṃ hoti, tena vatthuṃ jānanto ‘‘idaṃ vītikkamāmī’’ti ca vītikkamākārena saddhiṃ jānanto sañjānanto vītikkamacetanāvasena cetetvā pakappetvā upakkamavasena maddanto abhivitaritvā nirāsaṅkacittaṃ pesetvā yaṃ āpattādhikaraṇaṃ vītikkamaṃ āpajjati, tassa evaṃ vītikkamato yo vītikkamo, idaṃ vuccati ‘‘āpattādhikaraṇaṃ akusala’’nti.
Yaṃ jānantoti etc., the meaning here is this: Whatever mind is a contributing factor to the offense (āpatti), knowing the object with that mind, and knowing together with the manner of transgression, thinking "I will transgress this," intending and planning with the volition of transgression, afflicting through the means of effort, violating and sending forth a fearless mind, whatever offense-related issue (āpattādhikaraṇaṃ) one incurs through transgression, from that transgression of his, that transgression is called "an offense-related issue (āpattādhikaraṇaṃ) that is unwholesome (akusala)."
Abyākatavārepi yaṃ cittaṃ āpattiyā aṅgaṃ hoti, tassa abhāvena ajānanto vītikkamākārena ca saddhiṃ ajānanto asañjānanto āpattiaṅgabhūtāya vītikkamacetanāya abhāvena acetetvā sañcicca maddanassa abhāvena anabhivitaritvā nirāsaṅkacittaṃ apesetvā yaṃ āpattādhikaraṇaṃ vītikkamaṃ āpajjati, tassa evaṃ vītikkamato yo vītikkamo, idaṃ vuccati ‘‘āpattādhikaraṇaṃ abyākata’’nti.
In the case of the indeterminate (abyākata) too, due to the absence of the mind that is a contributing factor to the offense (āpatti), not knowing and not knowing together with the manner of transgression, not intending due to the absence of the volition of transgression that is a contributing factor to the offense (āpatti), not violating due to the absence of intentional affliction, not sending forth a fearless mind, whatever offense-related issue (āpattādhikaraṇaṃ) one incurs through transgression, from that transgression of his, that transgression is called "an offense-related issue (āpattādhikaraṇaṃ) that is indeterminate (abyākata)."
224.Ayaṃ vivādo no adhikaraṇantiādīsu samathehi adhikaraṇīyatāya abhāvato noadhikaraṇanti evamattho veditabbo.
224.Ayaṃ vivādo no adhikaraṇanti etc., this meaning should be understood thus: Because of the absence of being subject to adjudication by the Saṅgha (samatha), it is not an issue (no adhikaraṇaṃ).
Adhikaraṇakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Discourse on Issues is Concluded.
Adhikaraṇavūpasamanasamathakathā
The Discourse on Soothing, the Settling of Issues (Adhikaraṇavūpasamanasamathakathā)
228.Yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattāti ettha catuvaggakaraṇe kamme cattāro, pañcavaggakaraṇe pañca, dasavaggakaraṇe dasa, vīsativaggakaraṇe vīsati bhikkhū kammappattāti veditabbā.
228.Yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattāti, here, it should be understood that in a transaction requiring a quorum of four, there are four monks qualified for the transaction; in a transaction requiring a quorum of five, there are five; in a transaction requiring a quorum of ten, there are ten; in a transaction requiring a quorum of twenty, there are twenty monks qualified for the transaction.
230.Supariggahitanti suṭṭhu pariggahitaṃ katvā sampaṭicchitabbaṃ. Sampaṭicchitvā ca pana ‘‘ajja bhaṇḍakaṃ dhovāma, ajja pattaṃ pacāma, ajjeko palibodho atthī’’ti mānaniggahatthāya katipāhaṃ atikkāmetabbaṃ.
230.Supariggahitanti, having very well taken hold of it, it should be accepted. Having accepted it, a few days should be allowed to pass for the sake of subduing pride, thinking, "Today we will wash the bowl-stand, today we will heat the bowl, today there is some impediment."
231.Anantāni ceva bhassāni jāyantīti aparimāṇāni ito cito ca vacanāni uppajjanti. ‘‘Bhāsānī’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho.Ubbāhikāya sammannitabboti apaloketvā vā sammannitabbo parato vuttāya ñattidutiyāya vā kammavācāya. Evaṃ sammatehi pana bhikkhūhi visuṃ vā nisīditvā tassāyeva vā parisāya ‘‘aññehi asammatehi na kiñci kathetabba’’nti sāvetvā taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vinicchitabbaṃ.
231.Anantāni ceva bhassāni jāyantīti, countless words arise from here and there. "Bhāsānī" is also a reading; the meaning is the same. Ubbāhikāya sammannitabboti, it should be appointed either after announcing it to the Saṅgha or by a motion and second, or by a formal statement, as stated later. Having been appointed thus, the monks should either sit separately or, in that same assembly, announce, "Nothing should be said by those who are not appointed," and that issue should be decided.
233.Tatrāssāti tassaṃ parisati bhaveyya.Neva suttaṃ āgatanti na mātikā āgatā.No suttavibhaṅgoti vinayopi na paguṇo.Byañjanacchāyāya atthaṃ paṭibāhatīti byañjanamattameva gahetvā atthaṃ paṭisedheti. Jātarūparajatakhettavatthupaṭiggahaṇādīsu vinayadharehi bhikkhūhi āpattiyā kāriyamāne disvā ‘‘kiṃ ime āpattiyā kāretha, ‘nanu jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hotī’ti evaṃ sutte paṭiviratimattameva vuttaṃ, natthi ettha āpattī’’ti vadati. Aparo dhammakathiko suttassa āgatattā olambetvā nivāsentānaṃ āpattiyā āropiyamānāya ‘‘kiṃ imesaṃ āpattiṃ ropetha, ‘nanu parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā’ti evaṃ sikkhākaraṇamattamevettha vuttaṃ, natthi ettha āpattī’’ti vadati.
233.Tatrāssāti, it might be in that assembly. Neva suttaṃ āgatanti, the matrix (mātikā) is not known. No suttavibhaṅgoti, nor is the Vinaya well-understood. Byañjanacchāyāya atthaṃ paṭibāhatīti, taking only the literal meaning, he rejects the meaning. Seeing the Vinaya experts dealing with an offense regarding the acceptance of gold and silver or a field, he says, "Why are you dealing with an offense? Surely, in the Sutta it is stated only 'he is one who abstains from accepting gold and silver,' there is no offense here." Another Dhamma speaker, because of his acquaintance with the Sutta, when an offense is being charged against those who hang and wear (robes), says, "Why do you charge these with an offense? Surely, here it is stated only 'a training should be done that I will wear (the robe) in a perfectly round manner,' there is no offense here."
234.Yathā bahutarā bhikkhūti ettha ekenapi adhikā bahutarāva ko pana vādo dvīhi tīhīti.
234.Yathā bahutarā bhikkhūti, here, even one more is "more numerous"; what to say of two or three?
Adhikaraṇavūpasamanasamathakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Discourse on Soothing, the Settling of Issues is Concluded.
Tividhasalākaggāhakathā
The Discourse on Taking Ballots in Three Ways (Tividhasalākaggāhakathā)
235.Saññattiyāti saññāpanatthāya.Gūḷhakantiādīsu alajjussannāya parisāya gūḷhako salākaggāho kātabbo, lajjussannāya parisāya vivaṭako, bālussannāya sakaṇṇajappako.Vaṇṇāvaṇṇāyo katvāti dhammavādīnañca adhammavādīnañca salākāyo nimittasaññaṃ āropetvā aññamaññaṃ visabhāgā kātabbā. Tato tā sabbāpi cīvarabhoge katvā vuttanayena gāhetabbā.Duggahoti paccukkaḍḍhitabbanti ‘‘duggahitā salākāyo’’ti vatvā puna gahetvā yāvatatiyaṃ gāhetabbā.Suggahoti sāvetabbanti ekasmimpi dhammavādimhi atirekajāte ‘‘suggahitā salākāyo’’ti sāvetabbaṃ. Yathā ca te dhammavādino vadanti tathā taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasametabbanti. Atha yāvatatiyampi adhammavādinova bahutarā honti, ajja ‘‘akālo, sve jānissāmā’’ti vuṭṭhahitvā alajjīnaṃ pakkhabhedatthāya dhammavādipakkhaṃ pariyesitvā punadivase salākaggāho kātabbo. Ayaṃ gūḷhako salākaggāho.
235.Saññattiyāti, for the purpose of informing. Among Gūḷhakanti etc., the taking of ballots secretly should be done in an assembly known to be shameless; the taking of ballots openly should be done in an assembly known to be modest; the whispering in the ear should be done in an assembly known to be foolish. Vaṇṇāvaṇṇāyo katvāti, having made the ballots of those who speak in accordance with the Dhamma and those who speak against the Dhamma with distinguishing marks, they should be made different from each other. Then, having placed all of those in a robe-receptacle, they should be taken in the manner stated. Duggahoti paccukkaḍḍhitabbanti, saying "The ballots are poorly taken," they should be taken again, up to three times. Suggahoti sāvetabbanti, when even one more who speaks in accordance with the Dhamma is found, it should be announced, "The ballots are well taken." And that issue should be settled as those who speak in accordance with the Dhamma say. Then, if even up to the third time, those who speak against the Dhamma are more numerous, having risen, thinking, "It is not the right time today, we will know tomorrow," seeking a faction of those who speak in accordance with the Dhamma to divide the faction of the shameless ones, the taking of ballots should be done again on the following day. This is the secret taking of ballots (gūḷhako salākaggāho).
gahite vattabboti ettha sace saṅghatthero adhammavādisalākaṃ gaṇhāti, so evaṃ avabodhetabbo – ‘‘bhante, tumhe mahallakā vayoanuppattā, tumhākaṃ etaṃ na yuttaṃ, ayaṃ pana dhammavādisalākā’’ti assa itarā salākā dassetabbā. Sace so taṃ gaṇhāti, dātabbā. Atha neva avabujjhati, tato ‘‘mā kassaci ārocehī’’ti vattabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Vivaṭako vivaṭatthoyeva.
gahite vattabboti, here, if the elder monk of the Sangha takes a ballot of those who speak against the Dhamma, he should be advised thus: "Venerable sir, you are old, you have reached old age, this is not appropriate for you; this, however, is a ballot of those who speak in accordance with the Dhamma," the other ballot should be shown to him. If he takes that, it should be given. But if he does not understand, then he should be told, "Do not tell anyone." The rest is the same as stated. Vivaṭako (open) is open in meaning.
Tividhasalākaggāhakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Discourse on Taking Ballots in Three Ways is Concluded.
Tassapāpiyasikāvinayakathā
The Discourse on the Tassapāpiyasikā Penalty (Tassapāpiyasikāvinayakathā)
238.Pārājikasāmantaṃvāti ettha methunadhamme pārājikasāmantaṃ nāma dukkaṭaṃ hoti. Adinnādānādīsu thullaccayaṃ.Nibbeṭhentanti ‘‘na sarāmī’’ti vacanena nibbeṭhayamānaṃ.Ativeṭhetīti ‘‘iṅghāyasmā’’tiādivacanehi ativeṭhiyati.Sarāmi kho ahaṃ āvusoti pārājikapaṭicchādanatthāya evaṃ paṭijānāti. Puna tena ativeṭhiyamāno ‘‘sarāmi kho’’ti paṭiññaṃ datvā ‘‘idāni maṃ nāsessantī’’ti bhayena‘‘davāya me’’tiādimāha. Etassa tassapāpiyasikākammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sace sīlavā bhavissati, vattaṃ paripūretvā paṭippassaddhiṃ labhati, no ce tathā nāsitakova bhavissati. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
238.Pārājikasāmantaṃ vāti, here, regarding sexual intercourse, the offense proximate to a Pārājika is a dukkata. Regarding theft etc., it is a thullaccaya. Nibbeṭhentanti, one who denies with the words "I do not remember." Ativeṭhetīti, he is pressed with words such as "Come now, venerable sir." Sarāmi kho ahaṃ āvusoti, he acknowledges thus for the purpose of concealing a Pārājika offense. Being pressed again by him, having given the acknowledgement "I do remember," then, fearing that "Now they will destroy me," he says ‘‘davāya me’’ti etc. The Tassapāpiyasikā penalty should be carried out against him. If he is virtuous, having fulfilled the duty, he obtains appeasement; if not, he will be destroyed. The rest is all straightforward in meaning everywhere.
Tassapāpiyasikāvinayakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Discourse on the Tassapāpiyasikā Penalty is Concluded.
Samathakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Settling is Concluded.
5. Khuddakavatthukkhandhakaṃ
5. Khuddakavatthukkhandhakaṃ
Khuddakavatthukathā
The Discourse on Minor Matters (Khuddakavatthukathā)
243.Khuddakavatthukkhandhake –mallamuṭṭhikāti muṭṭhikamallā.Gāmamuddavāti chavirāgamaṇḍanānuyuttā nāgarikamanussā. Gāmamoddavātipi pāṭho; esevattho.Thambheti nhānatitthe nikhaṇitvā ṭhapitatthambhe.
243.In the Khuddakavatthukkhandhaka – mallamuṭṭhikāti, fist-fighters. Gāmamuddavāti, laymen devoted to beautifying the complexion. Gāmamoddavātipi is also a reading; the meaning is the same. Thambheti, on pillars that have been dug in and placed in bathing places.
Kuṭṭeti iṭṭhakāsilādārukuṭṭānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ.Aṭṭāne nhāyantīti ettha aṭṭānaṃ nāma rukkhaṃ phalakaṃ viya tacchetvā aṭṭhapadākārena rājiyo chinditvā nhānatitthe nikhaṇanti, tattha cuṇṇāni ākiritvā manussā kāyaṃ ghaṃsanti.Gandhabbahatthakenāti nhānatitthe ṭhapitena dārumayahatthena, tena kira cuṇṇāni gahetvā manussā sarīraṃ ghaṃsanti.Kuruvindakasuttiyāti kuruvindakapāsāṇacuṇṇāni lākhāya bandhitvā kataguḷikakalāpako vuccati, taṃ ubhosu antesu gahetvā sarīraṃ ghaṃsanti.Viggayha parikammaṃ kārāpentīti aññamaññaṃ sarīrena sarīraṃ ghaṃsanti.Mallakaṃnāma makaradantake chinditvā mallakamūlasaṇṭhānena kataṃ mallakanti vuccati, idaṃ gilānassāpi na vaṭṭati.
Kuṭṭeti, on any one of brick, stone, or wooden walls. Aṭṭāne nhāyantīti, here, aṭṭānaṃ means a tree that has been planed like a plank, and lines are cut in the shape of an eight-pointed star and dug into the bathing place; having scattered powders there, people rub their bodies. Gandhabbahatthakenāti, with a wooden hand placed in the bathing place; it is said that people take powders with that and rub their bodies. Kuruvindakasuttiyāti, a collection of balls made by binding kuruvinda stone powder with lac is called, holding it at both ends, they rub their bodies. Viggayha parikammaṃ kārāpentīti, they rub each other's bodies. Mallakaṃnāma, that which is made in the shape of the root of a mallaka tree, having cut (ivory) into the shape of a makara's tooth, is called mallaka; this is not allowable even for the sick.
244.Akatamallakaṃnāma dante acchinditvā kataṃ, idaṃ agilānasseva na vaṭṭati; iṭṭhakākhaṇḍaṃ pana kapālakhaṇḍaṃ vā vaṭṭati.Ukkāsikanti vatthavaṭṭiṃ; tasmā nhāyantassa yassa kassaci nhānasāṭakavaṭṭiyā piṭṭhiṃ ghaṃsituṃ vaṭṭati.Puthupāṇikanti hatthaparikammaṃ vuccati, tasmā sabbesaṃ hatthena piṭṭhiparikammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
244.Akatamallakaṃnāma, that which is made without cutting the teeth, this is not allowable only for the non-sick; however, a piece of brick or a piece of pot is allowable. Ukkāsikanti, a wick of cloth; therefore, it is allowable to rub the back of anyone who is bathing with a bathing-cloth wick. Puthupāṇikanti, it is called hand massage; therefore, it is allowable for all to massage the back with the hand.
245.Vallikāti kaṇṇato nikkhantamuttolambakādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ; na kevalañca vallikā eva, yaṃkiñci kaṇṇapiḷandhanaṃ antamaso tālapaṇṇampi na vaṭṭati.Pāmaṅganti yaṃkiñci palambakasuttaṃ.Kaṇṭhasuttakanti yaṃkiñci gīvūpagaābharaṇaṃ.Kaṭisuttakanti yaṃkiñci kaṭipiḷandhanaṃ antamaso suttatantumattampi.Ovaṭṭikanti valayaṃ.Kāyūrādīni pākaṭāneva, akkhakānaṃ heṭṭhā bāhābharaṇaṃ yaṃkiñci ābharaṇaṃ na vaṭṭati.
245.Vallikāti, this is a designation for pearls etc. hanging from the ears; and not only vallikā, but any ear ornament, even a palm leaf, is not allowable. Pāmaṅganti, any hanging thread. Kaṇṭhasuttakanti, any neck ornament. Kaṭisuttakanti, any waist ornament, even just a thread. Ovaṭṭikanti, a bracelet. Kāyūrādīni are clear enough; any arm ornament below the armpit is not allowable.
246.Dumāsikaṃvā duvaṅgulaṃ vāti ettha sace kesā antodvemāse dvaṅgulaṃ pāpuṇanti, antodvemāseva chinditabbā. Dvaṅgulehi atikkāmetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sacepi na dīghā, dvemāsato ekadivasampi atikkāmetuṃ na vaṭṭatiyeva; evamayaṃ ubhayenapi ukkaṭṭhaparicchedova vutto, tato oraṃ pana navaṭṭanabhāvo nāma natthi.
246.Dumāsikaṃ vā duvaṅgulaṃ vāti, here, if the hairs reach two fingers' breadth within two months, they should be cut within two months. It is not allowable to exceed two fingers' breadth. Even if they are not long, it is not allowable to exceed two months even by one day; thus, this is stated as an upper limit with both (measurements), therefore, there is no such thing as not being allowable below that.
Kocchena osaṇṭhentīti kocchena olikhitvā sannisīdāpenti.Phaṇakenāti dantamayādīsu yena kenaci.Hatthaphaṇakenāti hattheneva phaṇakiccaṃ karontā aṅgulīhi osaṇṭhenti.Sitthatelakenāti madhusitthakaniyyāsādīsu yena kenaci cikkalena.Udakatelakenāti udakamissakena telena. Maṇḍanatthāya sabbattha dukkaṭaṃ, uddhalomena pana anulomanipātanatthaṃ hatthaṃ temetvā sīsaṃ puñchitabbaṃ. Uṇhābhitattarajasirānampi allahatthena puñchituṃ vaṭṭati.
Kocchena osaṇṭhentīti, they smooth it down by scraping with a kocca. Phaṇakenāti, with any (comb) made of ivory etc. Hatthaphaṇakenāti, smoothing down with the fingers, doing the work of a comb with the hand. Sitthatelakenāti, with any greasy substance such as beeswax, honey or resin. Udakatelakenāti, with oil mixed with water. Everywhere it is a dukkata for the sake of adornment, but for the purpose of applying in the direction of the hair for the sake of removing dirt, the head should be wiped after wetting the hand. It is also allowable to wipe the hot, inflamed and dirty head with a damp hand.
247.Na bhikkhave ādāse vā udakapatte vāti ettha kaṃsapattādīnipi yesu mukhanimittaṃ paññāyati, sabbāni ādāsasaṅkhameva gacchanti. Kañjiyādīnipi ca udakapattasaṅkhameva. Tasmā yattha katthaci olokentassa dukkaṭaṃ.Ābādhapaccayāti ‘‘sañchavi nu kho me vaṇo, udāhu na tāvā’’ti jānanatthaṃ; ‘‘jiṇṇo nu khomhi no’’ti evaṃ āyusaṅkhāraṃ olokanatthampi vaṭṭatīti vuttaṃ.
247.Na bhikkhave ādāse vā udakapatte vāti, here, even bronze bowls etc., in which the reflection of the face is visible, all go under the heading of "mirror." And even kanji etc., go under the heading of "water bowl." Therefore, it is a dukkata for one who looks at his reflection anywhere. Ābādhapaccayāti, for the purpose of knowing "Is my wound healed, or not yet?"; it is said that it is also allowable for the purpose of observing the life-force, thinking "Am I old or not?"
Mukhaṃ ālimpantīti vippasannachavirāgakarehi mukhālepanehi ālimpanti.Ummaddentīti nānāummaddanehi ummaddenti.Cuṇṇentīti mukhacuṇṇakena makkhenti.Manosilikāya mukhaṃ lañchentīti manosilāya tilakādīni lañchanāni karonti, tāni haritālādīhipi na vaṭṭantiyeva.Aṅgarāgādayo pākaṭāyeva. Sabbattha dukkaṭaṃ.
Mukhaṃ ālimpantīti, they smear the face with face ointments that are clear in complexion and create a desire. Ummaddentīti, they massage with various massage-ointments. Cuṇṇentīti, they anoint with face powder. Manosilikāya mukhaṃ lañchentīti, they make marks such as tilakas on the face with orpiment; those are not allowable even with haritāla etc. Aṅgarāgādayo are clear enough. Everywhere it is a dukkata.
248.Nabhikkhave naccaṃ vātiādīsu yaṃkiñci naccaṃ antamaso moranaccampi dassanāya gacchantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Sayampi naccantassa vā naccāpentassa vā dukkaṭameva.Gītampiyaṃkiñci naṭagītaṃ vā sādhugītaṃ vā antamaso dantagītampi ‘‘yaṃ gāyissāmā’’ti pubbabhāge okūjantā karonti, etampi na vaṭṭati. Sayaṃ gāyantassāpi gāyāpentassāpi dukkaṭameva.Vāditampiyaṃkiñci na vaṭṭati. Yaṃ pana niṭṭhubhanto vā sāsaṅke vā ṭhito accharikaṃ vā phoṭeti, pāṇiṃ vā paharati, tattha anāpatti. Sabbaṃ antarārāme ṭhitassa passato anāpatti. ‘‘Passissāmī’’ti vihārato vihāraṃ gacchantassa āpattiyeva. Āsanasālāya nisinno passati, anāpatti. ‘‘Passissāmī’’ti uṭṭhahitvā gacchato āpatti. Vīthiyaṃ ṭhatvā gīvaṃ parivattetvā passatopi āpattiyeva.
248. In Na bhikkhave naccaṃ vā etc., for anyone going to see any kind of dance, even a peacock dance, there is a dukkata offense. For oneself dancing or having someone else dance, it is also a dukkata offense. Gītampi: any kind of stage song or refined song, even humming through the teeth, which they do making a preliminary humming sound, thinking "we will sing this," even this is not allowed. For oneself singing or having someone else sing, it is a dukkata offense. Vāditampi: any kind of musical instrument is not allowed. But there is no offense for one who, while clearing the throat or standing nervously, snaps the fingers, or claps the hands. For one standing within the inner monastery, there is no offense in seeing all this. For one going from monastery to monastery thinking, "I will watch," there is an offense. If one is sitting in the assembly hall and sees it, there is no offense. If one gets up thinking, "I will watch" and goes, there is an offense. If one stands in the street and turns the neck to watch, there is also an offense.
249.Sarakuttinti sarakiriyaṃ.Bhaṅgo hotīti aladdhaṃ uppādetuṃ na sakkoti; laddhaṃ samāpajjituṃ.Pacchimā janatāti amhākaṃ ācariyāpi upajjhāyāpi evaṃ gāyiṃsūti pacchimo jano diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjati; tatheva gāyati.Na bhikkhave āyatakenāti ettha āyatako nāma taṃ taṃ vattaṃ bhinditvā akkharāni vināsetvā pavatto. Dhamme pana suttantavattaṃ nāma atthi, jātakavattaṃ nāma atthi, gāthāvattaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ vināsetvā atidīghaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Caturassena vattena parimaṇḍalāni padabyañjanāni dassetabbāni.Sarabhaññanti sarena bhaṇanaṃ. Sarabhaññe kira taraṅgavattadhotakavattagalitavattādīni dvattiṃsa vattāni atthi. Tesu yaṃ icchati, taṃ kātuṃ labhati. Sabbesaṃ padabyañjanaṃ avināsetvā vikāraṃ akatvā samaṇasāruppena caturassena nayena pavattanaṃyeva lakkhaṇaṃ.
249. Sarakutti means manipulating the voice. Bhaṅgo hotī: one is not able to produce what has not been obtained; to master what has been obtained. Pacchimā janatā: the later people follow what they have seen, thinking, "Our teachers and preceptors sang like this;" they sing in the same way. Na bhikkhave āyatakenā: here, āyatako is so called because it proceeds by breaking that particular meter and destroying the syllables. But in the Dhamma, there is the suttantavatta meter, there is the jātakavatta meter, there is the gāthāvatta meter; it is not allowed to destroy that and make it excessively long. Syllables and letters should be displayed with roundness in a square meter. Sarabhañña means reciting with intonation. It is said that in sarabhañña there are thirty-two meters, such as taraṅgavatta, dhotakavatta, galitavatta, etc. One is allowed to do whichever one wishes. The characteristic of all is to proceed in a mannerly and square way, without destroying the syllables and letters, without making alterations, in a way that is appropriate for a samaṇa.
Bāhiralomiṃ uṇṇinti uṇṇalomāni bahi katvā uṇṇapāvāraṃ pārupanti; tathā dhārentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Lomāni anto katvā pārupituṃ vaṭṭati.Samaṇakappakathābhūtagāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttā.
Bāhiralomiṃ uṇṇi: turning the woolly side outwards, they wear woollen cloaks; there is a dukkata offense for one wearing it thus. It is allowed to wear it turning the wool inwards. Samaṇakappakathā was stated in the description of the bhūtagāmasikkhāpada.
251.Na bhikkhave attano aṅgajātanti aṅgajātaṃ chindantasseva thullaccayaṃ. Aññaṃ pana kaṇṇanāsāaṅguliādiṃ yaṃkiñci chindantassa tādisaṃ vā dukkhaṃ uppādentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Ahikīṭadaṭṭhādīsu pana aññaābādhapaccayā vā lohitaṃ vā mocentassa chindantassa vā anāpatti.
251. Na bhikkhave attano aṅgajāta: for one who cuts off his own sexual organ, there is a thullaccaya offense. But for one who cuts off anything else, such as an ear, nose, finger, etc., or causes similar pain, there is a dukkata offense. But if blood is let or something is cut off due to a snake bite, insect bite, or other illness, there is no offense.
252.Candanagaṇṭhi uppannāhotīti candanaghaṭikā uppannā hoti. So kira uddhañca adho ca jālāni parikkhipāpetvā gaṅgāya nadiyā kīḷati, tassa nadīsotena vuyhamānā candanagaṇṭhi āgantvā jāle laggā, tamassa purisā āharitvā adaṃsu; evaṃ sā uppannā hoti.Iddhipāṭihāriyanti ettha vikubbaniddhipāṭihāriyaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ, adhiṭṭhāniddhi pana appaṭikkhittāti veditabbā.
252. Candanagaṇṭhi uppannā hotī: a piece of sandalwood arose. It seems that he was playing in the Ganges river, having surrounded the place with nets both above and below, a piece of sandalwood drifting with the river current came and got caught in the net, and his men brought it to him; thus, it arose. Iddhipāṭihāriya: here, the magical power of transformation is prohibited, but the magical power of resolution should be understood as not prohibited.
Na bhikkhave sovaṇṇamayo pattotiādīsu sacepi gihī bhattagge suvaṇṇataṭṭikādīsu byañjanaṃ katvā upanāmenti, āmasitumpi na vaṭṭati. Phalikamayakācamayakaṃsamayāni pana taṭṭikādīni bhājanāni puggalikaparibhogeneva na vaṭṭanti, saṅghikaparibhogena vā gihivikaṭāni vā vaṭṭanti. ‘‘Tambalohamayopi pattova na vaṭṭati, thālakaṃ pana vaṭṭatī’’ti idaṃ sabbaṃ kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ.Maṇimayoti ettha pana indanīlādimaṇimayo vutto.Kaṃsamayoti ettha vaṭṭalohamayopi saṅgahito.
Na bhikkhave sovaṇṇamayo patto etc., even if lay people prepare dishes in golden bowls etc., in the dining hall and offer them, it is not allowed to even touch them. But bowls etc., made of crystal, glass, or bronze are not allowed for individual use, but are allowed for communal use or if given by lay people. In the Kurundi it is said, "A bowl made of copper is also not allowed, but a plate is allowed." Maṇimayo: here, it refers to bowls made of precious stones such as sapphire, etc. Kaṃsamayo: here, those made of white bronze are also included.
253.Likhitunti tanukaraṇatthāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Pakatimaṇḍalanti makaradantacchinnakamaṇḍalameva.
253. Likhituṃ: this was said for the purpose of making it thinner. Pakatimaṇḍalaṃ: it is the same as a makaradantacchinnakamaṇḍala.
254.Āvaṭṭitvāti aññamaññaṃ paharitvā.Pattādhārakanti ettha ‘‘dantavallivettādīhi kate bhūmiādhārake tayo, dāruādhārake dve patte uparūpari ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘bhūmiādhārake tiṇṇaṃ pattānaṃ anokāso, dve ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Dāruādhārakadaṇḍādhārakesupi susajjitesu eseva nayo. Bhamakoṭisadiso pana dāruādhārako tīhi daṇḍakehi baddho daṇḍakādhāro ca ekassapi pattassa anokāso, tattha ṭhapetvāpi hatthena gahetvā eva nisīditabbaṃ. Bhūmiyaṃ pana nikkujjitvā ekameva ṭhapetabba’’nti.
254. Āvaṭṭitvā: striking against each other. Pattādhāraka: here, in the Kurundi it is said, "It is allowed to place three bowls one above the other on a ground stand made of bamboo, vine, or rattan, or two bowls on a wooden stand." But in the Great Commentary it is said: "There is no space for three bowls on a ground stand, it is allowed to place two. This same method applies to well-arranged wooden stands and pole stands. But a wooden stand resembling a spinning top, tied with three sticks, and a pole stand do not allow even one bowl; even having placed it there, one should sit holding it with the hand. But on the ground, only one should be placed upside down."
Miḍḍhanteti ālindakamiḍḍhikādīnaṃ ante. Sace pana parivattetvā tattheva patiṭṭhāti, evarūpāya vitthiṇṇāya miḍḍhiyā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati.Paribhaṇḍanteti bāhirapasse katāya tanukamiḍḍhikāya ante. Miḍḍhiyaṃ vuttanayenevetthāpi vinicchayo veditabbo.
Miḍḍhante: at the edge of the verandah wall, etc. If it stays there turning around in the same place, it is allowed to place it on such a wide wall. Paribhaṇḍante: at the edge of a thin wall made on the outer side. The decision here should be understood in the same way as stated for the wall.
Coḷakanti yaṃ pattharitvā patto ṭhapīyati; tasmiṃ pana asati kaṭasārake vā taṭṭikāya vā mattikāparibhaṇḍakatāya bhūmiyā vā yattha na dussati, tathārūpāya vālikāya vā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Paṃsurajādīsu pana kharabhūmiyaṃ vā ṭhapentassa dukkaṭaṃ.Pattamāḷakaṃiṭṭhakāhi vā dārūhi vā kātuṃ vaṭṭati.Pattakuṇḍolikāti mahāmukhakuṇḍasaṇṭhānā bhaṇḍakukkhalikā vuccati.Yo laggeyyāti yattha katthaci laggentassa dukkaṭameva. Cīvaravaṃsepi bandhitvā ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Bhaṇḍakaṭṭhapanatthameva vā kataṃ hotu nisīdanasayanatthaṃ vā yattha katthaci mañce vā pīṭhe vā ṭhapentassa dukkaṭaṃ, aññena pana bhaṇḍakena saddhiṃ bandhitvā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Aṭaniyaṃ bandhitvā olambetuṃ vā vaṭṭati, bandhitvāpi upari ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭatiyeva. Sace pana mañco vā pīṭhaṃ vā ukkhipitvā cīvaravaṃsādīsu aṭṭakachannena ṭhapitaṃ hoti, tattha ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Aṃsavaddhanakena aṃsakūṭe laggetvā aṅke ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Chatte bhattapūropi aṃsakūṭe laggitapattopi ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭati, bhaṇḍakena pana saddhiṃ bandhitvā vā aṭṭakaṃ katvā vā ṭhapite yo koci ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati.
Coḷaka: that which is spread out on which the bowl is placed; but when that is not available, it is allowed to place it on a mat, a plate, the ground prepared with clay, or on such sand where it will not get dirty. But there is a dukkata offense for one placing it on dust, etc., or on hard ground. Pattamāḷakaṃ: it is allowed to make it with bricks or wood. Pattakuṇḍolikā means a vessel shaped like a large-mouthed pot. Yo laggeyyā: there is a dukkata offense for one who hangs it anywhere. It is not allowed to tie it and place it even on a robe rack. It may be made only for the purpose of placing items, or for sitting or lying down; there is a dukkata offense for one placing it anywhere on a bed or seat, but it is allowed to tie it and place it together with other items. It is allowed to hang it tying it to a rafter, but it is definitely not allowed to place it on top even tying it. But if a bed or seat is lifted up and placed covered by a rafter or robe rack, then it is allowed to place it there. It is allowed to hang it on the shoulder hook with a shoulder strap and place it on the lap. It is not allowed to place even a rice-filled bowl or a bowl hung on a shoulder hook on an umbrella, but if it is placed tying it together with an item or making a rafter, anyone is allowed to place it.
255.Pattahatthenāti ettha na kevalaṃ yassa patto hatthe, so eva pattahattho, na kevalañca kavāṭameva paṇāmetuṃ na labhati; apica kho pana hatthe vā piṭṭhipāde vā yattha katthaci sarīrāvayave pattasmiṃ sati hatthena vā pādena vā sīsena vā yena kenaci sarīrāvayavena kavāṭaṃ vā paṇāmetuṃ ghaṭikaṃ vā ukkhipituṃ sūciṃ vā kuñcikāya apāpurituṃ na labhati. Aṃsakūṭe pana pattaṃ laggetvā yathāsukhaṃ avāpurituṃ labhati.
255. Pattahatthenā: here, not only the one whose bowl is in hand, is called pattahattho, and it is not only that one cannot move the door; but also, when the bowl is in the hand or on the back, foot, or anywhere on the body, one cannot move the door or lift the water clock or open the lock with the key with the hand, foot, head, or any part of the body. But it is allowed to open it as one pleases hanging the bowl on the shoulder hook.
Tumbakaṭāhanti lābukaṭāhaṃ vuccati, taṃ pariharituṃ na vaṭṭati. Labhitvā pana tāvakālikaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Ghaṭikaṭāhepi eseva nayo.Ghaṭikaṭāhanti ghaṭikapālaṃ.Abhuṃ meti utrāsavacanametaṃ.Sabbapaṃsukūlikenāti ettha cīvarañca mañcapīṭhañca paṃsukūlaṃ vaṭṭati, ajjhoharaṇīyaṃ pana dinnakameva gahetabbaṃ.
Tumbakaṭāha: means a bowl made of gourd, it is not allowed to keep that. But having obtained it, it is allowed to use it temporarily. The same method applies to a bowl made of pot. Ghaṭikaṭāha: means a piece of a pot. Abhuṃ me: this is a word of fear. Sabbapaṃsukūlikenā: here, both a robe and a bed or seat are allowed as paṃsukūla, but the ajjhoharaṇīya must be taken only if it has been given.
Calakānīti cabbetvā apaviddhāmisāni.Aṭṭhikānīti macchamaṃsaaṭṭhikāni.Ucchiṭṭhodakanti mukhavikkhālanodakaṃ. Etesu yaṃkiñci pattena nīharantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Pattaṃ paṭiggahaṃ katvā hatthaṃ dhovitumpi na labhati. Hatthadhotapādadhotaudakampi patte ākiritvā nīharituṃ na vaṭṭati. Anucchiṭṭhaṃ suddhapattaṃ ucchiṭṭhahatthena gaṇhituṃ na vaṭṭati, vāmahatthena panettha udakaṃ āsiñcitvā ekaṃ udakagaṇḍusaṃ gahetvā ucchiṭṭhahatthena gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Ettāvatāpi hi so ucchiṭṭhapatto hoti, hatthaṃ pana bahi udakena vikkhāletvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Macchamaṃsaphalāphalādīni khādanto yaṃ tattha aṭṭhiṃ vā calakaṃ vā chaḍḍetukāmo hoti, taṃ patte ṭhapetuṃ na labhati. Yaṃ pana paṭikhāditukāmo hoti, taṃ patte ṭhapetuṃ labhati. Aṭṭhikakaṇṭakādīni tattheva katvā hatthena luñcitvā khādituṃ vaṭṭati. Mukhato nīhaṭaṃ pana yaṃkiñci puna khāditukāmo hoti, taṃ patte ṭhapetuṃ na labhati. Siṅgiveranāḷikerakhaṇḍāni ḍaṃsitvā puna ṭhapetuṃ labhati.
Calakānī: bits of food that have been chewed and spat out. Aṭṭhikānī: fish and meat bones. Ucchiṭṭhodaka: water used for rinsing the mouth. There is a dukkata offense for one removing any of these with the bowl. It is not allowed to make the bowl a receptacle and wash the hands. It is not allowed to pour water used for washing hands and feet into the bowl and remove it. It is not allowed to take an unused clean bowl with a used hand, but it is allowed to pour water into it with the left hand and take a handful of water and take it with a used hand. For even that much makes it a used bowl, but it is allowed to wash the hand outside with water and take it. When eating fish, meat, fruits, etc., one who wants to throw away a bone or a bit of food there, is not allowed to place it in the bowl. But it is allowed to place in the bowl what one wants to eat again. It is allowed to make bones, thorns, etc., there and pluck and eat them with the hand. But anything brought out from the mouth that one wants to eat again, is not allowed to place in the bowl. It is allowed to bite off pieces of ginger and coconut and put them back.
256.Namatakanti satthakaveṭhanakaṃ pilotikakhaṇḍaṃ.Daṇḍasatthakanti pipphalakaṃ vā aññampi vā yaṃkiñci daṇḍaṃ yojetvā katasatthakaṃ.
256. Namataka: means a cloth scrap for wrapping a razor. Daṇḍasatthaka: a razor made by joining a stalk of pipphali or any other stick.
Kaṇṇakitā hontīti malaggahitā honti.Kiṇṇena pūretunti kiṇṇacuṇṇena pūretuṃ.Sattuyāti haliddimissakena piṭṭhacuṇṇena.Saritakanti pāsāṇacuṇṇaṃ vuccati; tena pūretuṃ anujānāmīti attho.Madhusitthakena sāretunti madhusitthakena makkhetuṃ.Saritakaṃ paribhijjatīti taṃ makkhitamadhusitthakaṃ bhijjati.Saritasipāṭikanti madhusitthakapilotikaṃ; satthakosakasipāṭiyā pana saritasipāṭikāya anulomāti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ.Kathinanti nisseṇimpi tattha attharitabbakaṭasārakakilañjānaṃ aññatarampi.Kathinarajjunti yāya dupaṭṭacīvaraṃ sibbantā kathine cīvarampi bandhanti.Kathinaṃ nappahotīti dīghassa bhikkhuno pamāṇena kataṃ kathinaṃ; tattha rassassa bhikkhuno cīvaraṃ patthariyamānaṃ nappahoti, antoyeva hoti; daṇḍake na pāpuṇātīti attho.Daṇḍakathinanti tassa majjhe itarassa bhikkhuno pamāṇena aññaṃ nisseṇiṃ bandhituṃ anujānāmīti attho.
Kaṇṇakitā hontī: they become soiled with dirt. Kiṇṇena pūretu: to fill it with kiṇṇa flour. Sattuyā: with flour mixed with turmeric. Saritaka: means powdered stone; the meaning is that I allow it to be filled with that. Madhusitthakena sāretu: to smear it with honey wax. Saritakaṃ paribhijjatī: that smeared honey wax breaks. Saritasipāṭika: honey wax cloth; but in the Kurundi it is said that a cloth bag of razors is in accordance with a honey wax cloth. Kathina: either a ladder or one of the mats spread there or a seat made of leaves. Kathinarajju: the rope with which they tie the robe to the kathina while sewing a double robe. Kathinaṃ nappahotī: a kathina made according to the size of a tall bhikkhu; when a robe of a short bhikkhu is spread on it, it is not sufficient, it is only inside; it does not reach the rod, that is the meaning. Daṇḍakathina: I allow another ladder to be tied in the middle of that according to the size of the other bhikkhu.
Bidalakanti daṇḍakathinappamāṇena kaṭasārakassa pariyante paṭisaṃharitvā duguṇakaraṇaṃ.Salākanti dupaṭṭacīvarassa antare pavesanasalākaṃ.Vinandhanarajjunti mahānisseṇiyā saddhiṃ khuddakaṃ nisseṇiṃ vinandhituṃ rajjuṃ.Vinandhanasuttanti khuddakanisseṇiyā cīvaraṃ vinandhituṃ suttakaṃ.Vinandhitvā cīvaraṃ sibbetunti tena suttakena tattha cīvaraṃ vinandhitvā sibbituṃ.Visamā hontīti kāci khuddakā honti, kāci mahantā.Kaḷimbhakanti pamāṇasaññākaraṇaṃ yaṃkiñci tālapaṇṇādiṃ.Moghasuttakanti vaḍḍhakīnaṃ dārūsu kāḷasuttena viya haliddisuttena saññākaraṇaṃ.Aṅguliyā paṭiggaṇhantīti sūcimukhaṃ aṅguliyā paṭicchanti.Paṭiggahanti aṅgulikosakaṃ.
Bidalaka: folding the edge of the mat back and forth according to the size of the rod-kathina. Salāka: the pin inserted between the folds of a double robe. Vinandhanarajju: a rope for tying a small ladder together with a large ladder. Vinandhanasutta: a thread for tying a robe to a small ladder. Vinandhitvā cīvaraṃ sibbetu: to sew the robe there after tying it with that thread. Visamā hontī: some are small, some are large. Kaḷimbhaka: any palm leaf, etc., for marking the size. Moghasuttaka: marking with a turmeric thread, like carpenters do on wood with black thread. Aṅguliyā paṭiggaṇhantī: they cover the eye of the needle with a finger. Paṭiggaha: a finger stall.
257.Āvesanavitthakaṃnāma yaṃkiñci pāticaṅkoṭakādi.Uccavatthukanti paṃsuṃ ākiritvā uccavatthukaṃ kātuṃ anujānāmīti attho.Ogumphetvā ullittāvalittaṃ kātunti chadanaṃ odhunitvā ghanadaṇḍakaṃ katvā anto ceva bahi ca mattikāya limpitunti attho.Goghaṃsikāyāti veḷuṃ vā rukkhadaṇḍaṃ vā antokatvā tena saddhiṃ saṅgharitunti attho.Bandhanarajjunti tathā saṅgharitassa bandhanarajjuṃ.
257. Āvesanavitthakaṃ means any screen, awning, etc. Uccavatthukaṃ: the meaning is that I allow making a high base by piling up sand. Ogumphetvā ullittāvalittaṃ kātuṃ: the meaning is to remove the covering, make a thick pole, and plaster it with clay both inside and outside. Goghaṃsikāyā: entwining it together with bamboo or a wooden pole by inserting it inside. Bandhanarajju: a binding rope for one who entwines thus.
258.Kaṭacchuparissāvanaṃnāma tīsu daṇḍakesu vinandhitvā kataṃ.
258. Kaṭacchuparissāvanaṃ means one made by tying it to three sticks.
259.Yo na dadeyyāti aparissāvanakasseva yo na dadāti, tassa āpatti. Yo pana attano hatthe parissāvane vijjamānepi yācati, tassa na akāmā dātabbaṃ.Daṇḍaparissāvananti rajakānaṃ khāraparissāvanaṃ viya catūsu pādesu baddhanisseṇikāya sāṭakaṃ bandhitvā majjhedaṇḍake udakaṃ āsiñcitabbaṃ, taṃ ubhopi koṭṭhāse pūretvā parissavati.Ottharakaṃnāma yaṃ udake ottharitvā ghaṭakena udakaṃ gaṇhanti, tañhi catūsu daṇḍakesu vatthaṃ bandhitvā udake cattāro khāṇuke nikhaṇitvā tesu bandhitvā sabbapariyante udakato mocetvā majjhe ottharitvā ghaṭena udakaṃ gaṇhanti.Makasakuṭikāti cīvarakuṭikā vuccati.
259. Yo na dadeyyāti: Whoever does not give (water) with a filter, thinking it's only for impure water, commits an offense. But if someone asks for it even though they have a water filter in their own hand, it should not be given unwillingly. Daṇḍaparissāvananti: Like the alkali-filtering cloth of the dyers, a cloth is tied to a ladder fastened to four legs, and water is poured into the middle pole, filling both compartments and filtering through. Ottharakaṃ nāma: That which is submerged in water and used to draw water with a pot; cloth is tied to four poles, the four stakes are driven into the water, tied to them, and after freeing all the edges from the water, it is submerged in the middle, and water is drawn with a pot. Makasakuṭikāti: It is called a dwelling for robes.
260.Abhisannakāyāti semhādidosussannakāyā.Aggaḷavaṭṭināma dvārabāhāya samappamāṇoyeva aggaḷatthambho vuccati, yattha tīṇi cattāri chiddāni katvā sūciyo denti.Kapisīsakaṃnāma dvārabāhaṃ vijjhitvā tattha pavesito aggaḷapāsako vuccati.Sūcikāti tattha majjhe chiddaṃ katvā pavesitā.Ghaṭikāti upari yojitā.Maṇḍalikaṃ kātunti nīcavatthukaṃ cinituṃ.Dhūmanettanti dhūmanikkhamanachiddaṃ.Vāsetunti gandhena vāsetuṃ.Udakaṭṭhānanti udakatthapanaṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha ghaṭena udakaṃ ṭhapetvā sarāvakena vaḷañjetabbaṃ.Koṭṭhakoti dvārakoṭṭhako.
260. Abhisannakāyāti: A body overwhelmed by phlegm and other humors. Aggaḷavaṭṭi nāma: The doorpost that is exactly the same size as the doorframe is called aggaḷatthambho, where three or four holes are made and pegs are inserted. Kapisīsakaṃ nāma: The bolt-loop inserted after piercing the doorframe is called aggaḷapāsako. Sūcikāti: That which is inserted after making a hole in the middle. Ghaṭikāti: That which is attached above. Maṇḍalikaṃ kātunti: To build a low foundation. Dhūmanettanti: A hole for smoke to escape. Vāsetunti: To scent with fragrance. Udakaṭṭhānanti: A place for setting up water. There, water should be placed in a pot and covered with a potsherd. Koṭṭhakoti: A door socket.
261.Tissopaṭicchādiyoti ettha jantāgharapaṭicchādi ca udakapaṭicchādi ca parikammaṃ karontasseva vaṭṭati, sesesu abhivādanādīsu na vaṭṭati. Vatthapaṭicchādi sabbakammesu vaṭṭati.Udakaṃ na hotīti nhānodakaṃ na hoti.
261. Tisso paṭicchādiyoti: Here, the cover for the hot room and the cover for the water are suitable only while one is preparing them; in other situations, such as salutations, they are not suitable. A cloth cover is suitable for all activities. Udakaṃ na hotīti: There is no bathing water.
262.Tulanti paṇṇikānaṃ viya udakaubbāhanakatulaṃ.Karakaṭakovuccati goṇe vā yojetvā hatthehi vā gahetvā dīghavarattādīhi ākaḍḍhanayantaṃ.Cakkavaṭṭakanti arahaṭaghaṭiyantaṃ.Cammakhaṇḍaṃnāma tulāya vā karakaṭake vā yojetabbakaṃ cammabhājanaṃ.Pākaṭā hotīti aparikkhittā hoti.Udakapuñchanīti daṇḍamayāpi visāṇamayāpi dārumayāpi vaṭṭati, tassā asati coḷakenāpi udakaṃ paccuddharituṃ vaṭṭati.
262. Tulanti: A well sweep like those of the irrigation workers. Karakaṭakovuccati: A device for drawing water, which is connected to a yoke or held by hand and pulled with a long rope, etc. Cakkavaṭṭakanti: The wheel of a well pulley. Cammakhaṇḍaṃ nāma: A leather container to be attached to the well sweep or water drawing device. Pākaṭā hotīti: It is uncovered. Udakapuñchanīti: A water scoop made of wood, horn, or ivory is suitable; if that is not available, it is permissible to draw water out with a cloth.
263.Udakamātikanti udakassa āgamanamātikaṃ.Nillekhajantāgharaṃnāma āviddhapakkhapāsakaṃ vuccati, gopānasīnaṃ upari maṇḍale pakkhapāsake ṭhapetvā katakūṭacchadanassetaṃ nāmaṃ.Cātumāsaṃ nisīdanenāti nisīdanena cattāro māse na vippavasitabbanti attho.
263. Udakamātikanti: The source from which water comes. Nillekhajantāgharaṃ nāma: It is called a hot room with revolving side panels; this name refers to a roof made by placing side panels on the top of the gopānasīs and creating a covered structure. Cātumāsaṃ nisīdanenāti: It means that one should not live apart from the sitting cloth for four months.
264.Pupphābhikiṇṇesūti pupphehi santhatesu.Namatakaṃnāma eḷakalomehi kataṃ avāyimaṃ cammakhaṇḍaparihārena paribhuñjitabbaṃ.Āsittakūpadhānaṃnāma tambalohena vā rajatena vā katāya peḷāya etaṃ adhivacanaṃ, paṭikkhittattā pana dārumayāpi na vaṭṭati.Maḷorikāti daṇḍadhārako vuccati. Yaṭṭhiādhārakapaṇṇādhārakapacchikapiṭṭhānipi ettheva paviṭṭhāni. Ādhārakasaṅkhepagamanato hi paṭṭhāya chiddaṃ viddhampi aviddhampi vaṭṭatiyeva.Ekabhājaneti ettha sace eko bhikkhu bhājanato phalaṃ vā pūvaṃ vā gahetvā gacchati, tasmiṃ apagate itarassa sesakaṃ bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Itarassāpi tasmiṃ khīṇe puna gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.
264. Pupphābhikiṇṇesūti: On those strewn with flowers. Namatakaṃ nāma: That which is made of sheep's wool, unwoven, and to be used without a piece of leather as a substitute. Āsittakūpadhānaṃ nāma: This is a term for a box made of copper or silver, but because it is prohibited, even one made of wood is not suitable. Maḷorikāti: It is called a staff holder. Stands for walking sticks, stands for leaves, and back supports for bags are also included here. From the beginning of the summary of supports, whether pierced with a hole or not, it is suitable. Ekabhājaneti: Here, if one monk takes fruit or cake from the bowl and leaves, it is permissible for the other to eat the remainder. And it is permissible for the other to take more again when that is finished.
265.Aṭṭhahaṅgehīti ettha ekekenapi aṅgena samannāgatassa antosīmāya vā nissīmaṃ gantvā nadīādīsu vā nikkujjituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Evaṃ nikkujjite pana patte tassa gehe koci deyyadhammo na gahetabbo – ‘‘asukassa gehe bhikkhaṃ mā gaṇhitthā’’ti aññesu vihāresupi pesetabbaṃ. Ukkujjanakāle pana yāvatatiyaṃ yācāpetvā hatthapāsaṃ vijahāpetvā ñattidutiyakammena ukkujjitabbo.
265. Aṭṭhahaṅgehīti: Here, even if one possesses even one of the eight factors, it is permissible to go beyond the boundary or to overturn it in rivers etc. However, if it is overturned in this way, no donation should be accepted in that person's house—a message should be sent to other monasteries: "Do not accept alms in so-and-so's house." But at the time of overturning it, after asking three times and causing the hand to move away, it should be overturned with a formal act with motion and one announcement.
268.Purakkhatvāti aggato katvā.Saṃharantūti saṃhariyantu.Celapaṭikanti celasantharaṃ. So kira ‘‘sace ahaṃ puttaṃ lacchāmi, akkamissati me bhagavā celapaṭika’’nti iminā ajjhāsayena santhari, abhabbo cesa puttalābhāya; tasmā bhagavā na akkami. Yadi akkameyya, pacchā puttaṃ alabhanto ‘‘nāyaṃ sabbaññū’’ti diṭṭhiṃ gaṇheyya. Idaṃ tāva bhagavato anakkamane kāraṇaṃ. Yasmā pana bhikkhūpi ye ajānantā akkameyyuṃ, te gihīnaṃ paribhūtā bhaveyyuṃ; tasmā bhikkhū paribhavato mocetuṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapesi. Idaṃ sikkhāpadapaññāpane kāraṇaṃ.
268. Purakkhatvāti: Having placed it in front. Saṃharantūti: Let them collect it. Celapaṭikanti: A cloth spread. It seems he spread it with the intention, "If I get a son, the Blessed One will step on my celapaṭika," but he was incapable of getting a son; therefore, the Blessed One did not step on it. If he had stepped on it, later, not getting a son, he would have taken up the view, "This one is not all-knowing." This, firstly, is the reason for the Blessed One not stepping on it. But because monks who stepped on it without knowing would be despised by the householders; therefore, to free the monks from contempt, he laid down the training rule. This is the reason for laying down the training rule.
Maṅgalatthāya yāciyamānenāti apagatagabbhā vā hotu garugabbhā vā, evarūpesu ṭhānesu maṅgalatthāya yāciyamānena akkamituṃ vaṭṭati.Dhotapādakaṃnāma pādadhovanaṭṭhāne dhotehi pādehi akkamanatthāya paccattharaṇaṃ atthataṃ hoti, taṃ akkamituṃ vaṭṭati.
Maṅgalatthāya yāciyamānenāti: Whether the womb has disappeared or there is a difficult pregnancy, in such situations, it is permissible to step on it when requested for the sake of a blessing. Dhotapādakaṃ nāma: At the foot-washing place, a cloth is spread out to step on with washed feet, it is permissible to step on that.
269.Katakaṃnāma padumakaṇṇikākāraṃ pādaghaṃsanatthaṃ kaṇṭake uṭṭhāpetvā kataṃ. Taṃ vaṭṭaṃ vā hotu caturassādibhedaṃ vā, bāhulikānuyogattā paṭikkhittameva, neva paṭiggahetuṃ na paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.Sakkharāti pāsāṇo vuccati; pāsāṇapheṇakopi vaṭṭati.Vidhūpananti vījanī vuccati. Tālavaṇṭaṃ pana tālapaṇṇehi vā kataṃ hotu veḷudantavilīvehi vā morapiñchehi vā cammavikatīhi vā sabbaṃ vaṭṭati.Makasabījanīdantamayavisāṇamayadaṇḍakāpi vaṭṭati, vākamayabījaniyā ketakapārohakuntālapaṇṇādimayāpi saṅgahitā.
269. Katakaṃ nāma: Made in the shape of a lotus pericarp, with thorns raised for rubbing the feet. Whether it is round or of various shapes such as square, it is prohibited because of excessive indulgence; it is not permissible either to accept or to use it. Sakkharāti: It is called stone; a pumice stone is also suitable. Vidhūpananti: It is called a fan. But a palm fan, whether made of palm leaves, bamboo splints, peacock feathers, or strips of leather, is all suitable. Makasabījanī: A fan with a handle made of ivory or horn is also suitable; fans made of bark, ketaka shoots, kuntala leaves, etc., are included.
270.Gilānassa chattanti ettha yassa kāyaḍāho vā pittakopo vā hoti, cakkhu vā dubbalaṃ, añño vā koci ābādho vinā chattena uppajjati, tassa gāme vā araññe vā chattaṃ vaṭṭati. Vasse pana cīvaraguttatthaṃ vāḷamigacorabhayesu ca attaguttatthampi vaṭṭati. Ekapaṇṇacchattaṃ pana sabbattheva vaṭṭati.
270. Gilānassa chattanti: Here, for one who has body heat or bile disorder, or whose eyesight is weak, or who develops some other illness without an umbrella, an umbrella is suitable in the village or in the wilderness. In the rainy season, it is suitable for protecting the robes, for protection from wild animals, thieves, and dangers, and also for self-protection. However, a single-leaf umbrella is suitable in all situations.
Asissāti asi assa.Vijjotalatīti vijjotati.Daṇḍasammutinti ettha pamāṇayutto catuhatthoyeva daṇḍo sammannitvā dātabbo. Tato ūnātiritto vināpi sammutiyā sabbesaṃ vaṭṭati.Sikkāpana agilānassa na vaṭṭati, gilānassāpi sammannitvāva dātabbā.
Asissāti: An ass without a sword. Vijjotalatīti: It shines. Daṇḍasammutinti: Here, a cane that is four cubits in length, according to the measure, should be given after formal conferral. A cane shorter or longer than that is suitable for everyone even without formal conferral. Sikkāpana: A carrying strap is not suitable for one who is not ill; it should be given to one who is ill only after formal conferral.
273.Romanthakassāti ettha ṭhapetvā romanthakaṃ sesānaṃ āgataṃ uggāraṃ mukhe sandhāretvā gilantānaṃ āpatti. Sace pana asandhāritameva paragalaṃ gacchati, vaṭṭati.
273. Romanthakassāti: Here, having held back the regurgitated cud, it is an offense for those who retain and swallow the regurgitation that has come to the mouth. But if it goes down the throat without being retained, it is permissible.
Yaṃ diyyamānanti yaṃ dāyakehi diyyamānaṃ paṭiggahitabhājanato bahi patitaṃ, taṃ bhikkhunā sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjituṃ anujānāmīti attho. Idaṃ bhojanavagge vaṇṇitameva.
Yaṃ diyyamānanti: Whatever is falling outside the receiving bowl, being given by the donors, that, I allow to be taken and used by the monk himself, is the meaning. This has already been described in the section on food.
274.Kuppaṃ karissāmīti saddaṃ karissāmi. Nakhādīhi nakhacchedane āpatti natthi, anurakkhaṇatthaṃ pana nakhacchedanaṃ anuññātaṃ.Vīsatimaṭṭhanti vīsatipi nakhe likhitamaṭṭhe kārāpenti.Malamattanti nakhato malamattaṃ apakaḍḍhituṃ anujānāmīti attho.
274. Kuppaṃ karissāmīti: I will make a noise. There is no offense in cutting nails with nails, but cutting nails is allowed for the purpose of tidiness. Vīsatimaṭṭhanti: They have even twenty (nails) decorated by having designs drawn on the nails. Malamattanti: I allow removing only the dirt from the nails, is the meaning.
275.Khurasipāṭikanti khurakosakaṃ.Massuṃ kappāpentīti kattariyā massuṃ chedāpenti.Massuṃ vaḍḍhāpentīti massuṃ dīghaṃ kārenti.Golomikanti hanukamhi dīghaṃ katvā ṭhapitaṃ eḷakamassu vuccati.Caturassakanti catukoṇaṃ.Parimukhanti ure lomasaṃharaṇaṃ.Aḍḍhadukanti udare lomarājiṭṭhapanaṃ.Āpatti dukkaṭassāti massukappāpanādīsu sabbattha āpatti dukkaṭassa.Ābādhappaccayā sambādhe lomanti gaṇḍavaṇarudhiādiābādhappaccayā.Kattarikāyāti gaṇḍavaṇarudhisīsarogābādhappaccayā. Sakkharādīhi nāsikālomaggāhāpane āpatti natthi. Anurakkhaṇatthaṃ pana saṇḍāso anuññāto.Na bhikkhave palitaṃ gāhāpetabbanti ettha yaṃ bhamukāya vā nalāṭe vā dāṭhikāya vā uggantvā bībhacchaṃ ṭhitaṃ, tādisaṃ lomaṃ palitaṃ vā apalitaṃ vā gāhāpetuṃ vaṭṭati.
275. Khurasipāṭikanti: A razor case. Massuṃ kappāpentīti: They have the beard cut with scissors. Massuṃ vaḍḍhāpentīti: They let the beard grow long. Golomikanti: A goat's beard, kept long on the chin, is called golomika. Caturassakanti: Square-shaped. Parimukhanti: Collecting hairs on the chest. Aḍḍhadukanti: Keeping a line of hair on the belly. Āpatti dukkaṭassāti: In all cases of having the beard cut, etc., there is an offense of wrong-doing. Ābādhappaccayā sambādhe lomanti: Because of illness, such as boils, wounds, or blood, etc. Kattarikāyāti: Because of illnesses such as boils, wounds, blood, or head disease. There is no offense in plucking nose hairs with stones, etc. But a pair of tweezers is allowed for the purpose of tidiness. Na bhikkhave palitaṃ gāhāpetabbanti: Here, it is permissible to pluck a hair, whether gray or not, that has grown on the eyebrow, forehead, or jaw and stands out unattractively.
277.Kaṃsapattharikāti kaṃsabhaṇḍavāṇijā.Bandhanamattanti vāsikattarayaṭṭhiādīnaṃ bandhanamattaṃ.
277. Kaṃsapattharikāti: Dealers in bronze utensils. Bandhanamattanti: Only the binding of axe, scissors, walking stick, etc.
278.Nabhikkhave akāyabandhanenāti ettha abandhitvā nikkhamantena yattha sarati, tattha bandhitabbaṃ. Āsanasālāya bandhissāmīti gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Saritvā yāva na bandhati, na tāva piṇḍāya caritabbaṃ.Kalābukaṃnāma bahurajjukaṃ.Deḍḍubhakaṃnāma udakasappasīsasadisaṃ.Murajaṃnāma murajavaṭṭisaṇṭhānaṃ veṭhetvā kataṃ.Maddavīṇaṃnāma pāmaṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ. Īdisañhi ekampi na vaṭṭati, pageva bahūni.Paṭṭikaṃ sūkarantakanti ettha pakativītā vā macchakaṇṭakavāyimā vā paṭṭikā vaṭṭati, sesā kuñjaracchikādibhedā na vaṭṭanti.Sūkarantakaṃnāma kuñjikākosakasaṇṭhānaṃ hoti. Ekarajjukaṃ pana muddikakāyabandhanañca sūkarantakaṃ anulometi.Anujānāmi bhikkhave murajaṃ maddavīṇanti idaṃ dasāsuyeva anuññātaṃ. Pāmaṅgadasā cettha catunnaṃ upari na vaṭṭati.Sobhaṇaṃnāma veṭhetvā mukhavaṭṭisibbanaṃ.Guṇakaṃnāma mudiṅgasaṇṭhānena sibbanaṃ; evaṃ sibbitā hi antā thirā honti.Pavanantoti pāsanto vuccati.
278. Na bhikkhave akāyabandhanenāti: Here, one who goes out without a waistband should tie it where he remembers. It is permissible to go thinking, "I will tie it in the assembly hall." As long as one does not tie it after remembering, one should not go for alms. Kalābukaṃ nāma: With many strings. Deḍḍubhakaṃ nāma: Like the head of a water snake. Murajaṃ nāma: Made by wrapping in the shape of a muraja drum. Maddavīṇaṃ nāma: In the shape of a pāmaṅga lute. Indeed, even one of these is not suitable, let alone many. Paṭṭikaṃ sūkarantakanti: Here, a naturally woven belt or one woven with fishbone patterns is suitable, but others, such as those with elephant designs, are not suitable. Sūkarantakaṃ nāma: It is in the shape of a key case. However, a single-string waistband with a seal and sūkarantaka is in accordance. Anujānāmi bhikkhave murajaṃ maddavīṇanti: This is allowed only in the ten faults. The pāmaṅga lute here is not suitable for more than four. Sobhaṇaṃ nāma: Sewing by wrapping the mouth rim. Guṇakaṃ nāma: Sewing in the shape of a mudiṅga drum; indeed, the ends are firm when sewn in this way. Pavanantoti: It is called pāsanto.
280.Hatthisoṇḍakaṃnāma nābhimūlato hatthisoṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ olambakaṃ katvā nivatthaṃ coḷikaitthīnaṃ nivāsanaṃ viya.Macchavāḷakaṃnāma ekato dasantaṃ ekato pāsantaṃ olambetvā nivatthaṃ.Catukaṇṇakaṃnāma upari dve, heṭṭhato dveti evaṃ cattāro kaṇṇe dassetvā nivatthaṃ.Tālavaṇṭakaṃnāma tālavaṇṭākārena sāṭakaṃ olambetvā nivāsanaṃ.Satavalikaṃnāma dīghasāṭakaṃ anekakkhattuṃ obhañjitvā ovaṭṭikaṃ karontena nivatthaṃ, vāmadakkhiṇapassesu vā nirantaraṃ valiyo dassetvā nivatthaṃ. Sace pana jāṇuto paṭṭhāya ekā vā dve vā valiyo paññāyanti, vaṭṭati.
280. Hatthisoṇḍakaṃ nāma: Wearing a cloth hanging down from the base of the navel in the shape of an elephant's trunk, like the undergarment worn by women. Macchavāḷakaṃ nāma: Wearing a cloth hanging down, with one side covering and one side open. Catukaṇṇakaṃ nāma: Wearing a cloth showing four corners, two above and two below. Tālavaṇṭakaṃ nāma: Wearing a cloth hanging down in the shape of a palm fan. Satavalikaṃ nāma: Wearing a long cloth by folding it many times and making it circular, or wearing a cloth showing continuous folds on the left and right sides. But if one or two folds are visible starting from the knee, it is suitable.
Saṃvelliyaṃ nivāsentīti mallakammakārādayo viya kacchaṃ bandhitvā nivāsenti; evaṃ nivāsetuṃ gilānassapi maggappaṭipannassapi na vaṭṭati. Yampi maggaṃ gacchantā ekaṃ vā dve vā koṇe ukkhipitvā antaravāsakassa upari laggenti, anto vā ekaṃ kāsāvaṃ tathā nivāsetvā bahi aparaṃ nivāsenti, sabbaṃ na vaṭṭati. Gilāno pana anto kāsāvassa ovaṭṭikaṃ dassetvā aparaṃ upari nivāsetuṃ labhati. Agilānena dve nivāsentena saguṇaṃ katvā nivāsetabbāni. Iti yañca idha paṭikkhittaṃ, yañca sekhiyavaṇṇanāyaṃ; taṃ sabbaṃ vajjetvā nibbikāraṃ timaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādentena parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetabbaṃ. Yaṃkiñci vikāraṃ karonto dukkaṭā na muccati. Na bhikkhave gihipārutaṃ pārupitabbanti evaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ gihipārutaṃ apārupitvā, ubho kaṇṇe samaṃ katvā pārupanaṃ parimaṇḍalapārupanaṃ nāma, taṃ pārupitabbaṃ.
Saṃvelliyaṃ nivāsentīti: They wear it tying the armpits, like wrestlers and workers; it is not suitable to wear it in this way even for one who is ill or on the path. And it is all not suitable if those going on the path lift one or two corners and attach them above the inner robe, or if they wear one kāṣāya robe inside in that way and wear another outside. However, a sick person may wear another robe on top, showing the circle of the inner kāṣāya. A healthy person wearing two robes should wear them having made a saguṇa fold. Thus, whatever is prohibited here and whatever is in the description of the Sekhiya rules, all that should be avoided, and one should wear the lower robe perfectly round, covering the three maṇḍalas without distortion. One is not freed from a wrong-doing offense while making any distortion. Na bhikkhave gihipārutaṃ pārupitabbanti: Having not worn a householder's outer robe that has been prohibited in this way, wearing the outer robe with both edges equal is called parimaṇḍalapārupanaṃ, and that should be worn.
Tattha yaṃkiñci setapaṭapārutaṃ paribbājakapārutaṃ ekasāṭakapārutaṃ soṇḍapārutaṃ antepurikapārutaṃ mahājeṭṭhakapārutaṃ kuṭipavesakapārutaṃ brāhmaṇapārutaṃ pāḷikārakapārutanti evamādi parimaṇḍalalakkhaṇato aññathā pārutaṃ, sabbametaṃ gihipārutaṃ nāma. Tasmā yathā setapaṭā aḍḍhapālakanigaṇṭhā pārupanti, yathā ca ekacce paribbājakā uraṃ vivaritvā dvīsu aṃsakūṭesu pāvuraṇaṃ ṭhapenti, yathā ca ekasāṭakā manussā nivatthasāṭakassa ekenantena piṭṭhiṃ pārupitvā ubho kaṇṇe ubhosu aṃsakūṭesu ṭhapenti, yathā ca surāsoṇḍādayo sāṭakena gīvaṃ parikkhipantā ubho ante udare vā olambenti; piṭṭhiyaṃ vā khipanti, yathā ca antepurikāyo akkhitārakamattaṃ dassetvā oguṇṭhikaṃ pārupanti, yathā ca mahājeṭṭhā dīghasāṭakaṃ nivāsetvā tasseva ekenantena sakalasarīraṃ pārupanti, yathā ca kassakā khettakuṭiṃ pavisantā sāṭakaṃ paliveṭhetvā upakacchake pakkhipitvā tasseva ekenantena sarīraṃ pārupanti, yathā ca brāhmaṇā ubhinnaṃ upakacchakānaṃ antarena sāṭakaṃ pavesetvā aṃsakūṭesu pakkhipanti, yathā ca pāḷikārako bhikkhu ekaṃsapārupanena pārutaṃ vāmabāhuṃ vivaritvā cīvaraṃ aṃsakūṭaṃ āropeti; evaṃ apārupitvā sabbepi ete aññe ca evarūpe pārupanadose vajjetvā nibbikāraṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ pārupitabbaṃ. Tathā apārupitvā ārāme vā antaraghare vā anādarena yaṃkiñci vikāraṃ karontassa dukkaṭaṃ.
Therein, any wearing that is white cloth, a wanderer's wearing, a single-cloth wearing, a distiller's wearing, an inner-palace wearing, a great elder's wearing, a hut-entering wearing, a Brahmin's wearing, a Pāḷi reciter's wearing—thus, any wearing that is other than the characteristic of being fully rounded, all of this is called a householder's wearing. Therefore, just as those white-clothed Aḍḍhapālaka Nigaṇṭhas wear, and as some wanderers open the chest and place the covering on both shoulder blades, and as single-cloth people cover the back with one end of the lower cloth and place both corners on both shoulder blades, and as liquor distillers and others wrap the neck with a cloth, letting both ends hang down on the stomach or throwing them on the back, and as women of the inner palace show only the pupil of the eye and wear a veil, and as great elders wear a long cloth, wrap it around, and cover the entire body with one end of it, and as farmers, entering a field hut, wrap the cloth around, tuck it under the armpit, and cover the body with one end of it, and as Brahmins insert the cloth between both armpits and tuck it on the shoulder blades, and as a Pāḷi reciter bhikkhu, wearing in the manner of one shoulder uncovered, uncovers the left arm and puts the robe on the shoulder blade; so, without wearing in such ways, one should avoid all these and other such faults of wearing and wear it impeccably and fully rounded. Furthermore, while staying in the monastery or inside a house, doing anything carelessly and improperly constitutes a dukkata.
281.Muṇḍavaṭṭīti yathā rañño kuhiñci gacchato parikkhārabhaṇḍavahanamanussāti adhippāyo.Antarākājanti majjhe laggetvā dvīhi vahitabbabhāraṃ.
281. Muṇḍavaṭṭī: The intention is a person carrying equipment and goods when the king goes somewhere. Antarākāja: A burden to be carried by two people, attaching in the middle.
282.Acakkhussanti cakkhūnaṃ hitaṃ na hoti; parihāniṃ janeti.Nacchādetīti na ruccati.Aṭṭhaṅgulaparamanti manussānaṃ pamāṇaṅgulena aṭṭhaṅgulaparamaṃ.Atimaṭāhakanti atikhuddakaṃ.
282. Acakkhussa: It is not beneficial to the eyes; it generates decline. Nacchādeti: It is not pleasing. Aṭṭhaṅgulaparama: At most eight aṅgulas by the measure of a person's aṅgula. Atimaṭāhaka: Too small.
283.Dāyaṃ ālimpentīti tiṇavanādīsu aggiṃ denti.Paṭagginti paṭiaggiṃ.Parittanti appaharitakaraṇena vā parikhākhaṇanena vā parittāṇaṃ. Ettha pana anupasampanne sati sayaṃ aggiṃ dātuṃ na labhati, asati aggimpi dātuṃ labhati, bhūmiṃ tacchetvā tiṇānipi harituṃ, parikhampi khaṇituṃ, allasākhaṃ bhañjitvāpi aggiṃ nibbāpetuṃ labhati, senāsanaṃ pattaṃ vā appattaṃ vā tathā nibbāpetuṃ labhatiyeva. Udakena pana kappiyeneva labhati, na itarena.
283. Dāyaṃ ālimpentī: They set fire to grass and forest areas, etc. Paṭaggi: A counter-fire. Paritta: Protection by making a small amount of greenery or by digging a trench. Here, if there is an unordained person, he is not allowed to set the fire himself, he is allowed to set the fire even when there is no one. He can cut the ground and also remove the grass. He may dig a ditch, and even break off a fresh branch to extinguish the fire. Whether the dwelling is acquired or not, it is permissible to extinguish it in that way. But with water, it is permissible only with allowable water, not with other.
284.Sati karaṇīyeti sukkhakaṭṭhādiggahaṇakicce sati.Porisiyanti purisappamāṇaṃ.Āpadāsūti vāḷamigādayo vā disvā maggamūḷho vā disā oloketukāmo hutvā davaḍāhaṃ vā udakoghaṃ vā āgacchantaṃ disvā evarūpāsu āpadāsu atiuccampi rukkhaṃ ārohituṃ vaṭṭati.
284. Sati karaṇīye: When there is a need to collect dry wood, etc. Porisiya: A man's height. Āpadāsū: Having seen wild animals etc. or lost his way, or wanting to look around to see the direction, or having seen a forest fire or a flood coming, in such dangers it is proper to climb even a very tall tree.
285.Kalyāṇavākkaraṇāti madhurasaddā.Chandaso āropemāti vedaṃ viya sakkatabhāsāya vācanāmaggaṃ āropema.Sakāya niruttiyāti ettha sakā nirutti nāma sammāsambuddhena vuttappakāro māgadhiko vohāro.
285. Kalyāṇavākkaraṇā: With sweet sounds. Chandaso āropemā: We raise the path of recitation in Sanskrit language like the Vedas. Sakāya niruttiyā: Here, sakā nirutti means the Magadhi usage, the kind spoken by the Sammāsambuddha.
286.Lokāyataṃnāma sabbaṃ ucchiṭṭhaṃ, sabbaṃ anucchiṭṭhaṃ, seto kāko, kāḷo bako; iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti evamādiniratthakakāraṇapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ titthiyasatthaṃ.
286. Lokāyataṃ: Namely, everything is leftover, everything is not leftover, the crow is white, the heron is black; and the Tīrthika's doctrine is connected with useless reasons such as by this and by this reason.
288.Antarā ahosīti antaritā ahosi paṭicchannā.
288. Antarā ahosī: It was intervening, it was covered.
289.Ābādhappaccayāti yassa ābādhassa lasuṇaṃ bhesajjaṃ; tappaccayāti attho.
289. Ābādhappaccayā: For that illness for which garlic is the medicine; the meaning is, for that reason.
290.Passāvapādukanti ettha pādukā iṭṭhakāhipi silāhipi dārūhipi kātuṃ vaṭṭati.Vaccapādukāyapi eseva nayo.Pariveṇanti vaccakuṭiparikkhepabbhantaraṃ.
290. Passāvapāduka: Here, the pādukā can be made of bricks, stones, or wood. Vaccapādukāya: The same method applies to the toilet sandals as well. Pariveṇa: The inner enclosure surrounding the toilet hut.
293.Yathādhammokāretabboti dukkaṭavatthumhi dukkaṭena pācittiyavatthumhi pācittiyena kāretabbo. Paharaṇatthaṃ kataṃpaharaṇīti vuccati, yassa kassaci āvudhasaṅkhātassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, taṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ sabbaṃ lohabhaṇḍaṃ anujānāmīti attho.Katakañca kumbhakārikañcāti ettha katakaṃ vuttameva.Kumbhakārikañcāti dhaniyasseva sabbamattikāmayakuṭi vuccati. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
293. Yathādhammo kāretabbo: In a matter of dukkata, it should be dealt with by a dukkata; in a matter of pācittiya, it should be dealt with by a pācittiya. That which is made for striking is called paharaṇī, this is a designation for any kind of weapon; having excluded that, I allow all other metal wares, is the meaning. Katakañca kumbhakārikañcā: Here, kataka has already been mentioned. Kumbhakārikañcā: The entire mud hut made by a potter is called dhaniya. The rest is clear everywhere.
Khuddakavatthukathā niṭṭhitā.
The Minor Matter Discourse is finished.
Khuddakavatthukkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Minor Matter Section is finished.
6. Senāsanakkhandhakaṃ
6. The Lodging Section
Vihārānujānanakathā
Discourse on the Allowing of Monasteries
294.Senāsanakkhandhake –apaññattaṃ hotīti ananuññātaṃ hoti.Vihāronāma aḍḍhayogādimuttako avasesāvāso.Aḍḍhayogoti supaṇṇavaṅkagehaṃ.Pāsādoti dīghapāsādo.Hammiyanti upariākāsatale patiṭṭhitakūṭāgāro pāsādoyeva.Guhāti iṭṭhakāguhā silāguhā dāruguhā paṃsuguhā.Āgatānāgatassa cātuddisassa saṅghassāti āgatassa ca anāgatassa ca catūsu disāsu appaṭihatacārassa cātuddisassa saṅghassa.
294. In the Lodging Section – apaññattaṃ hotī: It is unpermitted. Vihāro: Namely, any dwelling apart from a semi-circular building, etc. Aḍḍhayogo: A building shaped like a bird's wing. Pāsādo: A long mansion. Hammiya: A storied building, a mansion that stands on an open space above. Guhā: A brick cave, a stone cave, a wooden cave, a clay cave. Āgatānāgatassa cātuddisassa saṅghassā: To the Saṅgha from the four directions, unrestrictedly wandering in the four directions, both those who have come and those who have not yet come.
295.Anumodanagāthāsu –sītaṃ uṇhanti utuvisabhāgavasena vuttaṃ.Sisire cāpi vuṭṭhiyoti etthasisiroti samphusitakavāto vuccati.Vuṭṭhiyoti ujukameghavuṭṭhiyo eva. Etāni sabbānipaṭihantīti imināva padena yojetabbāni.
295. In the verses of appreciation - sītaṃ uṇhaṃ: Is said in terms of different seasons. Sisire cāpi vuṭṭhiyo: Here, sisiro means a cold wind. Vuṭṭhiyo: Means upright rain clouds only. All these paṭihantī: Should be connected with this very word.
Paṭihaññatīti vihārena paṭihaññati.Leṇatthanti nilīyanatthaṃ.Sukhatthanti sītādiparissayābhāvena sukhavihāratthaṃ.Jhāyituñca vipassitunti idampi padadvayaṃ ‘‘sukhatthañcā’’ti imināva padena yojetabbaṃ. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – sukhatthañca vihāradānaṃ, katamaṃ sukhatthaṃ? Jhāyituṃ vipassituñca yaṃ sukhaṃ, tadatthaṃ. Atha vā parapadenapi yojetabbaṃ – jhāyituñca vipassituñca vihāradānaṃ; idha jhāyissanti vipassissantīti dadatovihāradānaṃ saṅghassa aggaṃ buddhena vaṇṇitaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘so ca sabbadado hoti, yo dadāti upassaya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.42).
Paṭihaññatī: It is warded off by the vihāra. Leṇatthaṃ: For the purpose of shelter. Sukhatthaṃ: For the purpose of living happily, without the hardships of cold, etc. Jhāyituñca vipassituṃ: This pair of words should also be connected with the word "sukhatthañca". For it is said thus – the giving of a vihāra is for the sake of happiness, what kind of happiness? For the sake of the happiness of meditating and seeing clearly. Or it should be connected with the subsequent word as well – the giving of a vihāra is for meditating and seeing clearly; here, the giving of a vihāra is the best gift to the Saṅgha, praised by the Buddha, to the giver thinking ‘here they will meditate and see clearly’. For it was said: “He is the giver of everything, who gives a dwelling” (SN 1.42).
‘‘tasmā hi paṇḍito poso’’ti gāthā.Vāsayettha bahussuteti ettha vihāre pariyattibahussute ca paṭivedhabahussute ca vāseyya.Tesaṃ annañcāti yaṃ tesaṃ anucchavikaṃ annañca pānañca vatthāni ca mañcapīṭhādisenāsanāni ca, taṃ sabbaṃ tesu ujubhūtesu akuṭilacittesu.Dadeyyāti nidaheyya. Tañca kho vippasannena cetasā na cittappasādaṃ virādhetvā, evaṃ vippasannacittassa hite tassa dhammaṃ desenti…pe… parinibbāti anāsavoti.
‘‘tasmā hi paṇḍito poso’’ is the verse. Vāsayettha bahussute: Here, one should have those who are much learned in the teachings and those who are much learned in realization dwell in the vihāra. Tesaṃ annañcā: And one should give to those upright ones, with non-deceitful minds, all that is suitable for them, food, drink, clothes and lodgings such as beds and chairs, etc. Dadeyyā: One should give generously. And indeed, with a clear mind, without spoiling the clarity of the mind; for one with such a clear mind they teach the Dhamma…pe… attains Nibbāna without āsavas.
296.Āviñchanacchiddaṃ āviñchanarajjunti ettha rajju nāma sacepi dīpinaṅguṭṭhena katā hoti, vaṭṭatiyeva; na kāci na vaṭṭati.Tīṇi tāḷānīti tisso kuñcikāyo.Yantakaṃ sūcikanti ettha yaṃ yaṃ jānāti taṃ taṃ yantakaṃ, tassa vivaraṇasūcikañca kātuṃ vaṭṭati.Vedikāvātapānaṃnāma cetiye vedikāsadisaṃ.Jālavātapānaṃnāma jālakabaddhaṃ.Salākavātapānaṃnāma thambhakavātapānaṃ.Cakkalikanti ettha coḷakapādapuñchanaṃ bandhituṃ anujānāmīti attho.Vātapānabhisīti vātapānappamāṇena bhisiṃ katvā bandhituṃ anujānāmīti attho.Miḍḍhinti miḍḍhakaṃ.Bidalamañcakanti vettamañcaṃ; veḷuvilīvehi vā vītaṃ.
296. Āviñchanacchiddaṃ āviñchanarajju: Here, regarding the rope, even if it is made with the sinew of a leopard, it is permissible; there is no ‘this is not allowed’. Tīṇi tāḷānī: Three keys. Yantakaṃ sūcika: Here, whatever he knows, he is allowed to make that kind of mechanism and also an indicator to open it. Vedikāvātapānaṃ: Namely, a window like a railing in a cetiya. Jālavātapānaṃ: Namely, a latticed window. Salākavātapānaṃ: Namely, a pillar window. Cakkalika: Here, the meaning is, I allow to tie a mat for wiping feet. Vātapānabhisī: The meaning is, I allow to make a cushion in the size of the window and tie it. Miḍḍhi: A hinge. Bidalamañcaka: A rattan bed; made with rattan or split bamboo.
297.Āsandikoti caturassapīṭhaṃ vuccati. Uccakampi āsandikanti vacanato ekatobhāgena dīghapīṭhameva hi aṭṭhaṅgulapādakaṃ vaṭṭati, caturassaāsandiko pana pamāṇātikkantopi vaṭṭatīti veditabbo.Sattaṅgonāma tīsu disāsu apassayaṃ katvā katamañco, ayampi pamāṇātikkanto vaṭṭati.Bhaddapīṭhanti vettamayaṃ pīṭhaṃ vuccati.Pīṭhikāti pilotikābaddhapīṭhameva.Eḷakapādapīṭhaṃnāma dārupaṭṭikāya upari pāde ṭhapetvā bhojanaphalakaṃ viya katapīṭhaṃ vuccati.Āmalakavaṭṭikapīṭhaṃnāma āmalakākārena yojitaṃ bahupādakapīṭhaṃ. Imāni tāva pāḷiyaṃ āgatapīṭhāni. Dārumayaṃ pana sabbaṃ pīṭhaṃ vaṭṭatīti ayamettha vinicchayo.Kocchanti usiramayaṃ vā muñjapabbajamayaṃ vā.
297. Āsandiko: Is called a square seat. Since it says even a high āsandika is allowed, it should be understood that a long seat with eight-inch legs is indeed suitable in one portion; but a square āsandika, even if exceeding the measurement, is allowed. Sattaṅgo: Namely, a couch made with a support in three directions; this too is allowed even if exceeding the measurement. Bhaddapīṭha: Is called a rattan seat. Pīṭhikā: Is just a seat bound with pilotika. Eḷakapādapīṭhaṃ: Namely, it is called a seat made like a dining table, placing the legs on top of a wooden plank. Āmalakavaṭṭikapīṭhaṃ: Namely, a many-legged seat joined in the shape of an āmalaka fruit. These, for now, are the seats that have come in the Pāḷi. But all wooden seats are allowed, this is the determination here. Koccha: Made of usira root or muñja grass.
Aṭṭhaṅgulaparamaṃ mañcapaṭipādakanti ettha manussānaṃ pamāṇaṅgulameva aṭṭhaṅgulaṃ.Cimilikānāma parikammakatāya bhūmiyā chavisaṃrakkhaṇatthāya attharaṇaṃ vuccati.Rukkhatūlanti simbalirukkhādīnaṃ yesaṃ kesañci rukkhānaṃ tūlaṃ.Latātūlanti khīravalliādīnaṃ yāsaṃ kāsañci vallīnaṃ tūlaṃ.Poṭakitūlanti poṭakitiṇādīnaṃ yesaṃ kesañci tiṇajātikānaṃ antamaso ucchunaḷādīnampi tūlaṃ. Etehi tīhi sabbabhūtagāmā saṅgahitā honti. Rukkhavallitiṇajātiyo hi muñcitvā añño bhūtagāmo nāma natthi, tasmā yassa kassaci bhūtagāmassa tūlaṃ bimbohane vaṭṭati, bhisiṃ pana pāpuṇitvā sabbampetaṃ akappiyatūlanti vuccati. Na kevalañca bimbohane etaṃ tūlameva, haṃsamorādīnaṃ sabbasakuṇānaṃ sīhādīnaṃ sabbacatuppadānañca lomampi vaṭṭati. Piyaṅgupupphabakuḷapupphādi pana yaṃkiñci pupphaṃ na vaṭṭati. Tamālapattaṃ suddhameva na vaṭṭati, missakaṃ pana vaṭṭati. Bhisīnaṃ anuññātaṃ pañcavidhaṃ uṇṇāditūlampi vaṭṭati.
Aṭṭhaṅgulaparamaṃ mañcapaṭipādaka: Here, eight aṅgulas is by the measurement of a person's aṅgula. Cimilikā: Namely, a covering for the protection of the surface of a worked ground. Rukkhatūla: Cotton from any tree whatsoever, such as the silk-cotton tree, etc. Latātūla: Cotton from any creeper whatsoever, such as milk vines, etc. Poṭakitūla: Cotton from any grass species whatsoever, such as poṭaki grass, etc., even sugarcane and reeds. By these three, all living beings are included. For there is no other group of living beings except trees, vines, and grasses; therefore, cotton from any living being whatsoever is allowable for a mattress, but having obtained a cushion, all this is called non-allowable cotton. And not only this cotton for a mattress, but also the feathers of all birds such as geese and peacocks, and the fur of all quadrupeds such as lions, are allowable. But any flower, such as piyaṅgu flowers, bakula flowers, etc., is not allowable. Tamāla leaves that are pure are not allowable, but a mixture is allowable. The five kinds of cotton beginning with wool allowed for cushions are also allowable.
Addhakāyikānīti upaḍḍhakāyappamāṇāni, yesu kaṭito paṭṭhāya yāva sīsaṃ upadahanti.Sīsappamāṇaṃnāma yassa vitthārato tīsu kaṇṇesu dvinnaṃ kaṇṇānaṃ antaraṃ minīyamānaṃ vidatthi ceva caturaṅgulañca hoti, majjhaṭṭhānaṃ muṭṭhiratanaṃ hoti. Dīghato pana diyaḍḍharatanaṃ vā dviratanaṃ vāti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ sīsappamāṇassa ukkaṭṭhaparicchedo. Ito uddhaṃ na vaṭṭati, heṭṭhā pana vaṭṭati. Agilānassa sīsupadhānañca pādupadhānañcāti dvayameva vaṭṭati. Gilānassa bimbohanāni santharitvā upari paccattharaṇaṃ katvā nipajjitumpi vaṭṭati. ‘‘Yāni pana bhisīnaṃ anuññātāni pañca kappiyatūlāni, tehi bimbohanaṃ mahantampi vaṭṭatī’’ti phussadevatthero āha. Vinayadharaupatissatthero pana ‘‘bimbohanaṃ karissāmī’ti kappiyatūlaṃ vā akappiyatūlaṃ vā pakkhipitvā karontassa pamāṇameva vaṭṭatī’’ti āha.
Addhakāyikānī: The size of half the body; they lie on those from the waist up to the head. Sīsappamāṇaṃ: Namely, when measuring the distance between two ears at the three corners in width, it is a span and four aṅgulas, the middle part is a fist-jewel. But in length, it is said in the Kurundi that it is one and a half or two cubits. This is the maximum limit of head size. It is not allowed above this, but it is allowed below. Only two things are allowed for a non-sick person, a head pillow and a foot pillow. For a sick person, it is also allowed to spread out a mattress and lie down after making an outer covering on top. “The mattress, even if large, is allowed with the five allowable cottons that are allowed for cushions,” said the Venerable Phussadeva. But the Venerable Vinayadhara Upatissa said, "When one is making a mattress, having put allowable or non-allowable cotton, only the prescribed measurement is allowed."
Pañca bhisiyoti pañcahi uṇṇādīhi pūritabhisiyo. Tūlagaṇanāya hi etāsaṃ gaṇanā vuttā. Tattha uṇṇaggahaṇena na kevalaṃ eḷakalomameva gahitaṃ, ṭhapetvā manussalomaṃ yaṃkiñci kappiyākappiyamaṃsajātīnaṃ pakkhicatuppadānaṃ lomaṃ, sabbaṃ idha uṇṇaggahaṇeneva gahitaṃ. Tasmā channaṃ cīvarānaṃ channaṃ anulomacīvarānañca aññatarena bhisicchaviṃ katvā taṃ sabbaṃ pakkhipitvā bhisiṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Eḷakalomāni pana apakkhipitvā kambalameva catugguṇaṃ vā pañcaguṇaṃ vā pakkhipitvā katāpi uṇṇabhisisaṅkhyameva gacchati.
Pañca bhisiyo: Cushions filled with five kinds of wool, etc. For this reckoning is stated in the counting of cottons. Therein, by the mention of wool, not only sheep's wool is included, but excluding human hair, all hair of allowable and non-allowable flesh-born bipeds and quadrupeds is included here by the mention of wool itself. Therefore, having made a cushion cover with one of the six robes or six under-robes, it is permissible to make a cushion by putting all that inside. But the wool blanket is also counted as a wool cushion if it is made with a fourfold or fivefold blanket without removing the sheep's wool.
coḷabhisi,yaṃkiñci vākaṃ pakkhipitvā katāvākabhisi,yaṃkiñci tiṇaṃ pakkhipitvā katātiṇabhisi,aññatra suddhatamālapattaṃ yaṃkiñci paṇṇaṃ pakkhipitvā katāpaṇṇabhisīti veditabbā. Tamālapattaṃ pana aññena missameva vaṭṭati, suddhaṃ na vaṭṭati. Bhisiyā pamāṇaniyamo natthi, mañcabhisi pīṭhabhisi bhūmattharaṇabhisi caṅkamanabhisi pādapuñchanabhisīti etāsaṃ anurūpato sallakkhetvā attano rucivasena pamāṇaṃ kātabbaṃ. Yaṃ panetaṃ uṇṇādipañcavidhatūlampi bhisiyaṃ vaṭṭati, taṃ ‘‘masūrakepi vaṭṭatī’’ti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Etena masūrakaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ hoti.
Coḷabhisi (culla-bhisī), is known as vākabhisi if made by stuffing any kind of fiber, tiṇabhisi, if made by stuffing any kind of grass, paṇṇabhisi, if made by stuffing any kind of leaves except for pure tamāla leaves. However, tamāla leaves are suitable if mixed with something else, but not suitable if pure. There is no fixed size for a bhisi; the size should be determined according to one's preference, considering whether it is a mañcabhisi (bed cushion), pīṭhabhisi (seat cushion), bhūmattharaṇabhisi (ground covering cushion), caṅkamanabhisi (walking meditation cushion), or pādapuñchanabhisi (foot wiping cushion). The five kinds of cotton, etc., that are suitable for a bhisi are also suitable for a masūraka (small cushion), as stated in the Kurundi. This implies that it is permissible to use a masūraka.
Mañcabhisiṃ pīṭhe santharantīti mañcabhisiṃ pīṭhe attharanti; attharaṇatthāya harantīti yujjati.Ullokaṃ akaritvāti heṭṭhā cimilikaṃ adatvā.Phositunti rajanena vā haliddiyā vā upari phusitāni dātuṃ.Bhattikammanti bhisicchaviyā upari bhattikammaṃ.Hatthabhattinti pañcaṅgulibhattiṃ.
Mañcabhisiṃ pīṭhe santharantī, means they spread the mañcabhisi on the seat; it is appropriate to bring it for spreading. Ullokaṃ akaritvā, means without providing a cimilikaṃ underneath. Phosituṃ, to apply dots on top with dye or turmeric. Bhattikammaṃ, decorative work on top of the bhisi. Hatthabhattiṃ, a hand-print design.
298.Ikkāsanti rukkhaniyyāsaṃ vā silesaṃ vā.Piṭṭhamaddanti piṭṭhakhaliṃ.Kuṇḍakamattikanti kuṇḍakamissakamattikaṃ.Sāsapakuṭṭanti sāsapapiṭṭhaṃ.Sitthatelakanti vilīnamadhusitthakaṃ.Accussannaṃ hotīti bindu bindu hutvā tiṭṭhati.Paccuddharitunti puñchituṃ.Gaṇḍumattikanti gaṇḍuppādagūthamattikaṃ.Kasāvanti āmalakaharītakānaṃ kasāvaṃ.
298.Ikkāsaṃ, tree resin or glue. Piṭṭhamaddaṃ, flour paste. Kuṇḍakamattikaṃ, clay mixed with bran. Sāsapakuṭṭaṃ, mustard powder. Sitthatelakaṃ, melted beeswax. Accussannaṃ hotī, it remains dripping drop by drop. Paccuddharituṃ, to wipe off. Gaṇḍumattikaṃ, earth from earthworm castings. Kasāvaṃ, astringent liquid from myrobalan and haritaki fruits.
299.Na bhikkhave paṭibhānacittanti ettha na kevalaṃ itthipurisarūpameva, tiracchānarūpampi antamaso gaṇḍuppādarūpampi bhikkhuno sayaṃ kātuṃ vā ‘‘karohī’’ti vattuṃ vā na vaṭṭati, ‘‘upāsaka dvārapālaṃ karohī’’ti vattumpi na labbhati. Jātakapakaraṇaasadisadānādīni pana pasādanīyāni nibbidāpaṭisaṃyuttāni vā vatthūni parehi kārāpetuṃ labbhati. Mālākammādīni sayampi kātuṃ labbhati.
299.Na bhikkhave paṭibhānacittaṃ, here, not only the forms of women and men, but also the forms of animals, even the form of an earthworm, are not allowed for a bhikkhu to make himself or to say "make it." It is not even allowed to say, "Upāsaka, make a doorkeeper." However, things that are inspiring, connected with disenchantment, like alms giving that are dissimilar to Jātaka stories, can be made by others. One can even make things like garlands oneself.
300.Aḷakamandāti ekaṅgaṇā manussābhikiṇṇā.Tayo gabbheti etthasivikāgabbhoti caturassagabbho.Nāḷikāgabbhoti vitthārato diguṇatiguṇāyāmo dīghagabbho.Hammiyagabbhoti ākāsatale kūṭāgāragabbho vā muṇḍacchadanagabbho vā.
300.Aḷakamandā, crowded with people in a single courtyard. Tayo gabbhe, here sivikāgabbho, a square chamber. Nāḷikāgabbho, a long chamber with a length two or three times its width. Hammiyagabbho, a chamber in a storied building or a flat-roofed chamber on the roof.
Kalaṅkapādakanti rukkhaṃ vijjhitvā tattha khāṇuke ākoṭetvā kataṃ, taṃ āharimaṃ bhittipādaṃ jiṇṇakuṭṭapādassa upatthambhanatthaṃ bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetuṃ anujānāmīti attho.Parittāṇakiṭikanti vassaparittāṇatthaṃ kiṭikaṃ.Uddasudhanti vacchakagomayena ceva chārikāya ca saddhiṃ madditamattikaṃ.
Kalaṅkapādakaṃ, made by piercing a tree and hammering a peg into it; it is said that I allow this, a support for an old wall, to be placed on the ground. Parittāṇakiṭikaṃ, a screen for protection from rain. Uddasudhaṃ, clay kneaded together with calf dung and ashes.
Āḷindonāma pamukhaṃ vuccati.Paghanaṃnāma yaṃ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca pādehi hananti, tassa vihāradvāre ubhato kuṭṭaṃ nīharitvā katapadesassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, ‘‘paghāna’’ntipi vuccati.Pakuṭṭanti majjhe gabbhassa samantā pariyāgāro vuccati. ‘‘Pakuṭa’’ntipi pāṭho.Osārakanti anāḷindake vihāre vaṃsaṃ datvā tato daṇḍake osāretvā katachadanapamukhaṃ.Saṃsāraṇakiṭikonāma cakkalayutto kiṭiko.
Āḷindo is called the entrance. Paghanaṃ is the name for the area where those going out and those entering strike with their feet; this is a term for the area created by extending the walls on both sides of the monastery door; it is also called "paghāna." Pakuṭṭaṃ, the surrounding enclosure around the middle of the chamber is called. "Pakuṭa" is also a reading. Osārakaṃ, an overhanging roof made by placing bamboo on a monastery without an entrance hall and then extending rafters from it. Saṃsāraṇakiṭiko is a screen fitted with wheels.
301.Pānīyabhājananti pivantānaṃ pānīyadānabhājanaṃ. Uḷuṅko ca thālakañca pānīyasaṅkhassa anulomāni.
301.Pānīyabhājanaṃ, a water vessel for giving water to those who are drinking. A water dipper and a bowl are suitable for the water supply.
303.Apesīti dīghadārumhi khāṇuke pavesetvā kaṇṭakasākhāhi vinandhitvā kataṃ dvārathakanakaṃ.Palighoti gāmadvāresu viya cakkayuttaṃ dvārathakanakaṃ.
303.Apesī, a small double door made by inserting a peg into a long piece of wood and intertwining thorny branches. Paligho, a small double door fitted with wheels, like those at village gates.
305.Assatarīhi yuttā rathāassatarīrathā.Āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalāti āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalāni.
305.Ratha (chariots) yoked with mules are assatarīrathā.Āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalā, adorned jeweled earrings.
Parinibbutoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto.Sītibhūtoti kilesātapābhāvena sītibhūto.Nirūpadhīti kilesupadhiabhāvena nirūpadhīti vuccati.
Parinibbuto, passed away with the extinction of defilements. Sītibhūto, become cooled due to the absence of the heat of defilements. Nirūpadhī, called without upadhi due to the absence of the kilesupadhi (defilement-substrata).
Sabbā āsattiyo chetvāti rūpādīsu vā visayesu sabbabhavesu vā patthanāyo chinditvā.Hadaye daranti citte kilesadarathaṃ vinetvā.Veyyāyikanti vayakaraṇaṃ vuccati.
Sabbā āsattiyo chetvā, having cut off desires in forms, etc., or in all existences. Hadaye daraṃ, having removed the fear of defilements from the mind. Veyyāyikaṃ, called the act of making disappear.
307.Ādeyyavācoti tassa vacanaṃ bahū janā ādiyitabbaṃ sotabbaṃ maññantīti attho.Ārāme akaṃsūti ye sadhanā, te attano dhanena akaṃsu. Ye mandadhanā ceva adhanā ca, tesaṃ dhanaṃ adāsi. Iti so satasahassakahāpaṇe satasahassagghanakañca bhaṇḍaṃ datvā pañcacattālīsayojanike addhāne yojane yojane vihārapatiṭṭhānaṃ katvā sāvatthiṃ agamāsi.
307.Ādeyyavāco, his words are considered by many people to be worth taking and listening to, this is the meaning. Ārāme akaṃsū, those who were wealthy made it with their own wealth. To those who had little wealth and those who had no wealth, he gave wealth. Thus, having given one hundred thousand kahāpaṇas and goods worth one hundred thousand, having established monasteries at each yojana (league) in a journey of forty-five yojanas, he went to Sāvatthi.
Koṭisantharaṃsantharāpesīti kahāpaṇakoṭiyā kahāpaṇakoṭiṃ paṭipādetvā santhari. Ye tattha rukkhā vā pokkharaṇiyo vā tesaṃ parikkhepappamāṇaṃ gahetvā aññasmiṃ ṭhāne santharitvā adāsi. Evamassa aṭṭhārasakoṭikaṃ nidhānaṃ parikkhayaṃ agamāsi.
Koṭisantharaṃ santharāpesī, he spread kahāpaṇas equal to one koṭi (ten million) upon one koṭi. Having taken the extent of the surrounding area of the trees or ponds there, he spread [coins] in another place and gave it. Thus, his treasure of eighteen koṭis came to an end.
Kumārassaetadahosīti gahapatino evaṃ bahudhanaṃ cajantassāpi mukhassa vippasannākāraṃ disvā etaṃ ahosi.Koṭṭhakaṃ māpesīti sattabhūmikaṃ dvārakoṭṭhakapāsādaṃ māpesi.
Kumārassa etadahosī, seeing the cheerful expression on the face of the householder even while giving up so much wealth, this occurred to the youth. Koṭṭhakaṃ māpesī, he had a seven-storied gatehouse palace built.
Atha kho anāthapiṇḍiko gahapati jetavane vihāre kārāpesi…pe… maṇḍape kārāpesīti aparāhipi aṭṭhārasahi koṭīhi ete vihārādayo kārāpesi aṭṭhakarīsappamāṇāya bhūmiyā. Vipassissa hi bhagavato punabbasumitto gahapati yojanappamāṇaṃ bhūmiṃ suvaṇṇiṭṭhakāsantharena kiṇitvā vihāraṃ kārāpesi. Sikhissa pana sirivaḍḍho gahapati tigāvutappamāṇaṃ suvaṇṇayaṭṭhisantharena, vessabhussa sotthijo gahapati aḍḍhayojanappamāṇaṃ suvaṇṇaphālasantharena, kakusandhassa pana accuto gahapati gāvutappamāṇaṃ suvaṇṇahatthipadasantharena, koṇāgamanassa uggo gahapati aḍḍhagāvutappamāṇaṃ suvaṇṇiṭṭhakāsantharena, kassapassa sumaṅgalo gahapati vīsatiusabhappamāṇaṃ suvaṇṇakacchapasantharena, amhākaṃ bhagavato sudatto gahapati aṭṭhakarīsappamāṇaṃ bhūmiṃ kahāpaṇasantharena kiṇitvā vihāraṃ kārāpesīti; evaṃ anupubbena parihāyanti sampattiyoti alameva sabbasampattīsu virajjituṃ alaṃ vimuccitunti.
Atha kho anāthapiṇḍiko gahapati jetavane vihāre kārāpesi…pe… maṇḍape kārāpesī, then Anāthapiṇḍika the householder had monasteries built in Jetavana...pe...had pavilions built; he had these monasteries, etc., built on land measuring eight karīsas with another eighteen koṭis. For Vipassī Buddha, the householder Punabbasumitta, after buying land measuring one yojana by covering it with gold bricks, had a monastery built. For Sikhi Buddha, the householder Sirivaḍḍha [did the same] on three gāvutas with gold rods, for Vessabhu Buddha, the householder Sotthija [did the same] on half a yojana with gold tiles, for Kakusandha Buddha, the householder Accuta [did the same] on one gāvuta with gold elephant footprints, for Koṇāgamana Buddha, the householder Ugga [did the same] on half a gāvuta with gold bricks, for Kassapa Buddha, the householder Sumaṅgala [did the same] on twenty usabhas with gold turtles, and for our Buddha, the householder Sudatta, after buying land measuring eight karīsas by covering it with kahāpaṇas, had a monastery built; thus, prosperity gradually declines; therefore, it is enough to be detached from all prosperity, enough to be liberated.
308.Khaṇḍanti bhinnokāso.Phullanti phalitokāso.Paṭisaṅkharissatīti pākatikaṃ karissati. Laddhanavakammena pana bhikkhunā vāsipharasunikhādanādīni gahetvā sayaṃ na kātabbaṃ, katākataṃ jānitabbaṃ.
308.Khaṇḍaṃ, a broken space. Phullaṃ, a space where there are cracks. Paṭisaṅkharissatī, he will repair it. However, a bhikkhu who has obtained new work should not take a hatchet, etc., and do it himself, but should know what has been done and not done.
310.Piṭṭhito piṭṭhito gantvāti thero kira gilāne paṭijagganto jiṇṇe vuḍḍhe saṅgaṇhanto sabbapacchato āgacchati. Idamassa cārittaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘piṭṭhito piṭṭhito gantvā’’ti.Aggāsananti therāsanaṃ.Aggodakanti dakkhiṇodakaṃ.Aggapiṇḍanti saṅghattherapiṇḍaṃ.Antarā satthīnaṃ karitvāti catunnaṃ pādānaṃ antare karitvā.
310.Piṭṭhito piṭṭhito gantvā, it seems that the Elder, while attending to the sick and gathering the old and aged, comes last of all. This is his conduct. Therefore, it was said: "Having gone behind." Aggāsanaṃ, the seat of the Elder. Aggodakaṃ, the water of offering. Aggapiṇḍaṃ, the lump of food for the Sangha Elder. Antarā satthīnaṃ karitvā, having done it between the four legs.
315.Patiṭṭhāpesīti aṭṭhārasakoṭipariccāgaṃ katvā patiṭṭhāpesi. Evaṃ sabbāpi catupaṇṇāsakoṭiyo pariccaji.
315.Patiṭṭhāpesī, he established it by spending eighteen koṭis. Thus, he gave up all fifty-four koṭis.
Vihārānujānanakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Discourse on the Permission of Monasteries is Concluded.
Āsanappaṭibāhanādikathā
Discourse on the Refusal of Seats, Etc.
316.Vippakatabhojanoti antaraghare vā vihāre vā araññe vā yattha katthaci bhuñjamāno bhikkhu aniṭṭhite bhojane na vuṭṭhāpetabbo. Antaraghare pacchā āgatena bhikkhaṃ gahetvā gantabbaṃ. Sace manussā vā bhikkhū vā ‘‘pavisathā’’ti vadanti, ‘‘mayi pavisante bhikkhū uṭṭhahissantī’’ti vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Etha, bhante, āsanaṃ atthī’’ti vuttena pana pavisitabbaṃ. Sace koci kiñci na vadati, āsanasālaṃ gantvā atisamīpaṃ agantvā sabhāgaṭṭhāne ṭhātabbaṃ. Okāse kate ‘‘pavisathā’’ti vuttena pana pavisitabbaṃ. Sace pana yaṃ āsanaṃ tassa pāpuṇāti, tattha abhuñjanto bhikkhu nisinno hoti, taṃ uṭṭhāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. Yāgukhajjakādīsu pana yaṃkiñci pivitvā vā khāditvā vā yāva añño āgacchati, tāva nisinnaṃ rittahatthampi vuṭṭhāpetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Vippakatabhojanoyeva hi so hoti.
316.Vippakatabhojano, a bhikkhu eating anywhere, whether in a house, a monastery, or the wilderness, should not be made to get up before the meal is finished. One who comes later in a house should take alms and leave. If people or bhikkhus say, "Enter," one should say, "The bhikkhus will get up when I enter." However, one should enter when told, "Come, Bhante, there is a seat." If no one says anything, one should go to the assembly hall and stand in a suitable place without going too close. When space is made, one should enter when told, "Enter." However, if a bhikkhu is sitting there not eating, occupying the seat that is due to him, it is permissible to make him get up. But when drinking or eating any kind of gruel or snacks, even if one is sitting empty-handed, one should not be made to get up until another comes. For he is one who is still in the midst of his meal.
Sace vuṭṭhāpetīti sace āpattiṃ atikkamitvāpi vuṭṭhāpetiyeva.Pavārito ca hotīti yaṃ so vuṭṭhāpeti, ayañca bhikkhu pavārito ca hoti, tena vattabbo – ‘‘gaccha udakaṃ āharāhī’’ti. Vuḍḍhatarañhi bhikkhuṃ āṇāpetuṃ idameva ekaṃ ṭhānanti. Sace so udakampi na āharati, tato yañca navakatarena kattabbaṃ, taṃ dassento‘‘sādhukaṃ sitthānī’’tiādimāha.
Sace vuṭṭhāpetī, if he makes [him] get up even after transgressing the offense. Pavārito ca hotī, and the bhikkhu whom he makes get up is also invited; therefore, he should be told: "Go, bring water." For this is the only situation where it is proper to order an older bhikkhu. If he does not even bring water, then showing what should be done by a junior, he said "sādhukaṃ sitthānī (carefully with the strainer)," etc.
Gilānassa patirūpaṃ seyyanti ettha yo kāsabhagandarātisārādīhi gilāno hoti, kheḷamallakavaccakapālādīni ṭhapetabbāni honti. Kuṭṭhi vā hoti, senāsanaṃ dūseti; evarūpassa heṭṭhāpāsādapaṇṇasālādīsu aññataraṃ ekamantaṃ senāsanaṃ dātabbaṃ. Yasmiṃ vasante senāsanaṃ na dussati, tassa varaseyyāpi dātabbāva. Yopi sinehapānavirecananatthukammādīsu yaṃkiñci bhesajjaṃ karoti, sabbo so gilānoyeva, tassāpi sallakkhetvā patirūpaṃ senāsanaṃ dātabbaṃ.Lesakappenāti appakena sīsābādhādimattena.Bhikkhūgaṇetvāti ‘‘ettakā nāma bhikkhū’’ti vihāre bhikkhūnaṃ paricchedaṃ ñatvā.
Gilānassa patirūpaṃ seyyaṃ, here, for one who is sick with cough, fistula, dysentery, etc., spittoons, toilet bowls, etc., should be provided. If one has leprosy, [and] defiles the dwelling, for such a person, one should give a solitary dwelling in one corner, such as a lower story dwelling or a leaf hut. For one in whom the dwelling is not defiled, a better dwelling should be given. Whoever takes any medicine, such as oil-drinking, purgatives, snuff, etc., is all sick; considering that, a suitable dwelling should be given to him. Lesakappenā, with a slight illness, such as a headache. Bhikkhū gaṇetvā, having known the number of bhikkhus in the monastery, saying, "There are so many bhikkhus."
Āsanappaṭibāhanādikathā niṭṭhitā.
The Discourse on the Refusal of Seats, Etc. is Concluded.
Senāsanaggāhakathā
Discourse on Taking a Dwelling
318.Seyyāti mañcaṭṭhānāni vuccanti.Seyyaggenāti seyyāparicchedena, vassūpanāyikadivase kālaṃ ghosetvā ekamañcaṭṭhānaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno gāhetuṃ anujānāmīti attho.Seyyaggena gāhentāti seyyāparicchedena gāhiyamānā.Seyyā ussārayiṃsūti mañcaṭṭhānāni atirekāni ahesuṃ. Vihāraggādīsupi eseva nayo.Anubhāganti puna aparampi bhāgaṃ dātuṃ. Atimandesu hi bhikkhūsu ekekassa bhikkhuno dve tīṇi pariveṇāni dātabbāni.Na akāmā dātabboti anicchāya na dātabbo. Tattha vassūpanāyikadivase gahite anubhāge pacchā āgatānaṃ na attano aruciyā so anubhāgo dātabbo. Sace pana yena gahito, so ca attano ruciyā taṃ anubhāgaṃ vā paṭhamabhāgaṃ vā deti, vaṭṭati.
318.Seyyā, are called bed-spaces. Seyyaggena, by the allotment of beds; on the day of entering the rains, after announcing the time, it is said that I allow one bed-space to be given to one bhikkhu. Seyyaggena gāhentā, being taken by the allotment of beds. Seyyā ussārayiṃsū, the bed-spaces were in excess. This same method applies to monastery-storages, etc. Anubhāgaṃ, to give another share again. For in the case of very few bhikkhus, two or three enclosures should be given to each bhikkhu. Na akāmā dātabbo, it should not be given against one's will. There, on the day of entering the rains, in the anubhāga that is taken, the anubhāga should not be given later to those who come after, against one's wish. But if the one by whom it was taken gives that anubhāga or the first share according to his own wish, it is allowable.
Nissīme ṭhitassāti upacārasīmato bahi ṭhitassa. Anto upacārasīmāya pana dūre ṭhitassāpi labbhatiyeva.Senāsanaṃ gahetvāti vassūpanāyikadivase gahetvā.Sabbakālaṃ paṭibāhantīti catumāsaccayena utukālepi paṭibāhanti. Tīsu senāsanaggāhesu purimako ca pacchimako cāti ime dve gāhā thāvarā.
Nissīme ṭhitassa, to one standing outside the boundary. However, it can be obtained even by one standing far away inside the boundary. Senāsanaṃ gahetvā, having taken a dwelling on the day of entering the rains. Sabbakālaṃ paṭibāhantī, they refuse even at the change of seasons after four months. Among the three ways of taking a dwelling, the first and the last are permanent.
Antarāmuttakeayaṃ vinicchayo – ekasmiṃ vihāre mahālābhasenāsanaṃ hoti. Senāsanasāmikā vassūpagataṃ bhikkhuṃ sabbapaccayehi sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhahitvā pavāretvā gamanakāle bahuṃ samaṇaparikkhāraṃ denti. Mahātherā dūratopi āgantvā vassūpanāyikadivase taṃ gahetvā phāsuṃ vasitvā vutthavassā lābhaṃ gaṇhitvā pakkamanti. Āvāsikā ‘‘mayaṃ etthuppannaṃ lābhaṃ na labhāma, niccaṃ āgantukamahātherāva labhanti, teyeva naṃ āgantvā paṭijaggissantī’’ti palujjantampi na olokenti. Bhagavā tassa paṭijagganatthaṃ ‘‘aparajjugatāya pavāraṇāya āyatiṃ vassāvāsatthāya antarāmuttako gāhetabbo’’ti āha.
Antarāmuttake, this is the judgment: in one monastery there is a dwelling with great gains. The owners of the dwelling, after attentively attending to a bhikkhu who has entered the rains with all requisites, invite him and give him much monastic equipment when he departs. Great Elders come from afar and take it on the day of entering the rains, live comfortably, complete the rains, take the gains, and leave. The resident bhikkhus, "We do not get the gains that arise here; only the visiting Great Elders always get them; they will come and attend to it," do not even look at it even if it is falling apart. The Blessed One, for the purpose of its care, said, "For the sake of dwelling during the rains in the future by an invitation given in the intervening period, an antarāmuttaka should be taken."
Taṃ gāhentena saṅghatthero vattabbo – ‘‘bhante antarāmuttakasenāsanaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti. Sace gaṇhāti, dātabbaṃ; no ce eteneva upāyena anutheraṃ ādiṃ katvā yo gaṇhāti, tassa antamaso sāmaṇerassāpi dātabbaṃ. Tena taṃ senāsanaṃ aṭṭhamāse paṭijaggitabbaṃ. Chadanabhittibhūmīsu yaṃ kiñci khaṇḍaṃ vā phullaṃ vā hoti, taṃ sabbaṃ paṭisaṅkharitabbaṃ. Uddesaparipucchādīhi divasaṃ khepetvā rattiṃ tattha vasitumpi vaṭṭati. Rattiṃ pariveṇe vasitvā tattha divasaṃ khepetumpi vaṭṭati. Rattindivaṃ tattheva vasitumpi vaṭṭati. Utukāle āgatānaṃ vuḍḍhānaṃ na paṭibāhitabbaṃ. Vassūpanāyikadivase pana sampatte sace saṅghatthero ‘‘mayhaṃ idaṃ senāsanaṃ dethā’’ti vadati, na labhati. ‘‘Bhante, idaṃ antarāmuttakaṃ gahetvā aṭṭhamāse ekena bhikkhunā paṭijaggita’’nti vatvā na dātabbaṃ. Aṭṭhamāse paṭijaggakabhikkhusseva gahitaṃ hoti.
When taking it, the Sanghatthera should be addressed: "Bhante, please accept the antarāmuttaka senāsana." If he accepts, it should be given; if not, following this method, starting with the anuthera, whoever accepts, even a sāmaṇera, should be given it. Then that senāsana should be maintained for eight months. Any cracks or damage to the roof, walls, or floor should all be repaired. Spending the day with uddesa, paripuccha, etc., it is permissible to live there at night. It is also permissible to spend the day there, having lived in the pariveṇa at night. It is also permissible to live there day and night. Elderly monks who come during the off-season should not be turned away. However, when the day of the vassūpanāyika arrives, if the Sanghatthera says, "Give this senāsana to me," he should not receive it. He should be told, "Bhante, this antarāmuttaka has been maintained by a bhikkhu for eight months," and it should not be given. It belongs to the bhikkhu who has maintained it for eight months. (pāci. 239)
Yasmiṃ pana senāsane ekasaṃvacchare dvikkhattuṃ paccaye denti chamāsaccayena chamāsaccayena, taṃ antarāmuttakaṃ na gāhetabbaṃ. Yasmiṃ vā tikkhattuṃ denti catumāsaccayena catumāsaccayena, yasmiṃ vā catukkhattuṃ denti temāsaccayena temāsaccayena, taṃ antarāmuttakaṃ na gāhetabbaṃ. Paccayeneva hi taṃ paṭijagganaṃ labhissati. Yasmiṃ pana ekasaṃvacchare sakideva bahupaccaye denti, etaṃ antarāmuttakaṃ gāhetabbanti. Ayaṃ tāva antovasse vassūpanāyikadivasena pāḷiyaṃ āgatasenāsanaggāhakathā.
However, a senāsana where requisites are given twice a year, every six months, should not be taken as antarāmuttaka. Nor should one be taken where they give three times, every four months, or where they give four times, every three months. For the maintenance will be obtained through the requisites themselves. But a senāsana where many requisites are given only once a year can be taken as antarāmuttaka. This, then, is the account of taking a senāsana that comes in the Pāḷi with regard to the vassūpanāyika day during the rains.
Ayaṃ pana senāsanaggāho nāma duvidho hoti – utukāle ca vassāvāse ca. Tattha utukāle tāva keci āgantukā bhikkhū purebhattaṃ āgacchanti, keci pacchābhattaṃ paṭhamayāmaṃ vā majjhimayāmaṃ vā pacchimayāmaṃ vā ye yadā āgacchanti, tesaṃ tadāva bhikkhū uṭṭhāpetvā senāsanaṃ dātabbaṃ. Akālo nāma natthi. Senāsanapaññāpakena pana paṇḍitena bhavitabbaṃ, ekaṃ vā dve vā mañcaṭṭhānāni ṭhapetabbāni. Sace vikāle eko vā dve vā therā āgacchanti, te vattabbā – ‘‘bhante, ādito paṭṭhāya vuṭṭhāpiyamāne sabbepi bhikkhū ubbhaṇḍikā bhavissanti, tumhe amhākaṃ vasanaṭṭhāneyeva vasathā’’ti.
Now, this taking of senāsana is of two kinds: during the off-season and during the rains-residence. Of these, during the off-season, some visiting bhikkhus arrive before the meal, some after the meal, in the first watch of the night, the middle watch, or the last watch; whenever they arrive, bhikkhus should be made to get up then and the senāsana should be given. There is no such thing as an inappropriate time. But the senāsanapaññāpaka should be wise and keep one or two mañcaṭṭhāna available. If one or two theras come at an unseemly hour, they should be told, "Bhante, if we make everyone get up from the beginning, all the bhikkhus will be disturbed; please stay in our own dwelling place."
Bahūsu pana āgatesu vuṭṭhāpetvā paṭipāṭiyā dātabbaṃ. Sace ekekaṃ pariveṇaṃ pahoti, ekekaṃ pariveṇaṃ dātabbaṃ. Tattha aggisāladīghasālamaṇḍalamālādayo sabbepi tasseva pāpuṇanti. Evaṃ appahonte pāsādaggena dātabbaṃ. Pāsādesu appahontesu ovarakaggena dātabbaṃ. Ovarakesu appahontesu seyyaggena dātabbaṃ. Seyyaggesu appahontesu mañcaṭṭhānena dātabbaṃ. Mañcaṭṭhāne appahonte ekapīṭhakaṭṭhānavasena dātabbaṃ. Bhikkhuno pana ṭhitokāsamattaṃ na gāhetabbaṃ. Etañhi senāsanaṃ nāma na hoti. Pīṭhakaṭṭhāne pana appahonte ekaṃ mañcaṭṭhānaṃ vā pīṭhakaṭṭhānaṃ vā vārena vārena gahetvā ‘‘bhante, vissamathā’’ti tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ dātabbaṃ, na hi sakkā sītasamaye sabbarattiṃ ajjhokāse vasituṃ. Mahātherena paṭhamayāmaṃ vissamitvā nikkhamitvā dutiyattherassa vattabbaṃ – ‘‘āvuso, idha pavisāhī’’ti. Sace mahāthero niddāgaruko hoti, kālaṃ na jānāti, ukkāsitvā dvāraṃ ākoṭetvā ‘‘bhante, kālo jāto, sītaṃ anudahatī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tena nikkhamitvā okāso dātabbo, adātuṃ na labhati. Dutiyattherenapi majjhimayāmaṃ vissamitvā purimanayeneva itarassa dātabbaṃ. Niddāgaruko vuttanayeneva vuṭṭhāpetabbo. Evaṃ ekarattiṃ ekamañcaṭṭhānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ dātabbaṃ. Jambudīpe pana ekacce bhikkhū ‘‘senāsanaṃ nāma mañcaṭṭhānaṃ vā pīṭhaṭṭhānaṃ vā kiñcideva kassaci sappāyaṃ hoti, kassaci asappāya’’nti āgantukā hontu vā mā vā, devasikaṃ senāsanaṃ gāhenti. Ayaṃ utukāle senāsanaggāho nāma.
But when many have come, it should be given by making them get up in order. If a single pariveṇa suffices, a single pariveṇa should be given. There, all of the aggisālā, dīghasālā, maṇḍalamālā, etc., belong to him. When this is not sufficient, it should be given with the pāsāda's upper story. When pāsādas are not sufficient, it should be given with the ovaraka's upper story. When ovarakas are not sufficient, it should be given with the seyya's upper story. When seyyas are not sufficient, it should be given with the mañcaṭṭhāna. When mañcaṭhāna is not sufficient, it should be given as a single pīṭhakaṭṭhāna. However, a bhikkhu should not be given merely enough space to stand, for this is not called a senāsana. When pīṭhakaṭṭhāna is not sufficient, taking one mañcaṭṭhāna or pīṭhakaṭṭhāna in turn, it should be given to three people, saying, "Bhante, please rest," for it is not possible to live in the open air all night in the cold season. The Mahāthera, having rested for the first watch of the night, should go out and say to the second thera, "Āvuso, enter here." If the Mahāthera is heavy with sleep and does not know the time, having coughed and knocked on the door, he should be told, "Bhante, the time has come, the cold is unbearable." He should go out and give the space; he is not allowed not to give it. The second thera, having rested for the middle watch of the night, should give it to the other in the same way as before. If he is heavy with sleep, he should be awakened in the manner described. Thus, one mañcaṭṭhāna should be given to three people for one night. However, in Jambudīpa, some bhikkhus, thinking that "a senāsana, namely a mañcaṭṭhāna or pīṭhaṭṭhāna, is suitable for some and unsuitable for others," take a senāsana daily, whether visitors are present or not. This is called taking senāsana during the off-season.
Vassāvāse pana atthi āgantukavattaṃ, atthi āvāsikavattaṃ, āgantukena tāva sakaṭṭhānaṃ muñcitvā aññattha gantvā vasitukāmena vassūpanāyikadivasameva tattha na gantabbaṃ. Vasanaṭṭhānaṃ vā hi tatra sambādhaṃ bhaveyya, bhikkhācāro vā na sampajjeyya, tena na phāsuṃ vihareyya. Tasmā ‘‘idāni māsamattena vassūpanāyikā bhavissatī’’ti taṃ vihāraṃ pavisitabbaṃ. Tattha māsamattaṃ vasanto sace uddesatthiko uddesasampattiṃ sallakkhetvā, sace kammaṭṭhāniko kammaṭṭhānasappāyataṃ sallakkhetvā, sace paccayatthiko paccayalābhaṃ sallakkhetvā antovasse sukhaṃ vasissati.
During the rains-residence, there is the conduct for visitors and the conduct for residents. A visitor who, leaving his own dwelling place, wants to go and live elsewhere, should not go there on the very day of the vassūpanāyika, for the dwelling place there may be crowded, or the alms round may not be successful, so he would not live comfortably. Therefore, he should enter that vihāra when "the vassūpanāyika will be in about a month." Living there for about a month, if he is interested in uddesa, considering the success of uddesa, if he is interested in kammaṭṭhāna, considering the suitability of kammaṭṭhāna, if he is interested in requisites, considering the obtaining of requisites, he will live happily during the rains.
Sakaṭṭhānato ca tattha gacchantena na gocaragāmo ghaṭṭetabbo, na tattha manussā vattabbā – ‘‘tumhe nissāya salākabhattādīni vā yāgukhajjakādīni vā vassāvāsikaṃ vā natthi, ayaṃ cetiyassa parikkhāro, ayaṃ uposathāgārassa, idaṃ tāḷañceva sūci ca sampaṭicchatha tumhākaṃ vihāra’’nti. Senāsanaṃ pana jaggitvā dārubhaṇḍamattikābhaṇḍāni paṭisāmetvā gamiyavattaṃ pūretvā gantabbaṃ. Evaṃ gacchantenāpi daharehi pattacīvarabhaṇḍikāyo ukkhipāpetvā telanāḷikattaradaṇḍādīni gāhāpetvā chattaṃ paggayha attānaṃ dassentena gāmadvāreneva na gantabbaṃ, paṭicchannena aṭavimaggena gantabbaṃ. Aṭavimagge asati gumbādīni maddantena na gantabbaṃ, gamiyavattaṃ pana pūretvā vitakkaṃ chinditvā suddhacittena gamanavatteneva gantabbaṃ. Sace pana gāmadvārena maggo hoti, gacchantañca naṃ saparivāraṃ disvā manussā ‘‘amhākaṃ thero viyā’’ti upadhāvitvā ‘‘kuhiṃ, bhante, sabbaparikkhāre gahetvā gacchathā’’ti vadanti, tesu ce eko evaṃ vadati – ‘‘vassūpanāyikakālo nāmāyaṃ, yattha antovasse nibaddhabhikkhācāro bhaṇḍapaṭicchādanañca labbhati, tattha bhikkhū gacchantī’’ti. Tassa ce sutvā te manussā ‘‘bhante, imasmimpi gāme jano bhuñjati ceva nivāseti ca, mā aññattha gacchathā’’ti vatvā mittāmacce pakkosāpetvā sabbe sammantayitvā vihāre nibaddhavattañca salākabhattādīni ca vassāvāsikañca paṭṭhapetvā ‘‘idheva bhante vasathā’’ti yācanti, sabbaṃ sādituṃ vaṭṭati. Sabbañhetaṃ kappiyañceva anavajjañca. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘‘kuhiṃ gacchathā’ti vutte ‘asukaṭṭhāna’nti vatvā, ‘kasmā tattha gacchathā’ti vutte ‘kāraṇaṃ ācikkhitabba’’’nti vuttaṃ. Ubhayampi panettha suddhacittattāva anavajjaṃ. Idaṃ āgantukavattaṃ nāma.
When going there from his own dwelling place, he should not disturb the village for alms, nor should he say to the people there, "There are no salākabhatta, etc., or yāgukhajjaka, etc., or rains-residence things relying on you. Accept this parikkhāra for the cetiya, this for the uposathāgāra, this tāḷa and sūci for your vihāra." But having maintained the senāsana, having returned the wooden utensils and earthenware utensils, and having fulfilled the gamiyavatta, he should go. Even when going thus, having had the young ones lift up the bowls and robe bags, having had them take the oil funnels and walking sticks, and displaying himself by raising the umbrella, he should not go by the village gate, but should go by a hidden forest path. If there is no forest path, he should not go crushing bushes, etc., but having fulfilled the gamiyavatta, having cut off vitakka, he should go only by the conduct of going with a pure mind. But if there is a path through the village gate, and people, seeing him going with his retinue, run up thinking, "He is our thera," and say, "Where are you going, Bhante, taking all the parikkhāras?" if even one of them says, "This is the time for vassūpanāyika; bhikkhus go where a regular alms round and covering of possessions are obtained during the rains," if, having heard this, those people, having summoned friends and relatives, all agree and establish regular duties, salākabhatta, etc., and rains-residence things in the vihāra, and entreat him, "Please stay here, Bhante," it is permissible to approve everything, for all of this is allowable and blameless. However, in the Kurundiya, it is said, "'When asked, "Where are you going?" he should say, "To such and such a place." When asked, "Why are you going there?" he should explain the reason.'" In this case, both are blameless due to purity of mind. This is called the conduct for visitors.
Idaṃ pana āvāsikavattaṃ – paṭikacceva hi āvāsikehi vihāro jaggitabbo. Khaṇḍaphullapaṭisaṅkharaṇaparibhaṇḍāni kātabbāni. Rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānavaccakuṭipassāvaṭṭhānāni padhānagharavihāramaggoti imāni sabbāni paṭijaggitabbāni, cetiye sudhākammaṃ muddavedikāya telamakkhanaṃ mañcapīṭhapaṭijaggananti idampi sabbaṃ kātabbaṃ – ‘‘vassaṃ vasitukāmā āgantvā uddesaparipucchākammaṭṭhānānuyogādīni karontā sukhaṃ vasissantī’’ti. Kataparikammehi āsāḷhījuṇhapañcamito paṭṭhāya vassāvāsikaṃ pucchitabbaṃ. Kattha pucchitabbaṃ? Yato pakatiyā labbhati. Yehi pana na dinnapubbaṃ, te pucchituṃ na vaṭṭati. Kasmā pucchitabbaṃ? Kadāci hi manussā denti, kadāci dubbhikkhādīhi upaddutā na denti. Tattha ye na dassanti, te apucchitvā vassāvāsike gāhite gāhitabhikkhūnaṃ lābhantarāyo hoti, tasmā pucchitvāva gāhetabbaṃ, pucchantena ‘‘tumhākaṃ vassāvāsikaggāhakakālo upakaṭṭho’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace vadanti ‘‘bhante, imaṃ saṃvaccharaṃ chātakādīhi upaddutamha, na sakkoma dātu’’nti vā ‘‘yaṃ mayaṃ pubbe dema, tato ūnataraṃ dassāmā’’ti vā ‘‘idāni kappāso sulabho, yaṃ pubbe dema, tato bahutaraṃ dassāmā’’ti vā vadanti, taṃ sallakkhetvā tadanurūpena nayena tesaṃ tesaṃ senāsane bhikkhūnaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ gāhetabbaṃ.
This, however, is the conduct for residents: The vihāra should be maintained by the residents with preparation. Repairs for what is cracked and damaged, and paribbhaṇḍas should be made. Nighttime places, daytime places, toilets, urinals, and the path to the main building and vihāra—all these should be maintained. Whitewashing the cetiya, oiling the brick vedikā, maintaining the couches and chairs—all this should also be done, thinking, "Those who wish to spend the rains, coming and doing uddesa, paripucchā, kammaṭṭhānānuyoga, etc., will live happily." Having made the preparations, from the fifth day of the waxing moon of Āsāḷhī, the rains-residence offering should be asked about. Where should it be asked? From where it is naturally obtained. However, it is not permissible to ask those by whom it has not been given before. Why should it be asked? Sometimes people give, sometimes, afflicted by famine, etc., they do not give. There, if the rains-residence offering is taken from those who will not give without asking, there will be an interruption of gains for the bhikkhus who have taken it. Therefore, it should be taken only after asking. When asking, one should say, "The time for taking your rains-residence offering is near." If they say, "Bhante, we are afflicted by famine, etc., this year; we are not able to give," or "We will give less than what we give before," or "Now cotton is easily available; we will give more than what we give before," having considered that, the rains-residence offering should be taken for the bhikkhus in those senāsanas in a manner appropriate to that.
Sace manussā vadanti – ‘‘yassa amhākaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ pāpuṇāti, so temāsaṃ pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetu, vihāramaggaṃ jaggatu, cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇāni jaggatu, bodhirukkhe udakaṃ āsiñcatū’’ti, yassa taṃ pāpuṇāti, tassa ācikkhitabbaṃ. Yo pana gāmo paṭikkamma yojanadviyojanantare hoti, tatra ce kulāni upanikkhepaṃ ṭhapetvā vihāre vassāvāsikaṃ dentiyeva, tāni kulāni apucchitvāpi tesaṃ senāsane vattaṃ katvā vasantassa vassāvāsikaṃ gāhetabbaṃ. Sace pana tesaṃ senāsane paṃsukūliko vasati, āgatañca taṃ disvā ‘‘tumhākaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ demā’’ti vadanti, tena saṅghassa ācikkhitabbaṃ. Sace tāni kulāni saṅghassa dātuṃ na icchanti, ‘‘tumhākaṃyeva demā’’ti vadanti, sabhāgo bhikkhu ‘‘vattaṃ katvā gaṇhāhī’’ti vattabbo. Paṃsukūlikassa panetaṃ na vaṭṭati, iti saddhādeyye dāyakamanussā pucchitabbā.
If people say, "Whoever receives our rains-residence offering should provide water for three months, maintain the vihāra path, maintain the cetiya courtyard and bodhi courtyard, and pour water on the bodhi tree," that should be told to whoever receives it. But if a village is two or three yojanas away, and families deposit things as collateral and give the rains-residence offering to the vihāra, even without asking those families, the rains-residence offering should be taken for one who, having done the duties for their senāsana, lives there. If a paṃsukūlika lives in their senāsana, and seeing him come, they say, "We will give you the rains-residence offering," that should be reported to the Sangha. If those families do not want to give to the Sangha and say, "We will give it to you," the sabhāga bhikkhu should be told, "Take it, having done the duties." But this is not permissible for a paṃsukūlika. Thus, in the case of things given out of faith, the giving people should be asked.
Tatruppāde pana kappiyakārakā pucchitabbā. Kathaṃ pucchitabbā? ‘‘Kiṃ, āvuso, saṅghassa bhaṇḍapaṭicchādanaṃ bhavissatī’’ti. Sace vadanti – ‘‘bhavissati, bhante, ekekassa navahatthaṃ sāṭakaṃ dassāma, vassāvāsikaṃ gāhethā’’ti, gāhetabbaṃ. Sacepi vadanti – ‘‘sāṭakaṃ natthi; vatthu pana atthi, gāhetha, bhante’’ti, vatthumhi santepi gāhetuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Kappiyakārakānañhi hatthe ‘‘kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti dinnavatthuto yaṃ yaṃ kappaṃ, taṃ taṃ sabbaṃ paribhuñjituṃ anuññātaṃ.
However, in the case of an uppāda, the kappiyakārakas should be asked. How should they be asked? "Āvuso, will there be bhaṇḍapaṭicchādana for the Sangha?" If they say, "Bhante, there will be; we will give each one a nine-hattha sāṭaka; please take the rains-residence offering," it should be taken. Even if they say, "There is no sāṭaka, but there is cloth; please take it, Bhante," it is permissible to take it even when there is cloth. For whatever is allowable is permitted to be used by the kappiyakārakas from the cloth given into their hands, saying, "Use the kappiya thing."
Yaṃ panettha piṇḍapātatthāya gilānapaccayatthāya vā uddissa dinnaṃ, taṃ cīvare upanāmentehi saṅghasuṭṭhutāya apaloketvā upanāmetabbaṃ. Senāsanatthāya uddissa dinnaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti, cīvaravaseneva catupaccayavasena vā dinnaṃ cīvare upanāmentānaṃ apalokanakammakiccaṃ natthi, apalokanakammaṃ karontehi ca puggalavaseneva kātabbaṃ, saṅghavasena na kātabbaṃ. Jātarūparajatavasenāpi āmakadhaññavasena vā apalokanakammaṃ na vaṭṭati. Kappiyabhaṇḍavasena cīvarataṇḍulādivaseneva ca vaṭṭati. Taṃ pana evaṃ kattabbaṃ – ‘‘idāni subhikkhaṃ sulabhapiṇḍaṃ, bhikkhū cīvarena kilamanti, ettakaṃ nāma taṇḍulabhāgaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cīvaraṃ kātuṃ ruccatī’’ti. ‘‘Gilānapaccayo sulabho gilāno vā natthi, ettakaṃ nāma taṇḍulabhāgaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cīvaraṃ kātuṃ ruccatī’’ti.
Whatever is given here, intended for piṇḍapāta or for the sake of medicine for the sick, when applying it to robes, it should be applied after informing the Sangha for the Sangha's well-being. A heavy item given intended for senāsana is so. For those who are applying what is given as robes only, or as the four paccayas, to robes, there is no need for an apalokanakamma. And the apalokanakamma should be done with regard to individuals, not with regard to the Sangha. An apalokanakamma is not permissible with regard to gold and silver or with regard to raw grain, but it is permissible with regard to kappiya things, such as robes, rice, etc. That, however, should be done thus: "Now there is plenty, piṇḍapāta is easily available, the bhikkhus are distressed by robes; so much of the rice portion is pleasing for the bhikkhus to make robes." "Medicine for the sick is easily available, or there are no sick people; so much of the rice portion is pleasing for the bhikkhus to make robes."
Evaṃ cīvarapaccayaṃ sallakkhetvā senāsanassa kāle ghosite sannipatite saṅghe senāsanaggāhako sammannitabbo. Sammannantena ca dve sammannitabbāti vuttaṃ. Evañhi navako vuḍḍhatarassa, vuḍḍho ca navakassa gāhessati. Mahante pana mahāvihārasadise vihāre tayo cattāro janā sammannitabbā. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘aṭṭhapi soḷasapi jane sammannituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tesaṃ sammuti kammavācāyapi apalokanenapi vaṭṭatiyeva.
Thus, having considered the robe paccaya, at a time announced for the senāsana, in a Sangha that has assembled, a senāsanaggāhaka should be appointed. It is said that two should be appointed. For thus a junior will take for a senior, and a senior will take for a junior. But in a large vihāra like the Mahāvihāra, three or four people should be appointed. However, in the Kurundiya, it is said that "it is permissible to appoint even eight or sixteen people." Their appointment is permissible both by kammavācā and by apalokana.
Tehi sammatehi bhikkhūhi senāsanaṃ sallakkhetabbaṃ, cetiyagharaṃ bodhigharaṃ āsanagharaṃ sammuñjaniaṭṭo dāruaṭṭo vaccakuṭi iṭṭhakasālā vaḍḍhakisālā dvārakoṭṭhako pānīyamāḷo maggo pokkharaṇīti etāni hi asenāsanāni, vihāro aḍḍhayogo pāsādo hammiyaṃ guhā maṇḍapo rukkhamūlaṃ veḷugumboti imāni senāsanāni, tāni gāhetabbāni. Gāhentena ca ‘‘paṭhamaṃ bhikkhū gaṇetuṃ, bhikkhū gaṇetvā seyyā gaṇetu’’nti ettha vuttanayena gāhetabbāni. Sace saṅghiko ca saddhādeyyo cāti dve cīvarapaccayā honti, tesu yaṃ bhikkhū paṭhamaṃ gaṇhituṃ icchanti, taṃ gāhetvā tassa ṭhitikato paṭṭhāya itaro gāhetabbo.
By those appointed bhikkhus, the senāsana should be considered. A cetiya house, a bodhi house, an āsana house, a broom closet, a wood closet, a toilet, a brick hall, a carpenters' hall, a gate tower, a water pavilion, a path, and a pond—these are non-senāsanas. A vihāra, an aḍḍhayoga, a pāsāda, a hammiya, a cave, a maṇḍapa, a tree root, and a bamboo grove—these are senāsanas, and they should be taken. When taking, they should be taken in the manner described here: "First count the bhikkhus, and having counted the bhikkhus, count the seyyas." If there are two robe paccayas, one from the Sangha and one given out of faith, having taken whichever the bhikkhus want to take first, the other should be taken starting from the established order of that.
Sace pana bhikkhūnaṃ appatāya pariveṇaggena senāsane gāhiyamāne ekaṃ pariveṇaṃ mahālābhaṃ hoti, dasa vā dvādasa vā cīvarāni labhanti, taṃ vijaṭetvā aññesu alābhakesu āvāsesu pakkhipitvā aññesampi bhikkhūnaṃ gāhetabbanti mahāsumatthero āha. Mahāpadumatthero panāha – ‘‘na evaṃ kātabbaṃ, manussā hi attano āvāsajagganatthāya paccayaṃ denti, tasmā aññehi bhikkhūhi tattha pavisitabba’’nti. Sace panettha mahāthero paṭikkosati – ‘‘māvuso, evaṃ gāhetha, bhagavato anusiṭṭhiṃ karotha, vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pariveṇaggena gāhetu’’’nti tassa paṭikkosanāya aṭṭhatvā ‘‘bhante bhikkhū bahū, paccayo mando, saṅgahaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti taṃ saññāpetvā gāhetabbameva.
If, however, when monks are allocating residences by lot, and one residence becomes very profitable, yielding ten or twelve robes, the Elder Mahāsumata said that it should be redistributed among other residences that have not received much, so that other monks too might receive something. The Elder Mahāpaduma, however, said, "This should not be done, because people give requisites intending to support their own monastery. Therefore, other monks should enter there." If, in this case, a senior monk objects, saying, "Friend, do not allocate it like that. Follow the Buddha's instruction. For the Buddha said, 'I allow, monks, to allocate by lot,'" without heeding his objection, one should inform him, "Venerable sir, the monks are many, but the resources are few. It is proper to make a collective effort," and then proceed with the allocation.
Gāhentena ca sammatena bhikkhunā mahātherassa santikaṃ gantvā evaṃ vattabbaṃ – ‘‘bhante, tumhākaṃ senāsanaṃ pāpuṇāti, gaṇhatha paccayaṃ dhārethā’’ti. ‘‘Asukakulassa paccayo asukasenāsanañca mayhaṃ pāpuṇāti, āvuso’’ti, ‘‘pāpuṇāti, bhante, gaṇhatha na’’nti, ‘‘gaṇhāmi, āvuso’’ti, gahitaṃ hoti. Sace pana ‘‘gahitaṃ vo, bhante’’ti vutte ‘‘gahitaṃ me’’ti vā ‘‘gaṇhissatha, bhante’’ti vutte ‘‘gaṇhissāmī’’ti vā vadati, ‘‘agahitaṃ hotī’’ti mahāsumatthero āha. Mahāpadumatthero panāha – ‘‘atītānāgatavacanaṃ vā hotu, vattamānavacanaṃ vā, satuppādamattaālayakaraṇamattameva cettha pamāṇaṃ, tasmā gahitameva hotī’’ti.
And the monk who has been appointed to allocate should go to the senior monk and say, "Venerable sir, a residence has accrued to you. Please accept the requisites and keep them." If the senior monk says, "The requisites from such-and-such a family and such-and-such a residence have accrued to me, friend," and [the allocating monk replies,] "Yes, venerable sir, they have accrued to you. Will you accept them?", and he says, "I accept, friend," then it is considered accepted. If, however, when told, "Venerable sir, it has been accepted by you," he says, "It has been accepted by me," or when asked, "Will you accept it, venerable sir?" he says, "I will accept it," then it is "not accepted," according to the Elder Mahāsumata. But the Elder Mahāpaduma said, "Whether it is expressed in past tense, future tense, or present tense, only the intention to create a sense of ownership is the measure here. Therefore, it is considered accepted."
Yopi paṃsukūliko bhikkhu senāsanaṃ gahetvā paccayaṃ vissajjeti, ayampi na aññasmiṃ āvāse pakkhipitabbo. Tasmiṃyeva pariveṇe aggisālāya vā dīghasālāya vā rukkhamūle vā aññassa gāhetuṃ vaṭṭati. Paṃsukūliko ‘‘vasāmī’’ti senāsanaṃ jaggissati, itaro ‘‘paccayaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti, evaṃ dvīhi kāraṇehi senāsanaṃ sujaggitataraṃ bhavissati. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘paṃsukūlike vāsatthāya senāsanaṃ gaṇhante senāsanaggāhāpakena vattabbaṃ – ‘bhante, idha paccayo atthi, so kiṃ kātabbo’ti. Tena ‘heṭṭhā aññaṃ gāhāpehī’ti vattabbo. Sace pana kiñci avatvāva vasati, vutthavassassa ca pādamūle ṭhapetvā sāṭakaṃ denti, vaṭṭati. Atha vassāvāsikaṃ demāti vadanti, tasmiṃ senāsane vassaṃvutthabhikkhūnaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti. Yesaṃ pana senāsanaṃ natthi; kevalaṃ paccayameva denti, tesaṃ paccayaṃ avassāvāsike senāsane gāhetuṃ vaṭṭati.
Even a paṃsukūlika monk who, having received a residence, gives away the requisites, should not have them transferred to another monastery. In that very pariveṇa, it is proper to allocate it to another in the fire hall, the long hall, or at the foot of a tree. The paṃsukūlika will look after the residence thinking, "I will dwell here," and the other will accept the requisites. Thus, the residence will be better cared for due to these two reasons. However, it is stated in the Mahāpaccari, "When a paṃsukūlika receives a residence for dwelling, the one allocating the residence should say, 'Venerable sir, there are requisites here. What should be done with them?' He should be told, 'Give it to another underneath.' If he dwells without saying anything and, after residing for the rains, they place a robe at his feet, it is allowable. But if they say that they are giving a vassāvāsika, it accrues to the monks who have resided in that residence." For those who do not have a residence but give only requisites, it is proper to allocate those requisites to a non-vassāvāsika residence.
Manussā thūpaṃ katvā vassāvāsikaṃ gāhāpenti, thūpo nāma asenāsanaṃ, tassa samīpe rukkhe vā maṇḍape vā upanibandhitvā gāhāpetabbaṃ. Tena bhikkhunā cetiyaṃ paṭijaggitabbaṃ. Bodhirukkhabodhigharaāsanagharasammuñjaniaṭṭadāruaṭṭavaccakuṭidvārakoṭṭhakapānīyamāḷakadantakaṭṭhamāḷakesupi eseva nayo. Bhojanasālā pana senāsanameva, tasmā taṃ ekassa vā bahūnaṃ vā paricchinditvā gāhetuṃ vaṭṭatīti sabbamidaṃ vitthārena mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ.
People build a thūpa and allocate a vassāvāsika. A thūpa is not a residence. It should be allocated by attaching [the offering] near it, to a tree or a pavilion. That monk should take care of the cetiya. The same method applies to the bodhirukkha, bodhighara, āsanaghara, brooms, aṭṭadāru, aṭṭavaccakuṭi, door frames, storerooms, water pavilions, and tooth-stick pavilions. But a refectory is indeed a residence. Therefore, it is proper to allocate it by assigning it to one or many. All this is stated in detail in the Mahāpaccari.
Senāsanaggāhāpakena pana pāṭipadaaruṇato paṭṭhāya yāva puna aruṇaṃ na bhijjati tāva gāhetabbaṃ, idañhi senāsanaggāhassa khettaṃ. Sace pātova gāhite senāsane añño vitakkacāriko bhikkhu āgantvā senāsanaṃ yācati, ‘‘gahitaṃ, bhante, senāsanaṃ, vassūpagato saṅgho, ramaṇīyo vihāro, rukkhamūlādīsu yattha icchatha tattha vasathā’’ti vattabbo. Vassūpagatehi antovasse nibaddhavattaṃ ṭhapetvā vassūpagatā bhikkhū ‘‘sammuñjaniyo bandhathā’’ti vattabbā. Sulabhā ce daṇḍakā ceva salākāyo ca honti, ekekena cha pañca muṭṭhisammuñjaniyo, dve tisso yaṭṭhisammuñjaniyo vā bandhitabbā. Dullabhā ce honti, dve tisso muṭṭhisammuñjaniyo ekā yaṭṭhisammuñjanī bandhitabbā. Sāmaṇerehi pañca pañca ukkā koṭṭetabbā. Vasanaṭṭhāne kasāvaparibhaṇḍaṃ kātabbaṃ.
The one allocating the residence should allocate it from the first light of dawn until dawn breaks again, for this is the time frame for residence allocation. If, after a residence has been allocated early in the morning, another wandering monk arrives and requests a residence, he should be told, "Venerable sir, the residence has been allocated. The Saṅgha has entered the rains. The monastery is delightful. Reside wherever you wish, at the foot of a tree or elsewhere." Those who have entered the rains should establish a fixed routine during the rains. The monks who have entered the rains should be told, "Tie brooms." If handles and labels are easily available, each should tie five or six fistfuls of brooms, or two or three stick brooms. If they are difficult to find, two or three fistfuls of brooms and one stick broom should be tied. The novices should pound five torches each. A robe-repairing kit should be prepared in the dwelling place.
Vattaṃ karontehi pana ‘‘na uddisitabbaṃ, na uddisāpetabbaṃ, na sajjhāyo kātabbo, na pabbājetabbaṃ, na upasampādetabbaṃ, na nissayo dātabbo, na dhammasavanaṃ kātabbaṃ, sabbeva hi ete papañcā. Nippapañcā hutvā samaṇadhammameva karissāmā’’ti vā ‘‘sabbe terasa dhutaṅgāni samādiyantu, seyyaṃ akappetvā ṭhānacaṅkamehi vītināmentu, mūgabbataṃ gaṇhantu, sattāhakaraṇīyena gatāpi bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṃ labhantū’’ti vā evarūpaṃ adhammikavattaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Evaṃ pana kātabbaṃ – pariyattidhammo nāma tividhampi saddhammaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti; tasmā sakkaccaṃ uddisatha, uddisāpetha, sajjhāyaṃ karotha, padhānaghare vasantānaṃ saṅghaṭṭanaṃ akatvā antovihāre nisīditvā uddisatha, uddisāpetha, sajjhāyaṃ karotha, dhammasavanaṃ samiddhaṃ karotha, pabbājentā sodhetvā pabbājetha, sodhetvā upasampādetha, sodhetvā nissayaṃ detha, ekopi hi kulaputto pabbajjaṃ upasampadañca labhitvā sakalasāsanaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti, attano thāmena yattakāni sakkotha tattakāni dhutaṅgāni samādiyatha. Antovassaṃ nāmetaṃ sakaladivasaṃ rattiyā ca paṭhamapacchimayāmesu appamattehi bhavitabbaṃ, vīriyaṃ ārabhitabbaṃ. Porāṇakamahātherāpi sabbapalibodhe chinditvā antovasse ekacārikavattaṃ pūrayiṃsu, bhasse mattaṃ jānitvā dasavatthukakathaṃ dasaasubhadasānussatiaṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇakathañca kātuṃ vaṭṭati, āgantukānaṃ vattaṃ kātuṃ sattāhakaraṇīyena gatānaṃ apaloketvā dātuṃ vaṭṭatīti evarūpaṃ vattaṃ kātabbaṃ.
When undertaking the routine, one should not say, "Recitations should not be done, nor should they be caused to be done. The scriptures should not be recited. Ordinations should not be given, nor should higher ordinations be given. Dependence should not be granted, nor should Dhamma talks be held, for all these are elaborations (papañca). Being free from elaborations, we will only perform monastic duties," or "Let all undertake the thirteen dhutaṅgas, passing the time with standing and walking meditation without arranging beds. Let them take a vow of silence, obtaining allowable items even when gone on a seven-day errand." Such unrighteous routines should not be done. But this should be done: the Teaching as text (pariyattidhammo) establishes the threefold saddhamma. Therefore, recite diligently, cause [others] to recite, recite the scriptures. Without causing disturbance to those dwelling in the meditation hall, sit within the monastery and recite, cause [others] to recite, recite the scriptures. Make the listening to the Dhamma flourish. When ordaining, purify [them] and ordain. Purify and grant higher ordination. Purify and grant dependence. For even one son of a good family, having obtained ordination and higher ordination, establishes the entire dispensation. Undertake as many dhutaṅgas as you can, according to your strength. This 'rains-residence' means that one should be mindful throughout the entire day and in the first and last watches of the night, and energy should be aroused. The ancient senior monks, having cut off all impediments, fulfilled the practice of solitary wandering during the rains. Knowing the proper measure in discourses, it is proper to give talks on the ten bases, the ten kinds of foulness, and the ten recollections. It is proper to do the routine for newcomers and to give [items] after seeking approval from those gone on a seven-day errand. Such a routine should be done.
Apica bhikkhū ovaditabbā – ‘‘viggāhikapisuṇapharusavacanāni mā vadatha, divase divase sīlāni āvajjentā caturārakkhaṃ ahāpentā manasikārabahulā viharathā’’ti. Dantakaṭṭhakhādanavattaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ, cetiyaṃ vā bodhiṃ vā vandantena gandhamālaṃ vā pūjentena pattaṃ vā thavikāya pakkhipantena na kathetabbaṃ, bhikkhācāravattaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ – ‘‘antogāme manussehi saddhiṃ paccayasaññuttakathā vā visabhāgakathā vā na kathetabbā, rakkhitindriyehi bhavitabbaṃ, khandhakavattañca sekhiyavattañca pūretabba’’nti evarūpā bahukāpi niyyānikakathā ācikkhitabbāti.
Moreover, the monks should be admonished: "Do not speak divisive, slanderous, or harsh words. Meditating on the precepts day by day, dwell cultivating the four protections." The routine of chewing tooth sticks should be explained. When venerating a cetiya or a bodhi tree, or when offering incense or flowers, or when placing a bowl in its bag, one should not speak. The alms-round routine should be explained: "Within the village, one should not engage in talk connected with requisites or in inappropriate talk with people. One should be restrained in the senses, and the khandhaka routine and the sekhiya routine should be fulfilled." Many such discourses that lead out [of suffering] should be explained.
Pacchimavassūpanāyikadivase pana sace kālaṃ ghosetvā sannipatite saṅghe koci dasahatthaṃ vatthaṃ āharitvā vassāvāsikaṃ deti, āgantuko sace bhikkhu saṅghatthero hoti, tassa dātabbaṃ. Navako ce hoti, sammatena bhikkhunā saṅghatthero vattabbo – ‘‘sace bhante icchatha, paṭhamabhāgaṃ muñcitvā idaṃ vatthaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti, amuñcantassa na dātabbaṃ. Sace pana pubbe gāhitaṃ muñcitvā gaṇhāti, dātabbaṃ. Etenevupāyena dutiyattherato paṭṭhāya parivattetvā pattaṭṭhāne āgantukassa dātabbaṃ. Sace paṭhamavassūpagatā dve tīṇi cattāri pañca vā vatthāni alatthuṃ, laddhaṃ laddhaṃ etenevupāyena vissajjāpetvā yāva āgantukassa samakaṃ hoti, tāva dātabbaṃ. Tena pana samake laddhe avasiṭṭho anubhāgo therāsane dātabbo. Paccuppanne lābhe sati ṭhitikāya gāhetuṃ katikaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
On the day of concluding the rains-residence, if someone brings a ten-cubit cloth and gives it as a vassāvāsika offering when the Saṅgha has assembled after announcing the time, it should be given to the visiting monk if he is a senior monk of the Saṅgha. If he is a junior monk, the appointed monk should say to the senior monk of the Saṅgha, "Venerable sir, if you wish, renounce the first share and accept this cloth." It should not be given if he does not renounce it. If, however, he renounces what he has already received and accepts it, it should be given. In the same way, starting from the second senior monk, it should be distributed in turn and given to the visitor in the place of the bowl. If the first rains-residents have received two, three, four, or five cloths, each received should be distributed in the same way until it is equal to what the visitor receives. When the visitor has received an equal share, the remaining portion should be given to the seat of the senior monks. When there is an immediate gain, it is proper to make an agreement to allocate it according to the established rule.
Sace dubbhikkhaṃ hoti, dvīsupi vassūpanāyikāsu vassūpagatā bhikkhū bhikkhāya kilamantā ‘‘āvuso, idha vasantā sabbeva kilamāma, sādhu vata dvebhāgā homa, yesaṃ ñātipavāritaṭṭhānāni atthi, te tattha vasitvā pavāraṇāya āgantvā attano pattaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti vadanti, tesu ye tattha vasitvā pavāraṇāya āgacchanti, tesaṃ apaloketvā vassāvāsikaṃ dātabbaṃ. Sādiyantāpi hi te neva vassāvāsikassa sāmino, khīyantāpi ca āvāsikā neva adātuṃ labhanti. Kurundiyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘katikavattaṃ kātabbaṃ – ‘sabbesaṃ no idha yāgubhattaṃ nappahoti, sabhāgaṭṭhāne vasitvā āgacchatha, tumhākaṃ pattaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ labhissathā’ti. Tañce eko paṭibāhati, supaṭibāhitaṃ; no ce paṭibāhati, katikā sukatā. Pacchā tesaṃ tattha vasitvā āgatānaṃ apaloketvā dātabbaṃ, apalokanakāle paṭibāhituṃ na labbhatī’’ti. Punapi vuttaṃ – ‘‘sace vassūpagatesu ekaccānaṃ vassāvāsike apāpuṇante bhikkhū katikaṃ karonti – ‘chinnavassānaṃ vassāvāsikañca idāni uppajjanakavassāvāsikañca imesaṃ dātuṃ ruccatī’ti evaṃ katikāya katāya gāhitasadisameva hoti, uppannuppannaṃ tesameva dātabba’’nti.
If there is a famine and the monks who have entered the rains-residence in both residences struggle for alms, they say, "Friends, all of us dwelling here are struggling. It would be good if we were divided into two groups. Those who have places supported by relatives should dwell there, and having come for the pavāraṇā, should take their bowl and vassāvāsika offering." To those who dwell there and come for the pavāraṇā, the vassāvāsika offering should be given after seeking approval. Even though they rejoice, they are not the owner of the vassāvāsika offering, and even though they are distressed, the residents cannot refuse to give it. However, it is stated in the Kurundi, "An agreement should be made: 'The rice gruel and cooked rice here are not enough for all of us. Dwell in a shared place and come back. You will receive your bowl and vassāvāsika offering.' If someone opposes it, it is a well-founded opposition. If he does not oppose it, the agreement is well made. Later, it should be given to those who dwelt there and have come back after seeking approval. It is not permissible to oppose it at the time of seeking approval." Again it is stated: "If, when some of those who have entered the rains-residence do not receive the vassāvāsika offering, the monks make an agreement, 'It is agreeable to give the vassāvāsika offering of those who have broken the rains-residence and the vassāvāsika offering that is now arising to these,' having made such an agreement, it is as if it has been received, and each arising [offering] should be given to them."
Temāsaṃ pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā vihāramaggacetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇāni jaggitvā bodhirukkhe udakaṃ siñcitvā pakkantopi vibbhantopi vassāvāsikaṃ labhatiyeva. Bhatiniviṭṭhañhi tena kataṃ. Saṅghikaṃ pana apalokanakammaṃ katvā gāhitaṃ antovasse vibbhantopi labhateva. Paccayavasena gāhitaṃ pana na labhatīti vadanti.
Even one who has prepared water for three months, cared for the monastery grounds, cetiya grounds, and bodhi tree grounds, and watered the bodhi tree, but has become disturbed and left, receives the vassāvāsika offering. For what he has done has been invested in the meal. However, even if one becomes disturbed during the rains, he receives [the offering] if it has been received after performing the act of seeking approval from the Saṅgha. Some say that if it is received based on a requisition, one does not receive it.
Sace vutthavasso disaṃgamiko bhikkhu āvāsikassa hatthato kiñcideva kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā ‘‘asukakule mayhaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ pattaṃ, taṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vatvā gataṭṭhāne vibbhamati, vassāvāsikaṃ saṅghikaṃ hoti. Sace pana manusse sammukhā sampaṭicchāpetvā gacchati, labhati. ‘‘Idaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ amhākaṃ senāsane vutthabhikkhuno demā’’ti vutte, yassa gāhitaṃ tasseva hoti. Sace pana senāsanasāmikassa piyakamyatāya puttadhītādayo bahūni vatthāni āharitvā ‘‘amhākaṃ senāsane demā’’ti denti, tattha vassūpagatassa ekameva vatthaṃ dātabbaṃ, sesāni saṅghikāni honti, vassāvāsikaṭṭhitikāya gāhetabbāni. Ṭhitikāya asati therāsanato paṭṭhāya gāhetabbāni. Senāsane vassūpagataṃ bhikkhuṃ nissāya uppannena cittappasādena bahūni vatthāni āharitvā ‘‘senāsanassa demā’’ti dinnesupi eseva nayo. Sace pana pādamūle ṭhapetvā ‘‘etassa bhikkhuno demā’’ti vadanti, tasseva honti.
If a monk who has completed the rains-residence and is going on a journey takes some allowable item from the resident monk's hand, saying, "In such-and-such a family, my bowl for the vassāvāsika offering [is kept]. Take it," and becomes disturbed in the place where he has gone, the vassāvāsika offering belongs to the Saṅgha. If, however, he goes after having the people accept it in person, he receives it. If it is said, "Let us give this vassāvāsika offering to the monk who resided in our residence," it belongs to the one who has received it. If, however, out of affection for the owner of the residence, sons, daughters, and others bring many cloths and give them, saying, "Let us give [them] to our residence," only one cloth should be given to the one who has entered the rains-residence there, and the remaining ones belong to the Saṅgha and should be received for the vassāvāsika rule. If there is no rule, they should be received starting from the seat of the senior monks. This same method applies even if, due to the pleasure that has arisen in dependence on a monk who has entered the rains-residence in the residence, many cloths are brought and given, saying, "Let us give [them] to the residence." If, however, they place [them] at the feet [of a monk] and say, "Let us give [them] to this monk," they belong to him alone.
Ekassa gehe dve vassāvāsikāni – paṭhamabhāgo sāmaṇerassa gāhito hoti, dutiyo therāsane. So ekaṃ dasahatthaṃ, ekaṃ aṭṭhahatthaṃ sāṭakaṃ peseti ‘‘vassāvāsikaṃ pattabhikkhūnaṃ dethā’’ti vicinitvā varabhāgaṃ sāmaṇerassa datvā anubhāgo therāsane dātabbo. Sace pana ubhopi gharaṃ netvā bhojetvā sayameva pādamūle ṭhapeti, yaṃ yassa dinnaṃ, tadeva tassa hoti.
In one house, there are two vassāvāsika offerings: the first share has been received by a novice, and the second by the seat of the senior monks. He sends one ten-cubit and one eight-cubit cloth, saying, "Give [them] to the monks who have the bowl for the vassāvāsika offering." Having chosen [them], the superior portion should be given to the novice, and the remaining portion should be given to the seat of the senior monks. If, however, he brings both to the house, feeds [them], and places [them] at their feet himself, whatever is given to whom, that belongs to him alone.
Ito paraṃ mahāpaccariyaṃ āgatanayo hoti – ‘‘ekassa ghare daharasāmaṇerassa vassāvāsikaṃ pāpuṇāti, so ce pucchati – ‘amhākaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ kassa patta’nti, ‘sāmaṇerassā’ti avatvā ‘dānakāle jānissasī’ti vatvā dānadivase ekaṃ mahātheraṃ pesetvā nīharāpetabbaṃ. Sace yassa vassāvāsikaṃ pattaṃ, so vibbhamati vā kālaṃ vā karoti, manussā ce pucchanti – ‘kassa amhākaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ patta’nti, tesaṃ yathābhūtaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Sace te vadanti – ‘tumhākaṃ demā’ti, tassa bhikkhuno pāpuṇāti. Atha saṅghassa vā gaṇassa vā denti, saṅghassa vā gaṇassa vā pāpuṇāti. Sace vassūpagatā suddhapaṃsukūlikāyeva honti, ānetvā dinnaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ senāsanaparikkhāraṃ vā katvā ṭhapetabbaṃ, bimbohanādīni vā kātabbānī’’ti. Idaṃ nevāsikavattaṃ.
From here on, there is the method that comes in the Mahāpaccari: "In one house, a young novice receives the vassāvāsika offering. If he asks, 'To whom does our vassāvāsika offering belong?', without saying 'To the novice,' one should say, 'You will know at the time of giving,' and on the day of giving, a senior monk should be sent to take it out. If the one who has received the vassāvāsika offering becomes disturbed or dies, and people ask, 'To whom does our vassāvāsika offering belong?', the truth should be told to them. If they say, 'Let us give [it] to you,' it accrues to that monk. But if they give it to the Saṅgha or a group, it accrues to the Saṅgha or the group. If those who have entered the rains-residence are purely paṃsukūlikas, the vassāvāsika offering or the requisites for the residence that have been brought should be arranged, or images and the like should be made." This is the practice for the resident monks.
Senāsanaggāhakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Discourse on Residence Allocation is Concluded.
Upanandavatthukathā
The Story of Upananda
319.Upanandavatthusmiṃ –tattha tayā moghapurisa gahitaṃ idha muttaṃ, idha tayā gahitaṃ tatra muttanti ettha ayamattho – yaṃ tayā tattha senāsanaṃ gahitaṃ, taṃ te gaṇhanteneva idha muttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Idha dānāhaṃ, āvuso, muñcāmī’’ti vadantena pana taṃ tatrāpi muttaṃ. Evaṃ tvaṃ ubhayattha paribāhiroti.
319. In the story of Upananda, the meaning of "there it was taken by you, foolish man, here it is relinquished; here it was taken by you, there it is relinquished" is this: That residence which you took there, by the very act of taking it by you, it is relinquished here. By saying, "Here I give, friend, I relinquish [it]," it is relinquished by you even there. Thus, you are excluded from both places.
Ayaṃ panettha vinicchayo – gahaṇena gahaṇaṃ paṭippassambhati, gahaṇena ālayo paṭippassambhati, ālayena gahaṇaṃ paṭippassambhati, ālayena ālayo paṭippassambhati. Kathaṃ? Idhekacco vassūpanāyikadivase ekasmiṃ vihāre senāsanaṃ gahetvā sāmantavihāraṃ gantvā tatrāpi gaṇhāti, tassa iminā gahaṇena purimaṃ gahaṇaṃ paṭippassambhati. Aparo ‘‘idha vasissāmī’’ti ālayamattaṃ katvā sāmantavihāraṃ gantvā tattha senāsanaṃ gaṇhāti, tassa iminā gahaṇena purimo ālayo paṭippassambhati. Eko ‘‘idha vasissāmī’’ti senāsanaṃ vā gahetvā ālayaṃ vā katvā sāmantavihāraṃ gantvā ‘‘idheva dāni vasissāmī’’ti ālayaṃ karoti, iccassa ālayena vā gahaṇaṃ ālayena vā ālayo paṭippassambhati, sabbattha pacchime gahaṇe vā ālaye vā tiṭṭhati. Yo pana ‘‘ekasmiṃ vihāre senāsanaṃ gahetvā aññasmiṃ vihāre vasissāmī’’ti gacchati, tassa upacārasīmātikkame senāsanaggāho paṭippassambhati. Yadi pana ‘‘tattha phāsu bhavissati, vasissāmi; no ce, āgamissāmī’’ti gantvā aphāsubhāvaṃ ñatvā paccāgacchati, vaṭṭati.
Herein is the determination regarding this: by abandoning, abandoning is suppressed; by abandoning, attachment is suppressed; by attachment, abandoning is suppressed; by attachment, attachment is suppressed. How? Here, a certain monk, on the day for entering the rains residence, having taken a dwelling place in one monastery, goes to a neighboring monastery and takes one there as well. By this taking, the former taking is suppressed. Another, having made only an intention to stay, thinking, "I will stay here," goes to a neighboring monastery and takes a dwelling place there. By this taking, the former intention is suppressed. One, having taken a dwelling place or having made an intention, thinking, "I will stay here," goes to a neighboring monastery and makes an intention, thinking, "Now I will stay right here." Thus, by the intention, either the taking or the intention is suppressed. In all instances, he abides in the latter taking or intention. But one who goes, thinking, "Having taken a dwelling place in one monastery, I will stay in another monastery," the taking of the dwelling place is suppressed upon transgression of the boundary of proximity. If, however, he goes thinking, "It will be comfortable there, I will stay; if not, I will return," and having gone, realizes it is uncomfortable and returns, it is allowable.
320.Tivassantarenāti etthativassantaronāma yo dvīhi vassehi mahantataro vā daharataro vā hoti. Yo pana ekena vassena mahantataro vā daharataro vā hoti, yo vā samānavasso, tattha vattabbameva natthi. Ime sabbe ekasmiṃ mañce vā pīṭhe vā dve dve hutvā nisīdituṃ labhanti. Yaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pahoti, taṃ saṃhārimaṃ vā hotu asaṃhārimaṃ vā, tathārūpe api phalakakhaṇḍe anupasampannenāpi saddhiṃ nisīdituṃ vaṭṭati.
320. Tivassantarena: Here, tivassantara means one who is either older or younger by more than two years. But concerning one who is either older or younger by one year, or one who is of the same age, there is nothing to be said. All these are allowed to sit two by two on one bench or seat. That which suffices for three, whether it is joined together or not joined together, even on such a piece of plank, it is allowable to sit with one who is not fully ordained.
Hatthinakhakanti hatthikumbhe patiṭṭhitaṃ; evaṃ katassa kiretaṃ nāmaṃ.Sabbaṃ pāsādaparibhoganti suvaṇṇarajatādivicitrāni kavāṭāni mañcapīṭhāni tālavaṇṭāni suvaṇṇarajatamayapānīyaghaṭapānīyasarāvāni yaṃkiñci cittakammakataṃ, sabbaṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Pāsādassa dāsidāsaṃ khettavatthuṃ gomahiṃsaṃ demā’’ti vadanti, pāṭekkaṃ gahaṇakiccaṃ natthi, pāsāde paṭiggahite paṭiggahitameva hoti. Gonakādīni saṅghikavihāre vā puggalikavihāre vā mañcapīṭhakesu attharitvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭanti. Dhammāsane pana gihivikaṭanihārena labbhanti, tatrāpi nipajjituṃ na vaṭṭati.
Hatthinakhaka: (means) established in the elephant's forehead; thus made, it is called a "kireta." Sabbaṃ pāsādaparibhoga: All the doors, benches, seats, palm-leaf fans, water pots and water bowls made of gold, silver, etc., whatever is made with decorative work, all is allowable. When they say, "We give the slaves, male and female, the field and property, the cows and buffaloes of the building," there is no need for a separate act of acceptance; having accepted the building, it is already accepted. Gonaka cloths, etc., are not allowed to be spread and used on benches and seats in a Saṅghika monastery or a personal monastery. However, they are obtainable in the Dhamma seat through the disposal of laypersons; even there, it is not allowed to lie down.
Upanandavatthukathā niṭṭhitā.
The Story of Upananda is concluded.
Avissajjiyavatthukathā
The Story of Things Not to Be Given Away
321.Pañcimānīti rāsivasena pañca, sarūpavasena panetāni bahūni honti. Tatthaārāmonāma pupphārāmo vā phalārāmo vā.Ārāmavatthunāma tesaṃyeva ārāmānaṃ atthāya paricchinditvā ṭhapitokāso; tesu vā ārāmesu vinaṭṭhesu tesaṃ porāṇakabhūmibhāgo.Vihāronāma yaṃkiñci pāsādādisenāsanaṃ.Vihāravatthunāma tassa patiṭṭhānokāso.Mañconāma – masārako, bundikābaddho, kuḷīrapādako āhaccapādakoti imesaṃ pubbe vuttānaṃ catunnaṃ mañcānaṃ aññataro.Pīṭhaṃnāma masārakādīnaṃyeva catunnaṃ pīṭhānaṃ aññataraṃ.Bhisināma uṇṇabhisiādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ aññatarā.Bimbohanaṃnāma vuttappakārānaṃ bimbohanānaṃ aññataraṃ.Lohakumbhīnāma kāḷalohena vā tambalohena vā yena kenaci lohena katā kumbhī.Lohabhāṇakādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha panabhāṇakanti arañjaro vuccati.Vārakoti ghaṭo.Kaṭāhaṃkaṭāhameva.Vāsiādīsuvalliādīsu ca duviññeyyaṃ nāma natthi. Evaṃ –
321. Pañcimānī: (means) five by way of aggregate, but in terms of specific instances, they are many. Here, ārāmo (means) either a flower garden or a fruit garden. Ārāmavatthu (means) the space demarcated and set aside for the sake of those very gardens; or, when those gardens have perished, the portion of their ancient ground. Vihāro (means) any dwelling place whatsoever, such as a building. Vihāravatthu (means) the site of its establishment. Mañco (means) one of the four kinds of benches previously mentioned: the masāraka, the bundikābaddha, the kuḷīrapādaka, and the āhaccapādaka. Pīṭhaṃ (means) one of the four kinds of seats, namely, the masāraka, etc. Bhisi (means) one of the five kinds of cushions, namely, the uṇṇabhisi, etc. Bimbohanaṃ (means) one of the types of pillows mentioned. Lohakumbhī (means) a pot made of black iron or copper or any kind of metal. The same method applies to Lohabhāṇakā, etc. Here, bhāṇaka means arañjaro (a kind of metal pot). Vārako (means) a water pot. Kaṭāhaṃ (means) a cauldron itself. Among Vāsi (axes) etc., and Valli (ropes) etc., there is nothing difficult to understand. Thus:
Dvisaṅgahāni dve honti, tatiyaṃ catusaṅgahaṃ;
There are two with two aggregates, the third with four aggregates;
The fourth with nine divisions, the fifth with eight distinctions.
Iti pañcahi rāsīhi, pañcanimmalalocano;
Thus, with five groups, the five-eyed one of purity;
The Lord revealed twenty-five kinds of heavy goods.
Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayakathā – idañhi sabbampi garubhaṇḍaṃ idha avissajjiyaṃ, kīṭāgirivatthusmiṃ ‘‘avebhaṅgiya’’nti vuttaṃ. Parivāre pana –
Here, this is the discussion of determination: all this heavy property here is not to be given away; in the Kīṭāgiri story, it is said to be "indestructible" (avebhaṅgiya). In the Parivāra, however –
‘‘Avissajjiyaṃ avebhaṅgiyaṃ, pañca vuttā mahesinā;
"Not to be given away, indestructible, five are said by the Great Sage;
For one who gives away or uses them, there is no offense,
These questions were pondered by the skilled." (pari. 479) –
Āgataṃ. Tasmā mūlacchejjavasena avissajjiyaṃ avebhaṅgiyañca parivattanavasena pana vissajjentassa paribhuñjantassa ca anāpattīti evamettha adhippāyo veditabbo.
It has come. Therefore, in terms of fundamental cutting off, it is not to be given away and indestructible; but in terms of exchange, there is no offense for one who gives away or uses them; thus, the meaning should be understood here.
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – idaṃ tāva pañcavidhampi cīvarapiṇḍapātabhesajjatthāya upanetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Thāvarena ca thāvaraṃ garubhaṇḍena ca garubhaṇḍaṃ parivattetuṃ vaṭṭati. Thāvare pana khettaṃ vatthu taḷākaṃ mātikāti evarūpaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa vicāretuṃ vā sampaṭicchituṃ vā adhivāsetuṃ vā na vaṭṭati, kappiyakārakeheva vicāritato kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ vaṭṭati. Ārāmena pana ārāmaṃ ārāmavatthuṃ vihāraṃ vihāravatthunti imāni cattāri parivattetuṃ vaṭṭati.
Here is the progressive account: this fivefold property is not allowed to be used for robes, alms food, or medicine. A fixed property may be exchanged for a fixed property, and heavy property for heavy property. However, regarding fixed property, such as a field, property, a pond, a well, etc., it is not allowed for the Saṅgha to consider, accept, or approve; it is allowable only for the kappiyakāraka to consider and (then the) kappiya articles are allowable. However, it is allowable to exchange a garden for a garden, a garden site, a monastery, or a monastery site.
Tatrāyaṃ parivattananayo – saṅghassa nāḷikerārāmo dūre hoti, kappiyakārakā vā bahutaraṃ khādanti. Yampi na khādanti, tato sakaṭavetanaṃ datvā appameva haranti. Aññesaṃ pana tassa ārāmassa avidūragāmavāsīnaṃ manussānaṃ vihārassa samīpe ārāmo hoti, te saṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā sakena ārāmena taṃ ārāmaṃ yācanti, saṅghena ‘‘ruccati saṅghassā’’ti apaloketvā sampaṭicchitabbo. Sacepi bhikkhūnaṃ rukkhasahassaṃ hoti, manussānaṃ pañca satāni, ‘‘tumhākaṃ ārāmo khuddako’’ti na vattabbaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi ayaṃ khuddako, atha kho itarato bahutaraṃ āyaṃ deti. Sacepi samakameva deti; evampi icchiticchitakkhaṇe paribhuñjituṃ sakkāti gahetabbameva. Sace pana manussānaṃ bahutarā rukkhā honti, ‘‘nanu tumhākaṃ bahutarā rukkhā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace ‘‘atirekaṃ amhākaṃ puññaṃ hotu, saṅghassa demā’’ti vadanti, jānāpetvā sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhūnaṃ rukkhā phaladhārino, manussānaṃ rukkhā na tāva phalaṃ gaṇhanti, kiñcāpi na gaṇhanti, na cirena gaṇhissantīti sampaṭicchitabbameva. Manussānaṃ rukkhā phaladhārino, bhikkhūnaṃ na tāva phalaṃ gaṇhanti, ‘‘nanu tumhākaṃ rukkhā phaladhārino’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace ‘‘gaṇhatha, bhante, amhākaṃ puññaṃ bhavissatī’’ti denti, jānāpetvā sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭati; evaṃ ārāmena ārāmo parivattetabbo. Eteneva nayena ārāmavatthupi vihāropi vihāravatthupi ārāmena parivattetabbaṃ. Ārāmavatthunā ca mahantena vā khuddakena vā ārāmaārāmavatthu vihāravihāravatthūni.
Here is the method of exchange: the Saṅgha's coconut garden is far away, or the kappiyakārakas eat too much. And even that which they do not eat, they take away only a little after giving the cart fee. But for other people, those living not far from that garden, there is a garden near the monastery; they approach the Saṅgha and request that garden for their own garden. The Saṅgha, having announced, "Does the Saṅgha approve?" should accept it. Even if the monks have a thousand trees and the people have five hundred, it should not be said, "Your garden is small." Even though this is small, it yields much more income than the other. Even if it yields the same, it should still be taken, because it can be used at any desired moment. But if the people have more trees, it should be said, "Surely you have more trees." If they say, "Let there be extra merit for us, we give it to the Saṅgha," it should be accepted after informing (the Saṅgha). If the monks' trees bear fruit, but the people's trees do not yet bear fruit, even though they do not bear fruit, they will bear fruit soon, so it should be accepted. If the people's trees bear fruit, but the monks' trees do not yet bear fruit, it should be said, "Surely your trees bear fruit." If they give, saying, "Take it, venerable sirs, may there be merit for us," it should be accepted after informing (the Saṅgha); thus, a garden should be exchanged for a garden. By this very method, a garden site, a monastery, and a monastery site can be exchanged for a garden. And with a large or small garden site, a garden, a garden site, a monastery, and monastery sites (can be exchanged).
Kathaṃ vihārena vihāro parivattetabbo? Saṅghassa antogāme gehaṃ hoti, manussānaṃ vihāramajjhe pāsādo, ubhopi agghena samakā, sace manussā tena pāsādena taṃ gehaṃ yācanti, sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhūnaṃ ce mahagghataraṃ gehaṃ hoti, ‘‘mahagghataraṃ amhākaṃ geha’’nti vutte ‘‘kiñcāpi mahagghataraṃ, pabbajitānaṃ asāruppaṃ, na sakkā tattha pabbajitehi vasituṃ, idaṃ pana sāruppaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadanti; evampi sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace pana manussānaṃ mahagghaṃ hoti, ‘‘nanu tumhākaṃ gehaṃ mahaggha’’nti vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Hotu, bhante, amhākaṃ puññaṃ bhavissati, gaṇhathā’’ti vutte pana sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭati. Evaṃ vihārena vihāro parivattetabbo. Eteneva nayena vihāravatthupi ārāmopi ārāmavatthupi vihārena parivattetabbaṃ. Vihāravatthunā ca mahagghena vā appagghena vā vihāravihāravatthuārāmaārāmavatthūni. Evaṃ tāva thāvarena thāvaraparivattanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
How is a monastery to be exchanged for a monastery? The Saṅgha has a house in the village, and the people have a building in the middle of the monastery; both are equal in value. If the people request that house for that building, it is allowable to accept. If the monks have a more valuable house, when it is said, "Our house is more valuable," if they say, "Even though it is more valuable, it is unsuitable for renunciants; it is not possible for renunciants to live there, but this is suitable, take it," even so, it is allowable to accept. But if the people have a more valuable (building), it should be said, "Surely your house is more valuable." But if they say, "Let it be, venerable sirs, may there be merit for us, take it," then it is allowable to accept. Thus, a monastery should be exchanged for a monastery. By this very method, a monastery site, a garden, and a garden site can be exchanged for a monastery. And with a valuable or less valuable monastery site, a monastery, a monastery site, a garden, and garden sites (can be exchanged). Thus, the exchange of fixed property with fixed property should be understood.
Garubhaṇḍena garubhaṇḍaparivattane pana mañcapīṭhaṃ mahantaṃ vā hotu khuddakaṃ vā, antamaso caturaṅgulapādakaṃ vā gāmadārakehi paṃsvāgārakesu kīḷantehi katampi saṅghassa dinnakālato paṭṭhāya garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti. Sacepi rājarājamahāmattādayo ekappahāreneva mañcasataṃ vā mañcasahassaṃ vā denti, sabbe kappiyamañcā sampaṭicchitabbā, sampaṭicchitvā vuḍḍhapaṭipāṭiyā ‘‘saṅghikaparibhogena paribhuñjathā’’ti dātabbā, puggalikavasena na dātabbā. Atirekamañce bhaṇḍāgārādīsu paññapetvā pattacīvaraṃ nikkhipitumpi vaṭṭati. Bahisīmāya ‘‘saṅghassa demā’’ti dinnamañco saṅghattherassa vasanaṭṭhāne dātabbo. Tattha ce bahū mañcā honti, mañcena kammaṃ natthi; yassa vasanaṭṭhāne kammaṃ atthi, tattha ‘‘saṅghikaparibhogena paribhuñjathā’’ti dātabbo. Mahagghena satagghanakena vā sahassagghanakena vā satasahassagghanakena vā mañcena aññaṃ mañcasataṃ labhati, parivattetvā gahetabbaṃ. Na kevalaṃ mañcena mañcoyeva, ārāmaārāmavatthuvihāravihāravatthupīṭhabhisibimbohanānipi parivattetuṃ vaṭṭanti. Esa nayo pīṭhabhisibimbohanesupi. Etesu hi kappiyākapyiyaṃ vuttanayameva. Tattha akappiyaṃ na paribhuñjitabbaṃ, kappiyaṃ saṅghikaparibhogena paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Akappiyaṃ vā mahagghaṃ kappiyaṃ vā parivattetvā vuttavatthūni gahetabbāni. Agarubhaṇḍupagaṃ pana bhisibimbohanaṃ nāma natthi.
In the exchange of heavy property with heavy property, a bench or seat, whether large or small, even one with legs of four finger-breadths, made by village boys playing in the dust heap, becomes heavy property from the time it is given to the Saṅgha. Even if kings, royal ministers, etc., give a hundred or a thousand benches in one instance, all the allowable benches should be accepted. Having accepted (them), they should be given according to the order of seniority, saying, "Use (them) for the common use of the Saṅgha"; they should not be given as personal property. The extra benches can be placed in the storehouse, etc., and bowls and robes can be placed on them. A bench given outside the boundary, saying, "We give it to the Saṅgha," should be given to the residence of the Saṅghatthera. If there are many benches there, there is no need for a bench; it should be given to the place where there is need, saying, "Use it for the common use of the Saṅgha." If another hundred benches are obtained for a valuable, hundred-fold, thousand-fold, or hundred-thousand-fold bench, it should be exchanged and taken. Not only a bench for a bench, but also a garden, garden site, monastery, monastery site, seat, cushion, and pillow are allowed to be exchanged. This method applies to seats, cushions, and pillows as well. Here, the allowable and unallowable have been stated in the manner described. There, the unallowable should not be used; the allowable should be used for the common use of the Saṅgha. The unallowable, or valuable, may be exchanged for the allowable, and the items mentioned should be taken. There is no cushion or pillow that falls under the category of light property.
Lohakumbhī lohabhāṇakaṃ lohakaṭāhanti imāni tīṇi mahantāni vā hontu khuddakāni vā antamaso pasatamattaudakagaṇhanakānipi garubhaṇḍāniyeva. Lohavārako pana kāḷalohatambalohavaṭṭalohakaṃsalohānaṃ yena kenaci kato sīhaḷadīpe pādagaṇhanako bhājetabbo. Pādo ca nāma magadhanāḷiyā pañcanāḷimattaṃ gaṇhāti, tato adhikagaṇhanako garubhaṇḍaṃ. Imāni tāva pāḷiyaṃ āgatāni lohabhājanāni.
A metal pot, a metal vessel, and a metal cauldron—these three, whether large or small, even those that can hold only a handful of water, are indeed heavy property. However, a metal water pot, made of black iron, copper, round iron, or bronze, that can hold the foot in Sri Lanka, should be divided. And a pāda (foot) holds about five Magadhanāḷis; one that holds more than that is heavy property. These are the metal containers that have come in the Pāḷi.
Pāḷiyaṃ pana anāgatānipi bhiṅgārapaṭiggahauḷuṅkadabbikaṭacchupātitaṭṭakasarakasamuggaaṅgārakapalladhūmakaṭacchuādīni khuddakāni vā mahantāni vā sabbāni garubhaṇḍāni. Patto, ayathālakaṃ, tambalohathālakanti imāni pana bhājanīyāni. Kaṃsalohavaṭṭalohabhājanavikati saṅghikaparibhogena vā gihivikaṭā vā vaṭṭati, puggalikaparibhogena na vaṭṭati. Kaṃsalohādibhājanaṃ saṅghassa dinnampi hi pārihāriyaṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Gihivikaṭanihāreneva paribhuñjitabba’’nti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ.
Even those that have not come in the Pāḷi, such as sprinklers, receivers, ladles, spoons, bowls, dishes, caskets, coal shovels, smoke shovels, etc., all, whether small or large, are heavy property. A bowl, an ayathālaka (a type of metal plate), and a copper plate are items to be distributed. A bronze or round iron container is allowable by common Saṅghika use or by lay disposal, but it is not allowable by personal use. Even a bronze, etc., container given to the Saṅgha is not allowable as a gift of relinquishment. "It should be used only through lay disposal," it is said in the Mahāpaccariya.
Ṭhapetvā pana bhājanavikatiṃ aññasmimpi kappiyalohabhaṇḍe – añjanī, añjanisalākā, kaṇṇamalaharaṇī, sūci, paṇṇasūci, khuddako, pipphalako, khuddakaṃ, ārakaṇṭakaṃ, kuñcikā, tāḷaṃ, kattarayaṭṭhi vedhako, natthudānaṃ, bhindivālo, lohakūṭo, lohakuṭṭi, lohaguḷo, lohapiṇḍi, lohacakkalikaṃ, aññampi vippakatalohabhaṇḍaṃ bhājanīyaṃ. Dhūmanettaphāladīparukkhadīpakapallakaolambakadīpaitthipurisatiracchānagatarūpakāni pana aññāni vā bhitticchadanakavāṭādīsu upanetabbāni, antamaso lohakhilakaṃ upādāya sabbāni lohabhaṇḍāni garubhaṇḍāniyeva honti, attanā laddhānipi pariharitvā puggalikaparibhogena na paribhuñjitabbāni, saṅghikaparibhogena vā gihivikaṭāni vā vaṭṭanti. Tipubhaṇḍepi eseva nayo. Khīrapāsāṇamayāni taṭṭakasarakādīni garubhaṇḍāniyeva.
Apart from container distribution, also in other allowable metal goods—ointment boxes, ointment sticks, earwax removers, needles, leaf needles, small knives, pipphalaka, small knives, awls, keys, locks, knife handles, drills, nose cleaners, bhindivāla, metal hooks, metal pegs, metal balls, metal balls, metal wheels, and other well-known metal goods are distributable. Dhūmanetta phāla (a type of metal plate), lamp stands, tree lamps, lamp shovels, hanging lamps, and images of men, women, and animals, or other items that should be placed on walls, roofs, doors, etc., up to and including metal nails, all metal goods are indeed heavy property. Even those obtained by oneself should be kept and not used for personal use; they are allowable by common Saṅghika use or by lay disposal. The same method applies to tin goods. Milkstone utensils, dishes, caskets, etc., are indeed heavy property.
Ghaṭako pana telabhājanaṃ vā pādagaṇhanakato atirekameva garubhaṇḍaṃ. Suvaṇṇarajatahārakūṭajātiphalikabhājanāni gihivikaṭānipi na vaṭṭanti, pageva saṅghikaparibhogena vā puggalikaparibhogena vā. Senāsanaparibhoge pana āmāsampi anāmāsampi sabbaṃ vaṭṭati.
However, a water pot or an oil container that is larger than the foot holder is indeed heavy property. Gold and silver hārakuṭajātiphalika containers are not allowable even by lay disposal, let alone by common Saṅghika use or personal use. However, in the use of a dwelling place, everything is allowable, whether it causes an offense or not.
Vāsiādīsu yāya vāsiyā ṭhapetvā daṇḍakaṭṭhacchedanaṃ vā ucchutacchanaṃ vā aññaṃ mahākammaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā, ayaṃ bhājanīyā. Tato mahattarī yena kenaci ākārena katā vāsi garubhaṇḍameva. Pharasu pana antamaso vejjānaṃ sirāvedhanapharasupi garubhaṇḍameva. Kuṭhāriyaṃ pharasusadiso eva vinicchayo. Yā pana āvudhasaṅkhepena katā, ayaṃ anāmāsā. Kudālo antamaso caturaṅgulamattopi garubhaṇḍameva. Nikhādanaṃ caturassamukhaṃ vā hotu doṇimukhaṃ vā vaṅkaṃ vā ujukaṃ vā, antamaso sammuñjanidaṇḍakavedhanampi daṇḍabaddhaṃ ce, garubhaṇḍameva. Sammuñjanidaṇḍakhaṇanakaṃ pana adaṇḍakaṃ phalamattameva, yaṃ sakkā sipāṭikāya pakkhipitvā pariharituṃ, taṃ bhājanīyaṃ. Sikharampi nikhādaneneva saṅgahitaṃ. Yehi manussehi vihāre vāsiādīni dinnāni honti, te ca ghare daḍḍhe vā corehi vā vilutte ‘‘detha no, bhante, upakaraṇe, puna pākatike karissāmā’’ti vadanti, dātabbā. Sace āharanti, na vāretabbā; anāharantāpi na codetabbā.
Pharasu pana antamaso vejjānaṃ sirāvedhanapharasupi garubhaṇḍameva. Kuṭhāriyaṃ pharasusadiso eva vinicchayo. Yā pana āvudhasaṅkhepena katā, ayaṃ anāmāsā. Kudālo antamaso caturaṅgulamattopi garubhaṇḍameva. Nikhādanaṃ caturassamukhaṃ vā hotu doṇimukhaṃ vā vaṅkaṃ vā ujukaṃ vā, antamaso sammuñjanidaṇḍakavedhanampi daṇḍabaddhaṃ ce, garubhaṇḍameva. Sammuñjanidaṇḍakhaṇanakaṃ pana adaṇḍakaṃ phalamattameva, yaṃ sakkā sipāṭikāya pakkhipitvā pariharituṃ, taṃ bhājanīyaṃ. Sikharampi nikhādaneneva saṅgahitaṃ. Yehi manussehi vihāre vāsiādīni dinnāni honti, te ca ghare daḍḍhe vā corehi vā vilutte ‘‘detha no, bhante, upakaraṇe, puna pākatike karissāmā’’ti vadanti, dātabbā. Sace āharanti, na vāretabbā; anāharantāpi na codetabbā.
Kammārataṭṭakāracundakāranaḷakāramaṇikārapattabandhakānaṃ adhikaraṇimuṭṭhikasaṇḍāsatulādīni sabbāni lohamayaupakaraṇāni saṅghe dinnakālato paṭṭhāya garubhaṇḍāni. Tipukoṭṭakasuvaṇṇakāracammakāraupakaraṇesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – tipukoṭṭakaupakaraṇesupi tipucchedanasatthakaṃ, suvaṇṇakāraupakaraṇesu suvaṇṇacchedanasatthakaṃ, cammakāraupakaraṇesu kataparikammacammachiddanakaṃ khuddakasatthakanti imāni bhājanīyabhaṇḍāni. Nahāpitatunnakāraupakaraṇesupi ṭhapetvā mahākattariṃ mahāsaṇḍāsaṃ mahāpipphalakañca sabbaṃ bhājanīyaṃ. Mahākattariādīni garubhaṇḍāni.
Kammārataṭṭakāracundakāranaḷakāramaṇikārapattabandhakānaṃ adhikaraṇimuṭṭhikasaṇḍāsatulādīni sabbāni lohamayaupakaraṇāni saṅghe dinnakālato paṭṭhāya garubhaṇḍāni. Tipukoṭṭakasuvaṇṇakāracammakāraupakaraṇesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – tipukoṭṭakaupakaraṇesupi tipucchedanasatthakaṃ, suvaṇṇakāraupakaraṇesu suvaṇṇacchedanasatthakaṃ, cammakāraupakaraṇesu kataparikammacammachiddanakaṃ khuddakasatthakanti imāni bhājanīyabhaṇḍāni. Nahāpitatunnakāraupakaraṇesupi ṭhapetvā mahākattariṃ mahāsaṇḍāsaṃ mahāpipphalakañca sabbaṃ bhājanīyaṃ. Mahākattariādīni garubhaṇḍāni.
Valliādīsu vettavalliādikā yā kāci aḍḍhabāhuppamāṇā valli saṅghassa dinnā vā tatthajātakā vā rakkhitagopitā garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti, sā saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca kate sace atirekā hoti, puggalikakammepi upanetuṃ vaṭṭati; arakkhitā pana garubhaṇḍameva na hoti. Suttamakacivākanāḷikerahīracammamayā rajjukā vā yottāni vā vāke ca nāḷikerahīre ca vaṭṭetvā katā ekavaṭṭā vā dvivaṭṭā vā saṅghassa dinnakālato paṭṭhāya garubhaṇḍaṃ. Suttaṃ pana avaṭṭetvā dinnaṃ makacivākanāḷikerahīrā ca bhājanīyā. Yehi panetāni rajjukayottādīni dinnāni honti, te attano karaṇīyena harantā na vāretabbā.
Valliādīsu vettavalliādikā yā kāci aḍḍhabāhuppamāṇā valli saṅghassa dinnā vā tatthajātakā vā rakkhitagopitā garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti, sā saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca kate sace atirekā hoti, puggalikakammepi upanetuṃ vaṭṭati; arakkhitā pana garubhaṇḍameva na hoti. Suttamakacivākanāḷikerahīracammamayā rajjukā vā yottāni vā vāke ca nāḷikerahīre ca vaṭṭetvā katā ekavaṭṭā vā dvivaṭṭā vā saṅghassa dinnakālato paṭṭhāya garubhaṇḍaṃ. Suttaṃ pana avaṭṭetvā dinnaṃ makacivākanāḷikerahīrā ca bhājanīyā. Yehi panetāni rajjukayottādīni dinnāni honti, te attano karaṇīyena harantā na vāretabbā.
Yo koci antamaso aṭṭhaṅgulasūcidaṇḍamattopi veḷu saṅghassa dinno vā tatthajātako vā rakkhitagopito garubhaṇḍaṃ, sopi saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca kate atireko puggalikakamme dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Pādagaṇhanakatelanāḷi pana kattarayaṭṭhi, upāhanadaṇḍako, chattadaṇḍo, chattasalākāti idamettha bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṃ. Daḍḍhagehamanussā gaṇhitvā gacchantā na vāretabbā. Rakkhitagopitaṃ veḷuṃ gaṇhantena samakaṃ vā atirekaṃ vā thāvaraṃ antamaso taṃagghanakampi phātikammaṃ katvā gahetabbo. Phātikammaṃ akatvā gaṇhantena tattheva vaḷañjetabbo, gamanakāle saṅghikāvāse ṭhapetvā gantabbaṃ. Asatiyā gahetvā gatena pahiṇitvā dātabbo. Desantaraṃ gatena sampattavihāre saṅghikāvāse ṭhapetabbo.
Yo koci antamaso aṭṭhaṅgulasūcidaṇḍamattopi veḷu saṅghassa dinno vā tatthajātako vā rakkhitagopito garubhaṇḍaṃ, sopi saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca kate atireko puggalikakamme dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Pādagaṇhanakatelanāḷi pana kattarayaṭṭhi, upāhanadaṇḍako, chattadaṇḍo, chattasalākāti idamettha bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṃ. Daḍḍhagehamanussā gaṇhitvā gacchantā na vāretabbā. Rakkhitagopitaṃ veḷuṃ gaṇhantena samakaṃ vā atirekaṃ vā thāvaraṃ antamaso taṃagghanakampi phātikammaṃ katvā понятно. Phātikammaṃ akatvā gaṇhantena tattheva vaḷañjetabbo, gamanakāle saṅghikāvāse ṭhapetvā gantabbaṃ. Asatiyā gahetvā gatena pahiṇitvā dātabbo. Desantaraṃ gatena sampattavihāre saṅghikāvāse ṭhapetabbo.
Tiṇanti muñjaṃ pabbajañca ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ yaṃkiñci tiṇaṃ. Yattha pana tiṇaṃ natthi, tattha paṇṇehi chādenti; tasmā paṇṇampi tiṇeneva saṅgahitaṃ. Iti muñjādīsu yaṃkiñci muṭṭhippamāṇampi tiṇaṃ tālapaṇṇādīsu ca ekaṃ paṇṇampi saṅghassa dinnaṃ vā tatthajātakaṃ vā bahārāme saṅghassa tiṇavatthuto jātatiṇaṃ vā rakkhitagopitaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti, tampi saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca kate atirekaṃ puggalikakamme dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Daḍḍhagehamanussā gahetvā gacchantā na vāretabbā. Aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇopi rittapotthako garubhaṇḍameva.
Tiṇanti muñjaṃ pabbajañca ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ yaṃkiñci tiṇaṃ. Yattha pana tiṇaṃ natthi, tattha paṇṇehi chādenti; tasmā paṇṇampi tiṇeneva saṅgahitaṃ. Iti muñjādīsu yaṃkiñci muṭṭhippamāṇampi tiṇaṃ tālapaṇṇādīsu ca ekaṃ paṇṇampi saṅghassa dinnaṃ vā tatthajātakaṃ vā bahārāme saṅghassa tiṇavatthuto jātatiṇaṃ vā rakkhitagopitaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti, tampi saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca kate atirekaṃ puggalikakamme dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Daḍḍhagehamanussā gahetvā gacchantā na vāretabbā. Aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇopi rittapotthako garubhaṇḍameva.
Mattikāpakatimattikā vā hotu pañcavaṇṇā vā sudhā vā sajjurasakaṅguṭṭhasilesādīsu vā yaṃkiñci, dullabhaṭṭhāne ānetvā vā dinnaṃ tatthajātakaṃ vā rakkhitagopitaṃ tālaphalapakkamattaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti. Tampi saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca niṭṭhite atirekaṃ puggalikakamme dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Hiṅguhiṅgulakaharitālamanosilañjanāni pana bhājanīyabhaṇḍāni.
Mattikāpakatimattikā vā hotu pañcavaṇṇā vā sudhā vā sajjurasakaṅguṭṭhasilesādīsu vā yaṃkiñci, dullabhaṭṭhāne ānetvā vā dinnaṃ tatthajātakaṃ vā rakkhitagopitaṃ tālaphalapakkamattaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti. Tampi saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca niṭṭhite atirekaṃ puggalikakamme dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Hiṅguhiṅgulakaharitālamanosilañjanāni pana bhājanīyabhaṇḍāni.
Dārubhaṇḍeyo koci aṭṭhaṅgulasūcidaṇḍamattopi dārubhaṇḍako dārudullabhaṭṭhāne saṅghassa dinno vā tatthajātako vā rakkhitagopito, ayaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ hotīti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana sabbampi dāruveḷucammapāsāṇādivikatiṃ dārubhaṇḍena saṅgaṇhitvā ‘‘tena kho pana samayena saṅghassa āsandiko uppanno hotī’’ti ito paṭṭhāya dārubhaṇḍavinicchayo vutto.
Dārubhaṇḍeyo koci aṭṭhaṅgulasūcidaṇḍamattopi dārubhaṇḍako dārudullabhaṭṭhāne saṅghassa dinno vā tatthajātako vā rakkhitagopito, ayaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ hotīti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana sabbampi dāruveḷucammapāsāṇādivikatiṃ dārubhaṇḍena saṅgaṇhitvā ‘‘tena kho pana samayena saṅghassa āsandiko uppanno hotī’’ti ito paṭṭhāya dārubhaṇḍavinicchayo vutto.
Tatrāyaṃ atthuddhāro, āsandiko, sattaṅgo, bhaddapīṭhaṃ, pīṭhikā, eḷakapādakapīṭhaṃ, āmalakavaṭṭakapīṭhaṃ, phalakaṃ, kocchaṃ, palālapīṭhakanti imesu tāva yaṃkiñci khuddakaṃ vā hotu mahantaṃ vā, saṅghassa dinnaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti. Palālapīṭhena cettha kadalipattādipīṭhānipi saṅgahitāni. Byagghacammaonaddhampi vāḷarūpaparikkhittaṃ, ratanaparisibbitaṃ, kocchakaṃ garubhaṇḍameva.
Tatrāyaṃ atthuddhāro, āsandiko, sattaṅgo, bhaddapīṭhaṃ, pīṭhikā, eḷakapādakapīṭhaṃ, āmalakavaṭṭakapīṭhaṃ, phalakaṃ, kocchaṃ, palālapīṭhakanti imesu tāva yaṃkiñci khuddakaṃ vā hotu mahantaṃ vā, saṅghassa dinnaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti. Palālapīṭhena cettha kadalipattādipīṭhānipi saṅgahitāni. Byagghacammaonaddhampi vāḷarūpaparikkhittaṃ, ratanaparisibbitaṃ, kocchakaṃ garubhaṇḍameva.
Vaṅkaphalakaṃ, dīghaphalakaṃ, cīvaradhovanaphalakaṃ, ghaṭṭanaphalakaṃ, ghaṭṭanamuggaro, dantakaṭṭhacchedanagaṇṭhikā, daṇḍamuggaro, ambaṇaṃ, rajanadoṇi, udakapaṭicchako, dārumayo vā dantamayo vā veḷumayo vā sapādakopi apādakopi samuggo, mañjūsā, pādagaṇhanakato atirekappamāṇo karaṇḍo, udakadoṇi, udakakaṭāhaṃ, uḷuṅko, kaṭacchu, pānīyasarāvaṃ, pānīyasaṅkhoti etesupi yaṃkiñci saṅghe dinnaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ. Saṅkhathālakaṃ pana bhājanīyaṃ, tathā dārumayo udakatumbo.
Vaṅkaphalakaṃ, dīghaphalakaṃ, cīvaradhovanaphalakaṃ, ghaṭṭanaphalakaṃ, ghaṭṭanamuggaro, dantakaṭṭhacchedanagaṇṭhikā, daṇḍamuggaro, ambaṇaṃ, rajanadoṇi, udakapaṭicchako, dārumayo vā dantamayo vā veḷumayo vā sapādakopi apādakopi samuggo, mañjūsā, pādagaṇhanakato atirekappamāṇo karaṇḍo, udakadoṇi, udakakaṭāhaṃ, uḷuṅko, kaṭacchu, pānīyasarāvaṃ, pānīyasaṅkhoti etesupi yaṃkiñci saṅghe dinnaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ. Saṅkhathālakaṃ pana bhājanīyaṃ, tathā dārumayo udakatumbo.
Pādakathalikamaṇḍalaṃ dārumayaṃ vā hotu coḷapaṇṇādimayaṃ vā sabbaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ. Ādhārako pattapidhānaṃ, tālavaṇṭaṃ, bījanī, caṅkoṭakaṃ, pacchi, yaṭṭhisammuñjanī muṭṭhisammuñjanīti etesupi yaṃkiñci khuddakaṃ vā mahantaṃ vā dāruveḷupaṇṇacammādīsu yena kenaci kataṃ garubhaṇḍameva.
Pādakathalikamaṇḍalaṃ dārumayaṃ vā hotu coḷapaṇṇādimayaṃ vā sabbaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ. Ādhārako pattapidhānaṃ, tālavaṇṭaṃ, bījanī, caṅkoṭakaṃ, pacchi, yaṭṭhisammuñjanī muṭṭhisammuñjanīti etesupi yaṃkiñci khuddakaṃ vā mahantaṃ vā dāruveḷupaṇṇacammādīsu yena kenaci kataṃ garubhaṇḍameva.
Thambhatulāsopānaphalakādīsu dārumayaṃ vā pāsāṇamayaṃ vā yaṃkiñci gehasambhārarūpaṃ, yo koci kaṭasārako, yaṃkiñci bhūmattharaṇaṃ, yaṃkiñci akappiyacammaṃ, sabbaṃ saṅghe dinnaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ, bhūmattharaṇaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Eḷakacammaṃ pana paccattharaṇagatikaṃ hoti, tampi garubhaṇḍameva. Kappiyacammāni bhājanīyāni. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘sabbaṃ mañcappamāṇaṃ cammaṃ garubhaṇḍa’’nti vuttaṃ.
Thambhatulāsopānaphalakādīsu dārumayaṃ vā pāsāṇamayaṃ vā yaṃkiñci gehasambhārarūpaṃ, yo koci kaṭasārako, yaṃkiñci bhūmattharaṇaṃ, yaṃkiñci akappiyacammaṃ, sabbaṃ saṅghe dinnaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ, bhūmattharaṇaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Eḷakacammaṃ pana paccattharaṇagatikaṃ hoti, tampi garubhaṇḍameva. Kappiyacammāni bhājanīyāni. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘sabbaṃ mañcappamāṇaṃ cammaṃ garubhaṇḍa’’nti vuttaṃ.
Udukkhalaṃ, musalaṃ, suppaṃ, nisadaṃ, nisadapoto, pāsāṇadoṇi, pāsāṇakaṭāhaṃ, turivemabhastādi sabbaṃ pesakārādibhaṇḍaṃ, sabbaṃ kasibhaṇḍaṃ, sabbaṃ cakkayuttakayānaṃ garubhaṇḍameva. Mañcapādo, mañcaaṭanī, pīṭhapādo, pīṭhaaṭanī, vāsipharasuādīnaṃ daṇḍāti etesu yaṃkiñci vippakatatacchanakammaṃ aniṭṭhitameva bhājanīyaṃ, tacchitamaṭṭhaṃ pana garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti. Anuññātavāsiyā pana daṇḍo chattamuṭṭhipaṇṇaṃ kattarayaṭṭhi upāhanā araṇisahitaṃ dhammakaraṇo pādagaṇhanakato anatirittaṃ āmalakatumbaṃ āmalakaghaṭo lābukatumbaṃ lābughaṭo visāṇakatumbanti sabbametaṃ bhājanīyaṃ, tato mahantataraṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ.
Udukkhalaṃ, musalaṃ, suppaṃ, nisadaṃ, nisadapoto, pāsāṇadoṇi, pāsāṇakaṭāhaṃ, turivemabhastādi sabbaṃ pesakārādibhaṇḍaṃ, sabbaṃ kasibhaṇḍaṃ, sabbaṃ cakkayuttakayānaṃ garubhaṇḍameva. Mañcapādo, mañcaaṭanī, pīṭhapādo, pīṭhaaṭanī, vāsipharasuādīnaṃ daṇḍāti etesu yaṃkiñci vippakatatacchanakammaṃ aniṭṭhitameva bhājanīyaṃ, tacchitamaṭṭhaṃ pana garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti. Anuññātavāsiyā pana daṇḍo chattamuṭṭhipaṇṇaṃ kattarayaṭṭhi upāhanā araṇisahitaṃ dhammakaraṇo pādagaṇhanakato anatirittaṃ āmalakatumbaṃ āmalakaghaṭo lābukatumbaṃ lābughaṭo visāṇakatumbanti sabbametaṃ bhājanīyaṃ, tato mahantataraṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ.
Hatthidanto vā yaṃkiñci visāṇaṃ vā atacchitaṃ yathājātameva bhājanīyaṃ, tehi katamañcapādādīsu purimasadisoyeva vinicchayo. Tacchitaniṭṭhitopi hiṅgukaraṇḍako añjanakaraṇḍako gaṇṭhikā vidho añjanī añjanisalākā udakapuñchanīti idaṃ sabbaṃ bhājanīyameva.
Hatthidanto vā yaṃkiñci visāṇaṃ vā atacchitaṃ yathājātameva bhājanīyaṃ, tehi katamañcapādādīsu purimasadisoyeva vinicchayo. Tacchitaniṭṭhitopi hiṅgukaraṇḍako añjanakaraṇḍako gaṇṭhikā vidho añjanī añjanisalākā udakapuñchanīti idaṃ sabbaṃ bhājanīyameva.
Mattikābhaṇḍe sabbaṃ manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ ghaṭapiṭharādikulālabhājanaṃ pattakaṭāhaṃ aṅgārakaṭāhaṃ dhūmadānakaṃ dīparukkhako dīpakapallikā cayaniṭṭhakā chadaniṭṭhakā thūpikāti saṅghassa dinnakālato paṭṭhāya garubhaṇḍaṃ, pādagaṇhanakato anatirittappamāṇo pana ghaṭako pattaṃ thālakaṃ kañcanako kuṇḍikāti idamettha bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṃ. Yathā ca mattikābhaṇḍe; evaṃ lohabhaṇḍepi kuṇḍikā bhājanīyakoṭṭhāsameva bhajatīti ayamettha anupubbikathā.
Mattikābhaṇḍe sabbaṃ manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ ghaṭapiṭharādikulālabhājanaṃ pattakaṭāhaṃ aṅgārakaṭāhaṃ dhūmadānakaṃ dīparukkhako dīpakapallikā cayaniṭṭhakā chadaniṭṭhakā thūpikāti saṅghassa dinnakālato paṭṭhāya garubhaṇḍaṃ, pādagaṇhanakato anatirittappamāṇo pana ghaṭako pattaṃ thālakaṃ kañcanako kuṇḍikāti idamettha bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṃ. Yathā ca mattikābhaṇḍe; evaṃ lohabhaṇḍepi kuṇḍikā bhājanīyakoṭṭhāsameva bhajatīti ayamettha anupubbikathā.
Avissajjiyavatthukathā niṭṭhitā.
Avissajjiyavatthukathā niṭṭhitā.
Navakammadānakathā
Navakammadānakathā
323.Bhaṇḍikāṭṭhapanamattenāti dvārabāhānaṃ upari kapotabhaṇḍikayojanamattena.Paribhaṇḍakaraṇamattenāti gomayaparibhaṇḍakasāvaparibhaṇḍakaraṇamattena.Dhūmakālikanti idaṃ yāvassa citakadhūmo na paññāyati, tāva ayaṃ vihāro etassevāti evaṃ dhūmakāle apaloketvā katapariyositaṃ vihāraṃ denti.Vippakatanti ettha vippakato nāma yāva gopānasiyo na ārohanti. Gopānasīsu pana āruḷhāsu bahukato nāma hoti, tasmā tato paṭṭhāya na dātabbo, kiñcideva samādapetvā kāressati.Khuddake vihāre kammaṃ oloketvā chappañcavassikanti kammaṃ oloketvā catuhatthavihāre catuvassikaṃ, pañcahatthe pañcavassikaṃ, chahatthe chavassikaṃ dātabbaṃ. Aḍḍhayogo pana yasmā sattaṭṭhahattho hoti, tasmā ettha ‘‘sattaṭṭhavassika’’nti vuttaṃ. Sace pana so navahattho hoti navavassikampi dātabbaṃ. Mahallake pana dasahatthe ekādasahatthe vihāre vā pāsāde vā dasavassikaṃ vā ekādasavassikaṃ vā dātabbaṃ. Dvādasahatthe pana tato adhike vā lohapāsādasadisepi dvādasavassikameva dātabbaṃ, na tato uttari.
323.Bhaṇḍikāṭṭhapanamattenāti dvārabāhānaṃ upari kapotabhaṇḍikayojanamattena.Paribhaṇḍakaraṇamattenāti gomayaparibhaṇḍakasāvaparibhaṇḍakaraṇamattena.Dhūmakālikanti idaṃ yāvassa citakadhūmo na paññāyati, tāva ayaṃ vihāro etassevāti evaṃ dhūmakāle apaloketvā katapariyositaṃ vihāraṃ denti.Vippakatanti ettha vippakato nāma yāva gopānasiyo na ārohanti. Gopānasīsu pana āruḷhāsu bahukato nāma hoti, tasmā tato paṭṭhāya na dātabbo, kiñcideva samādapetvā kāressati.Khuddake vihāre kammaṃ oloketvā chappañcavassikanti kammaṃ oloketvā catuhatthavihāre catuvassikaṃ, pañcahatthe pañcavassikaṃ, chahatthe chavassikaṃ dātabbaṃ. Aḍḍhayogo pana yasmā sattaṭṭhahattho hoti, tasmā ettha ‘‘sattaṭṭhavassika’’nti vuttaṃ. Sace pana so navahattho hoti navavassikampi dātabbaṃ. Mahallake pana dasahatthe ekādasahatthe vihāre vā pāsāde vā dasavassikaṃ vā ekādasavassikaṃ vā dātabbaṃ. Dvādasahatthe pana tato adhike vā lohapāsādasadisepi dvādasavassikameva dātabbaṃ, na tato uttari.
Navakammiko bhikkhu antovasse taṃ āvāsaṃ labhati, utukāle paṭibāhituṃ na labhati. Sace so āvāso jīrati, āvāsasāmikassa vā tassa vaṃse uppannassa vā kassaci kathetabbaṃ – ‘‘āvāso te nassati, jaggatha etaṃ āvāsa’’nti. Sace so na sakkoti, bhikkhūhi ñātī vā upaṭṭhāke vā samādapetvā jaggitabbo. Sace tepi na sakkonti, saṅghikena paccayena jaggitabbo. Tasmimpi asati ekaṃ āvāsaṃ vissajjetvā avasesā jaggitabbā. Bahū vissajjetvā ekaṃ saṇṭhāpetumpi vaṭṭatiyeva.
Navakammiko bhikkhu antovasse taṃ āvāsaṃ labhati, utukāle paṭibāhituṃ na labhati. Sace so āvāso jīrati, āvāsasāmikassa vā tassa vaṃse uppannassa vā kassaci kathetabbaṃ – ‘‘āvāso te nassati, jaggatha etaṃ āvāsa’’nti. Sace so na sakkoti, bhikkhūhi ñātī vā upaṭṭhāke vā samādapetvā jaggitabbo. Sace tepi na sakkonti, saṅghikena paccayena jaggitabbo. Tasmimpi asati ekaṃ āvāsaṃ vissajjetvā avasesā jaggitabbā. Bahū vissajjetvā ekaṃ saṇṭhāpetumpi vaṭṭatiyeva.
Dubbhikkhe bhikkhūsu pakkantesu sabbe āvāsā nassanti, tasmā ekaṃ vā dve vā tayo vā āvāse vissajjetvā tato yāgubhattacīvarādīni paribhuñjantehi sesāvāsā jaggitabbāyeva. Kurundiyaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅghike paccaye asati eko bhikkhu ‘tuyhaṃ ekaṃ mañcaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā jaggāhī’ti vattabbo. Sace bahutaraṃ icchati, tibhāgaṃ vā upaḍḍhabhāgaṃ vā datvāpi jaggāpetabbaṃ. Atha ‘thambhamattamevettha avasiṭṭhaṃ, bahukammaṃ kātabba’nti na icchati, ‘tuyhaṃ puggalikameva katvā jagga; evampi hi saṅghassa bhaṇḍakaṭṭhapanaṭṭhānaṃ navakānañca vasanaṭṭhānaṃ labhissatī’ti jaggāpetabbo. Evaṃ jaggito pana tasmiṃ jīvante puggaliko hoti, mate saṅghikoyeva. Sace saddhivihārikānaṃ dātukāmo hoti, kammaṃ oloketvā tibhāgaṃ vā upaḍḍhaṃ vā puggalikaṃ katvā jaggāpetabbo. Evañhi saddhivihārikānaṃ dātuṃ labhati. Evaṃ jagganake pana asati ‘ekaṃ āvāsaṃ vissajjetvā’tiādinā nayena jaggāpetabbo’’ti.
When monks depart due to famine, all monasteries are ruined; therefore, having allocated one, two, or three monasteries, the remaining monasteries should certainly be maintained by those who partake of gruel, rice, robes, and so on from those allocated monasteries. However, in the Kurundi, it is said: "When there are no requisites belonging to the Saṅgha, one monk should be told, 'Take one bed-frame and maintain it.' If he wants more, he should be given a third or a half and made to maintain it. But if he does not want it, saying, 'Only a pillar remains here, much work has to be done,' he should be made to maintain it by making it his personal property; for even in this way, the Saṅgha will obtain a place for storing goods and a place for new monks to reside." However, once maintained in this way, it becomes his personal property as long as he lives; upon his death, it belongs to the Saṅgha. If he wishes to give it to his saddhivihārikas, having considered the work, it should be made a third or a half his personal property and then made to be maintained. In this way, he is allowed to give it to his saddhivihārikas. But when there is no one to maintain it in this way, it should be maintained in the manner beginning, 'Having allocated one monastery,' etc."
Idampi ca aññaṃ tattheva vuttaṃ – dve bhikkhū saṅghikaṃ bhūmiṃ gahetvā sodhetvā saṅghikaṃ senāsanaṃ karonti. Yena sā bhūmi paṭhamaṃ gahitā, so sāmī. Ubhopi puggalikaṃ karonti, soyeva sāmī. So saṅghikaṃ karoti, itaro puggalikaṃ karoti, aññaṃ ce bahuṃ senāsanaṭṭhānaṃ atthi, puggalikaṃ karontopi na vāretabbo. Aññasmiṃ pana tādise paṭirūpe ṭhāne asati taṃ paṭibāhitvā saṅghikaṃ karonteneva kātabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana tassa tattha vayakammaṃ kataṃ, taṃ dātabbaṃ. Sace pana katāvāse vā āvāsakaraṇaṭṭhāne vā chāyūpagaphalūpagarukkhā honti, apaloketvā hāretabbā. Puggalikā ce honti, sāmikā āpucchitabbā; no ce denti, yāvatatiyaṃ āpucchitvā ‘‘rukkhaagghanakamūlaṃ dassāmā’’ti hāretabbā.
And another thing is said there in the same place: Two monks, having taken land belonging to the Saṅgha, clear it and construct a dwelling for the Saṅgha. The one who took the land first is the owner. If both make it their personal property, he is the owner. If he makes it Saṅghika, and the other makes it his personal property, if there is much other dwelling space, even if he makes it his personal property, he should not be prevented. But if there is no such suitable place elsewhere, having prevented that, it should be done only by making it Saṅghika. But whatever work he has done there, that should be given to him. But if there are trees that provide shade or fruit in a constructed monastery or in a place for constructing a monastery, they should be removed after informing the Saṅgha. If they are personal property, the owners should be asked; if they do not give them, having asked up to the third time, they should be removed, saying, "We will give the price of the trees."
Yo pana saṅghikavallimattampi aggahetvā āharimena upakaraṇena saṅghikāya bhūmiyā puggalikavihāraṃ kāreti, upaḍḍhaṃ saṅghikaṃ hoti; upaḍḍhaṃ puggalikaṃ. Pāsādo ce hoti, heṭṭhāpāsādo saṅghiko; upari puggaliko. Sace so heṭṭhāpāsādaṃ icchati, tassa hoti. Atha heṭṭhā ca upari ca icchati, ubhayattha upaḍḍhaṃ labhati. Dve senāsanāni kāreti – ekaṃ saṅghikaṃ, ekaṃ puggalikaṃ. Sace vihāre uṭṭhitena dabbasambhārena kāreti, tatiyabhāgaṃ labhati. Sace akataṭṭhāne cayaṃ vā pamukhaṃ vā karoti, bahikuṭṭe upaḍḍhaṃ saṅghassa, upaḍḍhaṃ tassa. Atha mahantaṃ visamaṃ pūretvā apade padaṃ dassetvā kataṃ hoti, anissaro tattha saṅgho.
However, whoever, without taking even a vine belonging to the Saṅgha, constructs a personal monastery on land belonging to the Saṅgha with materials brought from elsewhere, half of it belongs to the Saṅgha, and half of it is personal property. If it is a pāsāda, the lower pāsāda belongs to the Saṅgha; the upper one is personal property. If he wants the lower pāsāda, it belongs to him. But if he wants both the lower and upper parts, he obtains half in both places. He constructs two dwellings – one Saṅghika, one personal. If he constructs it with materials that arose in the monastery, he obtains a third part. If he makes a heap or a prominent feature in an unoccupied place, half of the outer wall belongs to the Saṅgha, half to him. But if he fills in a large, uneven area, making a place for feet to step, the Saṅgha has no authority there.
Ekaṃvaraseyyanti ettha navakammadānaṭṭhāne vā vassaggena pattaṭṭhāne vā yaṃ icchati, taṃ ekaṃ varaseyyaṃ anujānāmīti attho.
Ekaṃ varaseyyaṃ: Here, the meaning is, "I allow one choice of bedding" in the place for giving new work or in a place acquired for the rains (vassaggena), whatever one desires.
Pariyosite pakkamati tassevetanti puna āgantvā vasantassa antovassaṃ tasseva taṃ; anāgacchantassa pana saddhivihārikādayo gahetuṃ na labhanti.
Pariyosite pakkamati tassevetaṃ: If he comes again and dwells there within the rains, that is his; but if he does not come, the saddhivihārikas and others cannot take it.
Navakammadānakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Discourse on Giving New Work is Finished.
Aññatrapaṭibhogapaṭikkhepādikathā
Discourse on Rejecting Use Elsewhere, Etc.
324.Nātiharantīti aññatra haritvā na paribhuñjanti.Guttatthāyāti yaṃ tattha mañcapīṭhādi, tassa guttatthāya, taṃ aññatra harituṃ anujānāmīti attho. Tasmā taṃ aññatra haritvā saṅghikaparibhogena paribhuñjantassa naṭṭhaṃ sunaṭṭhaṃ, jiṇṇaṃ sujiṇṇaṃ. Sace arogaṃ tasmiṃ vihāre paṭisaṅkhate puna pākatikaṃ kātabbaṃ. Puggalikaparibhogena paribhuñjato naṭṭhaṃ vā jiṇṇaṃ vā gīvā hoti, tasmiṃ paṭisaṅkhate dātabbameva. Sace tato gopānasiādīni gahetvā aññasmiṃ saṅghikāvāse yojenti, suyojitāni. Puggalikāvāse yojentehi pana mūlaṃ vā dātabbaṃ, paṭipākatikaṃ vā kātabbaṃ chaḍḍitavihārato mañcapīṭhādīni theyyacittena gaṇhanto uddhāreyeva bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo. Puna āvāsikakāle dassāmīti gahetvā saṅghikaparibhogena paribhuñjantassa naṭṭhaṃ sunaṭṭhaṃ, jiṇṇaṃ sujiṇṇaṃ. Arogañce pākatikaṃ kātabbaṃ. Puggalikaparibhogena paribhuñjantassa naṭṭhaṃ gīvā hoti. Tato dvāravātapānādīni saṅghikāvāse vā puggalikāvāse vā yojitāni paṭidātabbāniyeva.
324.Nātiharantī: They do not use it by taking it elsewhere. Guttatthāyā: For the sake of protecting what is there, such as beds and chairs, I allow taking it elsewhere. Therefore, for one who takes it elsewhere and uses it for the Saṅgha's use, what is lost is well lost, what is worn out is well worn out. If it is not damaged when that monastery is restored, it should be made natural again. For one who uses it for personal use, what is lost or worn out is a debt; when that is restored, it must be given. But if they take roof tiles, etc., from there and attach them to another Saṅghika monastery, they are well attached. However, by those who attach them to a personal monastery, either the value must be given, or it must be made as it was before. Whoever takes beds, chairs, etc., from an abandoned monastery with the intention of theft must certainly be made to pay the price of the goods and have them removed. For one who takes them saying, "I will give them back when I am a resident again," and uses them for the Saṅgha's use, what is lost is well lost, what is worn out is well worn out. If it is not damaged, it should be made natural again. For one who uses it for personal use, what is lost is a debt. If doors, windows, etc., from there are attached to a Saṅghika or personal monastery, they must certainly be returned.
Phātikammatthāyāti vaḍḍhikammatthāya. Phātikammañcettha samakaṃ vā atirekaṃ vā agghanakaṃ mañcapīṭhādisenāsanameva vaṭṭati.
Phātikammatthāyā: For the sake of increasing work. Here, "increasing work" means beds, chairs, and other dwellings that are equal to or greater in value.
Cakkalikanti kambalādīhi veṭhetvā katacakkalikaṃ.Allehi pādehīti yehi akkantaṭṭhāne udakaṃ paññāyati, evarūpehi pādehi paribhaṇḍakatabhūmi vā senāsanaṃ vā na akkamitabbaṃ. Sace pana udakasinehamattameva paññāyati, na udakaṃ, vaṭṭati. Pādapuñchaniṃ pana allapādehipi akkamituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Saupāhanena dhotapādehi akkamitabbaṭṭhāneyeva na vaṭṭati.
Cakkalikaṃ: A cakkalikaṃ made by wrapping it with blankets, etc. Allehi pādehī: Ground or a dwelling covered with plaster should not be stepped on with feet of this sort, with which water is evident in the stepped place. But if only the moisture of water is evident, not the water itself, it is allowable. However, it is certainly allowable to step on a foot-wiper even with wet feet. It is not allowable only in a place where one should step with feet that have been washed with shoes on.
Coḷakena paliveṭhetunti sudhābhūmiyaṃ vā paribhaṇḍabhūmiyaṃ vā sace taṭṭikā vā kaṭasārako vā natthi, coḷakena pādā veṭhetabbā, tasmiṃ asati paṇṇampi attharituṃ vaṭṭati. Kiñci anattharitvā ṭhapentassa pana dukkaṭaṃ. Yadi pana tattha nevāsikā anatthatāyapi bhūmiyā ṭhapenti, adhotapādehipi vaḷañjenti, tatheva vaḷañjetuṃ vaṭṭati.
Coḷakena paliveṭhetuṃ: On a plastered floor or a covered floor, if there is no mat or rush mat, the feet should be wrapped with a coḷaka; when that is not available, it is allowable even to spread leaves. But there is a dukkaṭa for one who places them without spreading anything. However, if the residents there place them on the floor even without spreading anything and drag them even with unwashed feet, it is allowable to drag them in that way.
Na bhikkhave parikammakatā bhittīti setabhitti vā cittakammakatā vā. Na kevalañca bhittimeva, dvārampi vātapānampi apassenaphalakampi pāsāṇatthambhampi rukkhatthambhampi cīvarena vā kenaci vā appaṭicchādetvā apassayituṃ na labbhatiyeva.
Na bhikkhave parikammakatā bhittī: Walls that have been prepared, whether white walls or those with paintings. And not only walls, but also doors, windows, door panels, stone pillars, and wooden pillars cannot be leaned against without covering them with a robe or anything else.
Dhotapādakāti dhotapādakā hutvā dhotehi pādehi akkamitabbaṭṭhāne nipajjituṃ kukkuccāyanti. ‘‘Dhotapādake’’tipi pāṭho. Dhotehi pādehi akkamitabbaṭṭhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Paccattharitvāti paribhaṇḍakataṃ bhūmiṃ vā bhūmattharaṇasenāsanaṃ vā saṅghikamañcapīṭhaṃ vā attano santakena paccattharaṇena paccattharitvāva nipajjitabbaṃ. Sace niddāyatopi paccattharaṇe saṅkuṭite koci sarīrāvayavo mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā phusati, āpattiyeva. Lomesu pana lomagaṇanāya āpattiyeva. Paribhogasīsena apassayantassāpi eseva nayo. Hatthatalapādatalehi pana phusituṃ vā akkamituṃ vā vaṭṭati. Mañcapīṭhaṃ nīharantassa kāye paṭihaññati, anāpatti.
Dhotapādakā: Fearing that they will lie down in a place where one should step with washed feet after having washed their feet. "Dhotapādake" is also a reading. This is a designation for a place where one should step with washed feet. Paccattharitvā: Only after spreading a covering belonging to oneself over a covered floor, a spread-out dwelling, or a Saṅghika bed or chair should one lie down. If, even when one is asleep, some part of the body touches the bed or chair when the covering is crumpled, there is an offense. For counting hairs on the skin, there is an offense. The same method applies to one who leans with the head used for use. However, it is allowable to touch or step on them with the palms of the hands and the soles of the feet. There is no offense if the body is struck when taking out a bed or chair.
Aññatraparibhogapaṭikkhepādikathā niṭṭhitā.
The Discourse on Rejecting Use Elsewhere, Etc., is Finished.
Saṅghabhattādianujānanakathā
Discourse on Allowing Saṅghabhatta, Etc.
325.Nasakkonti saṅghabhattaṃ kātunti sakalassa saṅghassa bhattaṃ kātuṃ na sakkonti.Uddesabhattantiādīsu ‘‘ekaṃ vā dve vā…pe… dasa vā bhikkhū saṅghato uddisitvā dethā’’ti evaṃ uddesena laddhabhikkhūnaṃ bhattaṃ kātuṃ icchanti. Apare tatheva bhikkhū paricchinditvā nimantetvā tesaṃ bhattaṃ kātuṃ icchanti. Apare salākāyo chinditvā, apare pakkhikaṃ uposathikaṃ pāṭipadikanti evaṃ niyāmetvā, ekassa vā dvinnaṃ vā…pe… dasannaṃ vā bhikkhūnaṃ bhattaṃ kātuṃ icchanti. Iti etāni bhattāni uddesabhattaṃ nimantananti imaṃ vohāraṃ pattāni. Yasmā pana te sacepi dubbhikkhe na sakkonti, subhikkhe jāte pana puna saṅghabhattaṃ kātuṃ sakkhissanti, tasmā bhagavā tampi anto katvā‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, saṅghabhattaṃ uddesabhatta’’ntiādimāha.
325.Na sakkonti saṅghabhattaṃ kātuṃ: They are not able to prepare food for the entire Saṅgha. Among uddesabhatta, etc., they want to prepare food for monks obtained by designation, thinking, "Having designated one, two, or...ten monks from the Saṅgha, give them." Others, having selected monks in that way, want to invite them and prepare food for them. Others, having drawn lots, and others, having determined fortnightly, uposatha, or pāṭipadika in this way, want to prepare food for one, two, or...ten monks. Thus, these foods have attained this usage: uddesabhatta, invitation. However, because even if they are not able in times of famine, they will be able to prepare Saṅghabhatta again when good times arise, therefore, the Blessed One, having included that also, said, "I allow, monks, Saṅghabhatta, uddesabhatta," etc.
saṅghabhatteṭhitikā nāma natthi, tasmā ‘‘amhākaṃ ajja dasa dvādasa divasā bhuñjantānaṃ idāni aññato bhikkhū ānethā’’ti na evaṃ tattha vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Purimadivasesu amhehi na laddhaṃ, idāni taṃ amhākaṃ gāhethā’’ti evampi vattuṃ na labbhati. Tañhi āgatāgatānaṃ pāpuṇātiyeva.
In Saṅghabhatta, there is no fixed arrangement, therefore, one should not say there, "Now bring monks from elsewhere for us who have been eating for ten or twelve days today." It is not permissible to say even, "We did not obtain it in the previous days; now take that for us." For that is certainly obtained by those who come.
Saṅghabhattādianujānanakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Discourse on Allowing Saṅghabhatta, Etc., is Finished.
Uddesabhattakathā
Discourse on Uddesabhatta
Uddesabhattādīsupana ayaṃ nayo – raññā vā rājamahāmattena vā saṅghato uddisitvā ‘‘ettake bhikkhū ānethā’’ti pahite kālaṃ ghosetvā ṭhitikā pucchitabbā. Sace atthi, tato paṭṭhāya gāhetabbaṃ; no ce, therāsanato paṭṭhāya gāhetabbaṃ. Uddesakena piṇḍapātikānampi na atikkāmetabbaṃ. Te pana dhutaṅgaṃ rakkhantā sayameva atikkamissanti; evaṃ gāhiyamāne alasajātikā mahātherā pacchā āgacchanti, ‘‘bhante, vīsativassānaṃ gāhiyati, tumhākaṃ ṭhitikā atikkantā’’ti na vattabbā, ṭhitikaṃ ṭhapetvā tesaṃ gāhetvā pacchā ṭhitikāya gāhetabbaṃ. ‘‘Asukavihāre bahuṃ uddesabhattaṃ uppanna’’nti sutvā yojanantarikavihāratopi bhikkhū āgacchanti, sampattasampattānaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya gāhetabbaṃ. Asampattānampi upacārasīmaṃ paviṭṭhānaṃ antevāsikādīsu gaṇhantesu gāhetabbameva. Bahiupacārasīmāya ṭhitānaṃ gāhethāti vadanti, na gāhetabbaṃ. Sace pana upacārasīmaṃ okkantehi ekābaddhā hutvā attano vihāradvāre vā antovihāreyeva vā honti, parisāvasena vaḍḍhitā nāma sīmā hoti, tasmā gāhetabbaṃ. Saṅghanavakassa dinnepi pacchā āgatānaṃ gāhetabbameva. Dutiyabhāge pana therāsanaṃ āruḷhe puna āgatānaṃ paṭhamabhāgo na pāpuṇāti, dutiyabhāgato vassaggena gāhetabbaṃ.
In Uddesabhatta and others, this is the method: When the king or a great minister of the king sends someone, saying, "Bring so many monks, having designated them from the Saṅgha," the time should be announced, and the fixed arrangement should be asked about. If there is one, it should be taken starting from there; if not, it should be taken starting from the seat of the elders. Even piṇḍapātikās should not be transgressed by the designator. However, those who protect the dhutaṅga will transgress themselves; when it is being taken in this way, lazy elder monks come later, they should not be told, "Venerable sir, it is being taken for twenty years; your fixed arrangement has been transgressed"; having set aside the fixed arrangement, it should be taken for them, and afterwards it should be taken according to the fixed arrangement. Having heard that "Much uddesabhatta has arisen in such-and-such monastery," monks come even from a monastery a league away; it should be taken for those who have arrived starting from the place where they are standing. Even for those who have not arrived but have entered the boundary of the vicinity, it should certainly be taken when the novices and others are taking it. They say that it should be taken for those standing outside the boundary of the vicinity, but it should not be taken. But if those who have descended into the boundary of the vicinity are united as one and are at the door of their monastery or even inside the monastery, the boundary is said to be increased by the assembly, therefore, it should be taken. Even when it is given to a new monk of the Saṅgha, it should certainly be taken for those who come later. However, in the second part, for those who come again after ascending to the seat of the elders, the first part is not obtained; it should be taken from the second part according to seniority.
Ekasmiṃ vihāre ekaṃ bhattuddesaṭṭhānaṃ paricchinditvā gāvutappamāṇāyapi upacārasīmāya yattha katthaci ārocitaṃ uddesabhattaṃ, tasmiṃyeva bhattuddesaṭṭhāne gāhetabbaṃ. Eko ekassa bhikkhuno pahiṇāti ‘‘svepi saṅghato uddisitvā dasa bhikkhū pahiṇathā’’ti, tena so attho bhattuddesakassa ārocetabbo. Sace taṃ divasaṃ pamussati, dutiyadivase pātova ārocetabbo. Atha pamussitvāva piṇḍāya pavisanto sarati, yāva upacārasīmaṃ nātikkamati, tāva yā bhojanasālāya pakatiṭṭhitikā, tassāyeva vasena gāhetabbaṃ. Sacepi upacārasīmaṃ atikkantā bhikkhū ca upacārasīmaṭṭhakehi ekābaddhā honti, aññamaññaṃ dvādasahatthantaraṃ avijahitvā gacchanti, pakatiṭṭhitikāya vasena gāhetabbaṃ. Bhikkhūnaṃ pana tādise ekābaddhe asati bahiupacārasīmāya yasmiṃ ṭhāne sarati, tattha navaṃ ṭhitikaṃ katvā gāhetabbaṃ. Antogāme āsanasālāya sarantena āsanasālāya ṭhitikāya gāhetabbaṃ. Yattha katthaci saritvā gāhetabbameva, agāhetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Na hi etaṃ dutiyadivase labbhatīti.
Having designated one place for designating food in one monastery, the uddesabhatta announced anywhere within the boundary of the vicinity, even of the size of a gāvuta, should be taken in that place for designating food. One sends to one monk, saying, "Tomorrow also, send ten monks, having designated them from the Saṅgha"; that matter should be announced to the one designating food. If he forgets that day, it should be announced early on the second day. But if, while entering for alms, he remembers only after forgetting, as long as he does not transgress the boundary of the vicinity, it should be taken according to the usual arrangement of the alms hall. Even if the monks who have transgressed the boundary of the vicinity are united as one with those standing at the boundary of the vicinity, going without abandoning a distance of twelve hands from each other, it should be taken according to the usual arrangement. However, when the monks are not so united, a new arrangement should be made in the place where they remember outside the boundary of the vicinity, and it should be taken. If one remembers in the village inside the alms hall, it should be taken according to the arrangement of the alms hall. It should certainly be taken wherever one remembers; it is not permissible not to take it. For this is not obtained on the second day.
Sace sakavihārato aññaṃ vihāraṃ gacchante bhikkhū disvā koci uddesabhattaṃ uddisāpeti, yāva antoupacāre vā upacārasīmaṭṭhakehi saddhiṃ vuttanayena ekābaddhā vā honti, tāva sakavihāre ṭhitikāvaseneva gāhetabbaṃ. Bahiupacāre ṭhitānaṃ dinnaṃ pana ‘‘saṅghato bhante ettake nāma bhikkhū uddisathā’’ti vutte sampattānaṃ gāhetabbaṃ. Tattha dvādasahatthantaraṃ avijahitvā ekābaddhanayena dūre ṭhitāpi sampattāyevāti veditabbaṃ. Sace yaṃ vihāraṃ gacchanti, tattha paviṭṭhānaṃ ārocenti, tassa vihārassa ṭhitikāvasena gāhetabbaṃ. Sacepi gāmadvāre vā vīthiyaṃ vā catukke vā antaraghare vā bhikkhū disvā koci saṅghuddesaṃ āroceti, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne antoupacāragatānaṃ gāhetabbaṃ.
If someone, seeing monks going from their own monastery to another monastery, designates uddesabhatta, as long as they are within the inner vicinity or united as one with those standing at the boundary of the vicinity in the manner described, it should be taken only according to the arrangement in their own monastery. However, when it is said to those standing outside the vicinity, "Designate so many monks from the Saṅgha, venerable sirs," it should be taken for those who have arrived. There, even those standing at a distance, not abandoning a distance of twelve hands in the manner of being united as one, should be understood as having arrived. If they announce it to those who have entered the monastery to which they are going, it should be taken according to the arrangement of that monastery. Even if someone announces Saṅgha designation upon seeing monks at the village gate, on the street, at the crossroads, or inside a house, it should be taken for those who have gone to the inner vicinity in that place.
‘‘ekaṃ gharaṃ ekūpacāraṃ’’nāma.
"One house, one vicinity" is the name.
‘‘ekaṃ gharaṃ nānūpacāraṃ’’nāma.
"One house, no vicinity" is the name.
‘‘nānāgharaṃ ekūpacāraṃ’’nāma.
"Many houses, one vicinity" is the name.
‘‘nānāgharaṃ nānūpacāraṃ’’nāma.
"Many houses, no vicinity" is the name.
Yo pana gāmadvāravīthicatukkesu aññatarasmiṃ ṭhāne uddesabhattaṃ labhitvā aññasmiṃ bhikkhusmiṃ asati attanova pāpuṇāpetvā dutiyadivasepi tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne aññaṃ labhati, tena yaṃ aññaṃ navakaṃ vā vuḍḍhaṃ vā bhikkhuṃ passati, tassa gāhetabbaṃ. Sace koci natthi, attanova pāpetvā bhuñjitabbaṃ.
If someone, having obtained uddesabhatta in any place such as a village gate, street, or crossroads, and there isn't another bhikkhu, even on the second day, obtains another in that same place without having it reach his own, then whatever other bhikkhu he sees, whether new or elder, it should be given to him. If there is no one, it should be brought to himself and eaten.
Sace āsanasālāya nisīditvā kālaṃ paṭimānentesu bhikkhūsu koci āgantvā ‘‘saṅghuddesapattaṃ detha, uddesapattaṃ detha, saṅghato uddisitvā pattaṃ detha, saṅghikaṃ pattaṃ dethā’’ti vā vadati, uddesapattaṃ ṭhitikāya gāhetvā dātabbaṃ. ‘‘Saṅghuddesabhikkhuṃ detha, saṅghato uddisitvā bhikkhuṃ detha, saṅghikaṃ bhikkhuṃ dethā’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo.
If, while bhikkhus are sitting in the assembly hall waiting for the time, someone comes and says, "Give the saṅgha's uddesapatta, give the uddesapatta, give the patta designated from the saṅgha, give the saṅgha's patta," then the uddesapatta should be taken according to the established order and given. The same method applies even if it is said, "Give the saṅgha's uddesa bhikkhu, give the bhikkhu designated from the saṅgha, give the saṅgha's bhikkhu."
Uddesakopanettha pesalo lajjī medhāvī icchitabbo, tena tikkhattuṃ ṭhitikaṃ pucchitvā sace koci ṭhitikaṃ jānanto natthi, therāsanato gāhetabbaṃ. Sace pana ‘‘ahaṃ jānāmi, dasavassena laddha’’nti koci bhaṇati, ‘‘atthāvuso, dasavassā bhikkhū’’ti pucchitabbaṃ. Sace tassa sutvā ‘‘dasavassamha dasavassamhā’’ti bahū āgacchanti, ‘‘tuyhaṃ pāpuṇāti, tuyhaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti avatvā ‘‘sabbe appasaddā hothā’’ti vatvā paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapetabbā. Ṭhapetvā ‘‘kati icchathā’’ti upāsako pucchitabbo. ‘‘Ettake nāma, bhante, bhikkhū’’ti vutte ‘‘tuyhaṃ pāpuṇāti, tuyhaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti avatvā sabbanavakassa vassaggañca utu ca divasabhāgo ca chāyā ca pucchitabbā. Sace chāyāyapi pucchiyamānāya añño vuḍḍhataro āgacchati, tassa dātabbaṃ. Atha chāyaṃ pucchitvā ‘‘tuyhaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti vutte vuḍḍhataro āgacchati, na labhati. Kathāpapañcena hi nisinnassāpi niddāyantassāpi gāhitaṃ suggāhitaṃ, atikkantaṃ suatikkantaṃ, bhājanīyabhaṇḍañhi nāmetaṃ sampattasseva pāpuṇāti, tattha sampattabhāvo upacārena paricchinditabbo. Āsanasālāya ca antoparikkhepo upacāro, tasmiṃ ṭhitassa lābho pāpuṇātīti.
Here, the uddesaka should be amiable, conscientious, and wise; he should ask about the established order three times, and if there is no one who knows the established order, it should be taken from the elder's seat. But if someone says, "I know, I obtained it with ten years," he should be asked, "Are there, āvuso, bhikkhus of ten years?" If, having heard that, many come saying, "We are ten years, we are ten years," without saying "It falls to you, it falls to you," he should say, "Be quiet, all of you," and establish them in order. Having established them, the lay follower should be asked, "How many do you want?" When he says, "So many bhikkhus, bhante," without saying "It falls to you, it falls to you," the year of ordination, season, time of day, and shadow of all the newest should be asked. Even when being asked about the shadow, if another elder comes, it should be given to him. But if, after asking about the shadow and saying, "It falls to you," an elder comes, he does not obtain it. For even if one is sitting with a lengthy discussion or is dozing, what is taken is well-taken, what is passed is well-passed, for this is indeed an object to be shared; it falls only to the one who is present, and the state of being present should be determined by convention. And in the assembly hall, the inner boundary is the convention; the gain falls to one standing in it.
Koci āsanasālato aṭṭha uddesapatte āharāpetvā satta patte paṇītabhojanānaṃ ekaṃ udakassa pūretvā āsanasālāyaṃ pahiṇāti, gahetvā āgatā kiñci avatvā bhikkhūnaṃ hatthesu patiṭṭhāpetvā pakkamanti. Yena yaṃ laddhaṃ, tasseva taṃ hoti. Yena pana udakaṃ laddhaṃ, tassa atikkantampi ṭhitikaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ uddesabhattaṃ gāhetabbaṃ. Tañca lūkhaṃ vā labhatu paṇītaṃ vā ticīvaraparivāraṃ vā, tassevetaṃ. Īdiso hissa puññaviseso. Udakaṃ pana yasmā āmisaṃ na hoti, tasmā aññaṃ uddesabhattaṃ labbhati.
Someone, having brought eight uddesapattas from the assembly hall, fills seven pattas with fine foods and one with water, and sends them to the assembly hall; those who brought them, without saying anything, place them in the hands of the bhikkhus and depart. Whomever obtained what, that belongs to him. But for whomever obtained water, even if the established order is past, having kept the established order, another uddesabhatta should be taken. Whether he obtains rough food or fine food, or a set of three robes and requisites, this belongs to him. For this is his special merit. But since water is not food, another uddesabhatta is obtained.
Sace pana te gahetvā āgatā ‘‘idaṃ kira bhante sabbaṃ bhājetvā bhuñjathā’’ti vatvā gacchanti, sabbehi bhājetvā bhuñjitvā udakaṃ pātabbaṃ. Saṅghato uddisitvā ‘‘aṭṭha mahāthere detha, majjhime detha, navake detha, paripuṇṇavassasāmaṇere detha, majjhimabhāṇakādayo detha, mayhaṃ ñātibhikkhū dethā’’ti vadantassa pana ‘‘upāsaka, tvaṃ evaṃ vadasi, ṭhitikāya pana tesaṃ na pāpuṇātī’’ti vatvā ṭhitikāvaseneva dātabbā. Daharasāmaṇerehi pana uddesabhattesu laddhesu sace dāyakānaṃ ghare maṅgalaṃ hoti, ‘‘tumhākaṃ ācariyupajjhāye pesethā’’ti vattabbaṃ.
But if those who brought them say, "Divide and eat all of this, bhante," and leave, it should all be divided and eaten, and the water should be drunk. But to one who designates from the saṅgha and says, "Give to the eight great elders, give to the middling ones, give to the new ones, give to the fully ordained sāmaṇeras, give to the middling reciters, etc., give to my relatives who are bhikkhus," one should say, "Lay follower, you say this, but it does not fall to them according to the established order," and it should be given only according to the established order. But when uddesabhattas are obtained by young sāmaṇeras, if there is a celebration in the house of the donors, it should be said, "Send it to your teachers and preceptors."
Yasmiṃ pana uddesabhatte paṭhamabhāgo sāmaṇerānaṃ pāpuṇāti, anubhāgo mahātherānaṃ, na tattha sāmaṇerā ‘‘mayaṃ paṭhamabhāgaṃ labhimhā’’ti purato gantuṃ labhanti, yathāpaṭipāṭiyā eva gantabbaṃ. ‘‘Saṅghato uddisitvā ‘tumhe ethā’ti vutte ‘mayhaṃ aññadāpi jānissasi, ṭhitikā pana evaṃ gacchatī’’’ti ṭhitikāvaseneva gāhetabbaṃ. Atha ‘‘saṅghuddesapattaṃ dethā’’ti vatvā agāhiteyeva patte yassa kassaci pattaṃ gahetvā pūretvā āharati, āhaṭampi ṭhitikāya eva gāhetabbaṃ.
In whatever uddesabhatta the first portion falls to the sāmaṇeras and the subsequent portion to the great elders, there the sāmaṇeras cannot go forward thinking, "We obtained the first portion," but should go only according to the order. "When designated from the saṅgha, if it is said, 'You come,' one should take it only according to the established order, thinking, 'You will know mine another time, but the established order goes like this.'" But if, having said, "Give the saṅgha's uddesapatta," he brings a patta, filling whatever patta without taking it, even what is brought should be taken only according to the established order.
Eko ‘‘saṅghuddesapattaṃ āharā’’ti pesito ‘‘bhante, ekaṃ pattaṃ detha, nimantanabhattaṃ āharissāmī’’ti vadati, so ce uddesabhattagharato ayaṃ āgatoti ñatvā bhikkhūhi ‘‘nanu tvaṃ asukagharato āgato’’ti vutto ‘‘āma, bhante, na nimantanabhattaṃ, uddesabhatta’’nti bhaṇati, ṭhitikāya gahetabbaṃ. Yo pana ‘‘ekaṃ pattaṃ āharā’’ti vutto ‘‘‘ki’nti vatvā āharāmī’’ti vatvā ‘‘yathā te ruccatī’’ti vutto āgacchati, ayaṃ vissaṭṭhadūto nāma. Uddesapattaṃ vā paṭipāṭipattaṃ vā puggalikapattaṃ vā yaṃ icchati, taṃ tassa dātabbaṃ. Eko bālo abyatto ‘‘uddesapattaṃ āharā’’ti pesito vattuṃ na jānāti, tuṇhībhūto tiṭṭhati, so ‘‘kassa santikaṃ āgatosī’’ti vā ‘‘kassa pattaṃ harissasī’’ti vā na vattabbo. Evañhi vutto pucchāsabhāgena ‘‘tumhākaṃ santikaṃ āgatomhī’’ti ‘‘tumhākaṃ pattaṃ harissāmī’’ti vā vadeyya, tato taṃ bhikkhuṃ aññe bhikkhū jigucchantā na olokeyyuṃ. ‘‘Kuhiṃ gacchasi, kiṃ karonto āhiṇḍasī’’ti pana vattabbo. Tassa ‘‘uddesapattatthāya āgatomhī’’ti vadantassa gāhetvā patto dātabbo.
One, having been sent saying, "Bring the saṅgha's uddesapatta," says, "Bhante, give a patta, I will bring invitation-food." If it is known by the bhikkhus that he came from the uddesabhatta house and, having been told, "Surely you came from such and such a house?" he says, "Yes, bhante, not invitation-food, but uddesabhatta," it should be taken according to the established order. But one who, having been told, "Bring a patta," says, "How should I bring it?" and, having been told, "As you like," comes, this is called a reliable messenger. Whatever he wants, whether it is an uddesapatta, a patta in order, or an individual patta, that should be given to him. A foolish, uncomprehending one, having been sent saying, "Bring an uddesapatta," does not know what to say, and stands silently; he should not be asked, "To whom have you come?" or "Whose patta will you carry?" For if asked thus, due to the nature of the question, he might say, "I have come to you," or "I will carry your patta," then other bhikkhus, disgusted with that bhikkhu, would not look at him. But he should be asked, "Where are you going? What are you doing wandering about?" If, saying, "I have come for the uddesapatta," he gives it, the patta should be given.
kūṭaṭṭhitikānāma hoti. Rañño vā hi rājamahāmattassa vā gehe atipaṇītāni aṭṭha uddesabhattāni niccaṃ diyyanti, tāni ekacārikabhattāni katvā bhikkhū visuṃ ṭhitikāya paribhuñjanti. Ekacce bhikkhū ‘‘sve dāni amhākaṃ pāpuṇissantī’’ti attano ṭhitikaṃ sallakkhetvā gatā, tesu anāgatesuyeva aññe āgantukā bhikkhū āgantvā āsanasālāya nisīdanti; taṅkhaṇaññeva rājapurisā āgantvā ‘‘paṇītabhattapatte dethā’’ti vadanti. Āgantukā ṭhitikaṃ ajānantā gāhenti. Taṅkhaṇaññeva ca ṭhitikaṃ jānanakabhikkhū āgantvā ‘‘kiṃ gāhethā’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Rājagehe paṇītabhatta’’nti. ‘‘Kativassato paṭṭhāyā’’ti? ‘‘Ettakavassato nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Mā gāhethā’’ti nivāretvā ṭhitikāya gāhetabbaṃ. Gāhite āgatehipi pattadānakāle āgatehipi dinnakāle āgatehipi rājagehato patte pūretvā āhaṭakāle āgatehipi rājā ‘‘ajja bhikkhūyeva āgacchantū’’ti pesetvā bhikkhūnaṃyeva hatthe piṇḍapātaṃ deti; evaṃ dinnapiṇḍapātaṃ gahetvā āgatakāle āgatehipi ṭhitikaṃ jānanakabhikkhūhi ‘‘mā bhuñjitthā’’ti vāretvā ṭhitikāyameva gāhetabbaṃ.
Kūṭaṭṭhitikā (false established order) exists. In the house of a king or a royal minister, very fine uddesabhattas are always given, and having made them single wandering-for-alms-food, the bhikkhus partake of them separately according to the established order. Some bhikkhus, thinking, "Tomorrow they will fall to us," having noted their own established order, go; while they are not yet arrived, other visiting bhikkhus come and sit in the assembly hall; at that very moment, the royal men come and say, "Give the fine-food-pattas." The visitors, not knowing the established order, take them. At that very moment, bhikkhus who know the established order come and say, "What are you taking?" "Fine food from the royal house." "Since how many years?" "Since such and such a year." "Do not take it," and having stopped them, it should be taken according to the established order. Even when they have been taken and brought, even when they come at the time of giving the pattas, even when they come at the time of being given, even when pattas have been filled from the royal house and brought, even when the king sends word, "Today only the bhikkhus should come," and gives the alms food into the hands of the bhikkhus themselves; even when alms food given thus has been taken and brought, the bhikkhus who know the established order, having stopped them saying, "Do not eat," it should be taken only according to the established order.
Atha ne rājā bhojetvā pattepi nesaṃ pūretvā deti, yaṃ āhaṭaṃ taṃ ṭhitikāya gāhetabbaṃ. Sace pana ‘‘mā tucchahatthā gacchantū’’ti thokameva pattesu pakkhittaṃ hoti, taṃ na gāhetabbaṃ. Atha bhuñjitvā tucchapattāva āgacchanti, yaṃ tehi bhuttaṃ, taṃ nesaṃ gīvā hotīti mahāsumatthero āha. Mahāpadumatthero panāha – ‘‘gīvākiccaṃ ettha natthi, ṭhitikaṃ pana ajānantehi yāva jānanakā āgacchanti, tāva nisīditabbaṃ siyā; evaṃ santepi bhuttaṃ subhuttaṃ, idāni pattaṭṭhānena gāhetabba’’nti.
Then the king, having fed them, even fills their pattas and gives them; whatever is brought should be taken according to the established order. But if it has been put just a little in the pattas, thinking, "Let them not go empty-handed," that should not be taken. Then, having eaten, they come with empty pattas; whatever they have eaten is a debt on them, said Mahāsumatthero. But Mahāpadumatthero said, "There is no matter of debt here, but those who do not know the established order should sit until those who know come; even if that is the case, what is eaten is well-eaten, now it should be taken according to the order of the pattas."
Eko ticīvaraparivāro satagghanako piṇḍapāto avassikassa bhikkhuno patto, vihāre ca ‘‘evarūpo piṇḍapāto avassikassa patto’’ti likhitvā ṭhapesuṃ. Atha saṭṭhivassaccayena añño tathārūpo piṇḍapāto uppanno, ayaṃ kiṃ avassikaṭṭhitikāya gāhetabbo, udāhu saṭṭhivassikaṭṭhitikāyāti. Saṭṭhivassikaṭṭhitikāyāti vuttaṃ, ayañhi bhikkhu ṭhitikaṃ gahetvāyeva vaḍḍhitoti.
A set of three robes and requisites worth a hundred (kahāpaṇas) was the lot of an avassika bhikkhu, and in the monastery they wrote and placed, "Such alms food is the lot of the avassika." Then, after sixty years, another alms food of that kind arose; should this be taken according to the avassika established order, or according to the sixty-year established order? It was said that it should be taken according to the sixty-year established order, for this bhikkhu indeed has grown up taking the established order.
antarābhaṭṭhakonāma. Yo pana paripuṇṇavasso sāmaṇero ‘‘sve uddesabhattaṃ labhissatī’’ti ajjeva upasampajjati, atikkantā tassa ṭhitikā. Ekassa bhikkhuno uddesabhattaṃ pattaṃ, patto cassa na tuccho hoti, so aññassa samīpe nisinnassa pattaṃ dāpeti, tañce theyyāya haranti, gīvā hoti. Sace pana so bhikkhu ‘‘mayhaṃ pattaṃ dammī’’ti sayameva deti, assa gīvā na hoti. Athāpi tena bhattena anatthiko hutvā ‘‘alaṃ mayhaṃ, tavetaṃ bhattaṃ dammi, pattaṃ pesetvā āharāpehī’’ti aññaṃ vadati, yaṃ tato āharīyati sabbaṃ pattasāmikassa hoti. Pattañce theyyāya haranti, suhaṭo; bhattassa dinnattā gīvā na hoti.
Antarābhaṭṭhako (one who interferes) exists. If a fully ordained sāmaṇera is ordained today thinking, "Tomorrow he will obtain uddesabhatta," his established order is past. Uddesabhatta falls to a bhikkhu, and his patta is not empty, and he gives the patta to someone sitting nearby; if they steal it, it is a debt. But if that bhikkhu gives the patta himself, thinking, "I will give my patta," it is not a debt on him. Or else, being disinterested in that food, he says to another, "Enough for me, I give this food to you; send the patta and have it brought," whatever is brought from there belongs to the owner of the patta. If they steal the patta, it is well-stolen; since the food has been given, it is not a debt.
Vihāre dasa bhikkhū honti, tesu nava piṇḍapātikā, eko sādiyanako. ‘‘Dasa uddesapatte dethā’’ti vutte piṇḍapātikā gahetuṃ na icchanti. Itaro bhikkhu ‘‘sabbāni mayhaṃ pāpuṇantī’’ti gaṇhāti, ṭhitikā na hoti. Ekekaṃ ce pāpetvā gaṇhāti, ṭhitikā tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ gāhetvā dasahipi pattehi āharāpetvā ‘‘bhante, mayhaṃ saṅgahaṃ karothā’’ti nava patte piṇḍapātikānaṃ deti, bhikkhudattiyaṃ nāmetaṃ, gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati.
There are ten bhikkhus in a monastery, of whom nine are piṇḍapātikas, and one is a sādiyanaka. When it is said, "Give ten uddesapattas," the piṇḍapātikas do not want to take them. The other bhikkhu takes them thinking, "All fall to me," it is not the established order. But if he passes on one to each and takes it, the established order stands. Having taken them thus and having them brought with the ten pattas, he gives nine pattas to the piṇḍapātikas thinking, "Please do me a favor, bhante," this is called bhikkhudattiya, it is suitable to take.
Sace so upāsako ‘‘bhante, gharaṃ āgantabba’’nti vadati, so ca bhikkhu te bhikkhū ‘‘etha, bhante, mayhaṃ sahāyā hothā’’ti tassa gharaṃ gacchati. Yaṃ tattha labhati, sabbaṃ tasseva hoti. Itare tena dinnaṃ labhanti. Atha nesaṃ ghareyeva nisīdāpetvā dakkhiṇodakaṃ datvā yāgukhajjakādīni denti, ‘‘bhante, yaṃ manussā denti, taṃ gaṇhathā’’ti tassa bhikkhuno vacaneneva itaresaṃ vaṭṭati. Bhuttāvīnaṃ patte pūretvā gaṇhitvā gamanatthāya denti, sabbaṃ tasseva bhikkhuno hoti, tena dinnaṃ itaresaṃ vaṭṭati.
If that lay follower says, "Bhante, you should come to the house," and that bhikkhu goes to his house thinking to those bhikkhus, "Come, bhante, be my companions." Whatever he obtains there, all belongs to him. The others obtain what is given by him. Then, having seated them in the house itself, having given the water of donation, they give gruel, hard food, etc., "Whatever people give, bhante, take it," it is suitable for the others only by the word of that bhikkhu. Having filled the pattas of those who have eaten, they give them for the purpose of going, all belongs to that bhikkhu, what is given by him is suitable for the others.
Yadi pana te vihāreyeva tena bhikkhunā ‘‘bhante, mayhaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhatha, manussānañca vacanaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttā gacchanti, yaṃ tattha bhuñjanti ceva nīharanti ca, sabbaṃ taṃ tasseva santakaṃ. Athāpi ‘‘mayhaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti avuttā ‘‘manussānaṃ vacanaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti gacchanti, tatra ce ekassa madhurena sarena anumodanaṃ karontassa sutvā therānañca upasame pasīditvā bahuṃ samaṇaparikkhāraṃ denti, ayaṃ theresu pasādena uppanno ‘‘akatabhāgo’’ nāma, tasmā sabbesaṃ pāpuṇāti.
If, however, they go to the monastery, having been told by that bhikkhu, "Bhante, take my alms food, and it is suitable to do what the people say," whatever they eat there and bring out, all of that belongs to him. Or else, without being told, "Take my alms food," they go thinking, "It is suitable to do what the people say," and there, having heard one making an അനുമോദന (anumodana) with a sweet voice, and being pleased with the elders' calmness, they give much monastic equipment, this is called "akatabhāgo" (undesignated portion) arising from pleasure in the elders, therefore it falls to all.
Eko saṅghato uddisāpetvā ṭhitikāya gāhitaṃ pattaṃ haritvā paṇītassa khādanīyabhojanīyassa pūretvā āharitvā ‘‘imaṃ, bhante, sabbo saṅgho paribhuñjatū’’ti deti, sabbehi bhājetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Pattasāmikassa pana atikkantampi ṭhitikaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ uddesabhattaṃ dātabbaṃ. Atha ‘‘paṭhamaṃyeva sabbaṃ saṅghikaṃ pattaṃ dethā’’ti vadati, ekassa lajjibhikkhuno santako patto dātabbo. Āharitvā ca ‘‘sabbo saṅgho paribhuñjatū’’ti vutte bhājetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ.
Someone, having had a patta designated from the saṅgha and taken according to the established order, carries it, fills it with fine edibles and foods, brings it, and gives it thinking, "Bhante, let the whole saṅgha partake of this," it should be divided and partaken of by all. But for the owner of the patta, even if the established order is past, another uddesabhatta should be given. Then, if he says, "Give all the saṅgha's patta first," a patta belonging to a conscientious bhikkhu should be given. And having brought it, if it is said, "Let the whole saṅgha partake of it," it should be divided and partaken of.
Eko pātiyā bhattaṃ āharitvā ‘‘saṅghuddesaṃ dammī’’ti vadati, ekekaṃ ālopaṃ adatvā ṭhitikāya ekassa yāpanamattaṃ katvā dātabbaṃ. Atha so bhattaṃ āharitvā kiñci vattuṃ ajānanto tuṇhībhūto acchati, ‘‘kassa te ānītaṃ, kassa dātukāmosī’’ti na vattabbaṃ. Pucchāsabhāgena hi ‘‘tumhākaṃ ānītaṃ, tumhākaṃ dātukāmomhī’’ti vadeyya, tato taṃ bhikkhuṃ aññe bhikkhū jigucchantā gīvaṃ parivattetvā oloketabbampi na maññeyyuṃ. Sace pana ‘‘kuhiṃ yāsi, kiṃ karonto āhiṇḍasī’’ti vutte ‘‘uddesabhattaṃ gahetvā āgatomhī’’ti vadati, ekena lajjibhikkhunā ṭhitikāya gāhetabbaṃ. Sace ābhataṃ bahu hoti, sabbesaṃ pahoti, ṭhitikākiccaṃ natthi, therāsanato paṭṭhāya pattaṃ pūretvā dātabbaṃ.
Someone, having brought food in a bowl, says, "I will give it for the saṅgha's designation," without giving a single morsel, it should be given to one according to the established order, having made it just enough for sustenance. Then, if he brings food, not knowing what to say, he remains silent, it should not be said, "For whom have you brought it? To whom do you want to give it?" For if asked thus, due to the nature of the question, he might say, "I have brought it for you, I want to give it to you," then other bhikkhus, disgusted with that bhikkhu, would not even think of looking at him, turning their necks. But if, when asked, "Where are you going? What are you doing wandering about?" he says, "I have come having taken uddesabhatta," it should be taken according to the established order by a conscientious bhikkhu. If what is brought is much, it is enough for all, there is no need for the established order; starting from the elder's seat, the patta should be filled and given.
‘‘Saṅghuddesapattaṃ dethā’’ti vutte ‘‘kiṃ āharissasī’’ti avatvā pakatiṭṭhitikāya eva gāhetabbaṃ. Yo pana pāyāso vā rasapiṇḍapāto vā niccaṃ labbhati; evarūpānaṃ paṇītabhojanānaṃ āveṇikā ṭhitikā kātabbā, tathā saparivārāya yāguyā mahagghānaṃ phalānaṃ paṇītānañca khajjakānaṃ. Pakatibhattayāguphalakhajjakānaṃ pana ekāva ṭhitikā kātabbā. ‘‘Sappiṃ āharissāmī’’ti vutte sabbasappīnaṃ ekāva ṭhitikā vaṭṭati, tathā sabbatelānaṃ. ‘‘Madhuṃ āharissāmī’’ti vutte pana madhuno ekāva ṭhitikā vaṭṭati, tathā phāṇitassa laṭṭhimadhukādīnañca bhesajjānaṃ. Sace pana gandhamālaṃ saṅghuddesaṃ denti, piṇḍapātikassa vaṭṭati, na vaṭṭatīti. Āmisasseva paṭikkhittattā vaṭṭati, saṅghaṃ uddissa dinnattā pana na gahetabbanti vadanti.
When it is said, "Give (him) the saṅgha-uddesa allocation," without asking, "What will you bring?" it should be accepted according to the established custom. However, for choice foods like pāyāsa or a lump of delicious alms food that are regularly obtained, specific arrangements should be made, as well as for porridge with side dishes, expensive fruits, and choice pastries. But for ordinary rice, porridge, fruits, and pastries, only one arrangement should be made. When it is said, "I will bring ghee," one arrangement is sufficient for all ghee, and similarly for all oils. But when it is said, "I will bring honey," one arrangement is sufficient for honey, and similarly for molasses, licorice, and other medicines. If they give fragrant garlands as a saṅgha-uddesa, is it suitable for a piṇḍapātika or not? Because only non-vegetarian food is prohibited, it is suitable, but some say it should not be accepted because it is given intending for the Saṅgha. (pāci. 239)
Uddesabhattakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Discourse on Uddesa-bhutta is concluded.
Nimantanabhattakathā
The Discourse on Invitation-meal
Nimantanaṃpuggalikañce, sayameva issaro. Saṅghikaṃ pana uddesabhatte vuttanayeneva gāhetabbaṃ. Sace panettha dūto byatto hoti, ‘‘bhante, rājagehe bhikkhusaṅghassa bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti avatvā ‘‘bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭati. Atha dūto abyatto ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, bhattuddesako byatto ‘‘bhatta’’nti avatvā ‘‘bhante, tumhe yāthā’’ti vadati; evampi piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭati. Tumhākaṃ paṭipāṭiyā ‘‘bhattaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti vutte pana na vaṭṭati. Sace nimantetuṃ āgatamanusso āsanasālaṃ pavisitvā ‘‘aṭṭha bhikkhū dethā’’ti vā ‘‘aṭṭha patte dethā’’ti vā vadati; evampi piṇḍapātikānaṃ vaṭṭati, ‘‘tumhe ca tumhe ca gacchathā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace pana ‘‘aṭṭha bhikkhū detha; bhattaṃ gaṇhatha, aṭṭha patte detha; bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, paṭipāṭiyā gāhetabbaṃ. Gāhentena pana vicchinditvā ‘‘bhatta’’nti avadantena ‘‘tumhe ca tumhe ca gacchathā’’ti vutte piṇḍapātikānaṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Bhante, tumhākaṃ pattaṃ detha, tumhe ethā’’ti vutte pana ‘‘sādhu, upāsakā’’ti gantabbaṃ. Saṅghato uddisitvā ‘‘tumhe ethā’’ti vuttepi yathāṭhitikāya gāhetabbaṃ.
An invitation that is for an individual, (the invited person) is independent. But a Saṅgha invitation should be accepted in the same manner as described for uddesa-bhutta. If in this case, the messenger is articulate, and instead of saying, "Venerable, accept a meal for the Saṅgha of monks at the royal residence," he says, "Accept alms," it is suitable even for piṇḍapātikas. If the messenger is inarticulate and says, "Accept a meal," but the meal allocator is articulate and instead of saying "meal," says, "Venerable, you go;" even then it is suitable for piṇḍapātikas. But it is not suitable if it is said, "A meal will come to you" according to your turn. If a person who has come to invite enters the assembly hall and says, "Give eight monks," or "Give eight bowls;" even then it is suitable for piṇḍapātikas, and it should be said, "You and you go." But if he says, "Give eight monks; accept a meal, give eight bowls; accept a meal," it should be accepted according to the order. If the one who is accepting interrupts and says "meal," but says "You and you go," it is suitable for piṇḍapātikas. But when it is said, "Venerable, give your bowl, you come," one should go, saying, "Good, lay devotee." Even if, having designated from the Saṅgha, it is said, "You come," it should be accepted according to the established custom.
Nimantanabhattagharato pana pattatthāya āgatassa uddesabhatte vuttanayeneva ṭhitikāya patto dātabbo. Eko ‘‘saṅghato paṭipāṭiyā patta’’nti avatvā kevalaṃ ‘‘ekaṃ pattaṃ dethā’’ti vatvā agāhiteyeva patte yassa kassaci pattaṃ gahetvā pūretvā āharati, taṃ pattasāmikasseva hoti, uddesabhatte viya ṭhitikāya na gāhetabbaṃ. Idhāpi yo āgantvā tuṇhībhūto tiṭṭhati, so ‘‘kassa santikaṃ āgatosī’’ti vā ‘‘kassa pattaṃ harissasī’’ti vā na vattabbo.
From the invitation-meal house, for one who has come for a bowl, the bowl should be given according to the arrangement in the same manner as described for uddesa-bhutta. If one, without saying, "A bowl in turn from the Saṅgha," simply says, "Give one bowl," and takes a bowl and fills it without being accepted, that belongs to the owner of the bowl, and it should not be accepted according to the arrangement as in uddesa-bhutta. Here too, one who comes and stands silently should not be asked, "To whom have you come?" or "Whose bowl will you carry?"
Pucchāsabhāgena hi ‘‘tumhākaṃ santikaṃ āgato, tumhākaṃ pattaṃ harissāmī’’ti vadeyya, tato so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi jigucchanīyo assa. ‘‘Kuhiṃ gacchasi, kiṃ karonto āhiṇḍasī’’ti pana vutte ‘‘tassa pattatthāya āgatomhī’’ti vadantassa paṭipāṭiyā bhattaṭṭhitikāya gāhetvā patto dātabbo. ‘‘Bhattāharaṇakapattaṃ dethā’’ti vuttepi paṭipāṭiyā bhattaṭṭhitikāya eva dātabbo. Sace āharitvā ‘‘sabbo saṅgho bhuñjatū’’ti vadati, bhājetvā bhuñjitabbaṃ. Pattasāmikassa atikkantampi ṭhitikaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ paṭipāṭibhattaṃ gāhetabbaṃ.
For by asking he might say, "I have come to you, I will carry your bowl," then that monk would be despised by the monks. But when asked, "Where are you going, what are you wandering around doing?" and he says, "I have come for his bowl," the bowl should be given having accepted it according to the meal arrangement in turn. When it is said, "Give the bowl for bringing the meal," it should also be given according to the meal arrangement in turn. If, having brought (the food), he says, "Let the whole Saṅgha partake," it should be divided and partaken of. Even if the bowl owner has passed, having kept the arrangement, another meal should be accepted in turn.
Eko pātiyā bhattaṃ āharitvā ‘‘saṅghassa dammī’’ti vadati, ālopabhattaṭṭhitikato paṭṭhāya ālopasaṅkhepena bhājetabbaṃ. Sace pana tuṇhībhūto acchati, ‘‘kassa te ābhataṃ, kassa dātukāmosī’’ti na vattabbo. Sace pana ‘‘kuhiṃ gacchasi, kiṃ karonto āhiṇḍasī’’ti vutte ‘‘saṅghassa me bhattaṃ ābhataṃ, therānaṃ me bhattaṃ ābhata’’nti vadati, gahetvā ālopabhattaṭṭhitikāya bhājetabbaṃ. Sace pana evaṃ ābhataṃ bahuṃ hoti, sakalassa saṅghassa bahu hoti, abhihaṭabhikkhā nāma piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭati, ṭhitikāpucchanakiccaṃ natthi, therāsanato paṭṭhāya pattaṃ pūretvā dātabbaṃ.
If one brings a meal in a pot and says, "I give (this) to the Saṅgha," it should be divided starting from the āḷopa-meal arrangement, dividing by the āḷopa count. But if he remains silent, he should not be asked, "For whom is this brought, to whom do you wish to give it?" But if, when asked, "Where are you going, what are you wandering around doing?" he says, "I have brought a meal for the Saṅgha, I have brought a meal for the elders," it should be taken and divided according to the āḷopa-meal arrangement. If, however, what is brought is much, it is much for the entire Saṅgha, the alms brought is called abhihaṭabhikkhā and is suitable even for piṇḍapātikas, there is no need to ask about the arrangement, and the bowl should be filled and given starting from the elder's seat.
Upāsako saṅghattherassa vā ganthadhutaṅgavasena abhiññātassa vā bhattuddesakassa vā pahiṇāti ‘‘amhākaṃ bhattagahaṇatthāya aṭṭha bhikkhū gahetvā āgacchathā’’ti, sacepi ñātiupaṭṭhākehi pesitaṃ hoti, ime tayo janā pucchituṃ na labhanti, āruḷhāyeva mātikaṃ, saṅghato aṭṭha bhikkhū uddisāpetvā attanavamehi gantabbaṃ. Kasmā? Bhikkhusaṅghassa hi ete bhikkhū nissāya lābho uppajjatīti. Ganthadhutaṅgādīhi pana anabhiññāto āvāsikabhikkhu pucchituṃ labhati, tasmā tena ‘‘kiṃ saṅghato gaṇhāmi, udāhu ye jānāmi, tehi saddhiṃ āgacchāmī’’ti mātikaṃ āropetvā yathā dāyakā vadanti, tathā paṭipajjitabbaṃ. ‘‘Tumhākaṃ nissitake vā ye vā jānātha, te gahetvā ethā’’ti vutte pana ye icchanti, tehi saddhiṃ gantuṃ labhati. Sace ‘‘aṭṭha bhikkhū pahiṇathā’’ti pesenti, saṅghatova pesetabbā. Attanā sace aññasmiṃ gāme sakkā hoti bhikkhā labhituṃ, añño gāmo gantabbo. Na sakkā ce hoti labhituṃ, soyeva gāmo piṇḍāya pavisitabbo.
A lay devotee sends to the Saṅgha elder, or to one known for ascetic practice, or to the meal allocator, saying, "Having taken eight monks, come for our meal acceptance," even if it is sent by relatives and supporters, these three people are not allowed to ask, they should just establish the heading, have eight monks designated from the Saṅgha, and go with themselves as the ninth. Why? Because gain arises for the Saṅgha of monks relying on these monks. But a resident monk unknown to the one with ascetic practice etc. is allowed to ask, therefore he, having raised the heading, "Shall I take from the Saṅgha, or shall I come with those whom I know?" should proceed as the donors say. But when it is said, "Take those who are dependent on you or those whom you know and come," he is allowed to go with those who wish to go. If they send, "Send eight monks," they should be sent from the Saṅgha itself. If one is able to obtain alms in another village, another village should be gone to. If it is not possible to obtain (alms), that same village should be entered for alms.
Nimantitabhikkhū āsanasālāya nisinnā honti, tatra ce manussā ‘‘patte dethā’’ti āgacchanti, animantitehi na dātabbā. ‘‘Ete nimantitabhikkhū’’ti vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Tumhepi dethā’’ti vutte pana dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Ussavādīsu manussā sayameva pariveṇāni ca padhānagharāni ca gantvā tipiṭake ca dhammakathike ca bhikkhusatenapi saddhiṃ nimantenti. Tadā yepi jānanti, te gahetvā gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Kasmā? Na hi mahābhikkhusaṅghena atthikā manussā pariveṇāni ca padhānagharāni gacchanti, sannipātaṭṭhānatova yathāsatti yathābalaṃ bhikkhū gaṇhitvā gacchantīti.
Invited monks are sitting in the assembly hall, if there people come saying, "Give the bowls," they should not be given by the uninvited. It should be said, "These are invited monks." But if they say, "You also give," it is suitable to give. During festivals etc., people themselves go to the residences and meditation halls and invite even with a hundred monks who are versed in the Tipiṭaka and those who preach Dhamma. Then it is suitable to go taking even those who know. Why? People who need a large Saṅgha of monks do not go to the residences and meditation halls, they take monks from the assembly place according to their ability and strength and go.
Sace pana saṅghatthero vā ganthadhutaṅgavasena abhiññātako vā bhattuddesako vā aññatra vā vassaṃ vasitvā katthaci vā gantvā puna sakaṭṭhānaṃ āgacchanti, manussā ca āgantukassa sakkāraṃ karonti, ekavāraṃ ye jānanti, te gahetvā gantabbaṃ. Paṭibaddhakālato pana paṭṭhāya dutiyavāre āraddhe saṅghatoyeva gahetvā gantabbaṃ. Abhinavaāgantukāva hutvā ñātī vā upaṭṭhāke vā passissāmāti gacchanti, tatra tesaṃ ñātī ca upaṭṭhākā ca sakkāraṃ karonti. Ettha pana ye jānanti, te gahetvā gantuṃ vaṭṭati.
If the Saṅgha elder, or one known for ascetic practice, or the meal allocator, or another, having spent the rains elsewhere or having gone somewhere, return to their own place, and people make offerings to the newcomer, one should go taking those who know the first time. But from the time the second occasion is started after the fixed time, one should go having taken (monks) from the Saṅgha itself. Being a brand new newcomer, they go thinking, "I will see relatives or supporters," there their relatives and supporters make offerings. Here, however, it is suitable to go taking those who know.
Yo pana atilābhī hoti, sakaṭṭhānañca āgantukaṭṭhānañca ekasadisaṃ, sabbattha manussā saṅghabhattaṃ sajjetvāva nisīdanti, tena saṅghatova gahetvā gantabbanti ayaṃ nimantane viseso. Avaseso sabbapañho uddesabhatte vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘aṭṭha mahāthere dethā’’ti vutte ‘‘aṭṭha mahātherāva dātabbā’’ti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo majjhimādīsu. Sace pana avisesetvā ‘‘aṭṭha bhikkhū dethā’’ti vadati, saṅghato dātabbā.
But one who has much gain, his own place and the newcomer's place are the same, everywhere people sit having prepared a Saṅgha meal, he should go having taken (monks) from the Saṅgha itself, this is the distinction in invitation. The remaining all questions should be understood in the same manner as described for uddesa-bhutta. In the Kurundi, however, it is said, "When it is said, 'Give eight great elders,' only eight great elders should be given." This method (is for) the middle etc. But if, without specifying, he says, "Give eight monks," they should be given from the Saṅgha.
Nimantanabhattakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Discourse on Invitation-meal is concluded.
Salākabhattakathā
The Discourse on Ticket-meal
Salākabhattepana ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, salākāya vā paṭṭikāya vā upanibandhitvā opuñjitvā uddisitu’’nti vacanato rukkhasāramayāya salākāya vā veḷuvilīvatālapaṇṇādimayāya paṭṭikāya vā ‘‘asukassa nāma salākabhatta’’nti evaṃ akkharāni upanibandhitvā pacchiyaṃ vā cīvarabhoge vā katvā sabbā salākāyo opuñjitvā punappunaṃ heṭṭhuparivaseneva āloḷetvā pañcaṅgasamannāgatena bhattuddesakena sace ṭhitikā atthi, ṭhitikato paṭṭhāya; no ce atthi, therāsanato paṭṭhāya salākā dātabbā. Pacchā āgatānampi ekābaddhavasena dūre ṭhitānampi uddesabhatte vuttanayeneva dātabbā.
In the ticket-meal, however, "I allow, monks, to designate by writing on a ticket or a slip, and drawing (it) out," from that saying, having written letters such as "Ticket-meal of so-and-so" on a ticket made of heartwood or on a slip made of bamboo strips, reeds, palm leaves, etc., having put (them) in a basket or a robe bag, having mixed all the tickets, stirring (them) again and again only from the bottom and top, a meal allocator endowed with five qualities should give the tickets starting from the established custom, if there is an established custom; if not, starting from the seat of the elders. To those who have come later and to those standing far away as a single group, they should be given in the same manner as described for uddesa-bhutta.
Sace vihārassa samantato bahū gocaragāmā, bhikkhū pana na bahukā, gāmavasenapi salākāyo pāpuṇanti, ‘‘tumhākaṃ asukagāme salākabhattaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti gāmavaseneva gāhetabbā. Evaṃ gāhentena sacepi ekekasmiṃ gāme nānappakārāni saṭṭhisalākabhattāni, sabbāni gāhitāneva honti, tassa pattagāmasamīpe aññānipi dve tīṇi salākabhattāni honti, tānipi tasseva dātabbāni. Na hi sakkā tesaṃ kāraṇā aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ pahiṇitunti.
If a monastery has many surrounding alms villages, but there are not many monks, they receive tickets according to the village, they should be accepted according to the village, "Your ticket-meal comes in such-and-such a village." When accepting in this way, even if there are various kinds of sixty ticket-meals in each village, all are accepted, near that alms village of his, there are another two or three ticket-meals, those should also be given to him. For it is not possible to send another monk for their sake.
Sace ekaccesu gāmesu bahūni salākabhattāni sallakkhetvā sattannampi aṭṭhannampi bhikkhūnaṃ dātabbāni. Dadantena pana catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ bhattānaṃ salākāyo ekato bandhitvā dātabbā. Sace taṃ gāmaṃ atikkamitvā añño gāmo hoti, tasmiñca ekameva salākabhattaṃ, taṃ pana pātova denti, tampi etesu bhikkhūsu ekassa niggahena datvā ‘‘pātova taṃ gahetvā pacchā orimagāme itarāni bhattāni gaṇhāhī’’ti vattabbo. Sace orimagāme salākabhattesu agāhitesveva gāhitasaññāya gacchati, parabhāgagāme salākabhattaṃ gāhetvā puna vihāraṃ āgantvā itarāni gāhetvā orimagāmo gantabbo. ‘‘Na hi bahisīmāya saṅghalābho gāhetuṃ labbhatī’’ti ayaṃ nayo kurundiyaṃ vutto.
If, having noted that there are many ticket-meals in some villages, they should be given to seven or eight monks. When giving, the tickets for four or five meals should be tied together and given. If, having passed that village, there is another village, and in that (village) there is only one ticket-meal, but they give (it) early in the morning, having given even that to one of these monks by favor, he should be told, "Having taken that early in the morning, afterwards take the other meals in the inner village." If, without accepting the ticket-meals in the inner village, he goes with the idea that they are accepted, having accepted the ticket-meal in the outer village, he should return to the monastery and having accepted the other (meals), the inner village should be gone to. "For Saṅgha gain cannot be accepted outside the boundary," this is the method said in the Kurundi.
Sace pana bhikkhū bahū honti, gāmavasena salākā na pāpuṇanti, vīthivasena vā vīthiyaṃ ekagehavasena vā kulavasena vā gāhetabbā. Vīthiādīsu ca yattha bahūni bhattāni, tattha gāme vuttanayeneva bahūnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ gāhetabbāni. Salākāsu asati uddisitvāpi gāhetabbāni.
If, however, there are many monks, tickets are not received according to the village, they should be accepted according to the street, or according to one house in a street, or according to the family. In the streets etc. also, where there are many meals, they should be accepted for many monks in the same manner as described in the village. When tickets are not available, they should be accepted having designated (the recipient).
Salākadāyakena pana vattaṃ jānitabbaṃ. Tena hi kālasseva vuṭṭhāya pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā bhojanasālaṃ gantvā asammaṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ sammajjitvā pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā ‘‘idāni bhikkhūhi vattaṃ kataṃ bhavissatī’’ti kālaṃ sallakkhetvā ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā bhikkhūsu sannipatitesu paṭhamameva vāragāme salākabhattaṃ gāhetabbaṃ. ‘‘Tuyhaṃ asukasmiṃ nāma vāragāme salākā pāpuṇāti tatra gacchā’’ti vattabbaṃ.
The ticket-giver, however, should know the duties. For he, having risen early in the morning, having taken the bowl and robe, having gone to the dining hall, having swept the unswept place, having provided drinking water and water for use, having noted the time when "the duties will now be done by the monks," having struck the gong, when the monks have assembled, the ticket-meal should be accepted in the village on duty first. It should be said, "Your ticket comes in such-and-such a duty village, go there."
Sace atirekagāvute gāmo hoti, taṃ divasaṃ gacchantā kilamanti, ‘‘sve tuyhaṃ vāragāme pāpuṇātī’’ti ajjeva gāhetabbaṃ. Yo vāragāmaṃ pesiyamāno na gacchati, aññaṃ salākaṃ maggati, na dātabbā. Saddhānañhi manussānaṃ puññahāni saṅghassa ca lābhacchedo hoti, tasmā tassa dutiyepi tatiyepi divase aññā salākā na dātabbā, ‘‘attano pattaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā bhuñjāhī’’ti vattabbo, tīṇi pana divasāni agacchantassa vāragāmato orimavāragāme salākā gāhetabbā. Tañce na gaṇhāti, tato paṭṭhāya tassa aññaṃ salākaṃ dātuṃ na vaṭṭati, daṇḍakammaṃ pana gāḷhaṃ kātabbaṃ, saṭṭhito vā paṇṇāsato vā na parihāpetabbaṃ. Vāragāme gāhetvā vihāravāro gāhetabbo, ‘‘tuyhaṃ vihāravāro pāpuṇātī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Vihāravārikassa dve tisso yāgusalākāyo tisso catasso vā bhattasalākāyo ca dātabbā, nibaddhaṃ katvā pana na dātabbā. Yāgubhattadāyakā hi ‘‘amhākaṃ yāgubhattaṃ vihāragopakāva bhuñjantī’’ti aññathattaṃ āpajjeyyuṃ, tasmā aññesu kulesu dātabbā.
If the village is more than an additional league away, they become tired going that day, it should be accepted even today, "Tomorrow your duty village comes." One who is being sent to the duty village and does not go, seeks another ticket, it should not be given. For there is loss of merit for faithful people, and a break in gain for the Saṅgha, therefore, another ticket should not be given to him even on the second or third day, he should be told, "Go and eat at your own bowl place," if he does not go for three days, the ticket should be accepted for the village on duty closer than the duty village. If he does not accept that, from then on it is not suitable to give him another ticket, but strong punishment should be done, it should not be reduced from sixty or fifty. Having accepted (a ticket) in the duty village, the monastery turn should be accepted, it should be said, "Your monastery turn comes." Two or three porridge tickets and three or four meal tickets should be given to the one on monastery duty, but they should not be given having made it permanent. For the porridge and meal givers would become different (displeased), "Only the monastery attendants eat our porridge and meal," therefore they should be given to other families.
Sace vihāravārikānaṃ sabhāgā āharitvā denti, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ; no ce, vāraṃ gāhetvā tesaṃ yāgubhattaṃ āharāpetabbaṃ. Tāva nesaṃ salākā phātikammameva bhavanti, vassaggena pattaṭṭhāne pana aññampi paṇītabhattasalākaṃ gaṇhituṃ labhantiyeva. Atirekauttaribhaṅgassa ekacārikabhattassa visuṃ ṭhitikaṃ katvā salākā dātabbā.
If they bring and give a share to the monastery attendants, that is skillful; if not, having accepted a turn, their porridge and meal should be brought. To that extent, the tickets are just a convenience for them, but with the rains group at the bowl place, they are indeed allowed to accept another choice meal ticket. Having made a separate arrangement for an occasional, extra, special meal, a ticket should be given.
Sace yena salākā laddhā, so taṃdivasaṃ taṃ bhattaṃ na labhati, punadivase gāhetabbaṃ. Bhattameva labhati, na uttaribhaṅgaṃ; evampi puna gāhetabbaṃ. Khīrabhattassa salākāyapi eseva nayo. Sace pana khīrameva labhati, na bhattaṃ; khīralābhato paṭṭhāya puna na gāhetabbaṃ. Dve tīṇi ekacārikabhattāni ekasseva pāpuṇanti, dubbhikkhasamaye saṅghanavakena laddhakāle vijaṭetvā visuṃ gāhetabbāni, pākatikasalākabhattaṃ aladdhassāpi punadivase gāhetabbaṃ.
If someone receives a ticket (salākā), they do not receive that meal on that day; it should be taken on the following day. They only receive the meal, not extra portions; even in this case, it should be taken again later. The same method applies to a milk-rice meal ticket (khīrabhattassa salākā). But if they receive only milk, not the meal, they should not take another ticket after receiving the milk. If two or three single-portion walking-for-alms meals (ekacārikabhattāni) fall to one person, in times of famine, they should be separated and taken individually when acquired by a saṅghanavaka (a group providing for the Saṅgha); even if a regular ticket-meal (pākatikasalākabhattaṃ) is not received, it should be taken on the following day.
Sace khuddako vihāro hoti, sabbe bhikkhū ekasambhogā, ucchusalākaṃ gāhentena yassa kassaci sammukhībhūtassa pāpetvā mahātherādīnaṃ divā tacchetvā dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Rasasalākaṃ pāpetvā pacchābhattaṃ parissāvetvā vā phāṇitaṃ vā kāretvā piṇḍapātikādīnampi dātabbaṃ. Āgantukānaṃ āgatānāgatabhāvaṃ ñatvā gāhetabbā, mahāāvāse ṭhitikaṃ katvā gāhetabbā.
If there is a small monastery and all the bhikkhus share the same resources (ekasambhogā), when drawing lots for sugarcane (ucchusalākaṃ), it is permissible to give it to whomever is present and to have the senior monks and others cut it during the day to distribute. After distributing the molasses ticket (rasasalākaṃ), it is permissible to strain the juice after the meal or to make molasses (phāṇitaṃ) and give it to those who depend on alms rounds (piṇḍapātikādīnampi). For newcomers (āgantukānaṃ), tickets should be drawn after knowing whether they have arrived or not. In a large monastery (mahāāvāse), tickets should be drawn after establishing a fixed procedure (ṭhitikaṃ katvā).
Takkasalākampi sabhāgaṭṭhāne pāpetvā vā pacāpetvā vā dhūmāpetvā vā therānaṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Mahāāvāse vuttanayeneva paṭipajjitabbaṃ phalasalākapūvasalākabhesajjagandhamālasalākāyopi visuṃ ṭhitikāya gāhetabbā. Bhesajjādisalākāyo cettha kiñcāpi piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭanti, salākavasena gāhitattā pana na sāditabbā. Aggabhikkhāmattaṃ salākabhattaṃ denti, ṭhitikaṃ pucchitvā gāhetabbaṃ. Asatiyā ṭhitikāya therāsanato paṭṭhāya gāhetabbaṃ. Sace tādisāni bhattāni bahūni honti, ekekassa bhikkhuno dve tīṇi dātabbāni; no ce, ekekameva datvā paṭipāṭiyā gatāya puna therāsanato paṭṭhāya dātabbaṃ. Sace antarāva upacchijjati, ṭhitikā sallakkhetabbā. Yadi pana tādisaṃ bhattaṃ nibaddhameva hoti, yassa pāpuṇāti, so vattabbo ‘‘laddhā vā aladdhā vā svepi gaṇheyyāsī’’ti. Ekaṃ anibaddhaṃ hoti, labhanadivase pana yāvadatthaṃ labhati, alabhanadivasā bahutarā honti, taṃ yassa pāpuṇāti, so alabhitvā ‘‘sve gaṇheyyāsī’’ti vattabbo.
A sour gruel ticket (takkasalākampi) can be given to the elders (therānaṃ) by delivering it to the common area (sabhāgaṭṭhāne), cooking it, or smoking it. In a large monastery, one should proceed in the same manner as stated above. Tickets for fruit (phalasalāka), cakes (pūvasalākā), medicine (bhesajja), perfume, and flowers (gandhamālasalākā) should also be drawn according to a separate fixed procedure (visuṃ ṭhitikāya). Although tickets for medicine and other items are also suitable for alms-goers (piṇḍapātikānampi), they should not be accepted due to being received through the drawing of lots (salākavasena). They give only a small portion of rice (aggabhikkhāmattaṃ) as a ticket-meal (salākabhattaṃ); it should be taken after inquiring about the fixed procedure (ṭhitikaṃ pucchitvā). If there is no fixed procedure, it should be taken starting from the seat of the elders (therāsanato paṭṭhāya). If there are many such meals, two or three should be given to each bhikkhu; if not, give only one to each, and after going through the order, give again, starting from the seat of the elders. If it is interrupted in between, the fixed procedure should be noted. But if such a meal is consistently available, the person who receives it should be told, "Whether you receive it or not, you should take it tomorrow as well." If one is not consistently available, but on the day of receiving, one receives as much as one needs, but the days of not receiving are more numerous, the one who receives it should be told, "Take it tomorrow" if they do not receive it.
Yo salākāsu gāhitāsu pacchā āgacchati, tassa atikkantāva salākā na upaṭṭhāpetvā dātabbā. Salākaṃ nāma ghaṇṭippaharaṇato paṭṭhāya āgantvā hatthaṃ pasārentova labhati. Aññassa āgantvā samīpe ṭhitassāpi atikkantā atikkantāva hoti. Sace panassa añño gaṇhanto atthi, sayaṃ anāgatopi labhati. Sabhāgaṭṭhāne asuko anāgatoti ñatvā ‘‘ayaṃ tassa salākā’’ti ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace ‘‘anāgatassa na dātabbā’’ti katikaṃ karonti, adhammikā hoti. Antoupacāre ṭhitassa hi bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṃ pāpuṇāti. Sace pana ‘‘anāgatassa dethā’’ti mahāsaddaṃ karonti, daṇḍakammaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ, ‘‘āgantvā gaṇhantū’’ti vattabbaṃ.
If someone arrives after the tickets have been drawn, the ticket is already past and should not be brought and given to them. The ticket is received only by coming and extending one's hand after the sounding of the bell (ghaṇṭippaharaṇato paṭṭhāya). Even for someone else who comes and stands nearby, it is considered past once it is past. But if someone else is taking it on their behalf, they receive it even if they are not present themselves. In the common area (sabhāgaṭṭhāne), knowing that so-and-so is absent, it is permissible to set it aside, saying, "This is their ticket." If they make an agreement that "it should not be given to the absent," it is unrighteous (adhammikā). For someone standing within the boundary of the residence (antoupacāre), shareable items (bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṃ) are due. But if they make a loud noise saying, "Give it to the absent," a penalty (daṇḍakammaṃ) should be imposed, and they should be told, "Let them come and take it."
Chappañcasalākā naṭṭhā honti, bhattuddesako dāyakānaṃ nāmaṃ nassarati, so ce naṭṭhasalākā mahātherassa vā attano vā pāpetvā bhikkhū vadeyya, ‘‘mayā asukagāme salākabhattaṃ mayhaṃ pāpitaṃ, tumhe tattha laddhaṃ salākabhattaṃ bhuñjeyyāthā’’ti, vaṭṭati. Vihāre apāpitaṃ pana āsanasālāya taṃ bhattaṃ labhitvā tattheva pāpetvā bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Ajja paṭṭhāya mayhaṃ salākabhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte tatra āsanasālāya gāhetuṃ na vaṭṭati, vihāraṃ ānetvā gāhetabbaṃ. ‘‘Sve paṭṭhāyā’’ti vutte pana bhattuddesakassa ācikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘sve paṭṭhāya asukakulaṃ nāma salākabhattaṃ deti, salākaggāhaṇakāle sareyyāsī’’ti. Dubbhikkhe salākabhattaṃ pacchinditvā subhikkhe jāte kiñci disvā ‘‘ajja paṭṭhāya amhākaṃ salākabhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti puna paṭṭhapenti, antogāme agāhetvā vihāraṃ ānetvāva gāhetabbaṃ. Idañhi ‘‘salākabhattaṃ’’ nāma. Uddesabhattasadisaṃ na hoti, vihārameva sandhāya diyyati, tasmā bahiupacāre gāhetuṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Sve paṭṭhāyā’’ti vutte pana vihāre gāhetabbameva.
Five or six tickets are lost, and the meal distributor (bhattuddesako) forgets the names of the donors; if that lost ticket is given to the senior monk (mahātherassa) or to himself, and he tells the bhikkhus, "A ticket-meal (salākabhattaṃ) was given to me in such-and-such village; you should eat the ticket-meal received there," it is permissible. But it is not permissible to receive that meal in the assembly hall (āsanasālāya) without it having been brought to the monastery (vihāre apāpitaṃ) and then eat it there. If it is said, "Starting today, take my ticket-meal," it is not permissible to take it there in the assembly hall; it must be brought to the monastery and taken. But if it is said, "Starting tomorrow," the meal distributor should be informed, "Starting tomorrow, the family named so-and-so is giving a ticket-meal; you should remember during the ticket-taking time." In a famine, after stopping the ticket-meal and when prosperity returns, seeing something good, they re-establish it, saying, "Starting today, take our ticket-meal"; it should be brought to the monastery and then taken, not taken inside the village (antogāme agāhetvā). This is called a "ticket-meal" (salākabhattaṃ). It is not like a meal specifically designated (uddesabhattasadisaṃ), it is given specifically with the monastery in mind (vihārameva sandhāya diyyati), therefore it is not permissible to take it outside the inner boundary (bahiupacāre gāhetuṃ). But if it is said, "Starting tomorrow," it must be taken in the monastery.
Gamiko bhikkhu yaṃ disābhāgaṃ gantukāmo, tattha aññena vāragāmasalākā laddhā hoti, taṃ gahetvā itaraṃ bhikkhuṃ ‘‘mayhaṃ pattasalākaṃ tvaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti vatvā gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Tena pana upacārasīmaṃ anatikkanteyeva tasmiṃ tassa salākā gāhetabbā.
A traveling bhikkhu (gamiko) wishes to go in a certain direction, and a village-turn ticket (vāragāmasalākā) has been received by another in that direction; it is permissible to take that, and tell the other bhikkhu, "You take my bowl-ticket" (pattasalākaṃ), and go. However, the ticket for that person must be taken within the boundary of the residence (upacārasīmaṃ anatikkanteyeva).
Chaḍḍitavihāre manussā bodhicetiyādīni jaggitvā bhuñjantūti salākabhattaṃ paṭṭhapenti, bhikkhū sakaṭṭhānesu vasitvā kālasseva gantvā tattha vattaṃ karitvā taṃ bhattaṃ bhuñjanti, vaṭṭati. Sace tesu svātanāya attano pāpetvā gatesu āgantuko bhikkhu chaḍḍitavihāre vasitvā kālasseva vattaṃ katvā ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā salākabhattaṃ attano pāpetvā āsanasālaṃ gacchati, sova tassa bhattassa issaro. Yo pana bhikkhūsu vattaṃ karontesuyeva bhūmiyaṃ dve tayo sammuñjanippahāre datvā ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā ‘‘dhuragāme salākabhattaṃ mayhaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti gacchati, tassa taṃ corikāya gahitattā na pāpuṇāti, vattaṃ katvā pāpetvā pacchā gatabhikkhūnaṃyeva hoti.
In an abandoned monastery (chaḍḍitavihāre), people establish a ticket-meal (salākabhattaṃ) so that the bhikkhus can care for the Bodhi tree and shrines and eat; it is permissible for the bhikkhus to reside in their own places, go there early, perform their duties (vattaṃ karitvā), and eat that meal. If, after they have been given the ticket and have gone for the following day, a newcomer bhikkhu (āgantuko) resides in the abandoned monastery, performs the duties early, rings the bell (ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā), receives the ticket-meal himself, and goes to the assembly hall (āsanasālaṃ), he is the owner of that meal. But if, while the bhikkhus are performing their duties (vattaṃ karontesuyeva), someone gives two or three sweeps of the broom on the ground, rings the bell, and goes, saying, "The ticket-meal in Dhuragāma falls to me," that does not fall to them because it was taken by theft (corikāya gahitattā); it belongs to the bhikkhus who performed the duties, received the ticket, and went later.
Eko gāmo atidūre hoti, bhikkhū niccaṃ gantuṃ na icchanti, manussā ‘‘mayaṃ puññena paribāhirā homā’’ti vadanti, ye tassa gāmassa āsannavihāre sabhāgabhikkhū, te vattabbā ‘‘imesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ anāgatadivase tumhe bhuñjathā’’ti. Salākā pana devasikaṃ pāpetabbā, tā ca kho pana ghaṇṭippaharaṇamattena vā pacchicālanamattena vā pāpitā na honti, pacchiṃ pana gahetvā salākā pīṭhake ākiritabbā, pacchi pana mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ na gahetabbā. Sace hi tattha ahi vā vicchiko vā bhaveyya, dukkhaṃ uppādeyya; tasmā heṭṭhā gahetvā pacchiṃ parammukhaṃ katvā salākā ākiritabbā ‘‘sacepi sappo bhavissati, ettova palāyissatī’’ti. Evaṃ salākā ākiritvā gāmādivasena pubbe vuttanayeneva gāhetabbā. Apica ekaṃ mahātherassa pāpetvā ‘‘avasesā mayhaṃ pāpuṇantī’’ti attano pāpetvā vattaṃ katvā cetiyaṃ vanditvā vitakkamāḷake ṭhitehi bhikkhūhi ‘‘pāpitā, āvuso, salākā’’ti vutte ‘‘āma, bhante, tumhe gatagatagāme salākabhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vattabbaṃ; evaṃ pāpitāpi hi supāpitāva honti.
One village is very far away, and the bhikkhus do not want to go regularly; people say, "We will be excluded from merit" (puññena paribāhirā homā); those bhikkhus who are in a monastery near that village should be told, "You should eat on behalf of these bhikkhus on a future day." However, tickets must be given daily, and they are not considered given merely by the ringing of the bell (ghaṇṭippaharaṇamattena) or by the shaking of the basket (pacchicālanamattena); the basket (pacchiṃ) should be taken and the tickets scattered on a seat (pīṭhake ākiritabbā), but the basket should not be held at the mouth's edge (mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ). For if there were a snake or scorpion there, it would cause suffering; therefore, holding the basket from below, turning the opening away (parammukhaṃ katvā), the tickets should be scattered, thinking, "Even if there is a snake, it will flee from here." Having scattered the tickets in this way, they should be taken according to the villages, in the manner previously stated. Furthermore, after giving one to the senior monk (mahātherassa), and giving the rest to oneself, saying, "The rest fall to me," and after performing the duties, venerating the shrine (cetiyaṃ vanditvā), when the bhikkhus standing in the cloister (vitakkamāḷake) say, "The tickets have been given, friend" (pāpitā, āvuso, salākā), one should say, "Yes, venerable ones, you take the ticket-meal in the villages you go to" (tumhe gatagatagāme salākabhattaṃ gaṇhathā); even given in this way, they are well given (supāpitāva honti).
Bhikkhū sabbarattiṃ dhammasavanatthaṃ aññaṃ vihāraṃ gacchantā ‘‘mayaṃ tattha dānaṃ aggahetvāva amhākaṃ gocaragāmeva piṇḍāya caritvā āgamissāmā’’ti salākā aggahetvāva gatā, vihāre therassa pattasalākabhattaṃ bhuñjituṃ āgacchanti, vaṭṭati. Atha mahātheropi ‘‘ahaṃ idha kiṃ karomī’’ti tehiyeva saddhiṃ gacchati, tehi gatavihāre abhuñjitvāva gocaragāmaṃ anuppattehi ‘‘detha, bhante, patte salākayāguādīni āharissāmā’’ti vutte pattā na dātabbā. ‘‘Kasmā, bhante, na dethā’’ti ‘‘vihāraṭṭhakaṃ bhattaṃ vihāre vutthānaṃ pāpuṇāti, mayaṃ aññasmiṃ vihāre vutthā’’ti. ‘‘Detha, bhante, na mayaṃ vihāre pālikāya dema, tumhākaṃ dema, gaṇhatha amhākaṃ bhikkha’’nti vutte pana vaṭṭati.
Bhikkhus going to another monastery for the purpose of hearing the Dhamma (dhammasavanatthaṃ) all night, without taking tickets (salākā aggahetvāva), thinking, "We will go on alms round (piṇḍāya caritvā) in our own customary village (gocaragāmeva) without taking any donations there," and then come to the monastery to eat the bowl-ticket-meal (pattasalākabhattaṃ) of the elder (therassa), it is permissible. Then, even the senior monk (mahātheropi), thinking, "What am I doing here?" (ahaṃ idha kiṃ karomī), goes with them; when they arrive at their customary village without eating in the monastery they went to, and they say, "Give us the bowls, venerable one; we will bring ticket-gruel (salākayāguādīni āharissāmā)," the bowls should not be given. "Why don't you give them, venerable one?" (Kasmā, bhante, na dethā) "The meal belonging to the monastery (vihāraṭṭhakaṃ bhattaṃ) belongs to those residing in the monastery (vihāre vutthānaṃ), we are residing in another monastery" (mayaṃ aññasmiṃ vihāre vutthā). But if they say, "Give it, venerable one; we are not giving it to the monastery fund (vihāre pālikāya dema), we are giving it to you; take our alms" (gaṇhatha amhākaṃ bhikkha), then it is permissible.
Salākabhattakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Discourse on Ticket-Meals is Concluded.
Pakkhikabhattādikathā
Discourse on Fortnightly Meals, etc.
pakkhikaṃnāma. Taṃ salākabhattagatikameva hoti, gāhetvā bhuñjitabbaṃ. Sace salākabhattampi pakkhikabhattampi bahu sabbesaṃ vinivijjhitvā gacchati, dvepi bhattāni visuṃ visuṃ gāhetabbāni. Sace bhikkhusaṅgho mahā, pakkhikaṃ gāhetvā tassa ṭhitikāya salākabhattaṃ gāhetabbaṃ, salākabhattaṃ vā gāhāpetvā tassa ṭhitikāya pakkhikaṃ gāhetabbaṃ. Yesaṃ na pāpuṇāti, te piṇḍāya carissanti. Sace dvepi bhattāni bahūni, bhikkhū mandā; salākabhattaṃ nāma devasikaṃ labbhati, tasmā taṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘pakkhikaṃ āvuso bhuñjathā’’ti pakkhikameva gāhetabbaṃ. Pakkhikaṃ paṇītaṃ denti, visuṃ ṭhitikā kātabbā. ‘‘Sve pakkho’’ti ajja pakkhikaṃ na gāhetabbaṃ. Sace pana dāyakā vadanti ‘‘sve amhākaṃ ghare lūkhabhattaṃ bhavissati, ajjeva pakkhikabhattaṃ uddisathā’’ti, evaṃ vaṭṭati.
Fortnightly (pakkhikaṃ): This follows the same procedure as the ticket-meal (salākabhattagatikameva); it should be taken and eaten. If both the ticket-meal and the fortnightly meal are plentiful and cover everyone, both meals should be taken separately (visuṃ visuṃ gāhetabbāni). If the bhikkhu Saṅgha is large, the fortnightly meal should be taken first, according to its fixed procedure (ṭhitikāya), and then the ticket-meal should be taken; or the ticket-meal should be taken first, and then the fortnightly meal should be taken according to its fixed procedure. Those who do not receive will go on alms round (piṇḍāya carissanti). If both meals are plentiful, but the bhikkhus are few; the ticket-meal (salākabhattaṃ) is usually available daily, therefore, keeping that aside, only the fortnightly meal should be taken, saying, "Eat the fortnightly meal, friends" (pakkhikameva gāhetabbaṃ). They give excellent fortnightly meals; a separate fixed procedure (visuṃ ṭhitikā) should be established. The fortnightly meal should not be taken today, thinking, "Tomorrow is the fortnight" (sve pakkho). But if the donors say, "Tomorrow there will be plain meals (lūkhabhattaṃ) in our house; designate the fortnightly meal today itself," this is permissible (evaṃ vaṭṭati).
Uposathikaṃnāma anvaḍḍhamāse uposathaṅgāni samādiyitvā yaṃ attanā bhuñjati, tadeva diyyati.Pāṭipadikaṃnāma ‘‘uposathe bahū saddhā pasannā bhikkhūnaṃ sakkāraṃ karonti, pāṭipade pana bhikkhū kilamanti, pāṭipade dinnaṃ dubbhikkhadānasadisaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti, uposathakammena vā parisuddhasīlānaṃ dutiyadivase dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ hotī’’ti sallakkhetvā pāṭipade diyyanakadānaṃ, tampi ubhayaṃ salākabhattagatikameva. Iti imāni sattapi bhattāni piṇḍapātikānaṃ na vaṭṭanti, dhutaṅgabhedaṃ karontiyeva.
Uposatha Meal (uposathikaṃ): This refers to what is given personally, which one eats oneself after undertaking the Uposatha observances (uposathaṅgāni samādiyitvā) every half-month. Pāṭipada Meal (pāṭipadikaṃ): This refers to the donation given on the day after the Uposatha, considering that "on the Uposatha, many faithful and devoted people honor the bhikkhus, but on the day after the Uposatha (pāṭipade), the bhikkhus are tired; what is given on the day after the Uposatha is like a donation given during a famine and is of great fruit; what is given on the second day to those whose sīla is purified by the Uposatha observance (uposathakammena vā parisuddhasīlānaṃ dutiyadivase dinnaṃ) is of great fruit." Both of these also follow the same procedure as the ticket-meal (salākabhattagatikameva). Thus, all seven of these meals are not permissible for those who depend on alms rounds (piṇḍapātikānaṃ na vaṭṭanti), as it would break the dhutaṅga practice.
‘‘āgantukabhattaṃ’’. Esa nayo sesesu. Sace panettha āgantukabhattānipi āgantukāpi bahū honti, sabbesaṃ ekekaṃ gāhetabbaṃ, bhattesu appahontesu ṭhitikāya gāhetabbaṃ. Eko āgantuko paṭhamameva āgantvā sabbaṃ āgantukabhattaṃ attano gāhetvā nisīdati, sabbaṃ tasseva hoti, pacchā āgatehi āgantukehi tena dinnāni paribhuñjitabbāni. Tenapi ekaṃ attano gahetvā sesāni dātabbāni. Ayaṃ uḷāro.
"Arrival Meal" (āgantukabhattaṃ). This method applies to the rest. If there are many arrival meals (āgantukabhattānipi) and many newcomers (āgantukāpi), one should be given to everyone; if the meals are insufficient, they should be taken according to a fixed procedure (ṭhitikāya gāhetabbaṃ). If one newcomer arrives first and takes all the arrival meals for himself and sits down, everything belongs to him; later arrivals should partake of what has been given by him. Even he should take one for himself and give the rest. This is generosity (uḷāro).
Sace pana yo paṭhamaṃ āgantvāpi attano aggahetvā tuṇhībhūto nisīdati, pacchā āgatehi saddhiṃ paṭipāṭiyā gaṇhitabbaṃ. Sace niccaṃ āgantukā āgacchanti, āgatadivaseyeva bhuñjitabbaṃ, antarantarā ce āgacchanti, dve tīṇi divasāni bhuñjitabbaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘‘satta divasāni bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
If one arrives first but sits silently without taking anything for himself, it should be taken in order together with those who arrive later (pacchā āgatehi saddhiṃ paṭipāṭiyā gaṇhitabbaṃ). If newcomers are always arriving, it should be eaten on the day of arrival itself (āgatadivaseyeva bhuñjitabbaṃ); if they arrive intermittently, it should be eaten for two or three days. However, in the Mahāpaccari, it is said that "it is permissible to eat for seven days."
Āvāsiko katthaci gantvā āgato, tenāpi āgantukabhattaṃ paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Sace pana taṃ vihāre nibandhāpitaṃ hoti, vihāre gāhetabbaṃ. Atha vihāro dūre hoti, āsanasālāya nibandhāpitaṃ āsanasālāya gāhetabbaṃ. Sace pana dāyakā ‘‘āgantukesu asati āvāsikāpi paribhuñjantū’’ti vadanti, vaṭṭati.
An resident bhikkhu (āvāsiko) having gone somewhere, has returned, that one should also partake of the newcomer meal (āgantukabhattaṃ paribhuñjitabbaṃ). If it has been stipulated in the monastery (vihāre nibandhāpitaṃ hoti), it should be taken in the monastery (vihāre gāhetabbaṃ). If the monastery is far away, and it has been stipulated in the assembly hall (āsanasālāya nibandhāpitaṃ), it should be taken in the assembly hall. If the donors say, "In the absence of newcomers, even the residents may partake (āvāsikāpi paribhuñjantū)," it is permissible (vaṭṭati).
Gamiyabhattepiayameva kathāmaggo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – āgantuko āgantukabhattameva labhati, gamiko āgantukabhattampi gamiyabhattampi. Āvāsikopi pakkamitukāmo gamiko hoti; gamiyabhattaṃ labhati. Yathā pana āgantukabhattaṃ; evamidaṃ dve vā tīṇi vā satta vā divasāni na labbhati. ‘‘Gamissāmī’’ti bhutto taṃdivasaṃ kenacideva kāraṇena na gato, punadivasepi bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, saussāhattā. ‘‘Gamissāmī’’ti bhuttassa corā vā panthaṃ rundhanti udakaṃ vā, devo vā vassati, sattho vā na gacchati, saussāhena bhuñjitabbaṃ. Ete upaddave olokentena ‘‘dve tayo divase bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Gamissāmī’’ti pana lesaṃ oḍḍetvā bhuñjituṃ na labhati.
The same line of reasoning (kathāmaggo) applies to the Going Meal (gamiyabhattepi). This, however, is the difference: a newcomer (āgantuko) receives only the newcomer meal (āgantukabhattameva labhati), while a going bhikkhu (gamiko) receives both the newcomer meal and the going meal (gamiyabhattampi). An resident bhikkhu (āvāsikopi) who intends to depart becomes a going bhikkhu (gamiko hoti); he receives the going meal. Just as with the newcomer meal, this is not received for two, three, or seven days. If one eats, thinking, "I will go" (Gamissāmīti bhutto), but does not go that day for some reason, it is permissible to eat again on the following day, due to the intention of setting out (saussāhattā). If thieves block the way (corā vā panthaṃ rundhanti), or there is water (udakaṃ vā), or rain falls (devo vā vassati), or the caravan (sattho) does not depart, for one who has eaten thinking, "I will go," it should be eaten with the intention of setting out (saussāhena bhuñjitabbaṃ). Considering these dangers, it is said in the Mahāpaccari that "it is permissible to eat for two or three days" (dve tayo divase bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ). However, it is not permissible to eat pretending (lesaṃ oḍḍetvā) to go.
Gilānabhattampisace sabbesaṃ gilānānaṃ pahoti, sabbesaṃ dātabbaṃ; no ce, ṭhitikaṃ katvā gāhetabbaṃ. Eko gilāno arogarūpo sakkoti antogāmaṃ gantuṃ, eko na sakkoti, ayaṃ‘‘mahāgilāno’’nāma. Etassa gilānabhattaṃ dātabbaṃ. Dve mahāgilānā – eko lābhī abhiññāto bahuṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ labhati, eko anātho appalābhatāya antogāmaṃ pavisati – etassa gilānabhattaṃ dātabbaṃ. Gilānabhatte pana divasaparicchedo natthi. Yāva rogo na vūpasammati, sappāyabhojanaṃ abhuñjanto na yāpeti, tāva bhuñjitabbaṃ. Yadā pana missakayāguṃ vā missakabhattaṃ vā bhuttassāpi rogo na kuppati, tato paṭṭhāya na bhuñjitabbaṃ.
As for the Sick Meal (gilānabhattampi), if it is sufficient for all the sick, it should be given to all; if not, it should be taken according to a fixed procedure (ṭhitikaṃ katvā gāhetabbaṃ). One sick person is in good enough condition to go into the village, while another is not; this one is called "greatly sick" (mahāgilāno). The sick meal should be given to this one. There are two greatly sick persons—one is fortunate (lābhī), well-known, and receives much food and sustenance (bahuṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ labhati), while the other is destitute (anātho), receives little, and enters the village; the sick meal should be given to this one. In the sick meal, however, there is no limit on the number of days (divasaparicchedo natthi). As long as the illness does not subside (yāva rogo na vūpasammati) and one cannot subsist without eating wholesome food (sappāyabhojanaṃ abhuñjanto na yāpeti), it should be eaten. But when even after eating mixed gruel (missakayāguṃ) or a mixed meal (missakabhattaṃ), the illness does not worsen, from that point on, it should not be eaten.
Gilānupaṭṭhākabhattampiyaṃ sabbesaṃ pahoti, taṃ sabbesaṃ dātabbaṃ; no ce pahoti, ṭhitikaṃ katvā gāhetabbaṃ. Idampi dvīsu gilānesu mahāgilānupaṭṭhākassa gāhetabbaṃ, dvīsu mahāgilānesu anāthagilānupaṭṭhākassa. Yaṃ kulaṃ gilānabhattampi deti gilānupaṭṭhākabhattampi, tattha yassa gilānassa bhattaṃ pāpuṇāti tadupaṭṭhākassāpi tattheva gāhetabbaṃ. Gilānupaṭṭhākabhattepi divasaparicchedo natthi, yāva gilāno labhati, tāvassa upaṭṭhākopi labhatīti. Imāni cattāri bhattāni sace evaṃ dinnāni honti ‘‘āgantukagamikagilānupaṭṭhākā mama bhikkhaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti, piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭati. Sace pana āgantukādīnaṃ bhattaṃ nibandhāpemi, ‘‘mama bhattaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti evaṃ dinnāni honti, piṇḍapātikānaṃ na vaṭṭati.
Gilānupaṭṭhākabhattampi: The meal for the sick attendant, if it is sufficient for all, should be given to all. If it is not sufficient, it should be taken after establishing a fixed share. Here too, in the case of two sick people, it should be taken by the attendant of the seriously ill one; in the case of two seriously ill people, by the attendant of the helpless sick one. In a family that gives both the meal for the sick and the meal for the sick attendant, the attendant of whichever sick person receives the meal should take it from there. In the meal for the sick attendant, there is no limit of days; as long as the sick person receives it, so long does their attendant receive it. These four meals, if given in this way, "Let newcomers, travelers, the sick, and attendants take my alms," are suitable even for those who live on alms. But if I insist on a meal for newcomers, etc., given thus, "Let them take my meal," it is not suitable for those who live on alms.
dhurabhattanti niccabhattaṃ vuccati, taṃ duvidhaṃ – saṅghikaṃ puggalikañca. Tattha yaṃ ‘‘saṅghassa dhurabhattaṃ demā’’ti nibandhāpitaṃ, taṃ salākabhattagatikaṃ. ‘‘Mama nibaddhaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti vatvā dinnaṃ pana piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭati. Puggalikepi ‘‘tumhākaṃ dhurabhattaṃ dammī’’ti vutte piṇḍapātiko ce, na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Mama nibaddhaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte pana vaṭṭati, sāditabbaṃ. Sacepi pacchā katipāhe vītivatte ‘‘dhurabhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, mūle suṭṭhu sampaṭicchitattā vaṭṭati.
Dhurabhattaṃ: Fixed meal means a regular meal, which is of two kinds: belonging to the Saṅgha and personal. Of these, that which is stipulated as "We give a fixed meal to the Saṅgha" partakes of the nature of a ticket-meal (salākabhatta). But if it is given saying, "Take my regular alms," it is suitable even for those who live on alms. Even in the case of a personal meal, if it is said, "I will give you a fixed meal," it is not suitable for one who lives on alms. But if it is said, "Take my regular alms," it is suitable; it should be accepted. Even if after a few days have passed, one says, "Take the fixed meal," it is suitable because of the proper acceptance at the beginning.
Kuṭibhattaṃnāma yaṃ saṅghassa āvāsaṃ kāretvā ‘‘amhākaṃ senāsanavāsino amhākaṃyeva bhattaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti evaṃ nibandhāpitaṃ, taṃ salākabhattagatikameva hoti, gahetvā bhuñjitabbaṃ. ‘‘Amhākaṃ senāsanavāsino amhākaṃyeva bhikkhaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti vutte pana piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭati. Yaṃ pana puggale pasīditvā tassa vā āvāsaṃ katvā ‘‘tumhākaṃ demā’’ti dinnaṃ, taṃ tasseva hoti, tasmiṃ katthaci gate nissitakehi bhuñjitabbaṃ.
Kuṭibhattaṃ: Dwelling meal means that after having a dwelling built for the Saṅgha, it is stipulated, "Let those dwelling in our monastery take only our meal." This has the nature of a ticket-meal (salākabhatta); it should be taken and eaten. But if it is said, "Let those dwelling in our monastery take only our alms," it is suitable even for those who live on alms. But that which is given out of confidence in an individual or after having a dwelling built for him, saying, "We give to you," belongs to him alone; when he has gone somewhere, it should be eaten by those without resources.
Vārabhattaṃnāma dubbhikkhasamaye ‘‘vārena bhikkhū jaggissāmā’’ti dhuragehato paṭṭhāya dinnaṃ, tampi bhikkhāvacanena dinnaṃ piṇḍapātikānaṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Vārabhatta’’nti vutte pana salākabhattagatikaṃ hoti. Sace taṇḍulādīni pesenti, ‘‘sāmaṇerā pacitvā dentū’’ti, piṇḍapātikānaṃ vaṭṭati. Iti imāni ca tīṇi āgantukabhattādīni ca cattārīti satta, tāni saṅghabhattādīhi saha cuddasa bhattāni honti.
Vārabhattaṃ: Turn meal means that given during a time of famine, starting from the regular household, "We will support the monks in turn"; even that, if given with an announcement for alms, is suitable for those who live on alms. But if just "turn meal" is said, it partakes of the nature of a ticket-meal (salākabhatta). If they send rice etc., saying, "Let the novices cook and give it," it is suitable for those who live on alms. Thus, these three, and the four beginning with the meal for newcomers, are seven. These, together with the fourteen meals beginning with the meal for the Saṅgha, make fourteen meals.
vihārabhattaṃnāma vihāre tatruppādabhattaṃ, taṃ saṅghabhattena gahitaṃ. Taṃ pana tissamahāvihāracittalapabbatādīsu paṭisambhidāpattehi khīṇāsavehi yathā piṇḍapātikānampi sakkā hoti paribhuñjituṃ, tathā paṭiggahitattā tādisesu ṭhānesu piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭati. ‘‘Aṭṭhannaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dema, catunnaṃ demā’’ti evaṃ dinnaṃ panaaṭṭhakabhattañceva catukkabhattañca;tampi bhikkhāvacanena dinnaṃ piṇḍapātikānaṃ vaṭṭati. Mahābhisaṅkhārikena atirasakapūvena pattaṃ pūretvā thaketvā dinnaṃguḷhakabhattaṃnāma. Imāni tīṇi salākabhattagatikāneva.
Vihārabhattaṃ: Monastery meal means a meal produced there in the monastery; it is taken as a Saṅgha meal. However, in places like Tissa Great Monastery, Cittalapabbata etc., because it has been accepted that those who have attained the discriminations and are free from taints can partake of it even as those who live on alms, it is suitable for those who live on alms in such places. But if it is given saying, "We give to eight monks, we give to four," then the meal for eight and the meal for four; even that, if given with an announcement for alms, is suitable for those who live on alms. That which is given by a great confectioner, filling the bowl with excessive cakes and heaping them up, is called a lump meal (guḷhakabhatta). These three partake of the nature of ticket-meals (salākabhatta).
guḷakabhattaṃnāma atthi, idhekacce manussā mahādhammasavanañca vihārapūjañca kāretvā sakalasaṅghassa dātuṃ na sakkomāti, ‘‘dve tīṇi bhikkhusatāni amhākaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti bhikkhuparicchedajānanatthaṃ guḷake denti, idaṃ piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭati. Iti cīvarakkhandhake cīvarabhājanīyaṃ, imasmiṃ pana senāsanakkhandhake senāsanabhājanīyañceva piṇḍapātabhājanīyañca vuttaṃ.
Guḷhakabhattaṃ: There is also a lump meal (guḷhakabhatta), here some people, after having a great Dhamma sermon and a monastery offering made, because they are unable to give to the entire Saṅgha, give lumps in order to know the number of monks, "Let two or three hundred monks take our meal." This is suitable even for those who live on alms. Thus, in the section on robes (cīvarakkhandhaka), what is allowable for robes has been stated; but in this section on lodging (senāsanakkhandhaka), what is allowable for lodging and what is allowable for alms have been stated.
Gilānapaccayabhājanīyaṃ pana evaṃ veditabbaṃ – sappiādīsu bhesajjesu rājarājamahāmattā sappissa tāva kumbhasatampi kumbhasahassampi vihāraṃ pesenti, ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā therāsanato paṭṭhāya gahitabhājanaṃ pūretvā dātabbaṃ, piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭati. Sace alasajātikā mahātherā pacchā āgacchanti, ‘‘bhante, vīsativassānaṃ diyyati, tumhākaṃ ṭhitikā atikkantā’’ti na vattabbā, ṭhitikaṃ ṭhapetvā tesaṃ datvā pacchā ṭhitikāya dātabbaṃ.
What is allowable for requisites for the sick should be understood thus: among medicines such as ghee etc., royal or great ministers send even a hundred or a thousand jars of ghee to the monastery. After striking the bell, beginning from the seat of the elders, it should be given, filling the bowl that has been taken; it is suitable even for those who live on alms. If lazy elders come later, they should not be told, "Venerable sir, it is given to those of twenty years' standing; your fixed share is past." After setting aside a fixed share, it should be given to them, and then given according to the fixed share.
‘‘Asukavihāre bahu sappi uppanna’’nti sutvā yojanantaravihāratopi bhikkhū āgacchanti, sampattasampattānaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya dātabbaṃ. Asampattānampi upacārasīmaṃ paviṭṭhānaṃ antevāsikādīsu gaṇhantesu dātabbameva. ‘‘Bahiupacārasīmāya ṭhitānaṃ dethā’’ti vadanti, na dātabbaṃ. Sace pana upacārasīmaṃ okkantehi ekābaddhā hutvā attano vihāradvāre vā antovihāreyeva vā honti, parisāvasena vaḍḍhitā nāma sīmā hoti, tasmā dātabbaṃ. Saṅghanavakassa dinnepi pacchā āgatānaṃ dātabbameva. Dutiyabhāge pana therāsanaṃ āruḷhe pacchā āgatānaṃ paṭhamabhāgo na pāpuṇāti, dutiyabhāgato vassaggena dātabbaṃ. Upacārasīmaṃ pavisitvā yattha katthaci dinnaṃ hoti, sabbasannipātaṭṭhāneyeva bhājetabbaṃ.
Having heard that "Much ghee has arisen in such and such a monastery," monks come even from a monastery a league away; it should be given to those who arrive, beginning from their respective positions. Even to those who have not arrived but have entered the boundary of the vicinity, it should definitely be given when their pupils etc. take it. If they say, "Give to those standing outside the boundary of the vicinity," it should not be given. But if those who have stepped into the boundary of the vicinity are united and are at the door of their own monastery or even inside the monastery, the boundary is considered extended by the assembly, therefore it should be given. Even if it has been given to a junior monk of the Saṅgha, it should definitely be given to those who come later. But in the second distribution, those who arrive later after one has ascended the seat of the elders do not receive the first share; it should be given from the second share, according to seniority in vassas. After entering the boundary of the vicinity, wherever it has been given, it should be distributed at the entire assembly place itself.
Yasmiṃ vihāre dasa bhikkhū, daseva ca sappikumbhā diyyanti, ekekakumbhavaseneva bhājetabbaṃ. Eko sappikumbho hoti, dasa bhikkhūhi bhājetvā gahetabbaṃ. Sace yathāṭhitaṃyeva ‘‘amhākaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti gaṇhanti, duggahitaṃ; gatagataṭṭhāne saṅghikameva hoti. Kumbhaṃ pana āvajjetvā thālake thokaṃ sappiṃ katvā ‘‘idaṃ mahātherassa pāpuṇāti, avasesaṃ amhākaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti vatvā tampi kumbheyeva ākiritvā yathicchitaṃ gahetvā gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace thinaṃ sappi hoti, lekhaṃ katvā ‘‘lekhato parabhāgo mahātherassa pāpuṇāti, avasesaṃ amhāka’’nti gahitampi suggahitaṃ, vuttaparicchedato ūnādhikesupi bhikkhūsu ca sappikumbhesu ca etenevupāyena bhājetabbaṃ.
In whatever monastery there are ten monks, and ten jars of ghee are given, it should be divided simply on the basis of one jar per person. If there is one jar of ghee, it should be divided and taken by the ten monks. If they take it just as it is, "It falls to our lot," it is badly taken; it belongs to the Saṅgha wherever one goes. But after tilting the jar and making a little ghee in a dish, saying, "This falls to the lot of the elder monk, the remainder falls to our lot," and pouring that also back into the jar, it is allowable to take as desired and go. If the ghee is thick, after making a line, "The portion beyond the line falls to the lot of the elder monk, the remainder to us," even that taken is well taken. Whether there are more or fewer monks than the number stated, and whether there are more or fewer jars of ghee, it should be divided by this method.
Sace paneko bhikkhu, ekopi kumbho hoti, ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā ‘‘ayaṃ mayhaṃ pāpuṇātī’’tipi gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Ayaṃ paṭhamabhāgo mayhaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayaṃ dutiyabhāgo’’ti evaṃ thokaṃ thokampi pāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. Esa nayo navanītādīsupi. Yasmiṃ pana vippasanne tilatelādimhi lekhā na santiṭṭhati, taṃ uddharitvā bhājetabbaṃ. Siṅgiveramaricādibhesajjampi avasesapattathālakādisamaṇaparikkhāropi sabbo vuttānurūpeneva nayena suṭṭhu sallakkhetvā bhājetabboti.
If, however, there is one monk and also one jar, it is allowable to strike the bell and take it, thinking, "This falls to my lot." It is allowable to allocate even a little at a time, "This first part falls to my lot, this second part." This is the method also for fresh butter etc. But in the case of sesame oil etc., in which a line does not remain distinct when stirred, it should be scooped out and divided. And medicinal requisites such as ginger and pepper, and all the requisites including spare bowls and dishes, should be well considered and divided according to the method stated.
Pāḷiṃ aṭṭhakathañceva, oloketvā vicakkhaṇo;
A wise person, having examined both the Pali and the commentary,
Thus should divide the Saṅgha's requisites, being diligent.
Iti sabbākārena paccayabhājanīyakathā niṭṭhitā.
Thus, the account of how to allocate requisites in all ways is concluded.
Sammannitvā ṭhapitayāgubhājakādīhi bhājanīyaṭṭhānaṃ āgatamanussānaṃ anāpucchitvāva upaḍḍhabhāgo dātabbo, asammatehi pana apaloketvā dātabbo. Sammatena appamattakavissajjanakena bhikkhunā cīvarakammaṃ karontassa ‘‘sūciṃ dehī’’ti vadato ekā dīghā, ekā rassāti dve sūciyo dātabbā. ‘‘Avibhattaṃ saṅghikaṃ bhaṇḍa’’nti pucchitabbakiccaṃ natthi. Pipphalakatthikassa eko pipphalako, addhānakantāraṃ paṭipajjitukāmassa upāhanayugaḷaṃ, kāyabandhanatthikassa kāyabandhanaṃ, ‘‘aṃsabaddhako me jiṇṇo’’ti āgatassa aṃsabaddhako, parissāvanatthikassa parissāvanaṃ dātabbaṃ. Dhammakaraṇatthikassa dhammakaraṇo. Sace paṭako na hoti, dhammakaraṇo paṭakena saddhiṃ dātabbo. ‘‘Āgantukapaṭṭaṃ āropessāmī’’ti yācantassa kusiyā ca aḍḍhakusiyā ca pahonakaṃ dātabbaṃ. ‘‘Maṇḍalaṃ nappahotī’’ti āgatassa maṇḍalaṃ ekaṃ dātabbaṃ, aḍḍhamaṇḍalāni dve dātabbāni. Dve maṇḍalāni yācantassa na dātabbāni. Anuvātaparibhaṇḍatthikassa ekassa cīvarassa pahonakaṃ dātabbaṃ. Sappinavanītādiatthikassa gilānassa ekaṃ bhesajjaṃ nāḷimattaṃ katvā tato tatiyakoṭṭhāso dātabbo. Evaṃ tīṇi divasāni datvā nāḷiyā paripuṇṇāya catutthadivasato paṭṭhāya saṅghaṃ pucchitvā dātabbaṃ. Guḷapiṇḍepi ekadivasaṃ tatiyabhāgo dātabbo. Evaṃ tīhi divasehi niṭṭhite piṇḍe tato paraṃ saṅghaṃ pucchitvā dātabbaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
To people who have come to a place where things are to be distributed by those appointed and established as distributors of rice-gruel etc., half a share should be given without asking. But by those not appointed, it should be given after informing the Saṅgha. A monk appointed who is skilled in distribution should give two needles to one doing robe-making who says, "Give me a needle," one long and one short. There is no need to ask, "Is this undivided property of the Saṅgha?" One pippali fruit should be given to one who needs pippali; a pair of shoes to one who wishes to set out on a long journey; a waistband to one who needs a waistband; a shoulder-strap to one who comes saying, "My shoulder-strap is worn out"; a strainer to one who needs a strainer; a book-strap to one who needs a book-strap. If there is no wrapper, a book-strap should be given together with a wrapper. To one requesting, "I will attach a newcomer's patch," enough for a gore and half a gore should be given. To one who has come saying, "A maṇḍala is not enough," one maṇḍala should be given, or two half-maṇḍalas should be given. Two maṇḍalas should not be given to one requesting them. To one who needs an edging for a robe (anuvātaparibhaṇḍa), enough for one robe should be given. To a sick person who needs ghee or fresh butter etc., one medicine should be made to the measure of a nāḷi, and a third part of that should be given. After giving thus for three days, from the fourth day onwards it should be given after asking the Saṅgha. Even in the case of a lump of molasses, a third part should be given for one day. When the lump is finished after three days, it should be given thereafter after asking the Saṅgha. Everywhere else, it is straightforward.
Pakkhikabhattādikathā niṭṭhitā.
The account of fortnightly meals etc. is concluded.
Senāsanakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The commentary on the Section on Lodging is concluded.
7. Saṅghabhedakakkhandhakaṃ
7. The Section on the Schism of the Saṅgha
Chasakyapabbajjākathā
The Account of the Ordination of the Six Sakyans
330.Saṅghabhedakakkhandhakeabhiññātā abhiññātāti pākaṭā pākaṭā.Sakyakumārānāma kāḷudāyippabhutayo dasa dūtā saddhiṃ parivārehi aññe ca bahū janā.Amhākanti amhesu; amhākaṃ kulatoti vā vuttaṃ hoti.Gharāvāsatthaṃ anusāsissāmīti gharāvāse yaṃ kattabbaṃ, taṃ jānāpessāmi.Udakaṃ ninnetabbanti yathā udakaṃ sabbaṭṭhāne samaṃ hoti, evaṃ kātabbaṃ.Niddhāpetabbanti tiṇāni uddharitabbāni.Bhusikā uddharāpetabbāti sukhumapalālamissadhaññā palālikā palāpetabbā.Opunāpetabbanti sukhumapalālaṃ apanetabbaṃ.Tvaññeva gharāvāsatthena upajānāhīti tvaññeva gharāvāsatthaṃ jānāhi.Ahaṃ tayā yathāsukhaṃ pabbajāhīti ettha ahaṃ tayā saddhiṃ pabbajissāmīti sahāyasinehena sahasā vattukāmo hutvā puna rajjasirilobhena parikaḍḍhiyamānahadayo ‘‘ahaṃ tayā’’ti ettakameva vatvā sesaṃ vattuṃ nāsakkhīti evamattho veditabbo.
330. In the Section on the Schism of the Saṅgha, abhiññātā abhiññātā: well-known, well-known. Sakyakumārā: namely, the ten envoys led by Kāḷudāyi, together with their retinues, and many other people. Amhāka: to us; or it is said, to our family. Gharāvāsatthaṃ anusāsissāmī: I will instruct about what should be done in household life. Udakaṃ ninnetabbaṃ: water should be drained away, it should be done so that water is level in all places. Niddhāpetabbaṃ: weeds should be removed. Bhusikā uddharāpetabbā: fine chaff mixed with grain should be winnowed. Opunāpetabbaṃ: fine chaff should be removed. Tvaññeva gharāvāsatthena upajānāhi: you alone know about household life. Ahaṃ tayā yathāsukhaṃ pabbajāhi: here, intending to say quickly out of affection for a companion, "I will go forth with you," but his heart being drawn back again by the lure of royal splendor, he was unable to say more than just "ahaṃ tayā," and could not say the rest. Thus should the meaning be understood.
331.Nippātitāti nikkhamitā.Mānassinoti mānassayino; mānanissitāti vuttaṃ hoti.
331. Nippātitā: gone out. Mānassino: those who rely on conceit; it is said, based on conceit.
332.Yassantarato na santi kopāti tatiyamaggena samūhatattā yassa citte kopā na santi. Yasmā panabhavoti sampatti,vibhavoti vipatti; tathā bhavoti vuḍḍhi, vibhavoti hāni; bhavoti sassataṃ, vibhavoti ucchedo; bhavoti puññaṃ, vibhavoti pāpaṃ; vibhavoti ca abhavoti ca atthato ekameva, tasmāitibhavābhavatañca vītivattoti ettha yā esā sampattivipattivuḍḍhihānisassatucchedapuññapāpavasena iti anekappakārā bhavābhavatā vuccati; catūhipi maggehi yathāsambhavaṃ tena tena nayena taṃ itibhavābhavatañca vītivattoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.Nānubhavantīti na sampāpuṇanti; tassa dassanaṃ devānampi dullabhanti adhippāyo.
332. Yassantarato na santi kopā: because they have been eradicated by the third path, there are no angers in whose mind. Since bhavo means prosperity, vibhavo means adversity; likewise, bhavo means increase, vibhavo means decrease; bhavo means permanence, vibhavo means annihilation; bhavo means merit, vibhavo means demerit; and vibhavo and abhavo are one in meaning, therefore in itibhavābhavatañca vītivatto, that which is called itibhavābhavatā in many ways, due to prosperity, adversity, increase, decrease, permanence, annihilation, merit, and demerit, he has transcended that itibhavābhavatā in whatever way possible, by the four paths. Thus should the meaning be understood. Nānubhavantī: do not attain; the meaning is that seeing him is difficult even for the gods.
333.Ahimekhalikāti ahiṃ kaṭiyaṃ bandhitvā.Ucchaṅgeti aṅke.
333. Ahimekhalikā: having a snake tied around the waist. Ucchaṅge: on the lap.
334.Sammannatīti sammāneti.Yaṃ tumo karissatīti yaṃ so karissati.
334. Sammannatī: honors. Yaṃ tumo karissatī: whatever he will do.
Chasakyapabbajjākathā niṭṭhitā.
The Account of the Ordination of the Six Sakyans is concluded.
Pakāsanīyakammādikathā
The Account of the Act of Proclamation, etc.
336.Kheḷāsakassāti ettha micchājīvena uppannapaccayā ariyehi vantabbā kheḷasadisā, tathārūpe paccaye ayaṃ ajjhoharatīti katvā kheḷāsakoti bhagavatā vutto.
336. Kheḷāsakassā: here, because he partakes of requisites that arise from wrong livelihood and are like spit to be rejected by the noble ones, he was called kheḷāsaka by the Blessed One.
340.Patthaddhena kāyenāti potthakarūpasadisena niccalena kāyena.
340. Patthaddhena kāyenā: with a stiff body, like a book-cover.
342.Mayaṃ kho bhaṇe rājañātakā nāmāti rājā amhe jānātīti rājañātakassa bhāvena attānaṃ ukkaṃsanto āha.Pahaṭṭhakaṇṇavāloti bandhane niccale katvā.
342. Mayaṃ kho bhaṇe rājañātakā nāmā: the king knows us, he said, exalting himself by means of his acquaintance with the king. Pahaṭṭhakaṇṇavālo: having made the ear-hair motionless in restraint.
Dukkhañhi kuñjara nāgamāsadoti bho kuñjara buddhanāgaṃ āsādanaṃ vadhakacittena upagamanaṃ nāma dukkhaṃ.Nāgahatassāti buddhanāgaṃ ghātakassa.
Dukkhañhi kuñjara nāgamāsado: truly, Kuñjara, approaching the Buddha-elephant with a mind to kill is suffering. Nāgahatassā: to the slayer of the Buddha-elephant.
Paṭikuṭiyova osakkīti tathāgatābhimukhoyeva piṭṭhimehi pādehi avasakki.Alakkhikoti ettha na lakkhetīti alakkhiko; na jānātīti attho, ahaṃ pāpakammaṃ karomīti na jānāti. Na lakkhitabboti vā alakkhiko; na passitabboti attho.
Paṭikuṭiyova osakkī: he retreated with his back feet, facing the Tathāgata. Alakkhiko: here, alakkhiko means not noticing; the meaning is not knowing, he does not know that I am doing a bad deed. Or, alakkhiko means not to be noticed; the meaning is not to be seen.
343.Tikabhojananti ettha tīhi janehi bhuñjitabbabhojanaṃ.Taṃ paññāpessāmīti taṃ anujānissāmi. Gaṇabhojane pana yathādhammo kāretabboti.Pañcavatthuyācanakathāsaṅghādisesavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttā.Kappanti āyukappaṃ.Brahmaṃ puññanti seṭṭhaṃ puññaṃ.Kappaṃ saggamhīti āyukappameva.
Pakāsanīyakammādikathā niṭṭhitā.
Saṅghabhedakakathā
344.Atha kho devadatto saṅghaṃ bhinditvāti so kira evaṃ salākaṃ gāhetvā tattheva āveṇikaṃ uposathaṃ katvā gato, tenetaṃ vuttaṃ.
345.Piṭṭhime āgilāyatīti ciranisajjāya vedanābhibhūtā bādhati.Tamahaṃ āyamissāmīti taṃ ahaṃ pasāressāmi.Ādesanāpāṭihāriyānusāsanīnāma ‘‘evampi te mano, tathāpi te mano’’ti evaṃ parassa cittaṃ jānitvā tadanurūpā dhammadesanā.
346.Mamānukubbanti mamānukiriyaṃ kurumāno.Kapaṇoti dukkhito.Mahāvarāhassāti mahānāgassa.Mahiṃ vikubbatoti pathaviṃ padālentassa.Bhisaṃ ghasamānassāti bhisaṃ khādantassa.Nadīsu jaggatoti ettha so kira hatthināgo sāyanhasamayaṃ taṃ nadināmakaṃ pokkharaṇiṃ ogāhetvā kilanto sabbarattiṃ vītināmesi, jālikaṃ karoti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘nadīsu jaggato’’ti.
347.Sutāti sotā.Asandiddho ca akkhātīti nissandeho hutvā akkhāti anusandhivasena yojetvā yojetvā.
350.Apāye nibbattissatītiāpāyiko. Evaṃnerayiko. Kappaṃ ṭhassatītikappaṭṭho. Idāni buddhasahassenāpi tikicchituṃ na sakkātiatekiccho.
Mā jātu koci lokasminti mā kadācipi koci satto lokasmiṃ.Udapajjathāti upapajjatha.Jalaṃva yasasā aṭṭhāti yasasā jalanto viya ṭhito.Devadattoti me sutanti ‘‘īdiso devadatto’’ti bhagavatā sutampi atthi, tadeva gahetvā idaṃ vuttaṃ.So pamādamanuciṇṇoti ettha pamādaṃ anucinātīti anuciṇṇo, pamādo appahīnoti attho.Āsajja nanti pāpakena cittena patvā, visosetvāti vā attho.Avīcinirayaṃ pattoti idaṃ pana āsīsāyaṃ atītavacanaṃ.Bhesmāti bhayānako.
Saṅghabhedakakathā niṭṭhitā.
Upālipañhākathā
351.Ekato upāli ekoti dhammavādipakkhe eko.Ekato dveti adhammavādipakkhe dve.Catuttho anussāvetīti saṅghaṃ bhindissāmīti adhammavādicatuttho hutvā anussāveti; anunayanto sāveti ‘‘na tumhākaṃyeva narakabhayaṃ atthi, amhākampi atthi, na amhākaṃ avīcimaggo pihito, na mayaṃ akusalā na bhāyāma. Yadi hi ayaṃ adhammo avinayo asatthusāsanaṃ vā bhaveyya, na mayaṃ gaṇheyyāmā’’tiādinā nayena ‘‘adhammaṃ dhammo’’ti evaṃ aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūni bodhetīti attho.Salākaṃ gāhetīti evaṃ anussāvetvā pana ‘‘idaṃ gaṇhatha, idaṃ rocethā’’ti vadanto salākaṃ gāheti.
Ekato upāli dve hontītiādīsupi eseva nayo.Evaṃ kho upāli saṅgharāji ceva hoti saṅghabhedo cāti evaṃ hoti; na pana ettāvatā saṅgho bhinno hoti.
Bhikkhu kho upāli pakatatto samānasaṃvāsako samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhito saṅghaṃ bhindatīti ettha siyā evaṃ ‘‘devadatto kathaṃ pakatatto’’ti. Kathaṃ tāva na pakatatto, rañño ghātāpitattā ruhiruppādassa ca katattāti? Tattha vadāma – āṇattiyā tāva viraddhattā rañño ghātāpanaṃ natthi. ‘‘Tena hi tvaṃ, kumāra, pitaraṃ hantvā rājā hohi, ahaṃ bhagavantaṃ hantvā buddho bhavissāmī’’ti evañhi tassa āṇatti. Kumāro pana rājā hutvā pacchā pitaraṃ māresi; evaṃ tāva āṇattiyā viraddhattā rañño ghātāpanaṃ natthi. Ruhiruppāde pana katamatteyeva ruhiruppādapaccayā bhagavatā abhabbatā na vuttā, na ca sakkā bhagavato vacanaṃ vināyeva tassa abhabbatā āropetuṃ.
‘‘Ruhiruppādako, bhikkhave, anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo, upasampanno nāsetabbo’’ti –
Idaṃ pana bhagavatā saṅghabhedato pacchā vuttaṃ, tasmā pakatatteneva tena saṅgho bhinnoti.
Adhammaṃ dhammoti dīpentītiādīsu aṭṭhārasasu bhedakaravatthūsu suttantapariyāyena tāva dasa kusalakammapathā dhammo, dasa akusalakammapathā adhammo. Tathā cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā dhammo nāma; tayo satipaṭṭhānā, tayo sammappadhānā, tayo iddhipādā, cha indriyāni, cha balāni, aṭṭha bojjhaṅgā, navaṅgiko maggoti ca cattāro upādānā, pañca nīvaraṇā, satta anusayā, aṭṭha micchattāti ca ayaṃ adhammo.
Tattha yaṃkiñci ekaṃ adhammakoṭṭhāsaṃ gahetvā ‘‘imaṃ adhammaṃ dhammoti karissāma; evaṃ amhākaṃ ācariyakulaṃ nissāya niyyānikaṃ bhavissati, mayañca loke pākaṭā bhavissāmā’’ti taṃ adhammaṃ ‘‘dhammo aya’’nti kathayantā adhammaṃ dhammoti dīpenti nāma. Tatheva dhammakoṭṭhāsesu ca ekaṃ gahetvā ayaṃ adhammoti kathentā dhammaṃ adhammoti dīpenti nāma. Vinayapariyāyena pana bhūtena vatthunā codetvā sāretvā yathāpaṭiññāya kātabbaṃ kammaṃ dhammo nāma, abhūtena vatthunā acodetvā asāretvā apaṭiññāya kātabbaṃ kammaṃ adhammo nāma.
Suttantapariyāyena rāgavinayo dosavinayo mohavinayo saṃvaro pahānaṃ paṭisaṅkhāti ayaṃ vinayo nāma, rāgādīnaṃ avinayo asaṃvaro appahānaṃ appaṭisaṅkhāti ayaṃ avinayo nāma. Vinayapariyāyena vatthusampatti ñattisampatti anussāvanasampatti sīmāsampatti parisāsampattīti ayaṃ vinayo nāma, vatthuvipatti…pe… parisāvipattīti ayaṃ avinayo nāma.
Suttantapariyāyena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā… aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti idaṃ bhāsitaṃ lapitaṃ tathāgatena; tayo satipaṭṭhānā, tayo sammappadhānā, tayo iddhipādā, cha indriyāni, cha balāni, aṭṭha bojjhaṅgā, navaṅgiko maggoti idaṃ abhāsitaṃ alapitaṃ tathāgatena. Vinayapariyāyena cattāro pārājikā, terasa saṅghādisesā, dve aniyatā, tiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyāti idaṃ bhāsitaṃ lapitaṃ tathāgatena; tayo pārājikā, cuddasa saṅghādisesā, tayo aniyatā, ekattiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyāti idaṃ abhāsitaṃ alapitaṃ tathāgatena.
Suttantapariyāyena devasikaṃ phalasamāpattisamāpajjanaṃ, mahākaruṇāsamāpattisamāpajjanaṃ, buddhacakkhunā lokavolokanaṃ, aṭṭhuppattivasena suttantadesanā, jātakakathāti idaṃ āciṇṇaṃ; na devasikaṃ phalasamāpattisamāpajjanaṃ…pe… na jātakakathāti idaṃ anāciṇṇaṃ. Vinayapariyāyena nimantitassa vassāvāsaṃ vasitvā apaloketvā cāriyapakkamanaṃ, pavāretvā cāriyapakkamanaṃ, āgantukehi saddhiṃ paṭhamaṃ paṭisanthārakaraṇanti idaṃ āciṇṇaṃ; tasseva āciṇṇassa akaraṇaṃ anāciṇṇaṃ nāma.
Suttantapariyāyena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā…pe… aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti idaṃ paññattaṃ nāma; tayo satipaṭṭhānā…pe… navaṅgiko maggoti idaṃ apaññattaṃ nāma. Vinayapariyāyena cattāro pārājikā…pe… tiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyāti idaṃ paññattaṃ nāma; tayo pārājikā…pe… ekattiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyāti idaṃ apaññattaṃ nāma.
‘‘Anāpatti ajānantassa, atheyyacittassa, na maraṇādhippāyassa, anullapanādhippāyassa, na mocanādhippāyassā’’ti tattha tattha vuttā anāpatti anāpatti nāma. ‘‘Jānantassa, theyyacittassā’’tiādinā nayena vuttā āpatti āpatti nāma. Pañcāpattikkhandhā lahukāpatti nāma, dve āpattikkhandhā garukāpatti nāma. Cha āpattikkhandhā sāvasesāpatti nāma, eko pārājikāpattikkhandho anavasesāpatti nāma. Dve āpattikkhandhā duṭṭhullāpatti nāma, pañcāpattikkhandhā aduṭṭhullāpatti nāma.
apakassantī’’tiādi.
apakassantīti parisaṃ ākaḍḍhanti, vijaṭenti, ekamantaṃ ussārenti ca.Avapakāsantīti ati viya pakāsenti yathā visaṃsaṭṭhāva honti, evaṃ karonti.Āveninti visuṃ.Ettāvatā kho upāli saṅgho bhinno hotīti evaṃ aṭṭhārasasu bhedakaravatthūsu yaṃkiñci ekampi vatthuṃ dīpetvā tena tena kāraṇena ‘‘imaṃ gaṇhatha, imaṃ rocethā’’ti saññāpetvā salākaṃ gāhāpetvā visuṃ saṅghakamme kate saṅgho bhinno hoti. Parivāre pana ‘‘pañcahi upāli ākārehi saṅgho bhijjatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tassa iminā idha vuttena saṅghabhedalakkhaṇena atthato nānākaraṇaṃ natthi. Taṃ panassa nānākaraṇābhāvaṃ tattheva pakāsayissāma. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
Upālipañhākathā niṭṭhitā.
Saṅghabhedakakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
8. Vattakkhandhakaṃ
Āgantukavattakathā
357.Vattakkhandhakeidāni ārāmaṃ pavisissāmīti iminā upacārasīmasamīpaṃ dasseti; tasmā upacārasīmaṃ patvā upāhanāomuñcanādi sabbaṃ kātabbaṃ.Gahetvāti upāhanadaṇḍakena gahetvā.Paṭikkamantīti sannipatanti.Vissajjetabbanti pattharitabbaṃ.Gocaro pucchitabboti ‘‘gocaragāmo āsanne udāhu dūre, kālasseva piṇḍāya caritabbaṃ udāhu divā’’ti evaṃ bhikkhācāro pucchitabbo.Agocaronāma micchādiṭṭhikānaṃ vā gāmo paricchinnabhikkho vā gāmo; yattha ekassa vā dvinnaṃ vā bhikkhā diyyati, sopi pucchitabbo.Pānīyaṃ pucchitabbanti ‘‘kiṃ imissā pokkharaṇiyā pānīyaṃyeva pivanti, nahānādiparibhogampi karontī’’ti evaṃ pānīyañceva paribhojanīyañca pucchitabbaṃ. Kesuci ṭhānesu vāḷamigā vā amanussā vā honti, tasmā ‘‘kaṃ kālaṃ pavisitabbaṃ, kaṃ kālaṃ nikkhamitabba’’nti pucchitabbaṃ.
Bahi ṭhitenāti bahi nikkhamantassa ahino vā amanussassa vā maggaṃ datvā ṭhitena nilloketabbo.Sace ussahati sodhetabboti yadi sakkoti, sabbo vihāro sodhetabbo. Asakkontena attano vasanokāso jaggitabbo. Sabbaṃ sodhetuṃ sakkontassa pana dassite vihārasodhanavatte vinicchayo mahākhandhake vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
Āgantukavattakathā niṭṭhitā.
Āvāsikavattakathā
359.Āvāsikavatte –āsanaṃ paññapetabbanti evamādi sabbaṃ vuḍḍhatare āgate cīvarakammaṃ vā navakammaṃ vā ṭhapetvāpi kātabbaṃ. Cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajjantena sammajjaniṃ nikkhipitvā tassa vattaṃ kātuṃ ārabhitabbaṃ. Paṇḍito hi āgantuko ‘‘sammajjāhi tāva cetiyaṅgaṇa’’nti vakkhati. Gilānabhesajjaṃ karontena pana sace nātiāturo gilāno hoti, bhesajjaṃ akatvā vattameva kātabbaṃ. Mahāgilānassa pana bhesajjameva kātabbaṃ. Paṇḍito hi āgantuko ‘‘karohi tāva bhesajja’’nti vakkhati. Pānīyena pucchantena sace sakiṃ ānītaṃ pānīyaṃ sabbaṃ pivati, ‘‘puna ānemī’’ti pucchitabboyeva. Apica bījanenapi bījitabbo, bījantena sakiṃ pādapiṭṭhiyaṃ bījitvā sakiṃ majjhe sakiṃ sīse bījitabbaṃ, ‘‘alaṃ hotū’’ti vuttena tato mandataraṃ bījitabbaṃ. Puna ‘‘ala’’nti vuttena tato mandataraṃ bījitabbaṃ. Tatiyavāraṃ vuttena bījanī ṭhapetabbā. Pādāpissa dhovitabbā, dhovitvā sace attano telaṃ atthi, tena makkhetabbā. No ce atthi, tassa santakena makkhetabbā. Upāhanāpuñchanaṃ pana attano rucivasena kātabbaṃ. Teneva hettha ‘‘sace ussahatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā upāhanā apuñchantassāpi anāpatti. ‘‘Kattha mayhaṃ senāsanaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti pucchitena senāsanaṃ paññapetabbaṃ, ‘‘etaṃ tumhākaṃ senāsanaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti evaṃ ācikkhitabbanti attho. Papphoṭetvā hi pattharituṃ pana vaṭṭatiyeva.
pānīyaṃ ācikkhitabbanti ‘‘etaṃ pānīyaṃ gahetvā pivāhī’’ti ācikkhitabbaṃ. Paribhojanīyepi eseva nayo. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva. Mahāāvāsepi attano santikaṃ sampattassa āgantukassa vattaṃ akātuṃ na labhati.
Āvāsikavattakathā niṭṭhitā.
Gamikavattakathā
360.Gamikavattesudārubhaṇḍanti senāsanakkhandhake vuttaṃ mañcapīṭhādi.Mattikābhaṇḍampirajanabhājanādi sabbaṃ tattha vuttappabhedameva. Taṃ sabbaṃ aggisālāya vā aññatarasmiṃ vā guttaṭṭhāne paṭisāmetvā gantabbaṃ. Anovassake pabbhārepi ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati.Senāsanaṃ āpucchitabbanti ettha yaṃ pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ vā pāsāṇatthambhesu vā katasenāsanaṃ, yattha upacikā nārohanti, taṃ anāpucchantassāpi anāpatti.Catūsu pāsāṇakesūtiādi upacikānaṃ uppattiṭṭhāne paṇṇasālādisenāsane kattabbākāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.Appeva nāma aṅgānipi seseyyunti ayaṃ ajjhokāse ṭhapitamhi ānisaṃso. Ovassakagehe pana tiṇesu ca mattikāpiṇḍesu ca upari patantesu mañcapīṭhānaṃ aṅgānipi vinassanti.
Gamikavattakathā niṭṭhitā.
Anumodanavattakathā
362.Anumodanavatthusmiṃiddhaṃ ahosīti sampannaṃ ahosi.Catūhi pañcahīti saṅghattherena anumodanatthāya nisinne heṭṭhā paṭipāṭiyā catūhi nisīditabbaṃ. Anuthere nisinne mahātherena ca heṭṭhā ca tīhi nisīditabbaṃ. Pañcame nisinne upari catūhi nisīditabbaṃ. Saṅghattherena heṭṭhā daharabhikkhusmiṃ ajjhiṭṭhepi saṅghattherato paṭṭhāya catūhi nisīditabbameva. Sace pana anumodako bhikkhu ‘‘gacchatha bhante, āgametabbakiccaṃ natthī’’ti vadati, gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Mahātherena ‘‘gacchāma āvuso’’ti vutte ‘‘gacchathā’’ti vadati, evampi vaṭṭati. ‘‘Bahigāme āgamessāmā’’ti ābhogaṃ katvāpi bahigāmaṃ gantvā attano nissitake ‘‘tumhe tassa āgamanaṃ āgamethā’’ti vatvāpi gantuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Sace pana manussā attano rucikena ekena anumodanaṃ kārenti, neva tassa anumodato āpatti, na mahātherassa bhāro hoti. Upanisinnakathāyameva hi manussesu kathāpentesu mahāthero āpucchitabbo, mahātherena ca anumodanāya ajjhiṭṭhova āgametabboti idamettha lakkhaṇaṃ.Vaccitoti sañjātavacco; vaccapīḷitoti adhippāyo.
Anumodanavattakathā niṭṭhitā.
Bhattaggavattakathā
364.Bhattaggavatte ‘‘antogāmo vā hotu vihāro vā, manussānaṃ parivesanaṭṭhānaṃ gacchantena cīvaraṃ pārupitvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhanameva vaṭṭatī’’ti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ.Na there bhikkhū anupakhajjāti there bhikkhū atiallīyitvā na nisīditabbaṃ. Sace mahātherassa nisinnāsanena samakaṃ āsanaṃ hoti, bahūsu āsanesu sati ekaṃ dve āsanāni ṭhapetvā nisīditabbaṃ. Bhikkhū gaṇetvā paññattāsanesu anisīditvā mahātherena nisīdāti vuttena nisīditabbaṃ. No ce mahāthero vadati, ‘‘idaṃ, bhante, āsanaṃ ucca’’nti vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Nisīdā’’ti vutte nisīditabbaṃ. Sace pana evaṃ āpucchitepi na vadati, nisīdantassa anāpatti; mahātherasseva āpatti. Navako hi evarūpe āsane anāpucchā nisīdanto āpajjati, thero āpucchite ananujānanto.Na saṅghāṭiṃ ottharitvāti na saṅghāṭiṃ avattharitvā nisīditabbaṃ.
Ubhohihatthehīti pattadhovanaudakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Dakkhiṇodakaṃ pana purato ādhārake pattaṃ ṭhapetvā gahetabbaṃ.Sādhukanti udakasaddaṃ akarontena.
Sūpassa okāsoti yathā sūpassa okāso hoti; evaṃ mattāya odano gaṇhitabboti attho.Samakaṃ sampādehīti idaṃ na kevalaṃ sappiādīsuyeva odanepi vattabbaṃ. Sappiādīsu pana yaṃ appaṃ hoti ekassa vā dvinnaṃ vā anurūpakaṃ, taṃ sabbesaṃ samakaṃ sampādehīti vutte manussānaṃ vihasā hoti, tasmā tādisaṃ sakiṃ vā dvikkhattuṃ vā gahetvā sesaṃ na gahetabbaṃ.
Na tāva therena bhuñjitabbanti idaṃ yaṃ paricchinnabhikkhukaṃ bhattaggaṃ, yattha manussā sabbesaṃ pāpetvā dātukāmā honti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana mahābhattaggaṃ hoti, yattha ekasmiṃ padese bhuñjanti, ekasmiṃ padese udakaṃ diyyati, tattha yathāsukhaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ.
Na tāva udakanti idaṃ hatthadhovanaudakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Antarā pipāsitena pana gale vilaggāmisena vā pānīyaṃ pivitvā hatthā na dhovitabbā. Sace manussā ‘‘dhovatha bhante pattañca hatthe cā’’ti vadanti, bhikkhū vā ‘‘tumhe udakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadanti, vaṭṭati.
Nivattantenāti bhattaggato uṭṭhāya nivattantena saṅghena evaṃ nivattitabbanti dasseti. Kathaṃ?‘‘Navakehī’’ti sabbaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sambādhesu hi gharesu mahātherānaṃ nikkhamanokāso na hoti, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Evaṃ nivattantehi pana navakehi gehadvāre ṭhatvā theresu nikkhantesu paṭipāṭiyā gantabbaṃ. Sace pana mahātherā dhure nisinnā honti, navakā antogehe, therāsanato paṭṭhāya paṭipāṭiyā eva nikkhamitabbaṃ. Kāyena kāyaṃ aghaṭṭentena yathā antarena manussā gantuṃ sakkonti, evaṃ viraḷāya paṭipāṭiyā gantabbaṃ.
Bhattaggavattakathā niṭṭhitā.
Piṇḍacārikavattakathā
366.Piṇḍacārikavatte –kammaṃ vā nikkhipatīti kappāsaṃ vā suppaṃ vā musalaṃ vā yaṃ gahetvā kammaṃ karonti, ṭhitā vā nisinnā vā honti, taṃ nikkhipati.Na ca bhikkhādāyikāyāti itthī vā hotu puriso vā, bhikkhādānasamaye mukhaṃ na ulloketabbaṃ.
Piṇḍacārikavattakathā niṭṭhitā.
Āraññikavattakathā
368.Āraññikavatte –senāsanā otaritabbanti vasanaṭṭhānato nikkhamitabbaṃ.
Pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipitvāti ettha sace bahigāme udakaṃ natthi, antogāmeyeva bhattakiccaṃ katvā atha bahigāme atthi, bahigāme bhattakiccaṃ katvā patto dhovitvā vodako katvā thavikāya pakkhipitabbo.
Paribhojanīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetabbanti sace bhājanāni nappahonti, pānīyameva paribhojanīyampi katvā upaṭṭhāpetabbaṃ. Bhājanaṃ alabhantena veḷunāḷikāyapi upaṭṭhāpetabbaṃ. Tampi alabhantassa yathā samīpe udakaāvāṭo hoti, evaṃ kātabbaṃ. Araṇisahite sati aggiṃ akātumpi vaṭṭati. Yathā ca āraññikassa, evaṃ kantārappaṭipannassāpi araṇisahitaṃ icchitabbaṃ. Gaṇavāsino pana tena vināpi vaṭṭati. Nakkhattānevanakkhattapadāni.
Āraññikavattakathā niṭṭhitā.
Senāsanavattakathā
369.Senāsanavatte –dvāraṃnāma yasmā mahāvaḷañjaṃ, tasmā tattha āpucchanakiccaṃ natthi, sesāni pana uddesadānādīni āpucchitvāva kātabbāni. Devasikampi āpucchituṃ vaṭṭati. Athāpi ‘‘bhante āpucchitameva hotū’’ti vutte vuḍḍhataro ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchati, sayameva vā ‘‘tvaṃ yathāsukhaṃ viharāhī’’ti vadati; evampi vaṭṭati. Sabhāgassa vissāsenāpi vaṭṭatiyeva.Yena vuḍḍho tena parivattitabbanti vuḍḍhābhimukhena parivattitabbaṃ.Bhojanasālādīsupi evameva paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
Senāsanavattakathā niṭṭhitā.
Jantāgharavattādikathā
371.Jantāgharavatte –paribhaṇḍanti bahijagati.
373.Ācamanavatthusmiṃ –sati udaketi ettha sace udakaṃ atthi, paṭicchannaṭṭhānaṃ pana natthi, bhājanena nīharitvā ācamitabbaṃ. Bhājane asati pattena nīharitabbaṃ. Pattepi asati asantaṃ nāma hoti. ‘‘Idaṃ ativivaṭaṃ purato aññaṃ udakaṃ bhavissatī’’ti gatassa udakaṃ alabhantasseva bhikkhācāravelā hoti, kaṭṭhena vā kenaci vā puñchitvā gantabbaṃ, bhuñjitumpi anumodanampi kātuṃ vaṭṭati.Āgatapaṭipāṭiyāti vaccakuṭiyaṃ passāvaṭṭhāne nhānatittheti tīsupi āgatapaṭipāṭiyeva pamāṇaṃ.
374.Vaccakuṭivatte –na dantakaṭṭhaṃ khādantenāti ayaṃ vaccakuṭiyāpi avaccakuṭiyāpi sabbattheva paṭikkhepo.Na pharusena kaṭṭhenāti phālitakaṭṭhena vā kharena vā gaṇṭhikena vā kaṇṭakena vā susirena vā pūtinā vā na avalekhitabbaṃ. Avalekhanakaṭṭhaṃ pana aggahetvā paviṭṭhassa āpatti natthi.
Na ācamanasarāvaketi sabbasādhāraṇaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tatra hi aññe aññe āgacchanti, tasmā udakaṃ na sesetabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana saṅghikepi vihāre ekadese nibaddhagamanatthāya kataṃ ṭhānaṃ hoti puggalikaṭṭhānaṃ vā, tasmiṃ vaṭṭati. Virecanaṃ pivitvā punappunaṃ pavisantassāpi vaṭṭatiyeva.
Ūhatāti ūhaditā; bahi vaccamakkhitāti attho.Dhovitabbāti udakaṃ āharitvā dhovitabbā. Udakaṃ atthi, bhājanaṃ natthi, asantaṃ nāma hoti. Bhājanaṃ atthi, udakaṃ natthi, etampi asantaṃ. Ubhaye pana asati asantameva, kaṭṭhena vā kenaci vā puñchitvā gantabbaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
Jantāgharavattādikathā niṭṭhitā.
Vattakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
9. Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhakaṃ
Pātimokkhuddesayācanakathā
383.Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhake –(nandimukhiyā rattiyāti aruṇuṭṭhitakālepi hi nandimukhā viya ratti khāyati. Tenāha ‘‘nandimukhiyā rattiyā’’ti.Antopūtinti attacittasantāne kilesapūtibhāvena antopūtiṃ.Avassutanti kilesavassanavasena avassutaṃ.Kasambukajātanti ākiṇṇadosatāya saṃkiliṭṭhajātaṃ.)Yāva bāhāgahaṇāpi nāmāti ‘‘aparisuddhā ānanda parisā’’ti vacanaṃ sutvāyeva hi tena pakkamitabbaṃ siyā, evaṃ apakkamitvā yāva bāhāgahaṇāpi nāma so moghapuriso āgamessati, acchariyamidanti dasseti.
384.Na āyatakeneva papātoti na paṭhamameva gambhīro; anupubbena gambhīroti attho.Ṭhitadhammo velaṃ nātivattatīti vīcīnaṃ osakkanakandaraṃ mariyādavelaṃ nātikkamati.Tīraṃ vāhetīti tīrato appeti; ussāretīti attho.Aññāpaṭivedhoti arahattappatti.
385.Channamativassatīti āpattiṃ āpajjitvā paṭicchādento aññaṃ navaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati idametaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Vivaṭaṃ nātivassatīti āpattiṃ āpajjitvā vivaranto aññaṃ nāpajjati idametaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
Pātimokkhuddesayācanakathā niṭṭhitā.
Pātimokkhasavanārahakathā
386.Ṭhapitaṃhoti pātimokkhanti ettha pure vā pacchā vā ṭhapitampi aṭṭhapitaṃ hoti, khette ṭhapitameva pana ṭhapitaṃ nāma hoti. Tasmā ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ajjuposatho pannaraso, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho uposathaṃ kareyyā’’ti ettha yāva re-kāraṃ bhaṇati, tāva ṭhapetabbaṃ, idañhi khettaṃ. Yya-kāre pana vutte ṭhapentena pacchā ṭhapitaṃ nāma hoti. ‘‘Suṇātu me’’ti anāraddheyeva ṭhapentena pure ṭhapitaṃ hoti.
Pātimokkhasavanārahakathā niṭṭhitā.
Dhammikādhammikapātimokkhaṭṭhapanakathā
387.Amūlikāyasīlavipattiyā pātimokkhaṃ ṭhapeti akatāyāti tena puggalena sā vipatti katā vā hotu akatā vā, pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakassa saññāamūlikavasena amūlikā hoti.Katākatāyāti katañca akatañca ubhayaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ.
Dhammikaṃ sāmaggiṃ na upetīti kammaṃ kopetukāmatāya saṅghassa kamme karīyamāne neva āgacchati, na chandaṃ deti, sammukhībhūtova paṭikkosati, tena dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Iccassāpi sāpattikasseva pātimokkhaṃ ṭhapitaṃ hoti.Paccādiyatīti ‘‘puna kātabbaṃ kamma’’nti paccādiyati, tena ukkoṭanakena pācittiyaṃ āpajjati. Iccassāpi sāpattikasseva pātimokkhaṃ ṭhapitaṃ hoti.
Dhammikādhammikapātimokkhaṭṭhapanakathā niṭṭhitā.
Dhammikapātimokkhaṭṭhapanakathā
388.Yehi ākārehi yehi liṅgehi yehi nimittehīti ettha maggenamaggapaṭipādanādīsu ākārādisaññā veditabbā.Tena diṭṭhena tena sutena tāya parisaṅkāyāti ettha diṭṭhañca sutañca pāḷiyaṃ āgatameva. Sace pana tehi diṭṭhasutehi parisaṅkaṃ uppādeyya, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘tāya parisaṅkāyā’’ti.
Dhammikapātimokkhaṭṭhapanakathā niṭṭhitā.
Attādānaaṅgakathā
398.Attādānaṃ ādātukāmenāti ettha sāsanaṃ sodhetukāmo bhikkhu yaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ attanā ādiyati, taṃ attādānanti vuccati.Akālo imaṃ attādānaṃ ādātunti ettha rājabhayaṃ corabhayaṃ dubbhikkhabhayaṃ vassārattoti ayaṃ akālo, viparīto kālo.
Abhūtaṃ idaṃ attādānanti asantamidaṃ, mayā adhammo vā dhammoti, dhammo vā adhammoti, avinayo vā vinayoti, vinayo vā avinayoti, dussīlo vā puggalo sīlavāti, sīlavā vā dussīloti gahitoti attho; vipariyāyena bhūtaṃ veditabbaṃ.Anatthasaṃhitaṃ idaṃ attādānanti ettha yaṃ jīvitantarāyāya vā brahmacariyantarāyāya vā saṃvattati, idaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, viparītaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ nāma.
Na labhissāmi sandiṭṭhe sambhatte bhikkhūti appekadā hi rājabhayādīsu evarūpā attano pakkhassa upatthambhakā bhikkhū laddhuṃ na sakkā honti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘na labhissāmī’’ti. Appekadā pana khemasubhikkhādīsu laddhuṃ sakkā honti, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘labhissāmī’’ti vuttaṃ.
Bhavissati saṅghassa tatonidānaṃ bhaṇḍananti kosambakānaṃ viya bhaṇḍanaṃ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo ca bhavissatīti.Pacchāpi avippaṭisārakaraṃ bhavissatīti subhaddaṃ vuḍḍhapabbajitaṃ niggahetvā pañcasatikasaṅgītiṃ karontassa mahākassapattherasseva, dasavatthuke adhikaraṇe dasabhikkhusahassāni niggahetvā sattasatikasaṅgītiṃ karontassa āyasmato yasasseva, saṭṭhibhikkhusahassāni niggahetvā sahassikasaṅgītiṃ karontassa moggaliputtatissattherasseva ca pacchā samanussaraṇakaraṇaṃ hoti, sāsanassa ca vigatupakkilesacandimasūriyasassirikatāya saṃvattati.
Attādānaaṅgakathā niṭṭhitā.
Codakenapaccavekkhitabbadhammakathā
399.Acchiddena appaṭimaṃsenātiādīsu yena gahaṭṭhapabbajitesu yo koci pahaṭo vā hoti, gihīnaṃ gaṇḍaphālanādīni vejjakammāni vā katāni, tassa kāyasamācāro upacikāhi khāyitatālapaṇṇamiva chiddo ca paṭimāsituṃ yattha katthaci gahetvā ākaḍḍhituṃ sakkuṇeyyatāya sappaṭimaṃso ca hoti, viparīto acchiddo appaṭimaṃsoti veditabboti. Vacīsamācāro pana musāvādaomasavādapesuññaamūlakānuddhaṃsanādīhi chiddo ca sappaṭimaṃso ca hoti, viparīto acchiddo appaṭimaṃso.
Mettaṃ nu kho me cittanti palibodhe chinditvā kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānuyogena adhigataṃ mettacittaṃ.Anāghātanti āghātavirahitaṃ, vikkhambhanavasena vihatāghātanti attho.Idaṃ panāvuso kattha vuttaṃ bhagavatāti idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ katarasmiṃ nagare vuttanti attho.
Codakenapaccavekkhitabbadhammakathā niṭṭhitā.
Codakenaupaṭṭhāpetabbakathā
400.Kālenavakkhāmītiādīsu eko ekaṃ okāsaṃ kāretvā codentokālena vadatināma. Saṅghamajjhagaṇamajjhasalākaggayāguaggavitakkamāḷakabhikkhācāramaggaāsanasālādīsu upaṭṭhākehi parivāritakkhaṇe vā codentoakālena vadatināma. Tacchena vadantobhūtena vadatināma. ‘‘Ambho mahallaka, parisāvacara, paṃsukūlika, dhammakathika, patirūpaṃ tava ida’’nti vadantopharusena vadatināma. Kāraṇanissitaṃ pana katvā ‘‘bhante mahallakattha, parisāvacarā, paṃsukūlikā, dhammakathikattha, patirūpaṃ tumhākaṃ ida’’nti vadantosaṇhenavadatināma. Kāraṇanissitaṃ katvā vadantoatthasaṃhitena vadatināma.Mettacitto vakkhāmi no dosantaroti mettacittaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā vakkhāmi, na duṭṭhacitto hutvā.
Codakenaupaṭṭhāpetabbakathā niṭṭhitā.
Codakacuditakapaṭisaṃyuttakathā
401.Ajjhattaṃ manasikaritvāti attano citte uppādetvā.Kāruññatāti karuṇābhāvo. Iminā karuṇañca karuṇāpubbabhāgañca dasseti.Hitesitāti hitagavesanatā.Anukampitāti tena hitena saṃyojanatā. Dvīhipi mettañca mettāpubbabhāgañca dasseti.Āpattivuṭṭhānatāti āpattito vuṭṭhāpetvā suddhante patiṭṭhāpanā. Vatthuṃ codetvā sāretvā paṭiññaṃ āropetvā yathāpaṭiññāya kammakaraṇaṃvinayapurekkhāratānāma.Ime pañca dhammeti ye ete kāruññatātiādinā nayena vuttā, ime pañca dhamme ajjhattaṃ manasi karitvā paro codetabboti.
Sacce ca akuppe cāti vacīsacce ca akuppanatāya ca. Cuditakena hi saccañca vattabbaṃ, kopo ca na kātabbo. Neva attanā kujjhitabbo, na paro ghaṭṭetabboti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
Codakacuditakapaṭisaṃyuttakathā niṭṭhitā.
Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
10. Bhikkhunikkhandhakaṃ
Mahāpajāpatigotamīvatthukathā
402.Bhikkhunikkhandhake –alaṃ gotami mā te ruccīti kasmā paṭikkhipati, nanu sabbesampi buddhānaṃ catasso parisā hontīti? Kāmaṃ honti, kilametvā pana anekakkhattuṃ yācitena anuññātaṃ pabbajjaṃ ‘‘dukkhena laddhā ayaṃ amhehī’’ti sammā paripālessantīti bhaddakaṃ katvā anujānitukāmo paṭikkhipati.Aṭṭhagarudhammakathāmahāvibhaṅgeyeva kathitā.
403.Kumbhathenakehīti kumbhe dīpaṃ jāletvā tena ālokena paraghare bhaṇḍaṃ vicinitvā thenakacorehi.
Setaṭṭhikā nāma rogajātīti eko pāṇako nāḷimajjhagataṃ kaṇḍaṃ vijjhati, yena viddhattā nikkhantampi sālisīsaṃ khīraṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti.
Mañjiṭṭhikā nāma rogajātīti ucchūnaṃ antorattabhāvo.Mahato taḷākassa paṭikacceva āḷinti iminā pana etamatthaṃ dasseti – yathā mahato taḷākassa āḷiyā abaddhāyapi kiñci udakaṃ tiṭṭheyya, paṭhamameva baddhāya pana yaṃ abaddhapaccayā na tiṭṭheyya, tampi tiṭṭheyya; evameva ye ime anuppanne vatthusmiṃ paṭikacceva avītikkamanatthāya garudhammā paññattā. Tesu apaññattesupi mātugāmassa pabbajitattā pañceva vassasatāni saddhammo tiṭṭheyya. Paṭikacceva paññattattā pana aparānipi pañcavassasatāni ṭhassatīti evaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ vassasahassameva ṭhassatīti.Vassasahassanti cetaṃ paṭisambhidāpabhedappattakhīṇāsavavaseneva vuttaṃ. Tato pana uttarimpi sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavavasena vassasahassaṃ, anāgāmivasena vassasahassaṃ, sakadāgāmivasena vassasahassaṃ, sotāpannavasena vassasahassanti evaṃ pañcavassasahassāni paṭivedhasaddhammo ṭhassati. Pariyattidhammopi tāniyeva. Na hi pariyattiyā asati paṭivedho atthi, nāpi pariyattiyā sati paṭivedho na hoti; liṅgaṃ pana pariyattiyā antarahitāyapi ciraṃ pavattissatīti.
Mahāpajāpatigotamīvatthukathā niṭṭhitā.
Bhikkhunīupasampadānujānanakathā
404.Anujānāmi bhikkhave bhikkhūhi bhikkhuniyo upasampādetunti imāya anupaññattiyā bhikkhū pañcasatā sākiyāniyo mahāpajāpatiyā saddhivihāriniyo katvā upasampādesuṃ. Iti tā sabbāpi ekatoupasampannā nāma ahesuṃ. Ye kho tvaṃ gotamīti iminā ovādena gotamī arahattaṃ pattā.
409.Kammaṃ na karīyatīti tajjanīyādi sattavidhampi kammaṃ na karīyati.Khamāpentīti na puna evaṃ karissāmīti khamāpenti.
410.Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi bhikkhunīnaṃ kammaṃ ropetvā niyyādetunti ettha tajjanīyādīsu ‘‘idaṃ nāma kammaṃ etissā kātabba’’nti evaṃ ropetvā ‘‘taṃ dāni tumheva karothā’’ti niyyādetabbaṃ. Sace pana aññasmiṃ ropite aññaṃ karonti, ‘‘tajjanīyakammārahassa niyassakammaṃ karotī’’ti ettha vuttanayena kāretabbataṃ āpajjanti.
411.Kaddamodakenāti ettha na kevalaṃ kaddamodakena, vippasannaudakarajanakaddamādīsupi yena kenaci osiñcantassa dukkaṭameva.Avandiyo so bhikkhave bhikkhu bhikkhunisaṅghena kātabboti bhikkhunupassaye sannipatitvā ‘‘asuko nāma ayyo bhikkhunīnaṃ apasādanīyaṃ dasseti, etassa ayyassa avandiyakaraṇaṃ ruccatī’’ti evaṃ tikkhattuṃ sāvetabbaṃ. Ettāvatā avandiyo kato hoti. Tato paṭṭhāya yathā sāmaṇere disvā na vandanti; evameva disvāpi na vanditabbo. Tena bhikkhunā sammā vattantena bhikkhunupassayaṃ āgantvā vihāreyeva saṅghaṃ vā gaṇaṃ vā ekapuggalaṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho mayhaṃ khamatū’’ti khamāpetabbaṃ. Tena bhikkhunā bhikkhunīnaṃ santikaṃ āgantvā ‘‘eso bhikkhu tumhe khamāpetī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tato paṭṭhāya so vanditabbo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāraṃ pana kammavibhaṅge vakkhāma.
Obhāsentīti asaddhammena obhāsenti.Bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ sampayojentīti bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ purise asaddhammena sampayojenti. Avandiyakaraṇaṃ vuttanayameva.Āvaraṇanti vihārappavesane nivāraṇaṃ.Ovādaṃ ṭhapetunti ettha na bhikkhunupassayaṃ gantvā ṭhapetabbo. Ovādatthāya pana āgatā bhikkhuniyo vattabbā ‘‘asukā nāma bhikkhunī sāpattikā, tassā ovādaṃ ṭhapemi, mā tāya saddhiṃ uposathaṃ karitthā’’ti. Kāyavivaraṇādīsupi daṇḍakammaṃ vuttanayameva.
413.Na bhikkhave bhikkhuniyā ovādo na gantabbotiādi bhikkhunivibhaṅgavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva.
416.Phāsukā namentīti gihidārikāyo viya ghanapaṭṭakena kāyabandhanena phāsukā namanatthāya bandhanti.Ekapariyākatanti ekavāraṃ parikkhipanakaṃ.
Vilīvena paṭṭenāti saṇhehi veḷuvilīvehi katapaṭṭena.Dussapaṭṭenāti setavatthapaṭṭena.Dussaveṇiyāti dussena kataveṇiyā.Dussavaṭṭiyāti dussena katavaṭṭiyā.Coḷapaṭṭādīsu coḷakāsāvaṃ coḷanti veditabbaṃ.
Aṭṭhillenāti gojaṅghaṭṭhikena.Jaghananti kaṭippadeso vuccati.Hatthaṃ koṭṭāpentīti aggabāhaṃ koṭṭāpetvā morapattādīhi cittālaṅkāraṃ karonti.Hatthakocchanti piṭṭhihatthaṃ.Pādanti jaṅghaṃ.Pādakocchanti piṭṭhipādaṃ.
417.Mukhalimpanādīni vuttanayāneva.Avaṅgaṃ karontīti akkhī añjantiyo avaṅgadese adhomukhaṃ lekhaṃ karonti.Visesakanti gaṇḍappadese vicitrasaṇṭhānaṃ visesakaṃ karonti.Olokentīti vātapānaṃ vivaritvā vīthiṃ olokenti.Sāloke tiṭṭhantīti dvāraṃ vivaritvā upaḍḍhakāyaṃ dassentiyo tiṭṭhanti.Naccanti naṭasamajjaṃ kārenti.Vesiṃ vuṭṭhāpentīti gaṇikaṃ vuṭṭhāpenti.Pānāgāraṃ ṭhapentīti suraṃ vikkiṇanti.Sūnaṃ ṭhapentīti maṃsaṃ vikkiṇanti.Āpaṇanti nānābhaṇḍānaṃ anekavidhaṃ āpaṇaṃ pasārenti.Dāsaṃ upaṭṭhāpentīti dāsaṃ gahetvā tena attano veyyāvaccaṃ kārenti. Dāsīādīsupi eseva nayo.Haritakapakkikaṃpakiṇantīti haritakañceva pakkañca pakiṇanti; pakiṇṇakāpaṇaṃ pasārentīti vuttaṃ hoti.
418.Sabbanīlakādikathā kathitāyeva.
419.Bhikkhunī ce, bhikkhave, kālaṃ karontītiādīsu ayaṃ pāḷimuttakavinicchayo – sace hi pañcasu sahadhammikesu yo koci kālaṃ karonto ‘‘mamaccayena mayhaṃ parikkhāro upajjhāyassa hotu, ācariyassa hotu, saddhivihārikassa hotu, antevāsikassa hotu, mātu hotu, pitu hotu, aññassa vā yassa kassaci hotū’’ti vadati tesaṃ na hoti, saṅghasseva hoti. Na hi pañcannaṃ sahadhammikānaṃ accayadānaṃ ruhati, gihīnaṃ pana ruhati. Bhikkhu hi bhikkhunivihāre kālaṃ karoti, tassa parikkhāro bhikkhūnaṃyeva hoti. Bhikkhunī bhikkhuvihāre kālaṃ karoti, tassā parikkhāro bhikkhunīnaṃyeva hoti.
420.Purāṇamallīti purāṇe gihikāle mallakassa bhariyā.Purisabyañjananti purisanimittaṃ, chinnaṃ vā hotu acchinnaṃ vā, paṭicchannaṃ vā appaṭicchannaṃ vā. Sace etasmiṃ ṭhāne purisabyañjananti cittaṃ uppādetvā upanijjhāyati, dukkaṭaṃ.
421.Attano paribhogatthāya dinnaṃnāma yaṃ ‘‘tumheyeva paribhuñjathā’’ti vatvā dinnaṃ, taṃ aññassa dadato dukkaṭaṃ. Aggaṃ gahetvā pana dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace asappāyaṃ, sabbaṃ apanetuṃ vaṭṭati. Cīvaraṃ ekāhaṃ vā dvīhaṃ vā paribhuñjitvā dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Pattādīsupi eseva nayo.
Bhikkhūnaṃsannidhiṃ bhikkhunīhi paṭiggāhāpetvāti hiyyo paṭiggahetvā ṭhapitamaṃsaṃ ajja aññasmiṃ anupasampanne asati bhikkhūhi paṭiggāhāpetvā bhikkhunīhi paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Bhikkhūhi paṭiggahitañhi bhikkhunīnaṃ appaṭiggahitakaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, bhikkhunīnaṃ paṭiggahitampi bhikkhūsu eseva nayo.
426.Āsanaṃ saṃkasāyantiyo kālaṃ vītināmesunti aññaṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā aññaṃ nisīdāpentiyo bhojanakālaṃ atikkāmesuṃ.
Aṭṭhannaṃbhikkhunīnaṃ yathāvuḍḍhanti ettha sace pure aṭṭhasu nisinnāsu tāsaṃ abbhantarimā aññā āgacchati, sā attano navakaṃ uṭṭhāpetvā nisīdituṃ labhati. Yā pana aṭṭhahipi navakatarā, sā sacepi saṭṭhivassā hoti, āgatapaṭipāṭiyāva nisīdituṃ labhati.Aññattha sabbattha yathāvuḍḍhaṃ na paṭibāhitabbanti ṭhapetvā bhattaggaṃ aññasmiṃ catupaccayabhājanīyaṭṭhāne ‘‘ahaṃ pubbe āgatā’’ti vuḍḍhaṃ paṭibāhitvā kiñci na gahetabbaṃ; yathāvuḍḍhameva vaṭṭati.Pavāraṇākathākathitāyeva.
429.Itthiyuttantiādīhi sabbayānāni anuññātāni.Pāṭaṅkinti paṭapoṭṭalikaṃ.
430.Dūtena upasampadādasannaṃ antarāyānaṃ yena kenaci vaṭṭati. Kammavācāpariyosāne sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunupassaye ṭhitā vā hotu nipannā vā jāgarā vā niddaṃ okkantā vā, upasampannāva hoti. Tāvadeva chāyādīni āgatāya dūtabhikkhuniyā ācikkhitabbāni.
431.Udositoti bhaṇḍasālā.Na sammatīti nappahoti.Upassayanti gharaṃ.Navakammanti saṅghassatthāya bhikkhuniyā navakammampi kātuṃ anujānāmīti attho.
432.Tassā pabbajitāyāti tassā pabbajitakāle.Yāva so dārako viññutaṃ pāpuṇātīti yāva khādituṃ bhuñjituṃ nahāyituñca maṇḍituñca attano dhammatāya sakkotīti attho.
Ṭhapetvāsāgāranti sahagāraseyyamattaṃ ṭhapetvā. Yathā aññasmiṃ purise; evaṃ dutiyikāya bhikkhuniyā tasmiṃ dārake paṭipajjitabbanti dasseti. Mātā pana nahāpetuṃ pāyetuṃ bhojetuṃ maṇḍetuṃ ure katvā sayituñca labhati.
434.Yadeva sā vibbhantāti yasmā sā vibbhantā attano ruciyā khantiyā odātāni vatthāni nivatthā, tasmāyeva sā abhikkhunī, na sikkhāpaccakkhānenāti dasseti. Sā puna upasampadaṃ na labhati.
Sāāgatā na upasampādetabbāti na kevalaṃ na upasampādetabbā, pabbajjampi na labhati. Odātāni gahetvā vibbhantā pana pabbajjāmattaṃ labhati.
Abhivādanantiādīsu purisā pāde sambāhantā vandanti, kese chindanti, nakhe chindanti, vaṇapaṭikammaṃ karonti, taṃ sabbaṃ kukkuccāyantā na sādiyantīti attho. Tatreke ācariyā ‘‘sace ekato vā ubhato vā avassutā honti sārattā, yathāvatthukameva’’. Eke ācariyā ‘‘natthi ettha āpattī’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ ācariyavādaṃ dassetvā idaṃ odissa anuññātaṃ vaṭṭatīti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Taṃ pamāṇaṃ. ‘‘Anujānāmi bhikkhave sāditu’’nti hi vacaneneva taṃ kappiyaṃ.
435.Pallaṅkena nisīdantīti pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisīdanti.Aḍḍhapallaṅkanti ekaṃ pādaṃ ābhujitvā katapallaṅkaṃ.Heṭṭhā vivaṭe upari paṭicchanneti ettha sace kūpo khato hoti, upari pana padaramattameva sabbadisāsu paññāyati, evarūpepi vaṭṭati.
436.Kukkusaṃ mattikanti kuṇḍakañceva mattikañca. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.
Bhikkhunīupasampadānujānanakathā niṭṭhitā.
Bhikkhunikkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
11. Pañcasatikakkhandhakaṃ
Khuddānukhuddakasikkhāpadakathā
441.Pañcasatikakkhandhake –cattāri pārājikāni ṭhapetvā avasesāni khuddānukhuddakānīti evamādi ekasikkhāpadampi apariccajitvā sabbesaṃ saṅgahetabbabhāvadassanatthaṃ pariyāyena vuttaṃ.Idaṃ vo samaṇānanti idaṃ samaṇānaṃ. Padapūraṇamatte vokāro.
443.Idampi te āvuso ānanda dukkaṭanti ‘‘idaṃ tayā duṭṭhu kata’’nti kevalaṃ garahantehi therehi vuttaṃ, na āpattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Na hi te āpattānāpattiṃ na jānanti. Idāneva cetaṃ anussāvitaṃ – ‘‘saṅgho apaññattaṃ na paññapeti, paññattaṃ na samucchindatī’’ti.Desehi taṃ dukkaṭanti idampi ca ‘‘āma, bhante, duṭṭhu mayā kata’’nti evaṃ paṭijānāhi, taṃ dukkaṭanti idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na āpattidesanaṃ. Thero pana yasmā asatiyā na pucchi na anādarena, tasmā tattha duṭṭhukatabhāvampi asallakkhento ‘‘nāhaṃ taṃ dukkaṭaṃ passāmī’’ti vatvā theresu gāravaṃ dassento ‘‘apicāyasmantānaṃ sandhāya desemi taṃ dukkaṭa’’nti āha. Yathā tumhe vadatha, tathā paṭijānāmīti vuttaṃ hoti. Eseva nayo avasesesu catūsu ṭhānesu. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ nidānavaṇṇanāyameva vuttaṃ.
Khuddānukhuddakasikkhāpadakathā niṭṭhitā.
Pañcasatikakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
12. Sattasatikakkhandhakaṃ
Dasavatthukathā
446.Sattasatikakkhandhake –bhikkhaggenāti bhikkhuaggena, bhikkhū gaṇetvā tattake paṭivīse ṭhapesunti attho.Mahiyāti himapātasamaye himavalāhakā.
447.Avijjānivuṭāti avijjāpaṭicchannā.Posāti purisā. Piyarūpaṃ abhinandanti patthentītipiyarūpābhinandino.Aviddasūti avijānantā. Rāgarajehisarajā. Magasadisātimagā. Saha nettiyātisanettikā.Vaḍḍhenti kaṭasinti punappunaṃ kaḷevaraṃ nikkhipamānā bhūmiṃ vaḍḍhenti. Evaṃ vaḍḍhentāva ghoraṃ ādiyanti punabbhavaṃ.
454.Pāpakaṃ no āvuso katanti āvuso amhehi pāpakaṃ katanti attho.
455.Katamena tvaṃ bhūmi vihārenāti etthabhūmīti piyavacanametaṃ. Piyaṃ vattukāmo kira āyasmā sabbakāmī navake bhikkhū evaṃ āmanteti.Kullakavihārenāti uttānavihārena.
457.Sāvatthiyā suttavibhaṅgeti kathaṃ suttavibhaṅge paṭikkhittaṃ hoti? Tatra hi ‘‘sannidhi nāma ajja paṭiggahitaṃ aparajjū’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘sannidhikārake asannidhikārakasaññī khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā khādati vā bhuñjati vā āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti āpattiṃ vadantena paṭikkhittaṃ hoti. Tatreke maññanti ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu sannidhikārakaṃ khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā’’ti hi vuttaṃ, idañca loṇaṃ nāma yāvajīvikattā sannidhibhāvaṃ nāpajjati. Yampi aloṇakaṃ āmisaṃ paṭiggahetvā tena saddhiṃ paribhuñjati, taṃ tadahupaṭiggahitameva, tasmā ‘‘‘yāvakālikena, bhikkhave, yāvajīvikaṃ tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ kāle kappati, vikāle na kappatī’ti vacanato dukkaṭenettha bhavitabba’’nti. Te vattabbā – ‘‘tumhākaṃ matena dukkaṭenapi na bhavitabbaṃ, na hi ettha yāvajīvikaṃ tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ, yāvakālikameva tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ, na ca taṃ vikāle paribhuttaṃ. Yadi vā ‘‘vikāle na kappatī’’ti vacanena tumhe dukkaṭaṃ maññetha, yāvajīvikamissaṃ yāvakālikaṃ vikāle bhuñjantassa vikālabhojanapācittiyaṃ na bhaveyya. Tasmā na byañjanamattaṃ gahetabbaṃ, attho upaparikkhitabbo.
Ayañhettha attho – yāvakālikena yāvajīvikaṃ tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ yadi sambhinnarasaṃ hoti, yāvakālikagatikameva hoti. Tasmā ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu vikāle khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā’’ti iminā sikkhāpadena kāle kappati, vikāle na kappati. Na idha ‘‘na kappatī’’ti vacanamattenettha dukkaṭaṃ hoti. Yatheva yāvajīvikaṃ tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ yāvakālikena sambhinnarasaṃ vikāle na kappati, vikālabhojanapācittiyāvahaṃ hoti. Evaṃ ajja paṭiggahitampi aparajju yāvakālikena sambhinnarasaṃ na kappati, sannidhibhojanapācittiyāvahaṃ hoti. Taṃ ‘‘sannidhikataṃ ida’’nti ajānantopi na muccati. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘sannidhikārake asannidhikārakasaññī khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā khādati vā bhuñjati vā āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti. Tasmā ‘‘kattha paṭikkhitta’’nti imissā pucchāya ‘‘parisuddhamidaṃ byākaraṇaṃ sāvatthiyā suttavibhaṅge’’ti.
Rājagahe uposathasaṃyutteti idaṃ ‘‘na bhikkhave ekasmiṃ āvāse dve uposathāgārāni sammannitabbāni; yo sammanneyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti etaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Vinayātisāre dukkaṭanti ‘‘na bhikkhave ekasmiṃ āvāse dve uposathāgārāni sammannitabbānī’’ti etassa vinayassa atisāre dukkaṭaṃ.Campeyyake vinayavatthusminti idaṃ ‘‘adhammena ce bhikkhave vaggakammaṃ, akammaṃ na ca karaṇīya’’nti evamādiṃ katvā campeyyakkhandhake āgataṃ vinayavatthuṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
Ekaccokappatīti idaṃ dhammikaṃ āciṇṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Chedanake pācittiyanti suttavibhaṅge hi ‘‘nisīdanaṃ nāma sadasaṃ vuccatī’’ti āgataṃ, tasmā dvinnaṃ sugatavidatthīnaṃ upari dasāyeva vidatthimattā labbhati. Dasāya vinā taṃ pamāṇaṃ karontassa idaṃ āgatameva hoti – ‘‘taṃ atikkāmayato chedanakaṃ pācittiya’’nti. Tasmā ‘‘kiṃ āpajjatī’’ti puṭṭho ‘‘chedanake pācittiya’’nti āha. Chedanakasikkhāpade vuttapācittiyaṃ āpajjatīti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
Dasavatthukathā niṭṭhitā.
Samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya
Sattasatikakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Dvivaggasaṅgahā vuttā, dvāvīsatipabhedanā;
Yā tesaṃ vaṇṇanā esā, antarāyaṃ vinā yathā;
Cūḷavagga-aṭṭhakathā niṭṭhitā.